Home

20130631 - Toptech Systems

1. 600 Flow Profile Single Product Delivery High Flow 1st Stage Start Vol Trip Vol 500 High Flow Rate F 400 L O VW 300 R A 2nd Stage T Trip Vol 200 E Final Trip Vol Low Flow 1st Stage Start Vol Trip Rate we Block Valve Si l 100 4 Delay I l l Pump Start Delay Low Flow 2nd Stage l Trip Rate Flow Start Delay Start Rate Gage l Start DELIVERED QUANTITY ia Figure 5 2 Flow Profile for Single Product Delivery The load begins in the Low Flow Start stage When the Start button is pressed the control valve opens and the flow rate ramps up from zero to the Low Flow Rate Both the normally open Upstream and normally closed Downstream solenoids of the digital control valve are energized causing the control valve to open If sufficient pressure is available the Low Flow rate should be achieved in seconds When the flow rate rises to within the Low Flow Dead Band Rate the normally closed Downstream solenoid of the control valve will de energize This action locks the valve in position in order to maintain the desired rate Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 137 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control The opening of the control valve can be delayed by the Flow Start Delay parameter perhaps to allow time for the pump pressure to build to a suitable level The starting of the pump can be delayed by the Pump Start Delay parameter perhaps to allow time for the block values to fully open clo
2. Base 001 000000631 000000631 00000063 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000000 gt 000000000 gt 000000000 Base 001 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000006 31 00100006T 000000671 0000006 31 0000000 00 0000000 00 0000000 00 TOTALIZERS 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000000 000000000 000000000 TOTALIZERS 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000006 31 0000000 00 0000000 00 0000000 00 Total Gross Total gross volume of the component delivered Total Net Total net volume of the component delivered Total Mass Total mass of the component delivered Authorized Gross Authorized Net Total authorized gross volume of the component delivered Total authorized net volume of the component delivered Authorized Mass Total authorized mass of the component delivered Unauthorized Gross Total unauthorized gross volume of the component delivered Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries Unauthorized Net Total unauthorized net volume of the component delivered Unauthorized Mass Total unauthorized mass of the component delivered Notes Volume numbers displayed are whole numbers or with 1 100 resolution depending on the current setting of the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M Parameter The numbers on the left indicat
3. API PRODUCT TABLE Clear is specified using EOL and esc Clear EOS to use the esc G command F NAM SS TYPE 01 22 12 WJP Added new configuration parameter type API PRODUCT TABLE NO PRODUCT 0 API PRODUCT TABLE PROPAN d API PRODUCT TABLE PROPYLEN 2 API PRODUCT TABLE BUTAN 3 API PRODUCT TABLE ISOBUTAN 4 API PRODUCT TABLE ISOBUTEN 5 API PRODUCT TABLE CISBUT2EN 6 API PRODUCT TABLE TRANSBUT2EN 7 API PRODUCT TABLE BUTIEN 8 API PRODUCT TABLE BUTA13DIEN 9 API PRODUCT TABLE METHANOL 10 API PRODUCT TABLE ETHANOL Z API PRODUCT TABLE ISOPROPANOL 12 API PRODUCT TABLE ISOBUTANOL T3 API PRODUCT TABLE MTBE 14 API PRODUCT TABLE TAME 15 API PRODUCT TABLE BENZOL 16 API PRODUCT TABLE TOLUOL 17 API PRODUCT TABLE OXYLOL 18 API PRODUCT TABLE MXYLOL 19 API PRODUCT TABLE PXYLOL 20 Added new component configuration parameter API X Products Added API tables 54XG and 54YG 01 27 12 WIP Changed API PRODUCT TABLE NAME TYPE to API 54YG PRODUCT TYPE Gl Changed api product table name to api 54yg product Renamed configruation parameter API X PRODUCTS to API 54YG Product Added API tables TABLE TEC ETH US G TABLE TEC ETH B100 200 TABLE TEC ETH B40 201 TABLE TEC ETH E40 202 TABLE TEC ETH E100 203 Removed tec_eth function Updated tec function to accept base Updated TEC ETH xxx calls to use upd
4. Enter 149 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control The Blend Check parameters tell the controller when to begin checking the blend ratio for conformance to the recipe tolerances The Blend Check Start and Blend Check Restart Volumes are intended to prevent the checks from being made during flow stage transitions such as Low Flow Start Toptech recommends setting these parameters to prevent blend checking until the flow rate has stabilized at the High Flow Rate When these transition volumes have passed the load will stop if the ratio percentage falls outside of the Blend Check Alarm Percentage parameter The ratio must be out of tolerance for the period specified by the Blend Check Alarm time The alarm can also be activated based on volumetric error rather than a percentage error This is accomplished via the Blend Check Alarm Volume parameter Parameter Default Setting Blend Check Start Volume 60 gallons Blend Check Restart Volume 10 gallons Blend Check Alarm 5 Blend Check Alarm Volume 25 gallons Blend Check Alarm Time 10 seconds Blend Adjust parameters are the next parameters to be configured Based on the Blend Checks Blend Adjustments will be made depending on the configuration of these parameters The controller will always attempt to keep the blend to within the percentage dictated by the Blend Adjust Deviation Percentage No attempts at adjustment will be made until the Blend Adjust Start or
5. ENT S EL ECTION Comp 1 000123 BASE87UNL Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 127 Chapter 4 General Configuration 128 4 12 3 ADDITIVE ASSIGNMENT After defining your base additives this function allows assignment to the physical additive When selected the Additive Selection Screen is displayed E 1 Preset 001 ADDITIVE SEL Adtv 1 ADDOO1 Adtv 001 Next Prev Configure the assigned Base Additive as shown in the example below E 1 Preset 001 ADDITIVE SEL Ady 12 AD 20 ADSPOsZ20 Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 12 4 AUTHORIZED PRODUCTS ASSIGNMENT After defining your saleable products use this function is to specify which saleable products are authorized to be loaded at this preset When Authorized Products is selected the Authorized Products Screen is displayed ES E 1 AU THORIZ ED SELE Prod PRDOOI Prod 001 FEOV ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined Exit Configure the authorized Salable Products as shown in the example below PRI E E 1 AU rod 87 THORIZED SELECTION UNL 87UNLEAD Comp 000123 BASES UNL LESY ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined nde
6. Next Prev Boe EMES Parameter Description Number Bay Presets Excluding SMP Enter the number of presets load arms that will be controlled by this MultiLoad II Number of FCMs Enter the number of Flow Control Modules FCM including the I O board that will be attached to this bay The maximum number of FCMs that can be attached to a bay is 32 1 on MultiLoad II SMP Number of PCMs Enter the number of Printer Control Modules PCM that will be attached to this bay Temps in F This selection indicates whether temperatures will be in Fahrenheit or Celsius Select Enabled to choose Fahrenheit or Disabled to choose Celsius Canada API Limits When enabled API tables will use extended temperature ranges as required by Measurement Canada Bay Number Enter a number that the terminal or depot uses to identify the bay gantry This bay designation will appear on Meter Tickets and Alibi Logs Valid entries are 000 9999 Number External Presets Excluding SMP Enter the number of external presets a host system will display on the MultiLoad II load screen These presets will be displayed with a green background color with a Not Legal for Trade message See the MultiLoad II Communication Manual for more information Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 79 Chapter 4 General Configuration Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Descripti
7. Network Test Tests network connection to and from the host system TMS Keypad Tests the individual keys on the keypad Display Tests display operation Unicode Tests display fonts FCM Com Reports communication status with the I O board and FCMs PCM Com Reports communication status with PCMs FCM Health Reports the number of timeouts and lost communication events with the I O board and FCMs PCM Health Reports the number of timeouts and lost communication events with PCMs RCU View modify RCU level I O including the Program and W amp M key switch status Bay View modify Bay level I O Preset View modify Preset level I O Meters View modify Meter level I O Components View modify Component level UC Additives View modify Additive level UC Custom Logic Tests the custom logic execution GPS Displays the current detailed status of the GPS These functions are discussed in the order they appear on the Diagnostics menu Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 2 CARD READER EXCLUDING SMP 219 Note If the MultiLoad II is a SMP or does not have a card reader installed this test is not applicable Use the Card Reader function to verify the operation of proximity card reader and a driver card From the DIAGNOSTICS MENU choose Card Reader DARA CINTO Ss EL es ME Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com F
8. 4 20mA Decrease Step The mA amount to DECREASE the analog output after each flow scan if the flow rate is found to be ABOVE then the target dead band flow rate Analog Flow Rate 4mA Enter the flow rate that is represented by a 4mA signal from the analog meter transmitter This value is usually 0 Check the analog meter documentation or configuration for this value Analog Flow Rate 20mA Enter the flow rate that is represented by a 20mA signal from the analog meter transmitter This value is usually the maximum flow rate the meter can measure Check the analog meter documentation or configuration for this value Analog Flow Rate Offset Enter any needed flow rate offset Any needed flow rate calibration adjustments should be made in the meter transmitter Use this parameter to make adjustments if the flow rate on the meter is different than displayed on the MultiLoad Analog Flow Rate Cut Off Enter the Cut Off flow rate Any flow rate measured on the 4 20mA signal that is below this value will be processed as a zero flow rate Density Sensor This parameter indicates the use of a density sensor for the selected meter Enable this parameter if a density sensor is used to monitor density at the flow meter Density Sensor FCM Enter the FCM for the density sensor Enter a value of 0 for the internal I O board Default Density For API tables that require the entry of density enter that val
9. Enter Account Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 352 The driver keys in the account number and presses Enter If these are the only prompts defined the ne On MultiLoad II gt 1 Preset 001 IDLE 2 Preset 002 IDLE Next Prev Enter Pic EF PRODUCT E P STATUS xt screen the driver will view will be the Load Screen On MultiLoad II SMP Preset 001 IDL PRESET O 0 GALLONS k Enter Preset From this point operation is identical to operation in Remote mode However when the load completes and the driver pulls his card instead of TMS printing 12 5 8 METER TICKET If so configured the MultiLoad II prints a met 12 5 9 SWITCHING BACK TO REMOTE MODE a bill of lading the MultiLoad II will print a Meter Ticket er ticket for the entire transaction To switch to Remote mode enter program mode select Configuration RCU General Setup The RCU General Setup screen displays RCU Address Card Reader Remote Processing RCU GE O01 DISABLED Swing Arm Secondary DISABLED Password 1 Password 2 Password 3 Password 4 Password 5 Modem Dial Host Login Next Prev Select Remote Processing and press Enter MultiLoad II to Remote mode Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KKKKKKK KREAKERE A KKKKKKK TDSTEST TDSTEST Terminal Name Toptech Termin
10. 12 03 2012 PS Fix Color selection on the Multiload screen was not working 100 12 04 2012 PS Delete ENTERPRISE BOL out of tds routine and made a seperate bol script 12 04 2012 PS Enhance Meter trace for analog valves only for FCM2 not I0 boards also limit between 0 and 24mA 13 04 2012 PS Enhance the SD Card menu Each Menu will only show the files with the correct extension to prevent selecting invalid files Web interface will still show all files on the sd card 12 7 2012 WIP Include UAP functionality into standard MultiLoad firmware builds Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 409 Remove ability to build special UAP MultiLoad builds Remove ability to build ml_uap_ sim from the Makefile Remove UAP special build label Correct ifdef TDS INTERFACE endif alignments in source Correct size of returned LUA Data in web transaction viewer On ml_tds_ 30p and ml db added ability to selectivly start or stop tasks Updated database viewer to return if ml _ db has not started Corrected UAP BOL duplicate label to use transaction printed bit table Only include Local Databases item on Program Mode Menu when Processing Mode is set to UAP Delay processing first TDS 3PO call 1 minute until after the ml db has started 5 seconds 12 09 2012 PS Change default Meter Archive timeout and host down timeout from 30 to 120 seconds 13 12 2012 PS UAP Fix
11. a y Toptech Ze Systems MultiLoad II User Guide Including MultiLoad Il MultiLoad Il SMP MultiLoad II Mobile ig W D Part 6017 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 June 2013 Copyright Notice Copyright 2006 2013 Toptech Systems Inc The information contained in this document is proprietary and confidential No part of this document may be copied reproduced or transmitted in any medium without the express written permission of Toptech Systems Inc Disclaimer Toptech Systems assumes no responsibility for damages resulting from installation or use of its products Toptech Systems will not be liable for any claims of damage lost data or lost time as a result of using its products a Toptech m Systems Inc e logo is a registered trademark of Toptech Systems Inc TMS TMS5 TMS6 RCU II Remote Control Unit Toptech MultiLoad II Toptech MultiLoad Il SMP MultiLoad Il RCU Toptech MultiLoad II 1 Arm FCM Flow Control Module are trademarks of Toptech Systems Inc Copyright 2007 2013 Toptech Systems Inc All Rights Reserved Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 6 sscsccccd scscecsecs cccceretcne coed eczedsscateesenedescee ERR sustdedede soateesteedeeduerevnetsecbeeteceads 11 1 1 Who Should Use This Guide eebe Sete ett nn ee EE utente ce gece cutee ce e aa ap Pautareccuueceteesuantsebogeneone 11 1 2 How This Guide Is O
12. serewdtedtdr MultiMate File Communications Tools Reporting Help oos 8 B a DI MultiLoadi v3 31 04Nov302011 Firmware Data File code Breu rculib My Recent Cep Documents 2 e Desktop My Documents My Computer 20120710_ML_4_31_06 bin File name Firmware Binary Files bin My Network Files of type 5 After selecting a valid bin file the option upload gets available serewdtedtdr MultiMate Tools Reporting Help E File Communications GOB H AY O02 tg B B MultiLoadii v3 31 04Nov302011 Firmware Data File C Documents and Settings psandrap My 6 Uploading Reporting Help File Communications Tools eonngnen aag Firmware Data File ttings psandrap My Browse C Documents and Setting Uploading Complete 0 Estimated Rate Obytes s Estimated Time Remaining 10675199 days 2 hours 48 minutes 5 seconds 7 After the upload is completed the following pop up will appear Update FLASH firmware Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 62 Upload Complete 2 jJ The new firmware image has been successfully uploaded Do you want to flash the firmware now NOTE If the W amp M access switch is not active the flash operation will fail since the firmware image is W amp M protected 8 Warning message that the settings could be lost depending if the firmware step is small o
13. 103048 exp coef uom 103049 density _uom 103050 pressure uom ZS Lost 2 A reference temp ZE 1030527 Added ability to selectively display these parameters on the Temp Comp screen Updated Makefile to include ml api 2004 5 c ml api 2004 6 c Added the ASTM 2004 table types Changed equipment database version to 3 30 03 Added long table name for display Increased CTL table count from 21 to 48 Added ability to display and use 5 decimal place VCFs Component Status Screen 4 and 5 digit CTLs Increased API table name size on the API Table Setup Screens TODO Need to update USE flags for 2004 tables TODO Need to return correct density types for transaction TODO Need to retest all 2004 tables TODO Need to address CTPL values 10 14 11 MSH Added option to SD card menu to dump diagnostic data to SD including contents of NVRAM and flash transaction archive Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 398 Fixed improper BOL number when packing transactions Changed order of operations in TDS task so that any pending transactions will be sent first 10 17 11 MSH Filter tankcar list by terminal ID Sort Vendor BOLs by BOL number 10 17 11 WJP Added new configuration parameter U075 of http port to allow using alternate ports or complete disabling http port 0 the http service This value defaults to 80 enabled On simulation firmware builds http port is stilll
14. Api Gravity Adjusted Displays the observed Api Gravity as a result of applying the Api Gravity offset 10 10 VIEWING TRANSACTIONS Use the Transactions inquiry function to view Bill of Lading BOL load transactions It is also possible to go straight to this view screen via code 4447 combined with NEXT Select Transactions from the Views and Inquiries screen The View Transactions Screen displays BOL CARD ECKE EMELIE 0002 00000132 00 03 23 00 26 00 27 0001 WCO0CIS2 00 09 12 02 339 02 39 Next Prev Current transactions are listed on the screen that appears Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 322 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries Field Descriptions 323 BOL Bill of Lading number CARD Drivers card number CMPY Company ID number Two digit ID associated with the driver card Used for stand alone mode only DATE Date on which the load occurred START Load start time STOP Load complete time Select a transaction to view it in more detail The View Transaction Header Screen displays VIEW TRANSACTION HEADER 0003 Card 00000132 Company O3 23 orare OOs27 Details Stops 00ra Prompts Toptech 5M 28 41 646 N REECH 2 Print Transacelons XxXXxX VVVyy Ee eber eeh sl Oval Next Prev Exit Enter Details 00 2 Figure 10 1 View Transaction Header Screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiri
15. Next Prev The Serial Port Test introduction screen displays SERIAL PORT TEST This test requires use of a Serial Port Loopback Cable with the following connections COM0 RDA COM1 TDA COMO RDB COM1 TDB COM0 TDA COM1 RDA COM0 TDB COM1 RDB COM RX COM1 TX COM2 TX COM1 RX COM2 GND COM1 GN Note To conduct this test a special loop back cable must be constructed with the connections listed above This test will fail without this loop back cable in place Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 224 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 225 Once the cable is installed press Enter The Serial Port Test screen displays and the test begins SERIAL PORT TEST Tests Completed 000016 Errors 000000 BaudRate 38 4 COMO State RX 1 Test 2 Baud Press Exit to end the test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Packet Size 128 COMI COM2 d aS Errors 000000 000000 000000 Exit CLeaR Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 6 NETWORK TEST The Network Test is used to verify or troubleshoot the network connection between the MultiLoad Il and Host TMS system From the DIAGNOSTIC MENU choose Network By ik Ae BEE TETE S M I Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Health PCM Health RCU Bay Preset Next Prev The Network Test introductio
16. Press Enter to have the system authorize the load Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation A PLEASE WAIT message displays momentarily while authorization takes place BRE GEI SCRE EN UCT Low Sulfur Diesel ESET QUANTITY 5000 Please Then the Load Screen displays again On MultiLoad II bk PRODUCT gt 1 LS Diesel 2 Preset 002 Next Prev SET 5000 0 ExitLoad STATUS STOPPED IDLE Enter Pick On MultiLoad Il SMP Sulfur Diesel STOPPED ES ELI 5000 O GALLONS ExitLoad Clear Preset Enter Start 1 100 resolution is displayed when the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M parameter is enabled Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Figure 12 1 Preset Control Screen 342 Chapter 11 Operation Press Enter to start the load On MultiLoad II E PRODUCE SEL DEL STATUS Pall LS Diesel 5000 2501 HIGH FLOW 2 Preset 002 0 OMET DEE Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick 343 On MultiLoad Il SMP Sulfur Diesel ee Pee RESE 5000 A GALLONS ExitLoad Clear Preset Enter Start The load starts and as it proceeds you will view the Status change as well as the amount delivered When the load completes the Status will show COMPLETE the delivered amount should equal the preset amount On MultiLoad II E PRODUCE GE DEL STATU
17. When the Pulse in Mass feature is enabled all of the volume and rate parameters listed in the Meter Level Component Level Preset Levels are in Mass units EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING which remain in Volume units Preset Level Excess Flow Alarm Rate Preset Level Overrun Alarm Volume Preset Level Line Flush Volume Preset Level Line Flush Min Volume Preset Level Min Preset Volume Preset Level Max Preset Volume Preset Level Output Pulse Factor Component Level Unauthorized Flow Alarm Volume Component Level Block Valve Open Rate Component Level Fallback Retry Volume Volume 4 20mA Analog Input a 4 20mA signal indicates the flow rate Using the Meter K Factor this signal is converted to a virtual pulse stream The flow rate at 4mA and 20mA can be configured as well as a fine offset and lower cut off rate The meter factors can be applied to calibrate the volume Note FCM or I O Board Firmware Version 039 or greater is required to use meter type Volume 4 20mA Analog Input Volume Krohne Input a Modbus serial connection to the Krohne Mass Meter indicates the volume volume flow rate temperature and density values Additional setup and diagnostic screens are available when this option is enabled Volume MicroMotion Input a Modbus serial connection to the MicroMotion Mass Meter indicates the volume volume flow rate temperature and density values Additional setup and diagnostic screens are available when this opt
18. 210 Chapter 6 Additive Control 211 Flushing Systems that use Multiple Block Valves on a Common Additive Meter If the additive meter is in the flush path it will generate pulses during the flush phase when additive is no longer being delivered In such a case enable the Meter Flushed parameter Meter pulses will then be ignored during the flush phase Refer to the diagram Additive Block Valve Add 1 Flush Pump Figure 6 12 Additive Meter in Flush Path Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 212 If the Injector Valve is in the flush path as in the diagram below it will have to be held open during the flush phase In such a case enable the Solenoid Flushed parameter The Injector Valve will then remain open during the flush phase Additive Block Valve Add 1 Additive Meter Flush Pump Injector Valve Figure 6 13 Additive Meter and Injector Valve in Flush Path Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 7 Swing Arm Setup and Operation Excluding SMP CHAPTER 7 SWING ARM SETUP AND OPERATION EXCLUDING SMP 7 1 OVERVIEW Note On the MultiLoad II SMP swing arm operation is not possible A swing arm is mounted on an island and can be pulled to either of the two bays adjacent to the island On MultiLoad II up to 12 swing arms can be assigned to a bay A bay can have any combination of fixed load arms and swing load arms provided the total number of load arms
19. After keying in the product code press Enter Press Next to select Long Desc press Enter At the cursor key in a long description for the base component The description can be up to 25 characters This text will appear on the Preset Control screen and the Product Selection screen Fill in the remaining product definition parameters as follows Short Desc A short hand description of the product Maximum 10 characters Hazard Idx The Hazard index code associated with this product This code will reference the appropriate Hazard statements to print on meter tickets Type The type of product Choices are Base Component Base Additive and undefined For this example select Base Component Select Edit Product Recipe The Product Recipe screen appears Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 119 Chapter 4 General Configuration 120 4 10 1 DEFINING BASE COMPONENT RECIPES For both TMS and MultiLoad II every base product component must be composed of 100 of itself Therefore the product recipe for a base component would look like this PRODUCT 000123 BASE87UNL R Comp 100 00 000123 BASE87UNL Comp 50 00 undefined Aire DEE munder ined Next Prev Note that the default percent is 100 indicating that this product is composed of 100 of itself Press Exit to return to the Edit Product screen Press Exit to return to the Select Product screen which displays the
20. Correct bug in handling NO TRANSACTION state after firmware upgrade causing a blank screen on first startup Corrected bug where if back calculating density or relative density for a main component of a side stream logic was only looking at the side stream meter density Logic now also checks side stream component density Added safety check for max number of transaction details on loops 4 8 11 WIP Rev 3 4 31 01 WJP release Updated vsprintf calls to handle null return strings Corrected DMA buffer alignment issue on Atmel CPU boards that caused some serial messages to be corrupted and old messages to be reprocessed a second time Updated Diagnostic Serial Port Test to also perform full duplex tests Changed firmware version to 3 4 31 01 5 4 11 WIP Rev 3 4 31 02 WJP Added Preset level configuration parameter Compute Blend Density When meter level density is not defined and component level density is defined if Compute Blend Density is enabled the meter density is computed by a volume weighted average of the component densities if Compute Blend Density is not enabled then meter density is taken from the main component density Changed firmware version to 3 4 31 02 6 2 11 WIP Corrected bug in Component Net Totalizer On side stream blends it was possible that the side stream volume would clear before the main component cleared This would cause the component totalizer to bump up by the sid
21. Detailed information on the MultiLoad II Configuration tool is covered in Chapter 3 2 15 FACTORY DEFAULTS If there becomes a need to reset the MultiLoad II back to the factory defaults this can be accomplished in the following manner 1 Activate the W amp M switch remove the W amp M bolt 2 Remove power from the MultiLoad Il 8 Start pressing the CLR key over and over again while reconnecting power to the MultiLoad II 4 Stop repressing the CLR key when Setting Factory Defaults is displayed Note The resetting to factory defaults action will be logged in the W amp M Log Totalizers W amp M Log and Alibi Log will NOT be cleared when resetting to factory defaults Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 34 CHAPTER 3 GUI CONFIGURATION TOOL 3 1 OVERVIEW The MultiLoad Il GUI Configuration Tool feature is a Graphical User Interface GUI for configuring the MultiLoad ll Separate versions of this tool have been written for TMS 5 TMS 6 and for Microsoft Windows This software tool can be used when the MultiLoad II is configured for Remote or Local stand alone mode A major advantage of the Config Tool is the ability to store the configuration for a MultiLoad II unit onto a hard drive that can be backed up In the event that the MultiLoad II configuration is lost or the unit is damaged the entire configuration can be restored to the replacement hardware in minutes Other adva
22. 2 The RCU Diagnostics screen displays RCU DIAGNOSTICS Erogramikey ON W amp M Key ON Li The newest Hardware will also show the battery voltage and the internal temperature of the Multiload2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 236 RCU DIAGNOSTICS Program Key ON W amp M Key FON Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 15 Bay DIAGNOSTICS Use the Bay Diagnostics function to determine if the bay permissive input statuses can be viewed as ON or OFF the bay Permissive Out Authorized and Alarm Out outputs can be activated or deactivated from this screen by pressing the number that corresponds to the function 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select RCU DEA GNOSTIC S M Tee Components Additives Custom Logic Card Reader COM Loopback Serial Ports Network Test Keypad Display Unicode FEM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next Prev 2 The Bay Diagnostics screen displays Only the I O that is configured will appear on this screen GROUN VRU OVERET ESD BAY PE PE BAY PE PE PE BAY BAY 1 PermissOut 2 Authorized 3 Alarm Out 4 OutPulse D Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 BAY DIAGNOSTICS SORE SORE CORE SOR SORE SOFE SORE ORE ZORE FORE TOEF 20 237 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 16 PRESET DIAGNOSTICS Preset diagnostics enable your te
23. C When the relative density sensor is disabled this value will specify the relative density to be used for the meter level relative density If the relative density sensor is disabled and this default relative density value is zero the currently assigned component relative density will be used If this meter is the main stream of a side stream blend a volume weighted blend relative density will be calculated from the main and side stream component relative densities For API tables that require a relative density the meter level relative density will be used for this calculation Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 95 Chapter 4 General Configuration Alarm Low Relative Density When a Relative Density Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured relative density falls below a minimum value When the relative density of the metered product falls below the value entered in this field a DENSITY alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See Relative Density Calibration for instructions on configuring a relative density sensor Alarm High Relative Density When a Density Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured density rises above a maximum value When the relative density of the metered product exceeds the value entered in this field a DENSITY alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See Relative Density Calibration for instructions
24. a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index 22 BEACON Continues Pulse a Custom Logic Index On time b Custom Logic Index Off time Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 21 23 SUBTRACT a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index MULTIPLY a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index DIVIDE a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index SET VALUE a Value EQUAL a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index LESS THAN a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index GREATER THAN a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index LESS THAN OR EQUAL a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index GREATER THAN OR EQUAL a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index STOP DELAY a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index PULSE Single Pulse a Custom Logic Index On time of the Pulse b Custom Logic Index Trigger for the Pulse Chapter 12 Custom Logic 368 CHAPTER 14 WEB INTERFACE 14 1 OVERVIEW The Multiload2 has now a web interface which gives following information Rcu Ditto View of the display in the field Message Log Normal Logging of the Multiload2 W amp M Change Log W amp M Log for parameter that are changed Files It is possible to see all files on the SD Card and it is also possible to download all files Upload File It is possible to upload files or firmware remote to the device 14 2 LOGIN When going to the IP address of the device a password Protected Login Screen w
25. 000032AE532 Clear Exit Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 222 8 4 LOOPBACK TEST The Loopback Test is used for two purposes To test the transmit and receive capabilities of Host COM Port on MultiLoad II To troubleshoot serial communication problems between MultiLoad II and the host system TMS From the DIAGNOSTIC MENU choose COM Loopback EE M Card Reader Meters Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Cuszem Logig Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Health Health Next Prev The Loopback Test screen displays LOOPBACK TEST 1 Loopback test OFF Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 223 Using Loopback to test communication between MultiLoad Il and TAS computer Press the 1 key to toggle the Loopback Test to ON 2 When Loopback is turned ON press any key at the MultiLoad II keypad and the character pressed will be transmitted out the Serial Port assigned to the Host 3 If transmissions are not received at the TMS computer or the Optical Isolator determine if the MultiLoad II is capable of transmitting data B TMS users can run the TMSLCOMM utility in Loopback mode to determine if characters are being received by the computer B Alternatively Loopback can be set to continuously transmit a testing message Press the 1 key to toggle the Loopback Test to AUTO Using Loopback to test transmiss
26. 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select Meters D ARG ET M Components Additives Custom Logic Card Reader COM Loopback Serial Ports Network Test Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next Prev 2 After Selection of the Meter the Meter Diagnostics screen displays Only the I O that is configured will appear on this screen PRE 1 MTR 1 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFF 1 PermissOut ON A Authorized Orr 3 Alarm Out TORR 4 Upstrm Val OFF 5 Dnstrm Val OFF 6 OPN CLS Test Del Pulses 0 Ded Vow 0 00 Input mA 00 000 Rate 0 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 239 Chapter 8 Diagnostics If the meter is configured to have an analog valve output the following screen will appear PRE 1 MTR 1 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFF 1 PermissOut ON 2l Authorized OFER 3 Alarm Out OFF 4 Set Outpu O mA 5 Set Outpu 4 mA 6 Set Output 12 mA 20 mA Git Gon Net Get 7 Set Outpu 8 Output mA 00 000 Del Pulses 0 Del Vol 02 00 Rate 0 Upstrm Val Energize or deenergize the upstream solenoid valve Dnstrm Val Energize or deenergize the downstream solenoid valve OPN CLS Test Start an automated test measuring the control valve opening and closing speeds Set Output xx mA Set mA drive output to xx Output mA xx xxxx Display or Set mA drive output to xx xxxx Del Pulses Number of m
27. 1 3703 x 10 9 844 615 B5 RME 8 2261 x 10 4 5 5270 x 10 8 1 3289 x 10 9 846 439 B7 RME 8 2258 x 10 4 5 4729 x 10 8 1 3921 x 10 9 847 171 B100 RME 8 2330 x 10 4 1 4698 x 10 7 1 6545 x 10 9 883 314 B5 SME 8 1922 x 10 4 2 9212 x 10 s 1 0385 x 10 9 846 486 B7 SME 8 1925 x 10 4 3 1305 x 10 1 0918 x 10 9 847 253 B100 SME 8 2132 x 10 4 1 0329 x 10 7 1 0793 x 10 9 885 229 RME Rapeseed oil methyl ester SME Soy bean oil methyl ester TABLE ETH BRAZIL This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is alcohol Alcohol Percentage is known Current Temperature is available Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alcohol percentage The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Corrected density at 20 degrees will be calculated and stored TABLE HYDRO BRAZIL This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of hydrocarbons at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is alcohol Current Temperature and Density at 20 C is available Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and density The test temp
28. 2013 Toptech Systems Ine Copyright c 2019 Toptech Systems Ine MultiLoad II will display the access prompt screen indicating unit is in Operating mode For Access For Access Insert Driver Card Press Next to Begin Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 33 When Program Mode Access is permissed See Switch Access Control authorized personnel can enter Program Mode from this screen by keying in 00000 and pressing NEXT The Main Menu displays as MAIN MENU Diagnostics Views and Inquiries SD Card Next Prev The remainder of this Guide discusses the functions available from the MultiLoad Il Main Menu To exit the Main Menu press EXIT After exiting this menu the MultiLoad II will reboot The MultiLoad II banner screen displays briefly showing the firmware version number 2 13 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS MultiLoad II configuration screens contain configuration fields that define control parameters The configuration parameters are stored in the MultiLoad II s non volatile memory 2 14 MULTILOAD II CONFIGURATION TOOL MultiLoad II has an optional Graphical User Interface GUI configuration tool that allows you to configure the system from a PC The tool enables you to create and maintain configuration files as well as the ability to upload and download these files between the PC and the MultiLoad II This tool also allows the uploading of new firmware images as they become available
29. 824 1 to 838 5 838 6 to 1 200 0 18 to 125 18 to 125 18 to 150 18 to 150 NMI ASTM1250 1980 Table 54CG Germany NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion alpha of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of alpha is from 0 000486 0 001674 The alpha will be entered as 486 1674 however Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alpha The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Expansion ____ Temperature Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 261 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 0 000 486 to 0 000 918 18 to 150 0 000 919 to 0 000 954 18 to 125 0 000 955 to 0 001 674 18 to 95 ASTM1250 1980 Table 54DG Germany This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Density 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the
30. 9 15 Pressure Calibration for Meters ccceccesecsseeseseeeeeseeeeeeeeescaeseseeeeneeeeseaesescaeseseeeeeeeeeseeseseaeeneeeeeeeas 301 9 16 Density Calibration cic iin cece gd eege Aeddi ege edel deeg gee EEN 303 9 17 Relative Density Calibration ccssccsseeeeeseeeeseeseseeeenseeeeeeeeesaesnsneeeneeeeseaesesaesaseeeeneeeeseaesesaeeeeneeeeeees 304 9 18 API Gravity Calibration iiiec ccccccc eccctecs cetesscce eneceetacs ctscevensccestuarestcy ecndeeracuedcosedvecdeshateeseueseedertasaeteceedececee 305 9 19 BSW Calibration es ccccsiescsccessccecincccocecaes iccpensecceetecetetd sds cveeuaee scceeedeeeveGaceteatesdecdeesdeesaccevcendvetecetsstaetecccenedee 306 CHAPTER 10 VIEWS AND INQUIRIES eebe edd EE ed ege egene 307 TOT e EE 307 10 2 Viewing ALARMS sso ceca eae iiA cane cents ct cane cuae aus ttace EN 308 10 3 Viewing Totalizers ices sciccescecccce ca teceve stat Doce ce ct eceepsed cde ca dedeceduntbectensituengseabcenet titeeest sibecesstheuensssncerertuduests 309 10 3 1 Viewing Preset Totalizers viii ssi ie ee tn eo el isso eel nhl asda oot nee 310 10 3 2 Viewing Meter TOtaliZers REENEN 312 10 3 3 Viewing Component Totaltzerg nenn nenn nenn nenen neen 314 10 3 4 Viewing Adanive Tal Z OS rir iE aA ENEE AREIA AAE 316 10 4 Viewing Temperatures ccccsceececsseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeensaeeeenseeeeeseseeneeseseeeeesnseeeeeseseeneeseseeneeees 317 190 5 Viewing PreSSuUres E 318 10 6 Viewing Density E 319 10
31. EE Password 2 eRe Password 3 KKK KKK Password 4 KKK KK KK Password 5 KKKKKEK Modem Init AT amp F0 amp B1 amp C1 amp D0S0 1 Modem Dial Host Logins TBPSTES E TDSTESI Terminal Name Toptech Terminal Truck Number Next Prev Exit Enter e Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description Type in the new value e g 123 and press ENTER The new value displays on the screen RCU GE RCU Address ER Card Reader Type DISABLD Remote Processing StndAln Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1 KKKKKKEK Keak Re Password Password KEEKEKE 2 3 Password 4 kkkk k Password 5 KKKKKKK Modem Init AT amp F275324442 1 Modem Dial Hest Login TDSTEST LST SL Terminal Name Toptech Terminal Truck Number Next Prev Exit Enter Using this same screen as an example the Remote Processing line is selected and ENTER is pressed use the NEXT or PREV keys to toggle between the values ENABLED and DISABLD as shown below You must then press ENTER to accept the desired choice REUSE RCU Address 001 Card Reader Type DISABLD Remote Processing EE Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1 DEET Password 2 KKK KKK Password 3 KKK KKK 4 5 Password KK KK KK KKKKKKK Password Modem Init AT amp F0 amp B1 amp C1 amp D0S0 1 Modem Dial Hest Login TDSTEST TDOSTEST e Terminal Na
32. Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 151 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Component Setup For ratio blending each component must have its own meter Assign the component 1 to Meter 1 Assign the component 2 to Meter 2 and so on PRE 1 CMP 1 Base 001 SI Meter High Flow Rate lst Stage Irip Vol lst Stage Flow Rate 2nd Stage Trip Volume 2nd Stage Flow Rate Final Trip Vol aS Final Trip Max Time 5 000 vimal trip Vol Tock DISABLD Unauth Flow Alrm Vol 1O W amp M Recipe Percentage 0 00 BlkValve Open Rate 0 BlkValve Open Delay 0 B V Open Alrm Time 10 Nexe Brev 1 The Pump Run port assignment for the component is also configured on this screen Additionally there is a Pump Kill output that can be assigned to provide a signal to remove power from the pump An option also exists to configure a Pump Status signal to provide positive verification that a pump is running The pump related input and output signals can be assigned to any Flow Control Module The 1st Stage Trip and the 2nd Stage Trip parameters are also defined on this Screen Enter the volume and rate that defines the 1st Stage Trip and 2nd Stage Trips Parameter Default Setting 1st Stage Trip Volume 70 gallons 1st Stage Trip Flow Rate 225 gallons per minute 2nd Stage Trip Volume 20 gallons 2nd Stage Trip Flow Rate 150 gallons per minute Pump Run FCM Disabled Pump
33. Indicates if the Program key is active Card Inserted Indicates if a proximity card has been detected by the card reader Time Indicates the time in hours and minutes of they day Date Indicates the current year monty an day YYMMDD of the Multiload 5 Bay Real Time RT a Bay Real Time Prompt vi vii viii ix x xi Clearing Errors Indicates that operational alarms are being cleared This process can be initiated remotely or locally Diagnostic Mode Indicates when the operator has entered a diagnostic screen All Stop Indicates when the ALL Stop button has been pressed Alarm Out Indicates when a Bay level alarm such as a permissive has been violated Authorized Indicates when a driver has successfully completed the authorization process and is cleared to load Permissive Out Indicates that all Bay Level permissives have been satisfied Permissive 0 7 Monitors state of permissives 0 7 Deadman Input to reset the deadman timer Deadman Output to give the deadman pre alarm Deadman Bypass To bypass the deadman functionality Total Volume Volume deliverd by the full Bay 6 Preset Time RT a Preset Real Time Prompt vi vii viii xi xii xiii Authorized Indicates when a driver is authorized to use a particular preset load arm Flow Active Indicates when flow is active on a particular preset Batch Authorized Indicates when TMS has reviewed preset quantity and product selection info
34. Network Test Custom Logig Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PEM Com FCM Health PCM Health Sek Bay Preger Next Prev 2 The View PCM Health Status screen displays VIEW PCM HEALTH STATS PCM Timeouts Com Lost Ver 00 000000000 000000000 001 CLeaR Next Prev 4 After making a repair press the CLR key to reset the totalizers Then return to this screen to determine the effectiveness of the repair PCM Flow Control Module number Timeouts A timeout occurs when MultiLoad Il does not receive a response from a PCM after a poll is sent The MultiLoad II interprets three consecutive timeouts to mean that communications with the PCM has been lost The Timeouts totalizer increments each time a timeout occurs Com Lost The Com Lost totalizer is incremented whenever three consecutive timeouts have occurred Ver Displays the firmware revision number or Err if communications are currently lost with the PCM Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 235 8 14 RCU DIAGNOSTICS The RCU Diagnostics screen displays the state of the MultiLoad I Program switch the Weights and Measures switches 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select RCU DALA G NO Sek as es M Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logie Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PEM Com FCM Health PCM Health RCU Bay Preger Next Prev
35. Odd and Even line 3 Word size Select the word size defined in bits The choices are 7 and 8 line 4 Stop bits Select the number of stop bits The choices are 1 and 2 line 5 Tri State To define Tri stating select Multi or Single For Com 0 and Com 1 options are Single Multi and 2 wire Com 2 is always Single These three options are described below Single Select this choice when the following two conditions are met 1 Only one MultiLoad II will be on the circuit 2 The circuit is 4 wire RS 485 Multi Select this choice when the following two conditions are met 1 More than one MultiLoad II will be on the circuit 2 The circuit is 4 wire RS 485 2 Wire Select this choice when using a 2 wire RS 485 circuit Multi dropping is permitted with this choice a Toptech recommends using the Single 4 wire method whenever possible Multi dropping on 4 wire or 2 wire may not be feasible for large installations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 64 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter line 6 Port Usage Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Description Specify how the port is to be used Choices are FCM will communicate to the external FCMs excluding SMP or optional internal I O board Default for Com0 Host will communicate to a TMS Default for Com1 N A not applicable Default for Com2 Print indicates the printer port Log sends message log to serial printer Ethernet allows the Host TMS to communicat
36. Pressing Exit will return to the Configuration Menu without changing the currently loaded customer logo Pressing Enter will load the currently displayed customer logo 4 14 2 UPLOADING A CUSTOM BMP CUSTOMER LOGO The BMP file containing the customer logo must conform to certain specifications for the upload to be successful Those specifications are BMP Bitmap format Uncompressed image data 4 bits per pixel 16 color depth Width MUST be 640 pixels Height MUST be 240 pixels Nomore than 6 custom colors That is Colors R G B other than BLACK 0 0 0 BLUE 0 0 255 RED 255 0 0 MAGENTA 255 0 255 GREEN 0 255 0 CYAN 0 255 255 YELLOW 255 255 0 WHITE 255 255 255 TMS 5 and TMS 6 have a utility program to upload a BMP file conforming to these specifications into a MultiLoad Il For standalone MultiLoad Il and RCU II applications use the latest MultiMate configuration tool to upload a customer logo On Rev 2 0 CPU boards the SD Card slot can also be used to upload a logo BMP file Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 134 4 15 SYSTEM DATE AND TIME Use the Date amp Time function to set the current date and time 1 From the Configuration menu choose Date amp Time The CLOCK SETUP screen displays Wee EE ee 1 Date YYYYMMDD 20111231 2 Time HHMMSS 235959 2 Press 1 and enter the current date in YYYYMMDD format For example e
37. Temperature Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce a temperature offset to correct the indicated temperature to correspond with the observed temperature The offset range can be limited from 1 5 degrees via the parameter Temperature Offset Limit Temperature Alarm Time At the default value of zero seconds temperature alarms will be raised instantly A small delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when a RTD module is synchronizing with its FCM after recovering from a power failure Temp Sensor FCM When the Temp Module type is 10 enter the FCM for the temperature sensor Enter a value of 0 for the internal I O board Temperature Sensor Enable this parameter to activate a temperature sensor for this meter Disable this parameter if the temperature will be taken from a source outside of the SMP See also parameters Temp Module Type and Temp Sensor FCM Default Temperature In the event of a RTD failure the observed temperature can be entered manually for use by the system until the RTD is repaired Upon failure of a RTD a RTD alarm will occur If it is necessary to take the RTD out of service disable turn off the RTD Enable parameter and key in the observed temperature When the RTD is brought back into service enable the RTD Enable parameter Alarm Low Temp When the temperature of the metered product falls below the temperature specified by this parameter the
38. The Save Configuration screen displays files on the SD Card Save Configuration Configuration 1 mlc Cont rgurat ron EE kee Next Prev Select the configuration file or create a new file to save the configuration Load Configuration Configuration 1 mlc Configuration 2 miie new file Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 332 Chapter 11 Operation 11 4 Loap LOGO From the SD Card menu select Load Logo The Load Logo screen displays files on the SD Card Load Logo Customer Logo bmp Next Prev Select the logo file to load The logo file MUST be a BMP file with a resolution of 640x240x16 colors Any file format or color issues will be displayed if the file cannot be loaded It is recommended that the logo file to create with the MultiMate program After the file is loaded the following screen will be displayed Load Configuration Configuration 1l mlc EE EH Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 333 Chapter 11 Operation 334 11 5 LOAD FIRMWARE From the SD Card menu select Load Firmware The Load Firmware screen displays files on the SD Card Load Firmware ZO 100 OTE Mi AS OP Ose oat Next Prev Select the firmware file to load The W amp M switch must be active and the firmware file image will be verified before it is accepted and loaded into flash memory Load Configuration Configuration 1l mlc EES T
39. This parameter selects the output port that will be assigned to signal an unspecified alarm condition from the meter Authorized FCMA Authorized FCM provides an output signal if the meter has been authorized for flow as a result of driver card in or product selection Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 96 Chapter 4 General Configuration Permiss FCMA Allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the meter s permissive If the signal is not present at authorization or if the signal is lost during delivery the process will be stopped and a permissive meter level alarm will be raised Permiss Out FCMA This parameter permits the selection of a Flow Control Module FCM and port that will provide an output signal The signal will represent the loss of the meter s permissive Meter K Factor The K factor represents the number of pulses produced per unit of volume delivered The unit of volume represented in the K factor will determine the unit of volume used in all parameters that require a volume specification Quad Check Enable Quadrature Check also known as Pulse Security can be enabled or disabled with this parameter This function is intended to provide verification of meter pulse inputs by receiving two meter pulse train inputs from a single flow meter The quadrature input must use Port 5 The primary meter input must use port 4
40. arms that are using the common Pump Run output For example if an Additive Valve Fault occurs on a load arm s injector that delivers Brand X additive all other load arms in the bay that deliver Brand X additive will display the Pump Stat alarm and will not be able to load until corrective action is taken PUMP STAT DRIVER The Additive Pump Status alarm will occur in two situations Most commonly the alarm occurs in conjunction with a Valve Fault alarm If an injection valve fails to close the relevant pump output will be dropped in an effort to stop flow The Pump Stat alarm will appear on all of a bay s load arms that make use of the common Pump Run output For example if a Pump Stat alarm appears on load arm 7 it may have occurred due to an Additive Valve Fault on another arm that is in the same bay The Pump Stat alarm will also occur when using the Pump Status input to monitor a pump s pressure When the pump loses pressure the Pump Status alarm will appear on all of a bay s load arms that rely on the pump Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 115 Chapter 4 General Configuration Alarm Meaning INJCT FLT DRIVER This alarm indicates that MultiLoad II has detected that an injection failure has taken place If a piston injector is used the alarm indicates that a number of injections have been missed The quantity of missed injections is specified by the parameter Max Pstn Missed Inj Other failures
41. be inspected if it is not possible to obtain a meter factor that is within 2 of the reference Set this parameter to zero to deactivate the feature Adjacent MF Dev Limt Enter a value to limit variation in adjacent meter factors The Adjacent Meter Factor Deviation Limit will prevent a meter factor adjustment that will result in a variation of the entered value For example it is desired to limit the variation of adjacent meter factors to 0 25 If a new meter factor has been obtained for meter factor 2 this new meter factor cannot deviate more than plus or minus 0 25 percent from meter factor 1 or meter factor 3 If a new meter factor is entered that violates this setting an INVCONFIG alarm will be raised after the MultiLoad Il reboots To set the limit to 0 25 enter a value of 0 0025 The flow meter should be inspected if it is not possible to obtain a meter factor that does not violate this condition Set this parameter to zero to deactivate the feature Temp Offset Limit This parameter limits the range Temperature Offset that can be introduced The valid range of entries is from one to five degrees If a value of one is entered for example the Temperature Offset parameter can only be varied from zero by 1 degree When measuring temperature in Celsius enter a value of one When measuring temperature in Fahrenheit use a value of three Alarm Out FCM Alarm Out provides an output signal if the meter has an active alarm
42. both swing arm detector switches will be open and the relay coil will be de energized When the relay coil is de energized the normally closed N C contacts link the swing arm FCMs to the primary MultiLoad II RCU Since the swing arm is in the neutral position and no swing arm detector switches are closed the primary and secondary MultiLoad II RCUs will show swing arm alarms Moving the swing arm into the primary bay closes that bay s swing arm detector switch indicating to the primary MultiLoad II RCU that the swing arm is present The relay coil remains de energized and the N C contacts continue to link the swing arm FCMs to the primary MultiLoad II RCU With the closing of the swing arm detector switch the swing arm alarm in the primary MultiLoad II RCU clears Moving the swing arm into the secondary bay closes the secondary bay s swing arm detector switch The secondary MultiLoad II RCU then expects to communicate with the swing arm FCMs Closing the secondary bay swing arm detector switch energizes the relay coil The normally open NO relay contacts in the secondary bay close connecting the swing arm FCMs to the communication circuit of the secondary MultiLoad Il RCU The NC contacts of the primary bay are opened as the relay coil is energized severing the communication link between the swing arm FCMs and the primary MultiLoad II RCU Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 214 Chapter 7 Swing Arm Setup and Operation Excluding SMP Rel
43. calibrated cylinder Piston with Input calibrated cylinder with feedback switch Solenoid amp Pulser Input additive meter only Common Meter for Multiple Additives Analog valve pump using PID loop control Toptech recommends the Solenoid amp Pulser Input method because it provides all additive control totalizers and calibration in a very straightforward manner This method also eliminates the need for any microprocessor based additive injection equipment saving considerable expense in additive system training and maintenance This chapter also describes the Additive Calibration features available with the MultiLoad Il Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 171 Chapter 6 Additive Control 172 6 2 PISTON INJECTOR CYCLES The Piston Throw Time is a parameter that is configured for all of the piston type methods The Throw Time is the max time it takes the piston to complete one half cycle Note this is not a calculated value but is determined by physically measuring the time it takes the piston to complete one half of a cycle When an injection is initiated the system will assume that the piston has traveled to its maximum extension point when the Throw Time has expired After the Throw Time has expired the injection signal is removed and the piston begins its return to the starting position The time that it takes for the piston to return is assumed to be equal to the piston Throw Time also The system will not attempt
44. config Program Mode and W amp M switches Hardcoded legacy all stop switch off Removed legacy all stop configuration parameters Added check to verify that the W amp M switch is active before allowing firmware flash update Changed default Temp Module type from 0 FCM 1 RTD to 1 FCM II and FCM I Toptech module 09 12 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP Updated Ethernet defaults to 192 168 0 200 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 for factory tests 09 18 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP released to QA and production Corrected bug in keypad driver that could cause application code to lockup Increased ml_terminal protocol buffer size from 655 to 2048 characters for processing longer messages Added ability to upload a new firmware image with various packet sizes 09 22 06 ML MILL SMP 3 26 WJP Corrected font size on Meter Proving Screens for SMP 11 02 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP Added Factory Menu for use in testing Added reboot support inside factory test functional Added ML ML1 and SMP product logos and updated display logic to alternate between product logo and customer logo Set default logo display to lst graphic Toptech globe Fixed bug in Serial Port Test routine to restore the previous port parameter when exiting the test Added a factory I O board calibration screen Updated flash routines to keep interrupts enabled during flash programming Added additive calibration logic to prevent block
45. no pull down resistors on color lines 0x0001 8 4 VGA with full 0 100 on backlight dimming 10K Pull Down on Display Board Blue 1 LSB color line Corrected bug in Output Pulse Port processing where specification of port 10 would not send pulses to IO board Workaround was previously to specify port 1 for port 10 on IO boards Removed gqml gmll qmlm targets from the Makefile build script Updated firmware version to 3 29 01 4 6 09 3 29 01 WIP released for testing Corrected alarm count to allow up to promo count alarm clears before promoting to new level on next alarm Previously promoted on promo count alarm occurance Moved Blend Check Start Vol and Blend Check Restart Vol under Conditional W amp M control Corrected U600 register to correctly parse both 0 8 and 16 lockout bits on stand along card database 8 5 09 3 29 02 WJP Correct bug in card reader code that prevented correct identification of some corporate 1000 HID cards Updated simulation display terminal code to display utf 8 unicode and text foreground background colors Added Toptech Product ID French graphic screens Added Total Oil and various other customer logo graphic screens Replaced Toptech Global Solutions with Toptech Systems graphic screen Updated MultiLoad English Spanish French product ID graphic screens Updated code to bring in product ID graphics as raw files in rcutlc4 bmp directory instead of compiled C c
46. the system will expect a button press from the MultiLoad II keypad To start the Additive Calibration procedure 1 From the Configuration Menu choose Additive Cal 2 The Select Additive screen displays 3 Choose the desired Additive BODEN 1 Adtv 001 2 Adtv 002 Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 193 Chapter 6 Additive Control 194 4 The Additive Calibrate screen displays for the selected additive PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Review Last Calibration Data Calculate Additive Vol Inject Additive Vol Inject Geet Rdditive Mtr Factor Next Prev 6 7 2 AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION FUNCTION The following screen samples reflect standard Additive flow meters The screens for Piston type meters are slightly different The sequence demonstrates injections that are initiated at the MultiLoad II 1 From the Additive Calibrate screen choose Automatic Calibration Function 2 The Calibrate Additive screen displays E 1 ADIV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Press Next Key to Inject Now Injection 0 Meter Pulses 0 Delivered Volume 0 000 Hee Note If the Test Button is Enabled the text Hold Test Button To Inject Now would appear instead of Press NEXT Key to Inject Now 3 Place the test beaker to collect the additive injections and open the test port on the injector 4 Press the NEXT key or press the test
47. the transaction will be ended and all loads will be archived for data retrieval When disabled all loads will be stopped and archived immediately after the proximity card has been pulled Host Down The time in seconds that the MultiLoad II will wait before entering a HOST DOWN state after Timeout not receiving communications from MultiLoad This parameter is only valid if the MultiLoad II is operating in Remote Mode Host Wait Timeout The time in seconds that the MultiLoad II will wait before entering a HOST DOWN state after not receiving communications from MultiLoad after receiving a FHOSTWAIT command This parameter is only valid if the MultiLoad II is operating in Remote Mode Prt Alibi Log on Enable this parameter to print an Alibi Log from a Print Control Module PCM An Alibi Log is PCM a record of all transactions that are recorded by MultiLoad Il After enabling this parameter go to Alibi Log PCM and assign a PCM Also the unauthorized flow will be printed to a voucher Alibi Log PCM This parameter designates the Print Control Module PCM that will be used as a serial port to send Alibi Log data to a printer Swing Arm When swing arms are used one bay MultiLoad will be designated as the secondary MultiLoad Secondary Enable this parameter to identify the MultiLoad as secondary When this parameter is Excluding disabled the MultiLoad will be considered primary for swing arm purposes If no swing arms MultiLoad are invo
48. ze 0 Humber 0 Batch Humber 0000017 1 1 Ho Preset ed For Trade Yes y Gravity Relative Type None ted Density Gravity Relative Type None t Code 11 Delivered 29 livered 29 elivered 0 ature 15 00 Pressure 0 0 Density Gravity 0 0 Compartment Ho Compartment Expansion Coeff 0 0 Corrected Density Gravity 0 0 Volume Correction Factor 0 00000 Bsw 0 00 Detail Number 1 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Stop 16 14 Stop 16 23 Stop 16 25 Stop 16 26 Stop 16 31 Stop 16 44 Stop 10 46 371 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 372 CHAPTER 15 FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY 15 1 OVERVIEW This revision summary is designed to assist in the determination of what changes have been made between different firmware builds and releases Some comments may refer to internal testing factory test calibration routines and simulator builds that may not affect typical MultiLoad users but are still considered part of the firmware revision history 15 2 FIRMWARE CHANGES 08 30 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP released to QA and production MultiLoad 1 Version 2 26 ported to MultiLoad II platform Added customer logos Added Kanji character sets VGA RCU and QVGA QRCU support added Ethernet support added Support for FCMs with I O board and 4 20ma functionality added Added remote firmware upload up to 16 MB Added factory tests 09 08 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP released to QA and production Added support for DIP
49. 001 SI ZS Rate E er WU H 2 ter Factor ter Factor ter Factor Rate 2 DD mom om o Ed Rate ter Factor Meter Factors Used Next Prev If two meter factor flow rates are to be established the lowest flow rate must be the Meter Factor 1 Rate Enter Meter Factor 1 in the appropriate field Enter the flow rate that was used to determine the meter factor in the Meter Factor 1 Rate field When flowing between zero and the Meter Factor 1 Rate Meter Factor 1 will be applied to the Raw Gross Volume The second meter factor should be entered in the Meter Factor 2 field Enter the flow rate that was used to determine Meter Factor 2 in the Meter Factor 2 Rate field When flowing between the Meter Factor 1 and the Meter Factor 2 Rates an interpolated meter factor will be applied to the Raw Gross Volume The interpolated Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 168 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control meter factor will be a value that lies somewhere between the Meter Factor 1 Rate and Meter Factor 2 Rate If the flow rate is higher than the Meter Factor 2 Rate the meter factor that is applied to the Raw Gross Volume will be interpolated between Meter Factor 2 and Meter Factor 3 If Meter Factor 3 is determined ensure that the Meter Factor 3 Rate is higher than the Meter Factor 2 Rate If a meter factor is not determined for Meter Factor 3 enter the meter factor that was
50. 1000 of the specified host port Updated CTL Setup screen to correctly display needed parameters for 2004 tables Updated logic to return density rel density gravity etc when no table is selected Limited Local Databases on Diagnostics to only CN builds 10 20 11 WJP Updated 2004 tables to only include needed parameters 10 21 11 MSH Changed TDS task to only reset the task if in an idle error state 10 21 11 WJP Added new 2004 api X tables 10 25 11 WJP Removed legacy touch I O from Makefile More debugging on 2004 API tables Corrected format of Density Rel Density Exp Coeff API Gravity on stand alone tickets and in the transaction viewer Removed compartment from the transaction viewer 10 28 11 WJP More updates for API tables Replaced CTL and CPL with VCF on screens Replaced CTL and CPL table configuration with VCF table configuration Replaced Temp Comp and Press Comp setup screens with API Table setup screen Moved 11 2 2M to API table 54 Moved 11 2 2 to API table 24e CPL calculation done when pressure is not zero Added 2004 11 2 1 and 2004 11 2 1M tables 10 31 11 WJP Added Expansion Coefficient and VCF to transaction details Added printing expansion coefficient and VCF to alibi log Added new alibi log label for VCF U706018 Added ticket exp coeff pos and vcf pos U203 for printing these values on the printed ticket defaults to not printing Added sign to the Gravity Display on
51. 134 Writing Custom UE 361 13 5 MultiLoad II Real Time RT Functions 00 cccccecceseeeeee cece ee eeneeeeeee seen eeseneaeeeeeseeesaseneaeeeeeseeeeeseeneneeees 362 13 07 e eg Get 367 CHAPTER 14 WEBIN TER A OE a a ea a a pa a ageet ege ees 368 DNR o UE 368 UE Re Il WEE 368 14 3 WEBSITE EE 368 CHAPTER 15 FIRMWARE REVISION HISTORY c ccsccsseceseeeeeseeeesaeeesneeenseeeeeaesesaeseseeeeeeeeessaeseseeesneeaeeeees 372 Pa OREA A ee e E 372 15 2 Firmware Changes geed aa ae a Sect eaa e aeni Se aama SAA AE Eia aS ethe sisara tasa aa d aaie aas 372 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Table of Figures FECGKMDIL ModE S ienn aaa aaaea aa aerae iaae enge gt Deele ged iaaa aaraa aa rae ian Deus 20 Type T Program W amp M SWitChes seet sta aana aa aa aa aa aar aeae iaa 27 Type 2 Program W amp M Gwitches AA 28 Type 3 Program W amp M Gwitches AANEREN 29 CPU Board Rev 1 0 Program a
52. 2004 Table 5X API gravity This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the reference temperature and units of measure for density pressure and temperature ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 2004 Table 6A temperatures to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil NMI API Gravity 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed 2004 Table 6B_ temperatures to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product API Gravity 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F NMI d ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed 2004 Table 6C temperatures to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F NMI 8 ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures 2004 Table 6D to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6
53. 3 4 31 11 165 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Example The Blend Check Alarm is set to 5 and a preset of 1000 gallons is selected for a 60 40 load in which component 2 is the flush component The Flush Volume is 100 gallons The 600 gallon requirement of component 1 has to be completely delivered by the time the last 100 gallons of flush is started When ratio flow stops to begin the flush phase and before the flush is started the ratio will be 600 300 This will result in a 6 7 error until the flush begins The load will be stopped for a blend specification violation To deliver 1000 gallon loads in this case the Blend Check alarm setting will have to be relaxed to 7 Review the section on Ratio Blending in this chapter for configuration details Zb The flush feature for loading straight product from a ratio blending preset works the same as when the loading is conducted by a sequential recipe The following table shows how a 1000 gallon load is affected by each of the decision parameters The product is a 60 40 blend Component 1 is 60 of the total and component 2 is 40 of the total The Line Flush Component is component 2 The Line Flush Volume is 100 gallons Line Flush Delivery for Various Line Flush Options Ratio Blending Component Desired Ratio Quantity Delivered Flush Option Example 1 1 600 600 Take Flush from Matching Component 2 400 300 F
54. 5 21 10 WIP Rev 9 26 20 Corrected bug that prevented multidropped alibi log printing from releasing the control line 6 7 10 WIP No Changes 7 26 10 WIP Added W amp M protected parameter to enable FCM simulation for demo and debug purposes Simulation Mode is displayed on loading screen Updated all logo code to use c const struct inclusion in place of binary files for bitmaps Minor changes to remove Keil compiler warnings messages Currected bug in standalong card processing when searching for 2nd occurance of the same card number with a different PIN Moved AT91SAM9G45 modbus code to use PXA255 super switch Corrected modbus extended services command execution bug where command execution would occur at the completion of any write to the ESR not just at the write of the last register ESR changed from unsigned char to char to eliminate compiler warning Added start alt high flow rate and end alt high flow rate parameters to delay entry into and exit from alt high flow for use with the LC bubble detector Added preset Permissive Alarm Time parameter to delay the occurance of a Permissive Alarm for use with the LC bubble detector Added additive Upstream Block Valve parameter to allow the automatic opening of the additive block valve during additive calibration Added logic to allow the delivery of a single side stream component for meter calibration while in proving mode Added logic to mark side stream component as complete when main
55. 54 NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 500 600 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 1980 Table 54A NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Enabling the Canada API Limits bay parameter will extend the temperature range down to 40 C in accordance with Measurement Canada Bulletin V 18 E rev 3 1999
56. CHAPTER 10 VIEWS AND INQUIRIES 10 1 OVERVIEW The MultiLoad II provides inquiry functions available from the VIEWS AND INQUIRY MENU shown below VIEWS AND INQUIRY M Totalizers Temperature Pressure Density Relative Density BSW APL Gravity Temp Comp Pressure me ere Transactions W amp M Change Log Message Log Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 308 10 2 VIEWING ALARMS From the Views and Inquiry menu select Alarms The View Alarms screen displays all current alarms VIEW ALARMS PRE 1 Preset 001 COMP ALRM CMP 1 Base 001 API TABLE CLeaR Next Prev The listed alarms that are indented one space are associated with the preset listed above them If the Alarm message is longer than the display screen allows the message will wrap to the next line To clear all active alarms press the CLR key However certain alarms such as RTD ERROR will not clear until the condition has been corrected Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 3 VIEWING TOTALIZERS From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Totalizers The View Totalizers Menu displays It is also possible to go straight to this view screen via code 4448 combined with NEXT Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 EW TOTALIZE Meters Components Additives Next Prev 309 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 310 10 3 1 VIEWING PRESET TOTALIZER
57. Custom Logic 386 Added Legacy ACR test to Factory Menu Expanded Configuration Prompts Register r100 104 to return a max of 90 bytes and a default of 30 bytes instead of 20 bytes to support UTF 8 worst case Increased size of Alarm Names storage to handle UTF 8 characters Expanded Alarm Configuration Registers R U710 714 to return 30 instead of 10 bytes to support UTF 8 worst case Expanded Modbus Alarm Configuration Registers 2500 2599 to return 15 instead of 10 bytes to support UTF 8 Updated Alarm Setup Screen to properly display UTF 8 strings Updated RCU Setup Database version to 3 29 01 Added W amp M logging of firmware updates by monitoring the current firmware type version and build date on startup Canada amp US W amp M req Added W amp M logging of when any database is reset to factory defaults Expanded W amp M Log Register R912 to support Firmware Updates and Factory Default events Updated View W amp M Log to support Firmware Updates and Factory Default events Updated start clock to immediately poll RTC for current date time at startup to prevent W amp M and Event logs from reporting 00 00 00 00 00 00 Updated W amp M Log and Totalizer Database version to 3 29 01 Added lcd driver code to read the LCD device ID from display color lines Binary set of 10K pull down resistors on Blue color lines identify LCD display model connected 0x0000 8 4 VGA with limited 50 100 on backlight dimming
58. Densities Corrected bug where if entry into program mode followed PIN input caused to appear when entering numbers in program mode Updated view transaction to display density instead of pressure Updated view transaction to display totalizers stored in transactions Updated view transaction to display no net temperature or density for additives Removed dates and line number from message log display to increase the display from 57 to 71 characters Added ability to include ending totalizers in a transactions Added new configuration format type TOTALIZER SELECTION 25 MultiMate update needed Added new RCU configuration parameter Print Totalizers to select what totalizers PMCA should be included in a transaction and alibi log Increased the max number of Transaction Details from 99 to 999 Added optional extension to R800 register to support reading details over 99 Added blank line between each preset totalizer groups printed on ticket Added new Preset configuration parameter Default Preset to automatically enter a preset quantity Updated preset prompt routine to skip preset if default preset is specified Added new Meter configuration parameter Meter Address to specify the Modbus address of a serially connected mass meter Added new W amp M Component configuration parameter API Extrapolated Range to allow the use of API tables in the extrapolated ranges Updated proving mode to always use proving low flow rate and provin
59. ENEE er raea aaae ae aa aaraa eE e de Te Haiam daa entesntersenestt 23 2 10 1 Menus Re EE 23 2 10 2 Field Modification and Data Emir 24 2 11 Switch Access Control esbu uese erai eoena nieee esras nenene KEE EENEENE ah Hea arapen sha Hea or EENEG EE 26 2 11 1 Type 1 Program W amp M SWItCHES eisini iania iadaaa N eaae ARa eia a A NEEE R 26 2 11 2 Type 2 Program W amp M Switches siose a iaraa atA ANE AEA a Ka AEA EAEn EAREN R 28 2 11 3 Type 3 Program W amp M Switches A 29 2 11 4 Program Mode W amp M DIP Switch ou ceccccceecceesseceeeeeceneeeesaeeeeneeceeeeceaesseaaeceeneesenetessaseseneesseneetsneenees 30 2 11 5 Program Mode W amp M Field ZGwitches 31 PAn e le BE En WEE 32 2 13 Configuration Parameters errr raae aea raer ar tae raar a ara eaa r a a aa re Aar a o Aar Taaa aa aape aeaa Dena aai aera EEEa aaa eanan 33 2 14 MultiLoad Il Configuration Tool ccseccescesseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeenseaeseaeeasaesaseeeeneeeeseaeseseaesaseeeeneanes 33 2 15 Factory DefaultS s ssssssueusuunnrenennunununununnnnunununununnnnunununununnnnunununun unnn nununanunannnn ununun unune ennnnananann nnaman nnana 33 CHAPTER 3 GUI CONFIGURATION TOOL aai cellent a a ee 34 3 1 OWS VNC Wc EE Ee 34 3 2 Access from TMS 5 GU sects a a a theca aa raaa aaan a aaa a aa cccccustda ege 35 3 3 SereemiNavigation r eaa ea edel a A aaa qeacdacecedscandenctazstcddccacdvecdeg scdieacececctes 37 3 4 Menu FUN CHONG siririna eaaa a ee aaraa a Ne a
60. Enter a volume that will compensate for the amount of time it takes the control valve to close from the Second Stage Trip phase as the preset quantity is reached Before entering a value for this parameter adjust the closing speed of the control valve to the optimum setting using procedures provided by the valve s manufacturer This parameter will command the valve to close a little earlier to compensate for small consistent over deliveries Or it can be commanded to close a little later to compensate for small consistent under deliveries This adjustment is made on a volumetric basis Final Trip Max Time The Final Trip Stage is the last phase of delivery where product flow is authorized The Final Trip Max Time parameter establishes the length of time in milliseconds that this phase is active When the time specified in this parameter has elapsed flow must be completely stopped If there is no flow when the time expires the preset will transition to the Idle state If flow is still detected past this period the Overrun Alarm will activate if the Overrun Alarm Volume has been exceeded Final Trip Vol Lock W amp M Recipe Percentage Unauth Flow Alrm Vol Enable this parameter to prevent the MultiLoad II from automatically adjusting the Final Trip Volume parameter When this parameter is enabled the MultiLoad II will analyze the closing performance of the control valve and make adjustments to the Final Trip Volume as necess
61. Enter the BSW that will represent the lowest BSW value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA BSW 20mA Enter the BSW that will represent the highest BSW value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA BSW Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce a BSW offset to correct the indicated BSW to the observed BSW API Gravity Sensor This parameter indicates the use of an API Gravity sensor for the selected meter Enable this parameter if an API Gravity sensor is used to monitor API Gravity at the flow meter API FCM Gravity Sensor Enter the FCM for the API Gravity sensor Enter a value of O for the internal I O board Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 98 Chapter 4 General Configuration Chapter 4 General Configuration Default API Gravity For API tables that require the entry of API Gravity enter that value here The value should be the API Gravity of the component at 15 C or 60 F When the API Gravity sensor is disabled this value will specify the API Gravity to be used for the meter level API Gravity If the API Gravity sensor is disabled and this default API Gravity value is zero the currently assigned component API Gravity will be used If this meter is the main stream of a side stream blend a volume weighted blend API Gravity will be calculated from the main and side stream component API Gravity For API tables that require an API
62. Equipment Setup Menu appears EQUIPMENT S Bay Preset Mercero Components Additives Next Prev 2 Press Next until Meters is highlighted Press Enter The Meter Setup screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 SETUP Side Stream on Mtr 0 Side Srrm on Any Mtr DISABLD Meter Type VOL PUL Max Quad Errors 10 Reset Quad Errors 10000 Low Flow Alarm Rate LO iow Flow Alarm Time 10 000 Excess Flw Alrm Rate 800 Minimum Flow Rate 50 Maximum Flow Rate 650 Low Flow DB Rate 40 High Flow DB Rate 40 lst Stage DB Rate 40 Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 1 Before You Begin 1 4 INFORMATION ALERTS The Guide uses the following graphical conventions to alert the reader to different kinds of information Notes provide additional supplementary or nice to know information not actually necessary to the current task or topic h Cautions alert you to the possibility of unexpected results when performing an action They are also used to inform you of important things to keep in mind A Warnings inform you of the possibility that damage might occur as a result of performing a certain action or not performing a certain action Pay close attention when you see the warning symbo 1 5 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS The following typographical conventions are used throughout the Guide Boldface Indicates what yo
63. FCM where the additive is connected Set this value to zero for the internal I O board FCM Port Select the port that will serve as the Additive Injection Output Note A corresponding additive input port will automatically be assigned See the Additive Port Assignment description above Additive Type SolnMtr AnlgMtr Additive Volume Per Injection Enter the injection volume in appropriate units Piston Throw Time This parameter is not applicable Additive Meter K Factor Enter the additive meter s K factor in pulses per gallon Open Block Valve FCMA Assign an output port that will provide an output to open an Additive Block Valve The Additive Block Valve will be used for additive selection The remaining parameters that apply to this additive method are optional They are used to set up alarming pump outputs and permissive inputs Some of the remaining parameters affect how the additive is delivered at different stages of the load cycle All Additive configuration screens and parameter descriptions are found in the General Additive Setup section that follows The Parameters for Additive Methods table lists the parameters that apply to this method Not all of the additive parameters are applicable to every additive delivery method The following table shows the parameters that apply to each of the four possible methods Yes indicates that the parameter applies to the additive method No i
64. FCM 3 r E Se Figure 7 1 Swing Arm Configuration Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 7 Swing Arm Setup and Operation Excluding SMP 7 2 SWING ARM OPERATION When a swing arm is present and authorized in a bay that bay s MultiLoad Il RCU will show the swing arm as Idle Load arms that are in an Idle state are arms that are ready to be used Viewing the Load Screen of the other bay s MultiLoad II RCU will show a Swing Arm alarm as the status of the absent swing arm The swing arm alarm cannot be cleared and it will not go away until the swing arm is moved back into the bay and its presence is detected by the MultiLoad II RCU When a swing arm is absent from a bay all other load arms in the bay can be used normally A swing arm can be returned to a bay without negatively affecting a transaction that is in progress For example a driver may card in to a bay even though a swing arm is being used in the opposite bay In addition loading on other load arms in the bay can commence without the presence of a bay s swing arms Any absent swing arms can be brought into the bay at any point during a transaction When a swing arm is returned to a bay while a transaction is in progress the Swing Arm alarm will automatically clear and its status will change to Idle As soon as a swing arm s status is Idle a product can be selected and loading can commence as with any load arm at the bay Conversely a swing arm can be moved out of a bay at any point durin
65. Flow Restart Vol iow Flow Rate High Flow Rate Proving Low Flow Vol Next Prev Number of Meters Enter the number of flow meters that will be assigned to the load arm preset Excluding SMP Number of Components Indicates the number of components that will flow through the meter Number of Additives Indicates the number of additives that will be assigned to the load arm A maximum of 2 additives can be assigned The minimum number is 0 additives Sequential Blending Enables Sequential Blending Enable this parameter if using one flow meter in the Excluding SMP preset with multiple components For single component loading through a single flow meter this parameter can be disabled Ratio Blending Enables Ratio Blending Multiple flow meters and control valves are required for ratio Excluding SMP blending Enable this parameter if multiple flow meters and control valves are assigned to the load arm and Ratio Blending is desired W amp M Controlled Enables select blending and recipe parameters for this preset to be under W amp M control Proving Flow Rate Enter the target flow rate that will be used during the proving run Excess Flw Alrm Rate This parameter defines the flow rate that will trigger the Excess Flow Rate Alarm A flow rate is considered excessive if it exceeds the absolute maximum rate that the load arm is rated for The value of this parameter should be higher than the High Flow
66. Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Grem Ge Gross volume loaded difference between Blend and Ethanol Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Nrem Ne Net volume difference between the Blend Net Volume and Ethanol Net Volume Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Mrem Me Mass difference between the Blend Mass and Ethanol Mass Premium product Component Level values are reported as Gp Gpm Tp Tpm Dp Dp OR Dpm Np Npm Mp Mpm Where Gp Gross volume loaded for the Premium component Tp Temperature for the Premium component Dp Density for the Premium component Dp Density specified for the Premium component Np Net volume loaded for the Premium component Mp Mass loaded for the Premium component Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 297 9 13 TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION FOR METERS Use the Temperature screen to calibrate temperature for a meter 1 From the Views amd Inquiries Menu choose Temperature After selecting the preset and meter the Temperature screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 TEMPERATURE Temperature Unadjusted sty EE 1 Temperature Offset 0 00C 2 Temperature Adjusted 42 ATC State US Next Prev 2 If the observed temperature is different from the unadjusted temperature displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the di
67. Low Flow Rate Alarm will activate Excess Flw Alarm Specifies the absolute maximum flow rate of the flow meter When the flow rate Rate exceeds this value the meter excess flow alarm will activate Typically this value is set to the flow meter s highest flow rate as published by the meter s manufacturer Minimum Flow Rate Enter the minimum flow rate of the flow meter as prescribed by the meter s manufacturer The system will not command the flow rate to go below this value Maximum Flow Rate Enter the maximum flow rate of the flow meter as prescribed by the meter s manufacturer The system will not command the flow rate to go above this value Low Flow DB Rate The Low Flow Dead Band Rate specifies the amount of rate error that will be tolerated before a rate adjustment is attempted by the flow control valve If for example this parameter is set to 10 gpm and the Low Flow Rate is set to 100 gpm the valve will not attempt to adjust flow until the Low Flow Rate exceeds 110 gpm or until the Low Flow Rate falls below 90 gpm High Flow DB Rate The High Flow Dead Band Rate specifies the amount of rate error that will be tolerated before a rate adjustment is attempted by the flow control valve If for example this parameter is set to 10 gpm and the High Flow Rate is set to 1000 gpm the valve will not attempt to adjust flow until the High Flow Rate exceeds 1010 gpm or until the High Flow Rate falls below 990 gpm 17 Stage DB Rate The F
68. Low Temperature alarm will activate Enter the temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit The temperature units used for the entire bay are determined by a parameter in the Bay menu Alarm High Temp When the temperature of the metered product rises above the temperature specified by this parameter the High Temperature alarm will activate Enter the temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit The temperature units used for the entire bay are determined by a parameter in the Bay menu Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 97 Temp Module Type Enter a value that represents the appropriate type of temperature sensor For a typical setups set to 1 For MultiLoad II SMP 1 Internal UO Board RTD 3 Internal I O Board 4 20mA For MultiLoad II 0 External FCM with Opto22 RTD Module 1 Internal UO Board RTD or External FCM with Toptech RTD Module 2 External FCM with Opto22 4 20mA Module 3 Internal I O Board 4 20mA Add 10 to this value to specify a FCM other then the FCM that the meter is assigned Use Temp Sensor FCM to specify the alternate FCM Temperature 4mA When using a temperature sensor that provides a 4 20 mA signal enter the temperature that is represented by 4 mA Temperature 20mA When using a temperature sensor that provides a 4 20 mA signal enter the temperature that is represented by 20 mA BSW Sensor This parameter indicates the use of a bsw sensor for the selected meter Enable thi
69. Meter Factors Used Enter the number of meter factors that will be established for the component This will prevent configuration errors and subsequent FCM Conflict Alarms Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control CHAPTER 6 ADDITIVE CONTROL 6 1 OVERVIEW Sophisticated additive control is an integral part of the MultiLoad Il Because this control is integrated into the MultiLoad II the need for discrete additive control devices and their resulting interfaces to the terminal automation system have been eliminated Up to 16 injectors 2 injectors on SMP can be assigned to a load arm on MultiLoad II Additive injection rates are entered into the MultiLoad Il as a percentage of the total product recipe For example if the additive injection rate is 0 5000 gallons of additive per 1 000 gallons of product the percentage of additive in the product recipe would be 0 0500 Once this number is established any injection size Additive Volume Per Injection can be programmed in the MultiLoad II as long as it falls within the mechanical limitations of the injector MultiLoad II adjusts the frequency of injections to maintain the correct additive percentage This chapter describes the MultiLoad II Additive functions and features Please review the topics that describe characteristics that are generic to all additive methods before studying the individual methods The five additive methods discussed in this chapter are Piston Only
70. Meter Setup Adaptive Valve Control ENABLED Meter Setup 5 2 7 TWO STAGE VALVES Two stage valves are similar to Digital control valves in that they both operate using Normally Open NO and Normally Closed NC solenoids The two stage valve provides only two flow rates however Low and High MultiLoad can handle two stage valves through proper configuration as follows Navigate to Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup and configure the following parameters Preset Meters Components Low Flow Rate 5000 Low Flow DB Rate 4999 High Flow Rate 9999 High Flow Rate 9999 1st Stage DB Rate 4999 1st Stage Flow Rate 5000 Excess Flw Alrm Rate 2nd Stage Trip Vol 0 gt Max anticipated flow rate Fallback Time 0 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 142 5 2 8 ANALOG VALVES Analog valves are control valves that operate from a 4 20mA signal that indicates the proportional opening of the valve An analog signal of less than or equal to 4mA will drive the valve completely closed 0 An analog signal of greater than or equal to 20mA will drive the valve completely open 100 An analog signal between 4mA and 20mA will drive the valve to a percent open between 0 and 100 An analog valve by itself does not target a flow rate so the valve control signal will be adjusted by MultiLoad to target a flow rate profile With FCM or I O Board versions 037 and later Multi
71. Mode gt Configuration gt Products gt Product Setup The Product Setup screen displays PRODUCT SELECTION Comp BASOO2 Base 002 Comp BAS003 Base 003 Comp BAS004 Base 004 Comp BAS005 Base 005 BASOO6 Base undefined DOOL Adtv D002 Adtv D003 Adtv D004 Adtv D005 Adtv D006 Adtv undefined Prev Exit What is originally displayed is the default Base Products Base Additives and Saleable Products Press Enter will select the product to edit The Edit Product screen displays EDTE PRODUCT Long Desc Default Base Product 001 Short Desc Base 001 Hazard Tax 0 Type 2 Base Component Edit Product Recipe Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 10 DEFINING BASE COMPONENTS In the sample screen below an operator has filled in the values to create an unleaded 87 base component Note since the MultiLoad II SMP enclosure keypad does not support Alpha characters specification of Alpha characters on product names MUST be done through the MultiLoad Configuration Tool EDTE PRODUCT code OOO 3 Long Desc BASE87UNLEADED Short Desc BASE87UNL Hazard Idx 0 ype base Component Edit Product Recipe Next Prev Instructions are shown below With Code highlighted press Enter 1 a Fo N At the cursor key in a product code for the base component The code can be up to 6 digits
72. NMI Relative Density at 60 F is unknown Reference Temperature is 60 F ASTM1250 This table provides the value of relative density at 60 F of lubricating oils at observed Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 267 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 2004 Table 23D temperature and density Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lubricating oil Current Temperature and Density is available NMI Relative Density at 60 F is unknown Reference Temperature is 60 F ASTM1250 This table provides the relative density of a petroleum product at observed temperature and 2004 Table 23X density This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the reference temperature and the units of measure for density pressure and temperature ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 2004 Table 54A temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated NMI CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This
73. Name ke nd RACK4 SE o Disabled RCU while Download Directory M tmsdicty File Name izack4 tle E Download Registers from RCU CANCEL EXIT Figure 3 4 Download Window Protocol Type of communication protocol Smith default Brooks DanLoad LC Name Line Controller that controls the serial port the MultiLoad II is on Address Address of the MultiLoad II from which the configuration parameter values are downloaded Directory Full directory path where the configuration file resides or will reside File Name Name of the configuration file Down Load Prompt The prompt file indicates information about all the configurable parameters in MultiLoad II As firmware is updated and new parameters are added downloading a prompt file is how to get these new parameters to display in the Configuration Tool The language that the parameter descriptions appear in is determined by the prompt file By setting the ProgramMode Language parameter to the desired language then downloading the prompt file all parameter description in the MultiLoad Configuration Tool will appear in the selected language Down Load Registers The configuration parameter values reside in registers internal to the MultiLoad II After these values are downloaded to the appropriate configuration file the file can be edited and uploaded into an MultiLoad II Disabled RCU while Checking this box is recommended because it will sto
74. Rate value is in whole defined Temperature value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point Pressure value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point Density value is in tenths defined meaning one number after the decimal point Relative Density value is in tenthousth defined meaning 4 numbers after the decimal point Api Gravity value is in tenths defined meaning one number after the decimal point BSW value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point Creep Gross Volume value is in whole defined b Preset Number Specify the preset Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP c Meter Number Specify the meter Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP 9 Additive Real Time RT a Additive Real Time Prompts vi vii viii xi xii xiii Xiv XV xvi Clearing Errors Indicates that an additive level alarm is clearing for a particular additive Clearing Batch Indicates that additive totals of a particular injector are being archived Test Button Indicates that the Test Button used in injector calibration has been pressed for a particular injector Pump Run Indicates that a particular Additive s pump has been commanded to run Pump Kill Indicates that a Pump Kill signal has been received for a particular additive Pump Status Indicates that a Pump Status signal has been satisfied for a particular additive Open Block Valve Indicates that a Block Valve h
75. Rate High Flow DB Rate Component 3 Meter 3 10 gpm 10 gpm Seq Blending Disable 17 Stage DB Rate 10 1 Stage DB Rate 10 gpm gpm 2nd Stage DB Rate 2nd Stage DB Rate 10 gpm 10 gpm Weights amp Measures Weights amp Measures Meter 2 Meter 3 Minimum Flow Rate 5 gom Minimum Flow Rate 5 gom Maximum Flow Rate 100 gom Maximum Flow Rate 100 gpm Figure 5 8 Multiple Side Stream Configuration Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 5 6 2 SEQUENTIAL BLENDING WITH SIDE STREAM Sequential blending with a side stream component is a hybrid blending scheme As each component is delivered in turn through the primary stream a minor component is being blended into the primary stream upstream of the primary flow meter Regular PY VH EE rei T CR Mi C Premium _ JO O ec K GC Figure 5 9 Sequential Blending with Side Stream Application At the preset level define the number of flow meters and components liquids that will be delivered through the load arm In this example there will be two flow meters and three components Enable Ratio Blending and Sequential Blending parameters found at the preset level At the meter level configuration default values can typically be used for the primary meter Meter 1 When configuring parameters for Meter 2 enter a value in the Side Stream On Mtr parameter By en
76. Rate parameter in the Preset Menu Overrun Alarm Vol Defines the volume of overrun that will trigger the Overrun Volume Alarm The overrun volume is the volume of product delivered that exceeds the preset quantity Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Low Flow Start Vol After the initial start of a batch the flow rate will be maintained at the Low Flow Start target flow rate until the Low Flow Start Volume has been delivered Low Flow Restart Vol When restarting an interrupted batch the flow rate will be maintained at the Low Flow Start flow rate until the Low Flow Restart volume has been delivered Low Flow Rate This rate specifies the Low Flow target flow rate This rate will be maintained until the Low Flow Start Volume has been delivered This rate will also be used for the Low Flow Restart stage High Flow Rate This parameter specifies the High Flow target flow rate Maximum flow through the load arm is determined by this rate This rate will be maintained until the 1st Stage Trip Volume has been reached Proving Low Flow Vol During the proving process delivery into a proving vessel will begin at a Low Flow Rate until the value specified by this parameter has been delivered Enter a value that will determine how much volume will be delivered at the Low Flow Rate Typically the required Low Flow Start Volume for a proving delivery is less than the Low Flow Start Volume of a normal delivery Line Flush
77. Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Relative Density of the liquid at 15 F The valid range of Density is 350 637 kg m3 Test temperatures and pressures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CPL based on the test temperature test pressure and the Relative Density The test temperature test pressure and Calculated CPL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations 8 Configure for a Pressure Sensor Wire the pressure transmitter to the I O board Use any available analog input port Consult wiring diagrams in the Installation Guide Perform pressure calibration Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad Il Select the Weights A Measures Meters menu Then select the appropriate preset and meter Find the parameter Pressure Sensor This parameter should already be enabled if the pressure calibration step has been performed Find the Default Pressure parameter Configure this parameter for 999 9 Do not adjust this value unless the pressure transmitter is undergoing maintenance Find the parameter Pressure 4mA Enter the pressure that will represent the lowest pressure value measured by the sensor Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 274 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Find the parameter Pressure 20mA Enter the pressure that will represent the highest pressure value measured by the sensor Press the EXIT key until the Main Menu i
78. S Saleable 06 11 12 WJP Added seperate monitoring per port of non_toptech host connections 06 29 12 MSH UAP Updated base product process to use comp add id rather than meter id when assigning products components to meters 07 03 12 MSH Added two new passwords 4448 to jump to the view totalizers menu for transmontagne and 4447 to jump to the view transactions screen for CN 07 05 12 WJP Added prototypes to ml pm view h to remove compiler warnings Corrected var naming of uap_comp_add_id Corrected additive volume in uap transaction record to include three decimal places 07 09 12 MSH Version number increased to 3 4 31 06 in anticipation of release Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 07 10 12 MSH 405 Revert changes to authorization process relating to Meter table Remove comp _add_id from 07 24 12 MSH Meter table Revert changes made to PWM value for display ID 0x02 Add new display ID 0x03 for Multiload Mobile display Add setting for max brightness register 80 7 27 2012 WJP Update MRS gross and net volumes excluding preset volume whole to return volumes in hunds when use hunds configuration parameter is set 8 15 2012 WJP Added compiler switch in ml _functions c to Record or Playback keypresses for demos and automated testing 8 21 2012 WIP Added SD CARD menu to simulation builds Fix possible NULL pointer when saving configuration
79. SETUP Side Stream on Mtr 0 Side Strm on Any Mtr DISABLD Meter Address 0 Mercer Type VOL PUL Max Quad Errors Reset Quad Errors ow Flow Alarm Rate ow Flow Alarm Time Excess Flw Alrm Rate Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate Low Flow DB Rate High Flow DB Rate Next Prev Assign a Flow Control Module FCM for the selected product flow meter When using an internal I O Board 0 is the only valid entry Port 4 will automatically be selected as the Channel A meter input signal If a Channel B meter input is used it must be connected to Port 5 To activate Channel B see Weights and Measures parameter Quad Check Enable The digital control valve upstream and downstream outputs will automatically be assigned to Port 2 and Port 3 respectively If this meter will be a side stream meter use this parameter to identify the primary meter stream into which the side stream meter will be flowing See side stream configuration section for more details Enable this parameter if a side stream meter will be serving a load arm that has more than one custody meter stream A typical application is when one side stream meter is used at a two component ratio blending arm The side stream meter can only flow through one of the custody meters at any given time however 90 Chapter 4 General Configuration Meter Type This parameter identifies the type of meter input Valid types are VOL PUL Volume P
80. Setup press EXIT to save your changes and return to the Configuration Menu Reload ROM Enabling this parameter will enable the alarm and status labels to the factory defaults on Lang File reboot Driver Language Specify the Language English Spanish Portuguese French German Mandarin Old and New or Thai to be displayed to the driver Program Mode Specify the Language English Spanish Portuguese French German Mandarin Old and Language New or Thai to be displayed in program mode Card Reader Indicates whether a card reader is configured for use or if the device is to be used as keypad only Select card reader mode BUCKET BUCKET NON CAPTIVE SLOT SLOT NON CAPTIVE iBUTTON When Disabled the MultiLoad II will prompt the driver to Press Next to Begin for login The driver then keys in his card number and PIN Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 71 Chapter 4 General Configuration Prox Card Pull This number indicates the time period in seconds that a proximity card must be removed Secs pulled before the MultiLoad terminates the transaction This parameter can be increased from zero in order to alleviate the effects of site generated Electro Magnetic Interference EMI In some cases external EMI can cause the MultiLoad II to think that the proximity card has been removed resulting in a prematurely aborted transaction Processing Mode When this parameter is Remote the MultiLoad Il is in remote processing mo
81. Status screen From the Component Status screen press Next to view the Component Detail screen for each component The Views and Inquiry menu permits the observation of current temperatures and pressures including offsets without compromising Weights amp Measures security To view a temperature or pressure enter the program mode and choose the Views and Inquiry menu from the main configuration menu Select Temperature or Pressure as desired Then choose the desired load arm and associated flow meter 9 5 6 API MPMS CHAPTER 11 1 2004 ADJUNCT TO IP 200 04 ADJUNCT TO ASTM D 1250 04 MultiLoad II firmware as of version 4 31 04 supports API MPMS Chapter 11 1 2004 Adjunct to IP 200 04 Adjunct to ASTM D 1250 04 referred to hereafter as the 2004 standard Advantages over the 1980 standard include an addition digit of accuracy and correction to an arbitrary reference temperatures or gravity These methods can be used to recreate corrections factors in the manner of the historic tables with the appropriate inputs 9 5 7 CONFIGURING FOR TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CTL MultiLoad II firmware supports several different petroleum measurement tables used to produce CTL Selection of the appropriate table depends on the type of product the density units of measure used and the temperature to which the volume will be corrected Enter the program mode and select the View and Inquiries menu From the View and Inquiries menu select Temp Comp Select the desired
82. T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 Nbm Net volume loaded for the Blend Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mbm Mass loaded for the Blend Meter Blended product Preset Level values reported as Gb Gbm Tb Tbm Db Dbm Nb Nbm Mb Mbm Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 282 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 283 Ethanol meter Meter Level values are reported as Where Gem M2 value not to be used for trade Tem T2 value not to be used for trade Dem D2 OR De Nem Gem VCFe Tem Dem value not to be used for trade Mem Nem D2 OR Mem Gem Dem value not to be used for trade Gem Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter M2 Gross volume reported by meter M2 Tem Temperature for the Ethanol Meter T2 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T2 Nem Net volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter VCFe API Correction Table for Ethanol Mem Mass loaded for the Ethanol Meter Ethanol product Component Level values are reported as Where De De OR Dem Ge Gem value not to be used for trade Te Tem value not to be used for trade Ne Nem value not to be used for trade Me Mem value not to be used for trade Ge Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component Te Temperature for the Ethanol component Ne Net volume loaded for the Ethanol comp
83. The liquid is a refined product API Gravity 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the API Gravity of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of API Gravity is from 0 85 API Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the API Gravity The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 1980 Table 6C This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion alpha of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of alpha is from 0 000270 0 000930 The alpha will be entered as 270 930 however Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alpha The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 1980 Table 6D This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube
84. Value 2 008 006 Equals 007 009 P01 C03 Open BV 010 008 AND 009 011 FCM OUTPUT XX Y 010 Note XX FCM Y FCM port P01 preset 1 M03 meter 3 C03 component 3 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 161 5 7 PROVING SIDE STREAM METERS EXCLUDING SMP It is assumed that proving connections will be used to by pass the primary meter and valve in order to flow through the side stream meter into a calibration vessel Prior to proving a side stream meter make the following configuration changes For firmware version prior to 3 28 21 1 Enter Program Mode Go to menu Configuration Equipment Setup Meter Select the appropriate Preset Select the appropriate side stream meter This is usually Meter 2 Find the parameter labeled Side Stream on MTR Change this parameter to 0 Exit Program mode by pressing the EXIT key six times Proceed with the proving process NO amp wD Upon completion of the proving process re enter program mode and change the Side Stream on MTR parameter back to its original setting The value is usually 1 For firmware version 3 28 21 and later The above configuration changes are not necessary provided that the Host System has indicated that this is a Proving Transaction or that the Meter Proving Mode parameter has been enabled in Configuration gt RCU Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 8 LINE FLUSH EXCLUDING S
85. a blue screen exception handler that will display the type of fault address of fault and all register values 12 9 10 3 4 30 00 WJP Switched to eCos RTOS for Atmel processor same OS as xScale uses Removed all references to IAR and Keil compilers and RTOS Added Atmel Exception Handler Blue Screen Added CN GPS tracking demo code Added 200 gps position log Added compiler switches for GPS SITE DATABASE and GPS POSITION LOG Replaced Modem Sign On configuration parameter with Host Sign On Language Conversions needed Added TDS 3PO interface routines In process Adding Krohne and Micromotion functionality Removed ILTA Mass Meter demo code Added Mass Meter Real Time Status Registers Added VOLUME KROHNE 3 and VOLUME MICROMOTION 4 to meter typ numeration Added MASS MTR to the Communication Setup port type Added Mass Meter Diagnostics to Meter Diagnostic Screen Corrected bug where the input of UNSIGNED DIV1000 formatted parameters accepted the selection of a sign Removed workaround to force state to idle when powerup and a transaction is completing Addws SD Card Functions Added SD Card selection to the Views and Inquiries Menu Changed firmware version to 3 4 30 00 Changed real time database version to 3 30 00 z 12 20 10 3 4 30 00 WJP Added new Calculations for Shell Canada and Measurement Canada V18 For Side Stream Calculations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Cust
86. alarm condition at the preset Authorized FCM Authorized FCM provides an output signal if the preset has been authorized for flow as a result of driver card in or product selection Permiss FCM Permiss FCM parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the preset s Permissive If the signal is not present at authorization or if the signal is lost during delivery the process will be stopped and a permissive level alarm will be raised Permiss Out FCM This parameter permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal The signal will represent the loss of the preset s permissive Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 89 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 6 3 METER SETUP Use the Meter Setup functions to configure the characteristics of a product meter Further details about flow control can be found in Chapter 5 Meter flow rates are configured in the Weights amp Measures gt Meter section and can be found in Chapter 8 Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup gt Select Parameter Level gt Meter All Weights and Measures controlled values are displayed in red both on the screen and in this manual The Meter Setup screen displays Parameter Flow Control Module Side Stream on Mtr Excluding SMP Side Stream on Any Meter Excluding SMP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 PRE 1 MTR 1
87. archive details Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 413 Added printing BSW on UAP tickets previously missing Added printing Batch Number on UAP tickets Added printing Batch Numer on Stand Alone tickets Added new LUA command SetDetailBatchNumberPos to BOL script processing Added SetDetailBswPos and SetDetailBatchNumberPos to default BOL script Added Batch Number to transaction details in the MRTDppp and R800 commands Added Batch Number to the Transaction Viewer Screen Added Stand Alone Batch Number ticket position to R203 Added R006 command to read the current last assigned Batch Number Added Batch Number to the Web Server Transaction Detail Viewer 03 29 2013 PS Adding new alibilog label BATCH and adding batch number to the alibilog transaction 04 02 2013 PS Transaction to UAP had always spaces in po number changed to get it from account record 04 04 2013 PS Change batch number from bay level to preset level Added batch number to unauth flow voucher which will have also a different batch number Transaction will be not stored 04 05 2013 PS Add batch number to the modbus protocol so it can be read out of the transaction 04 05 2013 PS Add new features to Custom Logic Beacon Pulse generator variable ON and OFF time Pulse Single Puls on a high input trigger and variable ON time 04 10 2013 Found many issues with language selection in MultiLoad This impacte
88. character that can be assigned to an individual operator The MultiLoad Il has the ability to support a remote customer supplied Program Mode and or W amp M Mode switches When this is done the customer will be responsible for all sealing requirement on these external switches and wiring as required by the local Metrology Authority Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 253 9 3 WEIGHTS amp MEASURES CHANGE LOG AND METROLOGICAL PARAMETER SECURITY The last 1 000 Weights and Measures W amp M parameter changes are logged in the MultiLoad s Non Volatile RAM NVRAM Write access to these registers is restricted by software means When all conditions are met for changing a W amp M parameter a single write is allowed only after creating a new entry to the W amp M change log which records the following information about the parameter change Date Time Parameter name Event number Identifying character Affected preset load arm Affected flow meter Affected component Previous value New value The W amp M change log is stored in the MultiLoad NVRAM and cannot be edited or modified Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 4 VOLUME CORRECTION FACTOR FEATURES The MultiLoad Il has the ability to calculate net volumes Net volume for the purposes of this discussion is defined to be the gross volume corrected to a reference temperature and or a vapor pr
89. commanded to close at this volume in order to permit the additive or dye to be flushed from the line Blk Val Status FCMA Block Valve Status FCM This parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the additive block valve indicating whether it is open or closed When the block valve is closed an external contact attached to the valve will close applying a status signal to the input When the block valve is open the external contact will also be open removing the status signal from the input When the block valve has been commanded to open the absence of a signal at the input will indicate that the valve has opened If the closed signal is still present after the Block Valve Open Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure alarm will be issued When the block valve has been commanded to close the presence of the status signal at the input will indicate that the valve has closed If the closed signal has not been detected by the time the Block Valve Close Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure alarm will be issued Open Blk Val FCM Open Block Valve FCM This parameter permits selection of a port that will provide an output signal to open an additive s block valve This output will provide a signal to open the block valve as soon as the Start button is pressed The signal will be removed when the remaining quantity of the load reaches the value spec
90. communication This alarm will AUTO automatically clear when communications are restored Check the Diagnostic menu under FCM Com to determine if the I O board or FCM is communicating COMP PERM Component Permissive Permissives can be set to affect specific components in multi component load arms When the Component Permissive signal is lost loading will stop on the load arm if the component is being used The alarm will auto clear when the signal returns The alarm message that appears to the operator is configured via the MultiLoad Configuration Tool at Component AUTO Alarms Alarm 1 BLK VALVE Block Valve alarm This alarm activates when a component block valve has not opened in the time required by the Block Valve Open Alarm Time parameter This alarm will also occur if the DRIVER block valve has not closed in the time required by the Block Valve Close Alarm Time parameter Any time a block valve is in the improper position the alarm will activate UNAUTH FL Unauthorized Flow Alarm This alarm will occur when flow passes through the meter when the REMOTE meter is not authorized for loading The volume that will trip the alarm is determined by the Unauthorized Flow Alarm Volume PUMP STAT The Pump Status alarm will occur in two situations Most commonly the alarm occurs in conjunction with a Valve Fault alarm If a control valve fails to close the relevant pump output will be dropped in an effort to stop flow The Pump Stat alarm will appear
91. determined for the highest proven flow rate Ensure that the Meter Factor 4 Rate is higher than the Meter Factor 3 Rate If a meter factor is determined for Meter Factor 3 and Meter Factor 4 and product flow exceeds the Meter Factor 4 Rate Meter Factor 4 will be applied to the Raw Gross Volume for all rates that exceed the Meter Factor 4 Rate If a meter factor is not determined for Meter Factor 4 enter the meter factor that was determined for the highest proven flow rate Enter the actual number of configured meter factors 1 4 in Meter Factors Used parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 169 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 170 5 10 1 SINGLE METER FACTOR Use of a single meter factor can be accomplished by entering the same meter factor value in all four Meter Factor parameters Meter Factor Flow Rates however must have different values Example Meter Factor 1 1 0451 Meter Factor 1 Rate 150 Meter Factor 2 1 0451 Meter Factor 2 Rate 400 Meter Factor 3 1 0451 Meter Factor 3 Rate 600 Meter Factor 4 1 0451 Meter Factor 4 Rate 800 5 10 2 RULES FOR METER FACTORS Li If the following conditions are not met an FCM Conflict Alarm will be raised at time of flow Meter Factor Rates must always adhere to the following rule MF 1 Rate lt MF 2 Rate lt MF 3 Rate lt MF 4 Rate Meter Factors must adhere to the following restriction 0 8000 lt Meter Factor lt 1 2000
92. external FCMs but adding several additional input and outputs on that of an FCM An 2 meter I O board can provide control of up to two meter runs PORT 1 7 CR w f z RTD INPUTS PORT 0 2 a PORT 0 3 sp H p LINE S AC OUTPUTS T PORT 1 0 D 12Vde PORT 1 1 t2vde aa e 12VvC0M S PORT 1 3 PORT 0 4 LINE PORT 0 5 PORT 0 6 gt PORT 0 8 AC INPUTS PORT 0 7 DC INPUTS e PORT 1 8 PoRT 1 4 gt y PORT 1 5 He PORT 1 6 Uli ai d PORT 0 1 DC OUTPUTS PORT 1 1 C onha Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 2 10 NAVIGATING THE SYSTEM The following describes how to navigate the system select field values perform data entry and toggle options on and off Note All unknown or not allowed sequences of switch or key actuations are rejected and have no impact on the software or measurement data 2 10 1 MENUS AND SCREENS The MultiLoad Il Main Menu is shown below From this menu you select one of four main functions MATIN MENU Diagnostics Views and Inquiries SD Gand Next Prev The reverse video highlight bar indicates the current selection Press Next to select Diagnostics and then press the Enter key to go to the Diagnostics Menu DA CNOC S M Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Health PCM Health DC Bay Preset Next Prev Fo
93. for Temperature of Liquid CTL and for volume Correction for Pressure of Liquid CPL This screen will also permit the entry of a test temperature to calculate a CTL based on various temperatures When a test temperature is entered a VCF will be calculated and displayed The test temperature has no influence on normal operations 1 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose Temp Comp After selecting the preset and component the VCF Table Setup screen displays PRE 1 CMP 1 VCF TABLE SE API Name ASTM1250 2004 Table 6B TEE Genie Test API Gravity Calculated VCF Next Prev Highlight the API VCF Table Name row and press ENTER Press the Next or Previous key to scroll through the API table choices Press ENTER to select the desired table Two parameter fields are added to the screen one is API Test Temp the other depends on the API table selected 4 Enter a test temperature value in the Test Temp field This value is used to calculate a VCF on the bottom of the screen for information purposes The value entered in this field will have no effect on net calculations during normal operation Enter a value of zero until the remaining data is entered 5 Depending on the API table selected the next prompt will call for either a gravity a density or an expansion coefficient When the user enters a value the Calculated VCF will change accordingly If the bottom line displays API Input Data Out
94. i T e ea E r ar a a p are aaa r Nee 234 8 14 ROU Diago e 235 3 15 Bay Diagnostiese EE ee AAA EE ee EE ee ite 237 8 16 Preset Diagnostics see EES SEET ascidian 238 8 17 Meter Diagnostics ee ee eege eege 239 8 18 Digital Control Valve Test cccesccssseeceseeeeeseeessaeenseeeenseeeeeesesaaeenseeeenseeeseaesesaaesaaeaeenseeeseaesaaeeesesnaeeeaes 243 8 197 Component DIAGnOStics iiiii cchescececdtesitstdecconcedhedd ceatezeaccedeccdtesdeesesieencedeceheacs dd Sieg dE aini ihania 246 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 820 Additive RE Le EE 247 Bt CUSTOM Eglise eege Eege Eed Sege 249 8 22 GPS Diagnostics ML Il Moble Only ccccscccssceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeenaeseseeeeneeeeseaesesaesaseeeeeseeeseesaseaeenseeeeeeas 250 CHAPTER 9 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES ccccseeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeenseeeeeaeeeseaesaseeeenseaeseeeseseaeseseeeeneanes 251 9 1 OVO NVI W ee Ee EEN 251 9 1 1 Weights and Megsures AAR 251 9 2 Access Restrictions to W amp M Parameters ccceseeeseseeeeneeseeneeseeeeeeeeeseeneeseseeneesesesneesesesneeenseeenens 252 9 3 Weights amp Measures change log and metrological parameter security cssseeecseetereeeeeeeees 253 9 4 Volume Correction Factor Features scccsccssscessseeeeseeeeseeeescaeseseeeeeeeeeseaesesnaesaseeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseaenss 254 9 5 MASS CALCULAT ON LEE 254 951 Net Pulse Outputs sist inca als Sata aa a dosh ene Ae AE aaa TaS 256 9 5 2 Deliver in Gro s or Neto
95. in the transaction for P reset M eter C omponent and A dditives Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 72 Parameter Simulation Mode Large Prompts Confirm Flow Starts Display Adtv as CCs Display Hundredths Use Hundredths W amp M Density Lock Chapter 4 General Configuration If enabled will place the MultiLoad into a Simulation Mode for demo and test purposes In this mode a flashing Simulation Mode message will display on the load screen notifying the operator that simulated loading is occurring All FCM or l OBoard product and additive operations will be simulated in the firmware No actual FCM or I O Board hardware needs to be present while in this mode If enabled will force idle toggle message and all standalone prompts Enter Access ID Enter PIN and all custom prompts to appear in large fonts Note Toggle messages over 20 characters in length will not appear in large fonts If enabled the user is prompted a second time before starting flow Enable to display additive amounts in cc units Disable to display additive amounts in base units that is gallons or liters Enable to display 100s of whole units This also occurs when in meter proving mode Transaction and Totalizer resolution are still in whole units when this parameter is enabled Enable when 1 100 resolution is needed in the displaying totalizing and recording of delivered transaction volumes When this parameter is
96. into the MultiLoad II There are two methods to enter this data Enter the driver card data manually via the front panel of the MultiLoad II Enter the driver card data manually via the MultiLoad II Configuration Tool and upload to the MultiLoad Il See Upload Registers for procedure Note Currently there is no support for importing exporting this data to from data files There is also no method of having TMS supply current driver database data to the MultiLoad II No Customer Consignee or other Account type information is stored in the MultiLoad II Drivers can be prompted to enter this information for a transaction but no customer names or addresses are stored in the MultiLoad II as a configuration No validation is done on this driver supplied data Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 347 Chapter 11 Operation 12 5 2 PRODUCT DATABASE The Product database consists of five categories Base Product definitions Saleable Product definitions Preset Authorized products Base Component Assignments Base Additive Assignments Each category can be entered manually at the MultiLoad II or with the MultiLoad II Configuration Tool but this information is automatically overwritten by TMS each time the Bay is started with the Product assignments configured in TMS Note that all products listed will be available to all Drivers when in local mode 12 5 3 METER TICKET PRINTING If Meter Ticket printing is needed a Serial Line Printer will need t
97. last three transaction prompt fields Updated duplicate ticket message will appear on left margin for small ticket size Setup default ticket configuration for a small ticket size with Site Latitude and Longitude information Updated idle screen to display Latitude Longitude Speed Heading and Site Name Updated Transaction Archive Header Screen to display entire length of 4 prompts to show Lat and Long infomration Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 381 Added new meter level parameters Density Alarm Time and Pressure Alarm Time to provide a time that the value must be out of spec before raising the alarm Same logic as the Temperature Alarm Time parameter Updated density calculations to handle values larger then 1200 0 Expanded range from 1200 0 to 9999 9 for Meter Level Default Density Density Alarm High and Density Alarm Low Expanded range from 1200 0 to 9999 9 for Component Level Default Density Expanded range from 1200 0 to 4000 0 for Meter Level Density 4mA and Density H 20mA Updated RCU Setup Database version to 3 28 12 Updated Real Time Database version to 3 28 12 Added PetroPlus Logo for TTE Updated firmware version to 3 28 12 09 5 08 3 28 12 WJIP Added support for MultiClass PIV 200 card reader to read TWIC cards returning the card FASC N Updated card reader logic to support TWIC card reads Added W amp M CLEAR alarm level that
98. meter is complete to prevent side stream from running on when main stream stops 9 10 10 WD Continued debugging of Atmel routines for Card Reader Real Time Clock Flash Memory LCD Driver Serial Ports Network No impact to existing PXA255 code Rewrite and simplify ExL Alphanumeric Entry code Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 391 Updated software ID to be different for PXA255 vs Atmel builds to prevent upload image swap Added start of hardware watchdog timer at startup Updated software major number for new platform builds Disabled much of the email WIP code 9 17 10 WJP Added ability to accept analog flow meter inputs Added signed div1000 and meter input _type to configuration parameter types Changed Pulse in Mass meter configuration parameter to Meter Type Added several Analog Meter Input parameters for 4mA Rate 20mA Rate Rate Offset and Cutoff Rate When Meter Type is Volume Analog Input ports 4 and 5 can be used for other functions Updated meter diagnostic screen to display Input mA Corrected Mandarin LOW FLOW and HIGH FLOW text Increased latest known FCM version to 039 Added R U998 to read update bitmap cache data area 16MB 0x00000000 Ox00ffffff Added T hrcwhoooooooo command to display graphics from the cached bitmap data area Changed firmware version to 3 29 21 Changed equipment database version to 3 29 21 10 7 10 WJP Added
99. more than 100 registers for each level Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 408 added BSW into UAP build 11 19 2012 PS added change that prompts higher than 100 can be read r command 11 20 2012 PS API Table function has now a Test API Gravity instead of using the real API Gravity No W amp M key needs to be turned on Added on the MRS command for BSW and API Gravity the average of meter and component level Merge display denstiy type routine to one routine 11 21 2012 PS Fix issue on ticket printer that only on the total amount the hundreths digit was missing for gross and net 11 26 2012 PS Added ability to store alarms by batch into transaction for preset meter component and additive level Added ability to view batch alarms in transaction viewer and webpage transactionviewer Added ability to print the alarms by batch on the alibilog printer Fixed bug that webtransaction viewer would never show type 4 meter level 11 26 2012 PS Fix language german for product screen and layout 11 28 2012 PS Fix language german for Network screen alignment for counts was wrong 11 28 2012 PS UAP fix ticket number tracelog messages always a diff of 1 UAP fix during tds send of transaction could clear transaction LUA data 11 28 2012 PS UAP fix that stack doesn t overflow when checking transactions view web interfac 11 29 2012 PS Enhance German language on Main Meter Screens
100. network RX task to properly handle abnormal socket terminations from WINSOCK that return 1 from the socket read Bug caused SMP ML to lockup when a WINSOCK host application abnormally terminated Added ml fcm2_ tester binary output and functions to perform all digital and analog FCM2 testing and calibration Corrected display of 6 digit integers on the configuration screens min max preset value Added ability to use Temperature Module Type 3 to use 4 20mA on I O Board or FCM II Analog Board for Temperature Input Updated firmware version to 3 28 08 03 19 08 3 28 08 WJP QA approved and released Added Toptech 4 20mA status status line on the V amp I gt View Temperature screen 04 04 08 3 28 09 WJP Beta Release to D H to solve field blend issue Corrected signed unsigned compares in ml_fcm_config c causing blend to race out of tolerance and alarm 04 16 08 3 28 09 WJP 37 bit prox cards Updated card reader code to support HID 37 bit H10320 formatted cards facility code 0 05 07 08 3 28 09 WJP Added Decal and Terquimsa customer logos for TTE 06 03 08 3 28 09 WJP Corrected bug in limit checking lst and 2nd trip flow rates that allowed negative target rates to ramp up flow beyond excess rate Corrected bug in computing lower BD rate that caused valve to hunt when lower limit went negative 06 22 08 3 28 10 WJP Added customer supplied TransMontaigne2 logo Corrected bug in reading IP address in
101. of the additive meter and injector valve The additive meter and injector valve are often integrated into a mono block assembly The Block Valve will reside downstream of the mono block assembly as insurance against dye leaking past the assembly while in an idle state The Block Valve will open when the MultiLoad II s Start button is pressed The Block Valve will close as soon as the volume specified by the Shutoff Volume From End parameter is reached Flush Pumps have been devised to prevent dye from clinging to the output orifice of the Block Valve After the final injection has been made and the Block Valve closes the Flush Pump will activate for a pre programmed period The Flush Pump will circulate product across the Block Valve orifice dislodging residual dye Red Dye Block Valve Mono block Assembly Product Flow Dye Point Assembly Figure 6 11 Mono block Injector amp Dye Point Assembly To configure for a Block Valve find the Open Blk Val FCM parameter in the additive section Assign an FCM and port to perform this function For valves that require a separate closing signal and or a valve status signal ports can also be assigned for these functions To configure for a Flush Pump find the Flush Pump Run FCM parameter to assign a port for this function Determine the amount of time required for an adequate flush and enter this value in seconds into the Flush Pump Run Time parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11
102. oil API Gravity 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the API Gravity of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of API Gravity is from 10 to 45 API Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the API Gravity The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 1980 Table 23E This table provides density at 60 F of light hydrocarbons at observed temperature and density Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a NGL or LPG propane Current Temperature and Density is available Relative Density at 60 F is unknown Reference Temperature is 60 F Test temperatures and densities can be entered on this screen that will calculate the corrected density at the test temperature and density The test temperature density and Calculated corrected density at 60 F are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE This table will not produce a CTL value but this table may be used by other tables Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 258 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Table Description ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 1980 Table 24A temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if th
103. on configuring a relative density sensor Relative Density Alarm Time At the default value of zero seconds density alarms will be raised instantly A small delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when relative density is momentarily out of range The relative density alarm timer will only run when a density alarm is not active and a batch is currently authorized on this preset Relative Density 4mA Enter the relative density that will represent the lowest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA Relative Density 20mA Enter the relative density that will represent the highest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA Relative Density Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce a relative density offset to correct the indicated relative density to the observed relative density 2 ME Limit Ref The 2 Meter Factor Limit Reference is a number that is representative of the meter factors obtained during an initial proving session Enter a value that is the average of all meter factors obtained during an initial proving session Examples of initial proving sessions are provings that occur after a meter has been repaired or replaced If during subsequent proving sessions any one of the four meter factors has changed from the reference by more than 2 an INVCONFIG alarm will be raised The flow meter should
104. on particular additives Added W amp M logging to alarm level changes when old or new alarm levels are WM CLEAR Updated Configuration gt Alarm to support the new Alarm Configurations Updated Views gt W amp M Change Log to display the new Alarm Configuration Changes Updated R912 W amp M Change Log to support new W amp M Alarm Configuraiton Changes Removed legacy RO030 U030 Card Length Register Removed legacy RO31 U031 Card Offset Register Increased size of R962 Card Data from 40 characters to 80 Updated Diagnostics gt Card Reader to report new Card Data Format Error Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 382 The following are specific only to the MultiLoad II Mobile product Added R U650 to support reading or writing the GPS database Added R140 to support reading the current Latitude Longitude position Added R141 to support reading the current load Latitude Longitude Site Index Increased transaction count from 200 to 900 transactions and increased the transaction detail count from 1750 to 3500 Added new additive W amp M comfigurations R U104054 W M Inj Flt Promo Count and Flt Reset Mode to add W amp M promotions to particular additives R U104055 W M Inj 09 17 08 3 28 12 Updated RO71 07 Moved placement of Updated init code Updated Equipment Configuration Database version to 3 28 12 NVRAM6 Alibi Log to after NVRAM3 to verify no overlap between N
105. parameters at the Preset Meter and Component levels Preset Setup Configure the preset or the load arm for sequential blending by indicating the number of flow meters that will be assigned to the preset Typically for sequential blenders one flow meter and control valve are used Up to five meters can be used if desired It is assumed that if more than one meter is used there will be multiple independent meter runs with each meter having its own control valve PRE 1 Preset 001 SI Number of Meters Number of Components Number of Additives Sequential Blending ENABLED Ratio Blending DISABLD W amp M Controlled DISABLD Proving Flow Rate 600 Excess Flw Alrm Rate 1100 Overrun Alarm Vol 5 Ow Flow Start Vol 50 ow Flow Restart Vol 15 ow Flow Rate 150 High Flow Rate 600 Proving Low Flow Vol 50 Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 143 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 144 After establishing the number of flow meters assigned to the preset indicate the number of components that will be delivered through the load arm Enable the Sequential Blending parameter For multiple meter runs the Ratio Blending parameter may also be enabled if some recipes will be using ratio delivery Low Flow and High Flow rates are established in the Weights amp Measures Preset menu The Low Flow Start and Low Flow Restart volumes are also specified on this screen These parameters define the fl
106. rates through each meter will decrease to the rate specified in the 1st Stage Trip Flow Rate The MultiLoad will keep all the flow rates in proportion to one another while they are in the 1st Stage Trip phase The combined flow rate will not exceed the High Flow Rate but it may exceed the rate of any individual 1st Stage Trip Flow Rate After each component completes the 1st Stage Trip phase each component will transition to the 2nd Stage Trip phase when it reaches the 2nd Stage Trip Volume The 2nd Stage Trip Volume is configured in the Component menu for each component that is assigned to the preset Each component will probably reach the 2nd Stage Trip Volume at slightly different times The flow rates through each meter will decrease to the rate specified in the 2nd Stage Trip Flow Rate The MultiLoad will keep all the flow rates in proportion to one another while they are in the 1st Stage Trip phase The combined flow rate will not exceed the High Flow Rate but it may exceed the rate of any individual 2nd Stage Trip Flow Rate As each component completes its requirement for the load its control valve will close Each component will probably finish at slightly different times Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 148 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 4 1 RATIO BLENDING CONFIGURATION Preset Setup Preset configuration for Ratio Blending is accomplished on the Preset Setup screen shown below Configure the preset or the load arm for ratio bl
107. represent the highest API Gravity value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA API Gravity Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce an API Gravity offset to correct the indicated API Gravity to the observed API Gravity Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 99 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 6 4 COMPONENT SETUP Use the Component Setup functions to configure the characteristics of a component Further details about flow control can be found in Chapter 5 Component flow rates are configured in the Weights amp Measures gt Component section and can be found in Chapter 8 Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup gt Select Parameter Level gt Components The Component Setup screen displays PRE 1 CMP 1 Base 001 SETUP High Flow Rate lst Stage Irip Wolk lst Stage Flow Rate 2nd Stage Irip Vel 2nd Stage Flow Rate Einmal Wrap Vol E Final Trip Max Time 5 000 Pinal Leip Vol lock DISABLD Unauth Flow Alrm Vol W amp M Recipe Percentage BlkValve Open Rate BlkValve Open Delay B V Open Alrm Time Nese ErSV Parameter Action Meter Assign the component to a flow meter High Flow Rate Set to the same value as the high flow rate in the preset menu It may be a different value if piping requirements dictate 4s Stage Trip V
108. screen This phase is the initial transition when approaching target delivery When the 1st Stage Trip Volume is reached the MultiLoad Il de energizes both solenoids which permits the line pressure to reduce the valve opening The solenoids will remain de energized until the 1st Stage Flow Rate is reached The 1st Stage Flow Rate is configured in the Component menu When the 1st Stage Trip flow rate is achieved the MultiLoad II will energize the normally open upstream solenoid This is done in an attempt to lock the valve in a position to maintain the desired flow rate Periodic adjustments to the valve are made as the flow rate drifts above or below the 1st Stage Trip Dead Band rate Product flow will continue at the 1st Stage Trip flow rate until the 2nd Stage Trip Volume is reached Parameter Default Setting Screen Location 1st Stage Flow Hate 225 gallons per minute Component Setup 1st Stage Trip Volume 70 gallons Component Setup 1st Stage DB Rate 40 gallons per minute Meter Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 139 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 2 3 2 STAGE TRIP The 2nd Stage Trip phase will begin when the remaining volume reaches the volume indicated by the 2nd Stage Trip Volume parameter This parameter is in the Component menu This phase is the second in a series of adjustments from the High Flow rate to a no flow condition When the 2nd Stage Trip Volume is reached MultiLoad II will de ener
109. system raises the Injection Fault alarm The alarm will be raised if the specified quantity of missed injections occurs sequentially or if the quantity of missed injections accrues before the preset quantity has been delivered MaxSolenoid Inj Time This parameter defines the amount of time that the solenoid valve will remain open during an injection If no pulses are received within the specified time period an INJCT FLT injection fault alarm will occur It may then be necessary to check the operation of the pulser Enter a time in seconds If the injections are of a longer duration than the default setting of this parameter it will be necessary to increase the time to be greater than the typical injection time It may be necessary to increase the default value when front loading additive or when the additive lines flush requires one final large injection Under Add Alrm Inj Under Additize Alarm of Injections When the product becomes under additized by the number of injections specified in this parameter an additive alarm will be raised and delivery will stop The volume of each injection is determined in parameter Additive Vol Inj Over Add Alrm Inj Over Additized Alarm of Injections When the product becomes over additized by the number of injections specified in this parameter an additive alarm will be raised and delivery will stop The volume of each injection is determined in parameter Additive Vol Inj Che
110. t known Canada t and L res pe rts pe the number of supported fcm pulse output ports from 1 to 6 ulse enabled parameter ulse fcm number to output pulse fcm_address to include ulses per volume to output pulses per volume thous with 3 o deliver less then one pulse per unit t pulse enabled parameter t pulse fcm_number to output pulse fcm_address to include t pulses per volume to output pulses per volume thous with to deliver less then one pulse per unit o the bay diagnostics screen upport up to 39 ports tat structure from real _ time database FCM version to 036 whole number totals on ticket must always add up oad whole unit totals to sum component whole totals and r Measurement Canada Requirement Updated Component side stream back calculation to difference whole totals and r Measurement Canada Requirement Added on ticket total line to indicate if totals are or are not a sum of for S per Measurement Canada Requirement Updated RCU Setup Database version to 3 28 13 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 383 Updated Real Time Database version to 3 28 13 Updated Equipment Configuration Database version to 3 28 13 Updated firmware version to 3 28 13 10 25 08 3 28 13 WJP Introduced beta MODBUS register interfac 11 12 08 3 28 13 WJP Updated Card Reader Logic to support 26 bit Corporate 1000 formatted cards Corporate 1000 reads are returned to the Host system as 0 04u 0
111. temperature limit of the API table in use 4 Configure for Default Temperature When the Temperature Sensor is undergoing maintenance the observed temperature can be manually entered for use by the API table a Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad Il Select the Configuration Equipment Setup Meters menu Then select the appropriate preset and meter b Find the parameter Temperature Sensor Set the parameter to Disabled c Find the Default Temperature parameter Enter the temperature that is observed at the flow meter d When the Temperature Sensor is ready to be placed back in service re enable the Temperature Sensor parameter and return the default temperature to 999 9 5 Configure for Density Measurement For API tables that use density a density value can be entered manually or density can be measured throughout loading Manual density values are entered by the user when the appropriate API table is Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures activated To use live density readings from a densitometer 4 20 mA for volume correction use the following procedure a Wire the density transmitter to any available Flow Control Module FCM Use any available analog input port Consult transmitter wiring diagrams in the Installation Guide b Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad Il Select the Configuration Equipment Setup Meters menu Then select the appropriate preset and component c Find t
112. that could cause this alarm are a stuck piston solenoid spool valve failures clogged filters and injectors Additionally an improperly adjusted or broken piston position reed switch may be the source of the failure In some cases it may be necessary to increase the Max Piston Throw Time parameter when very low additive pressure exists If the additive is very viscous or if a large volume injector is used it may be necessary to increase the Piston Throw Time This will allow the injector more time to complete an injection cycle If the additive metering method is used this alarm indicates that additive injection target volume has not been reached within the period specified by the Max Solenoid Injection Time In most cases this will indicate that an additive valve is closed or the additive pump is not starting Other failures that could cause this alarm are solenoid failures clogged filters and malfunctioning meter pick off or pre amplifier In some cases it may be necessary to increase the Max Solenoid Injection Time when front loading or when injecting large quantities of additive prior to a line flush This will allow the injector more time to complete an injection cycle UNAUTH FL REMOTE Unauthorized Flow This alarm occurs when a volume of additive passes the meter and the additive is not authorized for delivery The volume of flow that will trigger the alarm is specified in the Unauthorized Flow Alarm Volume parameter NO LNFLSH
113. the alibi log and transaction detail screen Added display of Corrected Gravity to Meter Status Screen API Diagnostic Screen Correct display of Expansion Coefficient in alibi log 11 3 11 WJP Add format checking to all printf and scanf type application functions 11 3 11 WJP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 399 Added densitygravity type and corrected densitygravity type to the transaction detail for proper formatting of the densitygravity value Update sprintfexp to return number of characters written to string 11 4 11 MSH Added Thai translations 11 7 11 MSH Fixed TDS routines to close connection when our local databases are full This should keep the records queued on TDS 11 9 11 WIP Added transaction detail detail screen to view all transaction detail details 11 10 11 MSH Added local database browser for CN builds Located under Program mode Diagnostics Local Databases Increased size of local database for vendor BOL storage on CN builds Changed size of database for vendor storage per suggestions from PM New values are 1400 vendor BOLs 20 vendors Still 75Klocomotives 11 15 11 WJP In API TABLE 2004 53A the corrected density is now properly reported The parameter name API Table Name was shortened to simply API Table to allow room to display whole 25 character table name Updated all API TABLE 2004 X tables to report the configured reference t
114. the measured results Proceed to the next additive to be tested Place a receptacle at the test point of the next additive to be tested and use the test pushbutton to this injector to collect a measurable sample Record the results Continue collecting samples and recording the results until all of the additive injectors have been tested It is not required to test all of the additives that were enabled in the Select Additives step 12 After all of the injectors have been tested return to the MultiLoad II and unlock the MultiLoad II keypad with the Program Key if necessary Press the Exit key to continue EMOTE ADDITIVE CALIBRATION Select Additives Collect Samples Check Delivered Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 204 13 At the Remote Additive Calibration menu select the Check Delivered option The Check Delivered Additive screen displays CHECK DEL ERED ADDITIVE D I A 1 Adtv 001 E DEE STOC D I A 2 Adtv 002 None Delivered Next Prev 14 The volume measured by each injector will be displayed Select one of the additives that were tested The detail screen for the selected additive displays PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered Vol 0 100 SHEE 1 Beaker Voll 0 0 0 0 0 00 Z Beaker Vol CCCs 0 000 Meter Pulses 261 Additive Mtr K bac teal 2600 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Addi
115. time the Block Valve Close Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure alarm will be issued Open Blk Val FCM Permits selection of a port that will provide an output signal to control a component s block valve This output will provide a signal to open the block valve When MultiLoad II commands the valve to close the signal will be removed Pump Run FCM Permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal to a pump starter Pump Kill FCM Permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal to stop the pump The output signal will be sent to stop the pump whenever the Valve Fault Alarm is raised regardless of what other bays are commanding the pump to run Pump Status FCM Permits the selection of a port that will provide an input for monitoring pump pressure A port that has been assigned the Pump Status function will receive a signal high or low from a pressure sensing instrument when pump pressure has reached a sufficient level The parameter Pump Start Alarm Time must be configured when using this feature Alarm Out FCMA Provides an output signal if the component has an active alarm This parameter selects an output port that will be assigned to signal an unspecified alarm condition from the component Authorized FCM Authorized FCM provides an output signal if the component has been authorized for flow as a result of driver card in or product selection This paramete
116. to deliver in mass will accept preset quantities in mass Each preset in the bay can be configured independently of the others for gross net or mass delivery The Deliver Typ feature is in the Weights amp Measures Preset menu 9 5 4 API TABLE VCF CALCULATORS In the configuration menus of the API TABLE functions it is possible to enter test values of variables that are used to calculate the Vcf factors For example when using a CTL table that relies on a user entered density or gravity and a measured temperature a test temperature can be entered to determine the CTL that would be calculated at that temperature and gravity Similarly the tables used in conjunction with CPL will permit the entry of test temperatures and test pressures in order to determine the resulting CPL The configuration menu and calculator for CTL can be found under Weights amp Measures API TABLE in the program mode The configuration menu and calculator for CPL can be found under Weights amp Measures API TABLE in the program mode If valid test data temperature and pressure are within the range of the selected API table the bottom line will display Calculated Vcf In some cases the bottom line may display an Extrapolated Vcf This means that the table is producing a factor that was not obtained by experimentation the factor is in the extrapolated region of the table as recommended by API When the test data and gravity are beyond the recommended range of the selected
117. to determine if the valve is able to achieve target flow rates specified by High Flow Rate Low Flow Rate and the 1 and 2 Trip Rates If valve is operating in a wide open position and cannot achieve flow targets the valve is vulnerable to REMOTE control problems due to weak differential pressure If this is the case reduce flow rate targets to achievable values or enable the Fallback feature in the Component menu MTR CREEP This alarm indicates that volume has passed through the flow meter while the valve was not commanded to open It may be an indication of a small leak or it may indicate that erroneous flow signals have been noted by the system The amount of volume that triggers the alarm is configured in the Meter Creep Alarm Volume parameter See also Creep Reset REMOTE Time parameter PRES ALRM This alarm indicates that the pressure measured by the pressure transmitter has deviated REMOTE from the range established by the Alarm Low Pressure and Alarm High Pressure parameters Verify transmitter operation QUAD CHA This alarm message indicates that pulses from the referenced meter s A channel pulser are not being received at port 4 of the FCM or they are being received intermittently If this REMOTE alarm is received along with QUAD CHB alarm the meter channels are either wired in reverse or backflow is occurring See QUAD ENC alarm QUAD CHB This alarm message indicates that pulses from the referenced meter s B channel pulser are n
118. under the column headers and after all column data to help readability Updated UAP BOL default script to keep all footer lines on the same page 4 18 2013 WJP Global rename of thruput totalizer to alibilog daily gross del With mass delivery as an option clarify some global fields across source files Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 416 Global rename batch volume del to batch del Global rename volume preset whole to preset whole Global rename load volume del to load del Global rename batch volume_ to batch 4 22 2013 WJP Increased resolution of transaction temperature from tenths to hundredths Updated view transactions and web transaction viewer to display temperature in hundredths Added temperature in hundredths to the end of the R800 and MRTD commands as 05d implied 2 decimal digits Kept existing transaction temperatur reads in tenths for backward compatibility Kept existing TDS transaction detail temperature field in tenths for backward compatibility 04 24 2013 PS Store Mass Totalizers for each loaded Batch Added to Transaction Viewer the Mass Totalizer Added to Webinterface the Mass Totalizer Fixed Hundrehts totalizers in Webinterface would show whole totalizers Added Mass Totalizers to Alibi Log Added to Unauthorized flow voucher the mass value Added to Ticket Printer in Standalone the mass totalizers not for UAP 04 25 2013 PS Added check when deli
119. up to 5 characters Prod Short Name Short product name up to 10 characters Product Name Long product name or description up to 25 characters Product Index Index number assigned to the selected product Hazard Index Up to five Hazards can be configured for stand alone mode Go to the Hazard menu to specify the Hazard descriptions Components If the product is a blend specify the base components and their respective percentages Additives If the product includes additive s specify the percentage of additive that must be injected into the selected product For example if the amount of additive injected must be 1 of the total product enter 1 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 46 3 9 3 DRIVER ACCESs ID Figure 3 12 Access ID Screen Under Remote control driver information is supplied by the TMS Driver database In local mode you must supply some driver data Do this on the Access Card Registers Configuration screen shown here Index Index number of the selected card Card No Driver ID number 8 digits PIN No Driver Personal Identification Number 4 digits Company ID of the carrier for whom the driver hauls 2 digits Language Language code that determines the language text that appears on the MultiLoad Il display when the driver cards in or keys in Preset n Lockout When enabled clicked on the driver will not be allowed to load at the load arm s
120. valve from opening unless injector is shared Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 373 Added a flush volume reset after calibration to prevent flush alarm Updated clock setup to show time date in real time 11 03 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP Added interface to use 4 20mA input on I O Board or FCM II for Pressure and Density Inputs Added screensaver backlight control logic to dim backlight when idle Added a new parameter R046 screensaver seconds with a default of 10 minutes Added a new parameter R047 screensaver brightness pct with a default of 50 00 11 06 06 ML ML1 SMP 3 26 WJP released to production 11 17 06 2 27 WJP CAR 226 Add service to background tasks in close transaction header to allow COM and prevent the WDT from causing a reboot while processing transactions with a very large number of details gt 100 11 21 06 2 27 WIP released CAR 233 Force all unused future use parameters to zero and log when a parameter change occurs CAR 234 Correct time edit position on the screen 11 29 06 2 27 WIP released to measurement Canada Req of Measurement Canada Added vapor pressure to component status display Req of Measurement Canada Added bay configuration parameter Canada API Limits to extend low temps down to 40C on tables 54A 54B 54BC removed 54C 54D Corrected bug in conversion from 4 20ma to pressure or temperature that caused va
121. volumes of crude oil at observed 1980 Table temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist 54AG Germany The liquid is crude oil Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations 610 5 to 778 5 18 to 95 779 0 to 824 0 18 to 125 824 5 to 1 075 0 18 to 150 NMI ASTM1250 1980 Table 54BG Germany This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 600 1200 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations 600 0 to 770 4 18t095 770 5 to 778 5 18 to 95 778 6 to 787 5 787 6 to 824 0
122. volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures 2004 Table 54D to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Density 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 800 1064 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated NMI CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 2004 Table 60A temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Density at 20 C is known Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 268 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures NMI Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 20 C The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 60B NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperature
123. 0000 08u 01 Added ability to build a stand alone serial Opto Iso II tester firmware build Corrected bug with MRCA Request Component Alarms command returning invalid data Was using indicated component as preset index Updated FCM II factory tests to be event based instead of time based to increase reliability and speed of test Updated FCM II factory tests to support AC expander and Relay expander boards 12 05 08 3 28 13 WJP Released full MODBUS protocol and register interface as described in the MultiLoad Communication Manual Updated card reader logic to only accept TWIC card reads if two consecutive reads indicate only one card is in the reader Updated card reader logic to force a card out for approx 2 seconds when TWIC cards are swapped Add logic to keep current card during power cycle 12 08 08 3 28 13 WJP Released to QA 12 19 08 3 28 13 WJP Special Build on ML Moble Units Corrected Pulse Output Port Logic to also accept port 10 on Ver lt 036 FCMs and I O Boards Added back in logic to check fcm port assignment conflicts on Pulse Output Ports Increased GPS Site Database to 22 000 sites Added Default Site List to MLM for Special Build Updated GPS site search to break up search processing over several calls Corrected Database Overlap Checking startup logic Updated simulation startup usage to display keymapping and notes 12 30 08 3 28 14 WJP released to QA for testing Bug Fix In certain side stre
124. 09 19 section 270 ASTM1250 1980 Table 54B NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Density at 15 C is known use table 53B if Density at observed temperature is used Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Enabling the Canada API Limits bay parameter will extend the temperature range down to 40 C in accordance with Measurement Canada Bulletin V 18 E rev 3 1999 09 19 section 270 ASTM1250 1980 Table 54C NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion alpha of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of alpha is from 0 000486 0 001674 The alpha will be entere
125. 0mA control valves RTD temperature inputs 4 20 ma input for either density relative density api gravity pressure or bsw Ethernet communications Ethernet printing MultiLoad Il Single Meter Preset SMP is an economical package designed to support single load arm single meter applications The system can operate in conjunction with the Toptech TMS system remote processing mode or in Local stand alone Mode The MultiLoad II SMP supports 1 loading arm 1 meter 8 components different meter factors for each product No blending 2 additive injectors Digital two stage and Analog 4 20mA control valves RTD temperature input 4 20 ma input for either density relative density api gravity pressure or bsw Ethernet communications Ethernet printing Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 16 2 3 TWO OPERATING MODES The MultiLoad II can be configured to operate in three different modes Local stand alone Control Mode product and access information are stored in non volatile memory in the MultiLoad II Remote Control Mode access and product information is controlled by TMS or another remote computer system UAP Interfacing with a host system in the cloud which has all basic TAS functionality 2 3 1 LOCAL CONTROL MODE In local mode the MultiLoad II RCU will read a driver s Prox Card Excluding the SMP or will prompt the driver to enter an access ID Next the driver will be prompted to enter
126. 1 WJP released to QA Corrected placement of Measured for Trade Flag in Transaction Database Updated transaction database version to 3 28 02 08 06 07 3 28 02 WIP released to QA Corrected firmware version from 3 28 01 to 3 28 02 08 07 07 3 28 02 WIP released to QA Corrected the retrieval of Gravity Rel Density and Exp Coeff at the preset level in MRS and transaction archive to use component with most volume delivered value not directly measured and not valid for trade no averaging done 08 14 07 3 28 03 WIP released to QA Updated dates to support 4 digit years per CR xxxx Since hardware clock only supports two digit years any year outside the range 2005 2099 will be displayed as zeros 0000 Printed tickets Alibi Log and Clock Setup Screens updated to display 4 digits Updated transaction archive database version to 3 28 03 Updated firmware version to 3 28 03 08 20 07 3 28 03 WJP released to TTE Updated MM DD YY Date parameter name 10 16 07 3 28 04 GLP released to QA Corrected bug in network socket RX task that did not close connection after a timeout Explicit close from server is often not sent Updated firmware version to 3 28 04 11 02 07 3 28 05 WJP released to QA Incorporated the Portuguese Language Updated firmware version to 3 28 05 11 26 07 3 28 05 WJP released to QA Replaced No with in Portuguese Language Added the ability to send serial messages from etherne
127. 1 12 WIP UAP Development Updated simulation build of network get _mac_address to get MAC address of host PC Removed Terminal ID and Bay ID from configuration and from prompt script startup variables Added LUA mac_address startup variable Changed prompt script to look for the Bay record by using the device IP adderess Added device address to the Bay not Found MessageDenied Added tds_ client to Driver find Curreted bug where no pin required would skip Driver validation Added tds_ client and term_id to Carrier picklist and find Renamed PromptVehicle to PromptTruck Added tds client to Truck find Added tds_ client to Trailer find Added ability to find on five fields Correct bug in find routines where search would be aborted if first record was greater than search record 4 23 12 MSH Beta release to QA UAP Development Add support for card reader when in UAP mode Added ability to clear records in individual all databases Updated transaction payload for communication with TDS BOL reprint logic added to prompting sequence 4 25 12 MSH Fix issue where ML would hang reboot in multidrop and miswired not connected 5 8 12 WJP Corrected bug where loss of only the RX line from an FCM will prevent flow termination and droping of all outputs after 6 seconds Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 404 Updated FCM PCM and Krohne Mass Meter polling logic to wait 8 seconds before re
128. 1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 Trm Temperature for the Regular Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 Drm Density for the Regular Meter D1 Volume weighted average Density measured OR specified for meter Mi Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nrm Net volume loaded for the Regular Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mrm Mass loaded for the Regular Meter Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Grm Tr Trm Dr Dr OR Drm Nr Nrm Mr Mrm Where Gr Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Tr Temperature for the Regular component Dr Density for the Regular component Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 281 Premium meter Meter Level values are reported as Gpm M2 Tpm T2 Dpm D2 OR Dp Npm Gpm VCFp Tpm Dpm Mpm Npm Dom OR Mpm Gpm Dpm Where Gpm Gross volume loaded for the Premium Meter M2 Gross volume reported by meter M2 Tpm Temperature for the Premium Meter T2 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T2 Dpm Density for the Premium Meter D2 Volume weighted average Density measured OR specified for meter M2 Dp Density specified for the Premium component Npm Net volume loaded for the Premium Meter VCFp API Correction Table for Premium Mpm Mass loaded for the Premium Meter
129. 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil API Gravity 60 F is known NMI Reference Temperature is 60 F Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 266 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of a petroleum product at observed 2004 Table 6X temperatures This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the coefficient of expansion the reference temperature and units of measure for density pressure and temperature ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 2004 Table 24A temperatures to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Relative Density at 60 F is known NMI Reference Temperature is 60 F ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed 2004 Table 24B temperatures to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Relative Density at 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F NMI p ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed 2004 Table 24C temperatures to the volume at 60 F using th
130. 168 5 21 E 10 54 206 67 10 54 206 67 10 54 206 119 10 54 206 119 RAMA RAMA 131 192 168 0 200 192 168 0 200 10 54 206 224 10 54 206 224 AO re D AA qa Ed Dn ae EI e D gt gt 3 This will trigger the Connection Configuration Wizard Follow this to create a connection to the Multiload Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 52 Connection Configuration Wizard Create a New Connection Specify a name and description for this connection The connection name must be unique Connection Name Description lt Previous Finish e Multimate supports three different ways to connect to a device Ethernet 4 e Serial Port of your PC Laptop e Via your Tms5 or Tms6 system Connection Configuration Wizard Choose a Connection Type How do you intend to connect to this device Ethemet Serial Port TMS Line Controller Selecting Ethernet requires the IP address of the MTL Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 5 Confirming the IP address will cause also a first check if the connection is working The connection gets anyhow stored and can be reused when Multimate gets reopened Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 53 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 54 3 11 3 DOWNLOAD PARAMETER PROMPT FILE During the first install of the MultiMate Configuration Tool there is no
131. 2013 PS Added rollover check to unauthorized flow voucher New feature non proportional ratio and side stream blending the component max flow rate will be used to determin the high flow The main component highest percentage which flow in low flow all other component wait until the high flow start is reached Blend check is only done at the end of the load load during the load the product is never in spec only at the end Fallback and flush feature are still working in the non proportional enhancements 01 16 2013 PS Added Time on Main Loading Screen for all devices except SMP 01 29 2013 PS Added Alcohol Table Brazil NBR 5992 01 30 2013 PS Fix double use of RCU Registers 79 and 80 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 411 Change firmware number to x 31 09 SD card will save register 78 79 and 80 Changed equipment database version to 3 31 09 01 31 2013 PS Added Hydrocarbon Table Brazil LPG Gasoline Diesel Lubes Crude Asfalt and heavy oils 01 31 2013 PS Enhance sd card filelists to only display select extensions bmp mlc bin ignoring extension case Release 3 4 31 09 02 04 2013 PS Enhancement of Deadman with bypass key to disable deadman function without going into program mode 02 11 2013 PS Added API alarm timeout so alarm would not raise after x time Vcf stays the last known value Changed version number to x 31 10 02 15 2013 PS Enhance UAP that Prod
132. 3 4 31 11 113 Chapter 4 General Configuration Alarm Meaning API TABLE DRIVER This alarm indicates that some parameter of either the CTL or CPL table is out of range The cause of the alarm could be the result of a misconfigured table parameter or it could be the result of pressure or temperature sensor failure When this alarm occurs enter the program mode and select Views amp Inquires Message Log The Message Log will indicate the preset and component that has the active API Table alarm If a Pressure or RTD alarm is raised in addition to the API Table Alarm resolve the pressure and or temperature issues first If there is no pressure or temperature alarm enter the Weights amp Measures section in program mode Enter the Temp Comp menu of the Preset and Component that has the alarm Verify the settings of Gravity or Density or Expansion Coefficient Ensure that the settings are appropriate for the selected table If pressure correction is used check settings in the Pressure Comp menu as well Check the Gravity or Density settings Ensure that the settings are appropriate for the selected table CALARM 9 31 DRIVER Future component level alarm assignments Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 114 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 7 5 ADDITIVE ALARM SETUP Alarm Meaning ADTV FCM AUTO The MultiLoad I has lost communication with the I O board or FCM This message indicates that ad
133. 3 through 5 until speeds are as desired a d Increase closing speed lf it is necessary to increase the closing speed UPS adjust the closing speed needle valve 1 4 turn counter clockwise CCW This is the needle valve on the upstream side of the assembly Decrease closing speed If it is necessary to decrease the closing speed UPS adjust the closing speed needle valve 1 4 turn clockwise CW This is the needle valve on the upstream side of the assembly Increase opening speed If it is necessary to increase the opening speed DNS adjust the opening speed needle valve 14 turn counter clockwise CCW This is the needle valve on the downstream side of the assembly Decrease opening speed lf it is necessary to Decrease the opening speed DNS adjust the opening speed needle valve turn clockwise CW This is the needle valve on the downstream side of the assembly Stop the pump To stop the pump and close the block valve press exit until the Diagnostic Screen is reached a From the diagnostic screen select Components b Select the preset that is under test Select the desired component for the valve that is under test c Press the number that corresponds to Pump Run This should stop the pump Depending on the site configuration it may be necessary to close the component block valve If appropriate press the number that corresponds to Opn Blk Val d Press Exit until the MultiLoad II re boots exit program mode N
134. 30 2013 WJP Added CTL and CPL display on the component status screen and api table setup screen Update CN code to work with previous card_id parameter change 06 15 2013 WJP Corrected Weighted Average Routine for Temp Density Rel Density Pressure Gravity BSW where negative values were always computed as one least significant unit lower than actual at the component level 0 01 temp for example and two least significant units lower than actual at the preset level 0 02 temp for example Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 419 06 23 2013 WJP Remove not batch complete check from remote clear input processing Added DEBUG VOLUME and MEMORY FILL test code E Firmware Version 3 4 31 11
135. 5 can be assigned to some other I O function Port 2 will automatically be assigned to be the control valve s NO Solenoid signal Port 3 will be used for the control valve s NC Solenoid signal The Dead Band rates for the flow stages are configured on this screen No Valve adjustments will be attempted when the flow rate is within the dead band Whenever flow drifts outside of the dead band the valve will make adjustments to bring the flow rate back within the dead band If multiple meters are assigned to the preset repeat this process for the other meters Parameter Default Setting Flow Control Module 0 1st Stage Dead Band Rate 2nd Stage Dead Band Rate 40 gallons per minute 40 gallons per minute Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Component Setup Component parameters related to Sequential Blending are found on the Component Setup screen shown here Scroll down the screen to view additional parameter fields PRE 1 CMP 1 Base 001 Meter High Flow Rate lst Stage Trip Volume lst Stage Flow Rate 2nd Stage Trip Volume 2nd Stage Flow Rate Final teip vol Final Trip Max Time 5 000 Einmal Trip Vol Lock DISABLD Unauth Flow Alrm Vol W amp M Recipe Percentage BlkValve Open Rate BlkValve Open Delay B V Open Alrm Time Next Prev Configure component 1 Assign the component to Meter 1 Typically one flow meter is us
136. 6 11 Additive Flush Feat teg es eeeesedesgoeee eseer EES 207 6 11 1 Basic Flush EE ons rasa tes isin ida RL ey 207 6 11 2 Techniques for Flushing DY cccsecccecescceesesceeesnecceeesneaansesunaannesunaanaesuneassesuneanaesuseasaetnsneenaess 209 OTS Blo k Vales ANd Ee ee Ee 210 CHAPTER 7 SWING ARM SETUP AND OPERATION EXCLUDING SMP csseceeseeeseseesseeeenseeeeseees 213 7 1 OVORVICW ois ee ege eege eege eege 213 7 2 ie Brel e 214 7 3 Relay and Switch Logic EE 214 7 4 Swing Arm Bee e UE RE 216 CHAPTER 8 Reie Te ne 218 8 1 OVEN VIG WW ee EE ee EEN 218 8 2 Card Reader Excluding SMP cccs sccsssssscessssseeeesseceeesnseceeesnseeeesnseceesnseeceeseseeeensnseeeeensnseeeoess 219 8 3 iBUTTON Reader Excluding SMP cccsccssssesseeeeeseeeeeneeescaeseseeeeeeneeseaesesaaesaseeeeeeeeeseaesaseaeenseeeeneas 221 8 4 Loopback tes tices ees E eebe ees 222 8 5 SOM elo 224 8 6 Network teSt cununi a E hedesndestivcusetudeesacstudcuscecuuectsd 226 8 7 Keypad Leet geed Deene Dee a a 228 8 8 DISPlay lesbona aaraa EDEA aAa Aa e AEAN E eaS AAAA AAAA a AA NEEE E AA 229 8 9 Unicode jeet Eeer iaiia snes a a i i a i a Dee i 230 8 10 FCM C mm ni EE 231 8 11 PCM Communications cccccccecescceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseneeeenseeeeeaeeesaaesaseeeeneeeeseaesesaaesaseeeeeeeeeseaeseseaeenseeeeeees 232 8 12 FCM Health Stat Sii a e ea e aeaa E ra a Aeae dees a aa a aaa e Eaa Enea eaaa EE 233 8 13 PCM Heaitbt Stal S
137. 7 Viewing Relative Density ssssnsesuunnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn annann 320 108 Viewing BW a e r ee EE egene ee 321 10 9 ViewingeAPL GRAVITNY r r eegene eege 321 10 10 Viewing NM E e EE 322 10 11 View Weights and Measures Change LOQ sssscsseccsseeeseeeseseeeeeseeeeseeeescaesaseeeenseeeseeesaseaeeneeeeeees 327 10 12 View MultiLoad Il Message LOG ccc scccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseenseeeseeseeeneeeseenseaeeeeeseaeeeeaseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeeenas 329 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 CHAPTER 11 SR Deeg ere ege eege 330 Kb RE e Ee 330 14 2 Load COmiQuration ncesinccccsintsscec cs sececndecd sete gene secccetdsheces svsietsceadsuacctvacetdanteseacaesndetsdeivevecseceostdentesesterecaeaecee 331 11 3 Save COnfiQuration 2 scsecicetssei ess cecccncaddeccecssccetecetest a Tania das naaede tanai ia teiaa binanda risa ideadta iS Sania icas 332 11 4 Load E Le WEE 333 TES LOA FINMWANC eein aae uence Seve ARAS ERAN AAAA AAE AAEE AE AATA NETAS RAET EARE 334 11 6 Dump Diagnostic Data ccccceeeeesseteeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenneeeeeenseeeeegseeeeeegseeeeeegseeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeeeeenenees 335 CHAPTER 12 OBRECHT Ee 336 Wi e UE 336 12 2 Phases Of Operation Ee EES EEN 336 12 3 Driver Card or Keypad ACCESS ccecccetceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeesneeensneeeeeeeesaaesasneeeneeeeseaesesaaesasneeeeeeeeseaeseseeaeeseneeas 336 12 4 Remote Control Operation ccc
138. A swing arm in the secondary bay does not have to use the same Preset number assignment as the primary bay For example if a swing arm has been assigned to preset 1 in the primary bay that same swing arm can be assigned to Preset 2 in the secondary bay When configuring the swing arm for the secondary bay use the same FCM and port assignments as were used in the primary bay as When performing meter proving the resulting meter factors must be entered in both bay MultiLoad II RCU s as When setting up swing arm bays do NOT enable any swing arm flags in TMS MultiLoad swing arm bays are considered independent bays by TMS Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 217 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 218 CHAPTER 8 DIAGNOSTICS 8 1 OVERVIEW The MultiLoad II provides built in diagnostic tools that enable your technician s or electrician s to isolate wiring or hardware problems by performing various tests The main diagnostic functions available from the Diagnostics Menu and described in this chapter are DOLA C N O Sere LOTS M Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Custom Logie GPS Network Test Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PEM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next Prev Card Reader Excluding SMP Tests the prox card reader COM Loopback Tests communication ports to and from the host system TMS
139. Blend Adjust Restart Volumes have passed The Blend Adjust Deviation Percentage or the Blend Adjust Deviation Volume must be violated for the period specified by the Blend Adjust Time before any adjustments are made The Blend Adjust Start and Restart volumes should be set to values less than the values set for the Blend Check Start and Restart Volumes respectively Parameter Default Setting Blend Adjust Start Volume 60 gallons Blend Adjust Restart Volume 10 gallons Blend Adjust Deviation 1 Blend Adjust Deviation Volume 5 gallons Blend Adjust Time 5 seconds For detailed parameter descriptions please refer to the Configuration chapter topic Preset Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 150 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Meter Setup It will be necessary to configure Meter parameters for each flow meter Select the appropriate preset and meter On the Meter Setup screen enter the Flow Control Module number that will receive the flow meter input Valid choices are 0 31 The FCM number is determined by the communication address of the module The address is determined by the setting of the DIP switch S1 that is located on the FCM The switch position indicates a binary zero when it is in the Off position a binary one is represented by a switch in the On position The A channel of the flow meter signal will always be on Port 4 of the selected Flow Control Module If a channel B signal is used fo
140. CM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Network Test Custom Logic Next Prev The Card Reader Test screen displays After placing a card in each read of the card the reader card holder the screen will update after CARD READER TEST Good Reads 00005 Card Pulls 00000 Parity 00000 LRC 00000 Timeouts 00000 0 75 0000000 00035937 01 Good Read No The diagnostic data reported is Good Reads Number of times a successful read of the approximately once every second while a card is inserted Enron zit Clear card is performed This value should increment Card Pulls Number of times a card has been removed from the card reader Parity LRC Timeouts Number of times a certain read error has occurred These values should remain zero For HID 26 bit Prox Cards 0 yy 0000000 xxxxxxxx 01 Card number that was read from the card Where yy is the facility number 00 99 XXXXXXXxX is the card number O0000000 00065535 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 220 For HID 26 bit Corporate 1000 Prox Cards 0 yyyy 00000 xxxxxxxx 01 Card number that was read from the card Where yyyy is the facility number 00 4095 XXXXXXXX is the card number 00000000 01048575 For HID 37 bit H10320 formatted Prox cards 0 yy 0000000 xxxxxxxx 01 Card number that was read from the card Where yy is the facility number Always 00 XXXXXXXxX is th
141. D Card slot above the processor board This SD Card slot allows the quick loading and saving of configuration files as well as the loading of customer logo files and firmware updates The MultiLoad II firmware version 4 xx xx provides a SD Card functions menu available from the MAIN MENU shown below SD CARD MENU Save Configuration Load Logo Load Firmware Dump Diagnostic Data Next Prev A formatted SD Card must be inserted into the SD Card slot on the CPU board before selecting any of the options above or a Not Accessible message will be displayed NOTE Each file list will only show associated file extensions mlc bin or bmp Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 331 11 2 LOAD CONFIGURATION From the SD Card menu select Load Configuration The Load Configuration screen displays files on the SD Card Load Configuration Configuration 1 mlc Contigurarc ron 2 be Next Prev Select the configuration file to load The number of accepted and rejected parameters are displayed Parameters may be rejected if the parameter is out of range or the parameter is attempting to change a W amp M protected parameter without the W amp M key active Load Configuration Configuration 1l mlc Contiguradc eet be Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 11 3 SAVE CONFIGURATION From the SD Card menu select Save Configuration
142. DRIVER No Line Flush This alarm occurs if the load is aborted and the Minimum Line Flush did not have the opportunity to occur MTR CREEP DRIVER This alarm indicates that volume has passed the meter or piston when it was not commanded to inject It may be an indication of a small leak or it may indicate that erroneous flow signals have been noted by the system The amount of volume that triggers the alarm is configured in the Meter Creep Alarm Volume parameter See also Creep Reset Time parameter BLK VALVE DRIVER Block Valve alarm This alarm activates when an additive block valve has not opened in the time required by the Block Valve Open Alarm Time parameter This alarm will also occur if the block valve has not closed in the time required by the Block Valve Close Alarm Time parameter Any time a block valve is in the improper position the alarm will activate ALARM 11 31 DRIVER Future additive level alarm assignments Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 116 Chapter 4 General Configuration 117 4 8 LOCAL PRODUCT DEFINITION AND ASSIGNMENT The purposes of the Product Setup functions are to Define base components base additives single products and blended products for Local control installations Assign components additives and or authorized products to existing presets as Toptech recommends that you complete the Equipment Setup functions Bay Presets Meters Components Additives befor
143. Del Pulses Initiates an injection The number of additive meter pulses expected from the injection will appear to the right Del Pulses Number of additive pulses received from the additive meter Del Volume Total additive volume injected 8 21 Custom LOGIC The Custom Logic Diagnostics function is used for any customized diagnostic tools or functions required by your company or your particular terminal If at any time you wish to include custom logic please contact Toptech Account Management The Custom Logic Diagnostics function is covered later in this User Guide Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 22 GPS DiAGnostics ML Il MOBLE ONLY GPS diagnostics displays the current detailed status of the connected GPS DA Ge EE Mt Je IN 1 WEG Dates 5 0 08 UEC timo 18 11 52 Latitude 28 41 655 N Longitude 0er 21 22W Altitude S220 M Speed 0 0 MPH OT O R EES Heading 104 Site Toptech 27 M Elek 22 28 36 26 13 3923 22 20 19 14 27 kko kk kE AA kk AE kA zk Next Prev Exit Enter UTC Date The current Universal Coordinated Time UTC Date reported by the GPS UTC Time The current Universal Coordinated Time UTC Time reported by the GPS Latitude The current Latitude reported by the GPS Longitude The current Longitude reported by the GPS Altitude The current Altitude above sea level reported by the GPS Heading The current heading repo
144. Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 750 1164 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations 750 0 to 1164 0 18 to 170 NMI ASTM1250 1980 Table 54XG Germany This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of Gas and Bitumen at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a Gas or Bitumen Density 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations 54YG Germany NMI 500 0 to 650 0 50 to 50 950 0 to 1200 0 0 0250 ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of Chemicals at observed 1980 Table temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a Chemical Density 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C Alpha and K coefficient are known these factors are selected in the Multiload2 via parameter YG Product name The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Product name The
145. Displacement PD meter set this parameter to zero and review the Fallback Time parameter After specifying a Fallback Rate for a turbine meter application configure Fallback Time Fallback Retry Time and Fallback Retry Volume Fallback Time If during the High Flow stage the flow rate is below the High Flow Rate deadband for the period specified by this parameter the control algorithm will search for a controllable rate Begin with a value of 3 seconds An entry of zero seconds will disable the Fallback feature Fallback Retry Time After a controllable rate has been obtained it will be maintained for a period determined by the setting of this parameter Upon the expiration of the Fallback Retry Time the algorithm will attempt to regain the target flow rate If the target flow rate cannot be regained in the time allotted by the Fallback Time parameter the algorithm will search again for a controllable rate Begin with a value of 45 seconds An entry of zero seconds will disable the Fallback feature Fallback Retry Volume This parameter tells the control algorithm when to stop trying to reacquire the target flow rate When the remaining volume of the load is equal to the value specified by this parameter no further attempts will be made Set the parameter to the same value as the 17 Stage Trip Volume plus 50 gallons An entry of zero will disable the Fallback feature API Table Name Select the desired API table to corre
146. EE erer be Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 335 11 6 Dump DiaGnostic DATA From the SD Card menu select Dump Diagnostic Data The Dump Diagnostic Data screen prompts for Enter before continuing DIAGNOSTIC DATA DUMP Enter To Continue Make sure an SD card is inserted in the Multiload unit and press Enter The NVRAM and FLASH is written to the SD card as NVRAM BIN and FLASH BIN respectively Provide the files to Toptech Support for analysis DIAGNOSTIC DATA DUMP Dumping data to SD DO NOT REMOVE Dumping NVRAM Done Dumping FLASH Done Success Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 336 CHAPTER 12 OPERATION 12 1 OVERVIEW This chapter discusses the two methods of MultiLoad Il operation Remote Control and Local Control Under Remote Control the MultiLoad II relies on TMS to handle all driver data entry tasks and product authorization Under Local Control the MultiLoad II handles driver data entry tasks and data validation via internal configuration and stored validation lists On MultiLoad II On MultiLoad Il SMP E PRODUCE E E STAFUS gt 1 Preset 001 IDLE Ee JOL 2 Preset 002 TOLE OL PRES EIS 6 6 GALLONS Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick ExitLoad Enter Preset 1 100 resolution is displayed when the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M p
147. Flow Control Modules FCMs Host Down Timeout 30 Products Host Wait Timeout 999 Driver Access Ids Custom Logic Prt Alibi Log on PCM C Enabled Alibi Log PCM D Swing Arm Secondary C Enabled Screen Saver Timeout j 600 Screen Saver Bright 50 00 Min Time Change Secs 60 Enabled FCM Trace C Enabled 4 Save the configuration file Download Registers Select Destination Download To File Download To Table Download Cancel 5 To verify that the download worked the screen should show a lot of yellow lines These are depending how many parameters are not matching the default 6 Re opening afterward of the file can be done by starting MultiMate and go to File followed by the Open Menu Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 59 3 11 6 UPLOAD A CONFIGURATION FILE TO A MULTILOAD II To upload a configuration file to a MultiLoad II 1 Start the MultiMate program 2 Open the configured connection to the Multiload device download prompts 3 After downloading the prompts the red highlighted button can be used to upload all the config registers adebug MultiMate File Communications Tools Reporting Help GO OH ad e DPD CRW D Ba Inacuvige ur n DEU Print Meg L Upload Registers C Enabled E Alarms E Prompts Message Log PCM n Hazard Messages No Prox Pull If Flow Alibi Log Labels L Enabled E Flow Contro
148. Gravity the meter level API Gravity will be used for this calculation Alarm Low API Gravity When an API Gravity Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured API Gravity falls below a minimum value When the API Gravity of the metered product falls below the value entered in this field an API Gravity alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See API Gravity Calibration for instructions on configuring an API Gravity sensor Alarm High API When an API Gravity Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm Gravity when the measured API Gravity rises above a maximum value When the API Gravity of the metered product exceeds the value entered in this field an API Gravity alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See API Gravity Calibration for instructions on configuring an API Gravity sensor API Gravity Alarm At the default value of zero seconds API Gravity alarms will be raised instantly A small Time delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when API Gravity is momentarily out of range The API Gravity alarm timer will only run when an API Gravity alarm is not active and a batch is currently authorized on this preset API Gravity 4mA Enter the API Gravity that will represent the lowest API Gravity value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA API Gravity 20mA Enter the API Gravity that will
149. JP On Simulation builds send transaction to display Move NR3 by 0x1000 bytes to prevent overlap Updated MRS and MSS commands to support configuration bits to return meter level parameters Added meter level pressure temperature density to the component status screen Followup Check meter detail print logic on ml_main 2050 Followup Add Modbus registers for meter level gross net temp press density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 393 2 3 11 WIP Transacton archive lockup issue resolved After a card out on 3 29 xx firmware there was a slight possibility of the following issues occurring Lockup on preset screen while displaying a status of clearing on one or more arms Lockup on transaction complete screen Real time clock updates stop Loss of serial or Ethernet communication Loss of keypad operation Upon power cycle after the issu Lockup on preset screen display with status as blank or clearing on one or more arms Lockup on blank white screen Real time clock stuck at 00 00 00 00 00 00 Factory defaults were required to regain control Multiple power cycle operations to regain real time clock operations Root Cause Operating System flash routines were flushing and disabling the CPU cache with both the scheduler and interrupts enabled If a task switch or interrupt occurred while flushing the cache but before disabling the cache DRAM memory updates were lost When
150. Kill FCM Disabled Pump Status FCM Disabled For detailed parameter descriptions please refer to General Configuration chapter topic Component Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 152 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 5 SIDE STREAM BLENDING EXCLUDING SMP Regular Figure 5 5 Simple Side Stream Application Side Steam blending is similar to Ratio blending in that two or more components are delivered simultaneously to achieve a blend Each component incorporates its own control valve and flow meter In a side stream configuration minor component s are injected upstream of the major component s flow meter primary meter Flow through the primary meter flows at the rate dictated by the preset level High Flow Rate parameter The flow rate of the side stream component tracks the flow rate of the primary meter The side stream seeks to maintain its rate at a pre programmed ratio of the rate that is being controlled through the primary meter valve The primary meter measures the commingled major and minor components 5 5 1 SIMPLE SIDE STREAM BLENDER CONFIGURATION When configuring a load arm to be a side stream blender begin at the preset level At the preset level define the number of flow meters and components liquids that will be delivered through the load arm A maximum of five flow meters and eight components can be assigned to a load arm Enable the Ratio Blending parameter foun
151. LED value changes to DISABLED switching the MultiLoad II to Local standalone mode 12 5 6 OPERATION IN LOCAL MODE Operation in Local standalone mode is nearly identical to operation in Remote mode with the following exception In Local mode the driver must key in product owner and customer IDs on the screen prompts previously set up with the Configuration tool In other words account picklists are not available in Local mode Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 12 5 7 LOCAL AUTHORIZATION As mentioned earlier in Local mode the MultiLoad II prompts the driver to insert a driver card or enter an access ID driver and PIN This PIN code must match the PIN code of the driver table stored in the MultiLoad Is non volatile database Once the PIN code is verified the MultiLoad II acts upon an internal configuration regarding additional prompts The MultiLoad II has up to four configurable prompts that may be displayed to the driver Once data has been entered for each of these prompts MultiLoad II will authorize the load The configuration driver prompts are defined using the Miscellaneous function in the Configuration Tool The driver will view only those prompts defined For example if you defined Prompt 1 to prompt the driver for the Shipper ID the driver will be presented with the following screen Enter Shipper When the driver keys in the Shipper ID and presses Enter the second customized prompt appears
152. Load can handle analog valves through proper configuration as follows Navigate to Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup and configure the following parameters Parameter Setting Screen Location Flow Scan Time 0 200 Seconds Meter Setup Analog Valve Control ENABLED Meter Setup 4 20mA Increase Step 0 080 mA Meter Setup 4 20mA Decrease Step 0 800 mA Meter Setup To change the speed of positive flow changes modify the 4 20mA Increase Step To change the speed of negative flow changes modify the 4 20mA Decrease Step 5 3 SEQUENTIAL BLENDING EXCLUDING SMP Regular PJ En Premium _ On eg Figure 5 3 Sequential Blending Application The Sequential Blending feature is used when loading two to eight 2 8 components together in a compartment to make a single product Typically the components will be delivered one at a time through the same load arm using one flow meter and one digital control valve Block valves which serve as component selection valves must be used to ensure loading of the proper component in the proper sequence These valves can be motor operated MOV or they can be manually operated In either case a block valve status or feedback signal can be employed to verify that the valves are in the proper position at all times during the loading sequence The flow profile control sequence used in Sequential Blending is very similar to the sequence us
153. MP Load arms that handle multiple components often have the need to lay the line with a specific component at the end of the load If the line is not flushed at the end of a load the pipe segment between the flow meter and the end of the load arm will contain the component that was delivered last This may be undesirable for the load that follows The Line Flush feature is designed to have the line laid with the component of choice at the end of each load This component of choice is called the Line Flush Component The first step to take when considering line flush is to determine the volume of liquid that is contained between the end of the flow meter and the end of the load arm The MultiLoad will subtract this volume from the preset quantity and stop the loading of a non flush component when the remaining quantity is equal to the Line Flush Volume The Line Flush Component will then be metered to satisfy the preset quantity After the Line Flush Component is metered it will remain in the line segment beyond the flow meter The Line Flush Component is not delivered during the load in which it was metered but it will be delivered in a subsequent load In effect the Flush Component is the first product into the truck but it is not metered as part of the load until the Line Flush stage at the load s end The second step is to decide what the Line Flush Minimum Volume will be This parameter is intended to prevent nuisance alarms from occurring if th
154. Maximum Flow Rate 100 gpm Figure 5 6 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Simple Side Stream Configuration 154 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 6 HYBRID BLENDING EXCLUDING SMP The MultiLoad architecture permits hybrid blending schemes where there may be multiple side streams or multiple major components that flow through the primary stream 5 6 1 MULTIPLE SIDE STREAMS Since five flow meters can be assigned to one load arm it is possible to have multiple side streams serving a primary meter The key to supporting multiple side streams is designating meters as side stream meters when performing the meter level configuration Figure 5 7 Multiple Side Stream Application Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 155 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control The following table identifies the configuration parameters necessary to support the diagram in Figure 5 3 Meter 2 and Meter 3 are both designated as side stream meters of Meter 1 Four side stream meters could potentially be assigned to this load arm Preset Meter Meter 2 Meter Meter 3 Components 1 3 Component To Meter Assignment Meter Param Number of Meters 3 Side Stream on Side Stream on Component 1 Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1 Number of Low Flow DB Rate 10 Low Flow DB Rate Component 2 Meter 2 Components 3 gpm 10 gom Ratio Blending Enable High Flow DB
155. Menu and its functions Other administrative procedures such as clearing high level alarms To access Program Mode the MultiLoad II terminal operator must 1 Move the Program Mode switch into the active position 2 At the idle card in screen enter the security code default security code is 000000 and press the lt Next gt key Your local Weights and Measures office may need to be contacted after breaking the seal and changing parameters This is typically done only during meter proving or temperature calibration 2 11 1 TYPE 1 PROGRAM W amp M SWITCHES Type 1 switches consist of two separate external rotary switches one for Program Mode Access and one for W amp M change access Each switch has external fold down cover that can be locked or sealed with a wire and lead seal to prevent moving the switch into the active state Each cover will also be stamped as W amp M or Program to indicate function Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Figure 2 2 Type 1 Program W amp M Switches 27 Chapter 2 System Description 28 2 11 2 TYPE 2 PROGRAM W amp M SWITCHES Type 2 switches consist of a single 3 position external rotary switches where each position corresponds to an operating mode The switch has two external fold down covers that limits the switch rotation as described below Each cover can be locked or sealed with a wire and lead seal to prevent movin
156. NFIGURATION FILE To create edit and save Connection File should only be done when the correct prompt file is already on your machine 1 In the red rectangular the option to create a new configuration file is shown Pushing it once will create a new file adebug MultiMate File Communications Tools Reporting Help Gongzaal kz egag S Preset 1 Number Bay Presets 1 Meter 1 Number of FCMs Ia Component 1 Products Number of PMs o RCU Temps in F C Enabled 5 Alarms E Prompts Canada API Limits Enabled Hazard Messages Bay Number Tal Alibi Log Labels Le Flow Control Modules FCMs Number Extemal Presets 0 Products d Driver Access Ids Output Pulse FCM Enabled O Inverted FCM ol Port 0 Custom Logic Output Pulse Factor 10 000 Alarm Out FCM ale Mied FCM ol Pott e Authorized FCM C Enabled O Inverted FCM 0 Port o Permiss 0 FCM C Enabled O Inverted FCM 0 Port 0 Permiss 1 FCM Enabled CT Inverted FCM o Pott ol Permiss 2 FCM Enabled O Inverted FCM o Pot 0 Permiss 3 FCM ET Enabled O Inverted FCM n Pot n Permiss 4 FCM Enabled O Inverted FCM 0 Port 0 Permiss 5 FCM Enabled O Inverted FCM n Pott 0 Permiss 6 FOM Enabled O Inverted FCM 0 Port 0 Permiss 7 FCM C Enabled O Inverted FCM 0 Port 0 Permiss Out FCM Enabled CO Inverted FCM n Pott ol Ready 2 Making modif
157. P bug where a blank driver PIN was still prompted for when pin req was not N Updated UAP LUA script error processing to display message as well as writing it into the message log Correct web file upload naming to correctly deal with windows s in filenames 11 7 2012 PSFix transaction viewer via web interface Values were not reflected correctly Density Relative Pressure possible hundredths mode Alarm Measurement approved 11 9 2012 PS Remove Time of UAP R000 register 11 13 2012 WJP Corrected UAP bug that caused TDS transactions and BOLs to omit data fields when special characters for example quotes appeared in the UAP database values 11 19 2012 PS fix bug in reading via modbus relative density add new functionality of BSW real time analog input all parameters transactionviewer also store value alibilog ticketbuilder reading live BSW via MRS modbus functional bsw can be back calculated blending add new functionality of API Gravity real time analog input all parameters reading live API Gravity via MRS modbus functional api gravity can be back calculated blending add new functionality to simulate analog input each fcm number will bump the current with 300mA changed meter screens logic that only 1 density type is shown at a time api gravity or relative density or density changed sd_card routine that we store all parameters even if higher than 100 registers changed boot config check that we check
158. Parameter Prompt File This file describes the all of the parameters that can be configured on the MultiLoad Il The prompt file must be downloaded from the MultiLoad Il before any configuration files can be created downloaded or edited The instructions below describe the proper procedure to downloading the parameter prompt file from the MultiLoad II NOTE The language of the parameters in the prompt file are determend by the configuration of the language mode in the Mutliload2 1 Connect via the just configured connection to Multiload each time the connection will be established Multimate will ask to refresh the prompt list Connection Established p The device is reporting firmware MultiLoad II vi 21 06 Nov 12012 Do you want to download the associated prompts now Download Prompts Select Destination Download To File Download To Table Download Cancel 3 Answer the question reload the prompt file with a Yes In that case we will use immediate the new prompt file Download Complete j Download complete Do you want to reload using these prompts The configuration file gets available Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool adebug MultiMate b b he he i Le i l ol S L L o o d V LI i S a oO L L d z L Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 55 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 56 3 11 4 CREATE A CO
159. Premium product Component Level values are reported as Gp Gpm Tp Tpm Dp Dp OR Dpm Np Npm Mp Mpm Where Gp Gross volume loaded for the Premium component Tp Temperature for the Premium component Dp Density for the Premium component Dp Density specified for the Premium component Np Net volume loaded for the Premium component Mp Mass loaded for the Premium component Blended product Preset Level values reported as Gb Gr Gp value not to be used for trade Tb Tr Gr Tp Gp Gb value not to be used for trade Db Dr Gr Dp Gp Gb value not to be used for trade Nb Nr Np Mb Mr Mp Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Tr Gr Tp Gp Gb Volume weighted temperature for the blend Db Density for the blend Dr Gr Dp Gp Gb Volume weighted density for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 9 MUuLTILOAD SIDE STREAM BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular main stream Ethanol side stream Regular Blended Meter Meter Level values reported as Gbm M1 Tom T 1 Dbm D1 OR De Ge Dr Gr Gb Nbm Gbm VCFr Tbm Dbm Mbm Nbm D1 OR Mbm Gbm Dbm Where Gbm Gross volume loaded for the Blend Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 Tbm Temperature for the Blend Meter
160. RECIPE Comp 100 00 000123 BASE87UNL Comp 30 00 underined Adtv Adtv 0 0500 AD720 ADSP0720 50 0000 lnedetinea Next Prev When done press Exit twice to return to the Product Setup Menu Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 12 PRESET PRODUCT SETUP Use the Preset Product Setup functions to Assign defined Base Components to a Component Assign defined Base Additive to an Additive Assign defined Saleable Products to a Preset Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Products gt Preset Product Setup The Preset Product Setup screen displays PRES PRODUCE SETUR gt PRE SE Name Preset 001 Component Assignment Additive Assignment Authorized Products Next Prev 4 12 1 PRESET NAME The Preset can be assigned a name This is will be displayed before the driver makes a product selection Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 126 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 12 2 COMPONENT ASSIGNMENT After defining your base components this function allows assignment to the physical component When selected the Component Selection Screen is displayed E 1 Preset 001 COMPON ENT S EL Comp 1 BAS001 Base 001 Next Prev Configure the assigned Base Component as shown in the example below Preset 001 COMPON
161. Results screen 3 PRE 1 Preset 001 CMP 1 LS DIESEL Meter Proving Results 3 of 4 Prover Corrected Vol LOOT LO Metered Volume 999 64 Correction Factor 1 0014605 Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 358 20 Meter Proving Results screen 3 displays the Prover Corrected Volume the Metered Volume and the Correction Factor that was calculated from all of the data that was entered by the operator No entries are to be made at this screen Press the Next key to advance to the Meter Proving Results screen 4 PRE 1 Preset 001 CMP 1 LS DIESEL Meter Proving Results 4 of 4 Proving Rate MoE Flow Rate 150 150 0000 Old MF 1 0000 200 s0000 New MF 1o05 400 0000 Apply New Meter Factor 800 0000 1 1 d 1 Next Prev Note The Weights and Measures Switch MUST be active to modify Rate and M F parameters 21 At the Meter Proving Results screen 4 the proving Flow Rate Old Meter Factor and New Meter Factor will be displayed a To accept the New Meter Factor press Enter The New Meter Factor will automatically be programmed into the system for the appropriate proving rate After accepting the New Meter Factor press Exit to return to the Preset Control screen If another proving run is to be performed clear the preset and re select a product Repeat the process beginning from step 4 Pressing the next key will also allow manual modifi
162. S From the View Totalizers Menu select Presets After selecting the preset the Preset Totalizers screen displays PRE Preset 001 TOTALIZERS Toral Total total Authorized Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Unauthorized Gross 000000631 000000631 00000063 00000062 00000062 0000006 2 000000000 000000000 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000631 000000000 000000000 000000631 Unauthorized 000000000 000000000 BRE 1 Preset 001 TOTALIZERS Toral Toral otal Authorized Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Unauthorized Unauthorized Gross 0000006 0000006 0000006 0000006 20000006 0000006 0000000 0000000 0000000 Sul 31 SR 31 31 Sal 00 00 00 0000006 0000006 0000006 0000006 0000006 0000006 0000000 0000000 0000000 Parameter Descriptions Total Gross Total gross volume through the preset load arm Total Net Total net volume through the preset load arm Total Mass Total mass through the preset load arm Authorized Gross Authorized Net Total authorized gross volume through the preset load arm Total authorized net volume through the preset load arm Authorized Mass Total authorized mass through the preset load arm Unauthorized Gross Total unauthorized gross volume through the preset load arm Unauthori
163. S gt i eS Diesel 5000 5000 COMPLETE 2 Preset 002 0 DEI EENS Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 On MultiLoad Il SMP Low Sulfur Diesel AANT TENS RESE 5000 SEH GALLONS ExitLoad Clear Preset Enter Start Chapter 11 Operation 344 On MultiLoad II 12 07 PRESET 01 CONTRO iE 0 PRODUCE Default Produc EE SPARUS SIMONSEN ID PRESET DELIVER 1000 0 LLONS Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick OAt the left Top corner the Real Time is added to the loading screen for all devices except SMP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 12 4 3 LOAD STATUS VALUES Alarm Arm is currently has one or more alarms All Alarm names will start with an asterisk Unauth Load Arm is not available for authorization Idle Load Arm is available to be authorized Stopped Load Arm is authorized no product flowing Starting Load Arm is in the process of starting flow Low Flow After the initial start of a batch the flow rate will be maintained at the Low Flow Start target flow rate until the Low Flow Start Volume has been delivered High Flow This rate specifies the High Flow target flow rate This rate will be maintained until the 1st Stage Trip Volume has been reached 1 Trip The First Stage Trip phase will begin when the remai
164. SE Meter Proving Results 1 of 4 Prover Volume KOO ETILO Prover Temperature 1 20 00 Prover Temperature 2 21 00 Prover Temperature 3 Prover Temperature 4 Next Prev 16 The Prover Volume field should be highlighted Press Enter and key in the volume observed in the proving vessel 17 Press Next to advance to the Prover Temp 1 field If prover temperature readings are available press Enter and key in the temperature observed at the first prover thermometer Press Next to advance to the next temperature field Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 357 18 Enter temperatures as described in the previous step When finished entering temperatures press the Next key to advance to the Meter Proving Results screen 2 If no temperatures will be entered press the Next key until the Meter Proving Results screen 2 appears PRE 1 Preset 001 CMP 1 LS DIESEL Meter Proving Results 2 of 4 Prover Volume LOO AAO Prover Avg Temp AAO BO Prover Correction Factor 1 000000000 Prover Corrected Vol 10017 10 Next Prev 19 The Meter Proving Results screen presents the following data entered by the operator Observed volume the average of the proving temperatures and the Prover Correction Factor From these data the Prover Corrected Volume is calculated and displayed No entries are to be made at this screen Press the Next key to advance to the Meter Proving
165. The units are kg m3 When this value is non zero this value will be reported as the component level density and may be used as the meter level density if a density is not defined at the meter level If this value is zero the meter level density will be used as the component level density If this is the main component on a side stream blend a density will be back calculated from the meter level density and the side stream meter or component density Expansion Coef For API tables that require the entry the coefficient of expansion enter that value here The value should be the coefficient of expansion of the component 60 F or 15 C depending on the table Hydrometer Used In cases where a Hydrometer is used to determine API Gravity or Density enable this Parameter Commodity Type Only used for API X tables No type Crude Refined and Lubric Expansion Coef VOM Only used for API X tables C or F Density UOM Only used for API X tables kg m API Gravity and Relative Density Pressure UOM Only used for API X tables BAR PSIG and kPA Reference This is used for the API X tables but also for the ethanol tables TEC B40 TEC B100 Temperature TEC E40 TEC E100 Alcohol Percentage This percentage value is only used for the Brazilien alcohol table this value is need to determine the vcf factor API Delay Alarm This parameter is use for unloading Bays when the density gravity or relative densi
166. This register immediately increases to the Line Flush Minimum Volume value as soon as any non flush component is delivered into the line Consider the example of a sequential blend where component 1 is the flush component but the load is aborted during component 1 delivery component 2 nor the Flush is delivered Although technically the flush never occurred the Flush feature will not alarm since it knows that the line is filled with component 1 which happens to be the flush component The alarm will not activate provided that the minimum flush requirement was met during component 1 loading Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 162 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control To deactivate the Line Flush feature set the values of the first three parameters in the table below to zero The remaining flush parameters are related to blending Parameter Name Default Setting Screen Location Line Flush Volume 0 gallons Preset Setup Line Flush Minimum Volume 0 gallons Preset Setup Line Flush Component 0 no component selected Preset Setup Take Line Flush From Match Enabled Preset Setup Take Line Flush From First Disabled Preset Setup Take Line Flush From Last Disabled Preset Setup Line Flush and Blending When blending multiple components through a load arm one of the product components will have to be shorted by a volume equal to the Line Flush Volume There are three Line Flush parameters that can be configured to dete
167. Time configuration will delay further injections in order to allow time for piston travel If this time is too great some ratios cannot be attained due to limitations of piston action Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 174 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 2 CONFIGURING A PISTON ONLY ADDITIVE This topic describes the minimum configuration to get an additive to operate with this method Configuration of these parameters is mandatory Using the MultiLoad Il Configuration Tool or the Remote Control Unit keypad access the Program mode From the Configuration Menu select the preset and additive desired Additive Enable Enable this parameter Flow control module Set this value to the FCM where the additive is connected Set this value to zero for the internal I O board FCM Port Select the port that will serve as the Additive Injection Output Note A corresponding additive input port will automatically be assigned See the Additive Port Assignment description above Additive Type Set to Pstn Multiload will be configured as a Pstn type and will not check the feedback Also we always expect that everything is injected Additive Volume Per Injection Enter the cylinder volume in the appropriate units The additive units of volume are configured as cubic centimeters or as thousandaths of a gallon Piston Throw Time Enter the time in seconds that it will take for the piston to complete one half of an injection c
168. Updated firmware version to 3 29 05 12 16 09 3 29 04 WJP Correct remote picklist processing to setup default colors when picklist is written Bug caused picklist items to appear with black foreground and black background when host displayed a picklist Problem would only occur between powerup and first time entering program mode Once program mode was entered picklist would display correctly Picklist would always appear on RCU ditto even when displayed items were black 2 23 10 3 29 06 WJP Beta Release to Sam Yu In MAC address setup allow specification of most resent IE address block Include NanoSleep call in linux simulator build to prevent idle task starvation Updated firmware version to 3 29 06 Added Chinese language to product Started adding eMail support Todo add registers for email settings Increased configuration prompt string from 30 to 45 bytes max 30 ASCII characters or 15 UTF 8 characters 3 byte each Increased language prompt string from 40 to 60 bytes max 40 ASCII characters or 20 UTF 8 characters 3 byte each Added HTTP server Added for now engligh product graphics for portuguese and chinese T E assigned MAC 4 14 10 Added conoco Farmington density alarm timeout modification for air in line Only time timeout when not in alarm and authorized to allow time for correct density to be read 4 30 10 3 29 06 WJP ILTA Demo ILTA Mass Meter Demo Code Updated Krohne meter diagnost
169. VRAM structures WJP 4 Network Address Configurations to be left justified Corrected Alarm log messages to indicate Alarm Count Added log message to i Updated Set Factory Defaults to also reset GPS site Database ndicate when Alarm Count is cleared Corrected data formatting on Access IDs and Alarm Setup screens Added W amp M Acc ss Deni d message on Alarms Setup screens Corrected formatting on R140 and R114 GPS data register Corrected formatting on R650 GPS Site Database register Left justified alarm name in R710 R714 10 31 08 2 28 12 WJP Re leased Added buffer clear to prevent old message data from bring processed with new incomplete comman ds Installed default company name from ML Mobile small format ticket 10 01 08 3 28 13 WJP Removed legacy FCM trace logging Problem with prompt display on view transaction header Added code to i Added code to i ports Removed bay o Changed bay o port Changed bay o implied decimal p Removed prese Changed prese port Changed prese 3 implied decimal Added pulse o Updated R133 U1 Removed unused Increased lates Per Measurement Updated Prese not fractional pa not fractional pa trade preset valu Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 ncereas ncereas the number of supported fcm ports from x to 39 ports utpu utpu utput laces t outpu t outpu t outpu places utput t 33 to e disp bs
170. Vol Specify the volume of product required to flush the pipe segment that lies between Excluding SMP the flow meter and the end of the load arm When this parameter is set to zero the Line Flush feature is disabled Line Flush Min Vol Specify the volume of line flush that will be acceptable if the actual Line Flush Excluding SMP Volume is not reached If the Line Flush Minimum Volume fails to be delivered the line flush alarm will activate This parameter is intended to prevent nuisance alarms due to small acceptable deviations from the Line Flush Volume The Minimum Line Flush Volume will be the Flush value displayed on the status screen and that value will decrement as the line is flushed Line Flush Comp Select the component to be used to flush the pipe segment that lies between the flow Excluding SMP meter and the end of the load arm After the Line Flush Component is metered it will remain in the line segment beyond the flow meter when the preset quantity has been reached and the load has been completed The Flush Component will not be delivered during the load in which it was metered but it will be delivered in a subsequent load In effect the Flush Component is the first product into the truck but it is not metered as part of the load until the Line Flush phase of delivery The range of entries is 1 for component 1 to a number that represents the highest order component configured for the preset Take L F from Match Take Line F
171. a 38 BAT Fil ee EE 38 34 2 Edit eier 38 3 5 TOOL 2 Tei e TEE 39 3 6 BOL Ticket EI EE 39 365 Download et EE 39 3 6 2 gt Upload Registers oone ober aad vein Bat tier oer rite een db oats ait aie oie 40 3 7 Reload Language eegne Eege 40 37 1 Extract and View TransactiOn wis 00 41 3 7 2 Create BOLS from Transachons cccsccccecceceensesesecseneecseneecenesssnaecaaeecenneessaesseaeecseneeseanstanaseseneeetennenanes 41 3 8 MultiLoad I Reports s cccsccticenstecvecscacs cesesiee concentiveccncctvencceed aaa aa a aai 42 3 8 1 Configuration Report EE 42 3 8 2 Flow Control Modules Report 1scccccccccesceceeececneeeeeneeceeneecsaeessaaeceeaeeceetecsaesseaaecseneecsnessaaeseenetessnesanes 43 3 9 Local Mode Only Parameters csssccsseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeescaesanneeeneeeeseaeeasaaesasneeenseeessaeseaeaaeenseeeesanes 44 LI Der deele 44 3 9 2 Product Configuration AE 45 B93 Aivar ACCESS ID EEN 46 EE Hazard EE 47 3 10 Other Configuration Tool FUNCTIONS cccccescceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeenseeeeeneeeseaeseseeeenseeeseneseseaeenseeeeesaees 47 3 10 1 FOM GUI eelere AEE eee aaa sagen tee eee a ee ee ele 48 3 11 Windows MultiMate Configuration Tool ccsccsseccsseeeeeseeesseeseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeesenesesnaesnseeeeeenees 49 3 11 1 EE GE 49 3 11 2 Connection to the MUItiLOG le 51 3 11 3 Download Parameter Prompt Elei 54 3 11 4 Create a Configuration Ee ee NEdEEE NEESS ANERE 56 3 11 5 Do
172. a PIN code The supplied driver card or access ID and PIN must match a record in the driver database stored in the non volatile memory of the MultiLoad II RCU Once verified the MultiLoad II will act upon its internal configuration regarding additional prompts The MultiLoad Il has up to 5 configurable prompts that may be presented to the driver Once these data entry prompts have been recorded loading will be authorized Capabilities of the MultiLoad II operating in Local mode are 300 access ID s and associated PIN codes 10 000 transaction archives complete with salable product component detail and additive detail 5 user configurable custom prompts resultant data stored with each transaction 33 product recipes per meter loading arm Meter Ticket combined ticket for all transaction liftings in user configurable format Meter Additive and Temperature Calibration features Log of the last 1000 Weights and Measures parameter changes 2 3 2 REMOTE CONTROL MODE When interfaced to a remote computer system the number of driver records customer prompts and recipes is virtually unlimited 2 3 3 UAP MODE This is an interface to the cloud and has all basic functionality of a TAS system in the cloud Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 17 2 4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS The Toptech MultiLoad II family of products is available in the following configurations e MultiLoad Il Multiple Arm Multiple Co
173. a preset The Select Additive Preset screen displays 4 Select an additive The Additive Setup screen displays PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 SETUP Additive Enable DISABLD Flow Control Module FCM Port W amp M Controlled Upstream Block Valve Additive Type Additive P Factor Additive I Time Additive D Time Solenoid Shut Pulses Shutoff Vol From End Last In Vol From End Tine Elush Minm vol Assigned Component Next Prev Additive Enable Enables or disables the selected additive Flow Control Set this value to the FCM where the additive is connected Module Set this value to zero for the internal I O board Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control FCM Port W amp M Controlled Upstream Block Valve Additive Type Choose the port that will serve as the additive injection output signal for the selected additive Possible choices are 0 3 0 1 on SMP This port choice also automatically chooses a port to serve as either the additive meter input or the additive feedback signal The following list shows which additive meter input injector feedback input corresponds to what additive port Additive Port Additive Meter Injector Feedback Input Output Port Input Port Injector 1 0 7 Injector 2 1 6 Injector 3 Excluding SMP 2 5 Injector 4 Excluding SMP 3 4 For example if Additive Port 0 is chosen the a
174. a volume that is less than the Last Injection From End Volume It may be necessary to experiment with this value Find a volume range that provides enough time for the entire dye requirement to be delivered Consider the example in the diagram below The Last Injection Volume From End is set at 1000 gallons Ina 1000 gallon batch the dye will begin its final injection immediately Since the additive Shutoff Volume is set to 700 gallons the entire volume of dye required for a 1000 gallon batch must be delivered within the first 300 gallons of the load This example may or may not be practical depending on the recipe amount and the hydraulic characteristics of the system The remaining volume of the load can be used to flush the line The Minimum Flush Volume can be extended to 700 gallons or less If the load is aborted before a minimum amount of flush volume has passed an Additive Flush alarm will occur Shutoff Volume From End 700 gal 209 600 Additive Target Volume aa Additive Volume Delivered S 2 w OC xe LL Last Injection Volume From End 1000 gal 100 Min Flush Vol 700 gal T T T T T T 1000 500 200 0 Remaining Load Volume gal Figure 6 10 Front Loading Dye Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 11 3 BLOCK VALVES AND FLUSH PUMPS Functionality exists in the MultiLoad II to support additive Block Valves and or Flush Pumps The Block Valves are mounted downstream
175. ables displaying 1 100s vol Added RCU Setup parameter to enable or disable displaying 1 100s vol W amp M key switch no longer automatically enters proving mode when in standalone mode Added RCU parameter to enable or disable automatic proving mode when in stand alone mode When in proving mode 1 100s vol are still displayed Proving mode can b ntered when W amp M key not active but parameter changes cannot be made Added component current _temp_hund component current pressure hund and component current density tenths options to the MRS command Corrected bug of unassigned meter variable that caused component status screen to lockup SMP screen Display current temperature instead of batch temperature on component status Updated firmware version to 3 27 02 02 05 07 3 27 03 WJP Moved density sensor configuration from component level to meter level for meter mass calculations overrides Removed alarms Removed Kept optional default density at the component level Any non zero value value from meter level density error from component level alarms Replaced the obsolete fcm permissive with density alarm in the meter level Updated Updated the unused meter level calculation of gross remain_hund ctl _densitygravity to return batch density when no API table selected accuracy Updated Updated the weighted temperature pressure density routine to prov
176. added analog in analog out and RTD input for only FCM2 Added also to modbus as other protocols Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 418 Added to Diagnostic Mode Added check if analog output is already used by meter level for valve control 05 14 2013 PS Added Canexus Logo Added Alarm Ouput for each alarm on global alarm level 05 15 2013 PS Enhancement on Custom Logic Each Alarm Level Bay Preset Meter Component and Additive can be used for a certain specific Bay Preset Meter Component and Additive Also added this to all communication protocols as modbus 05 16 2013 PS Added 2 new API tables for Alcohol these tables use temperature and density as an input and will give the alcohol percentage of the product 05 17 2013 PS Change German Ethanol table from temperature hundreths to tenths mode Added totalizers to UAP Bol 05 18 2013 PS Added new featur to mask the storage of an alarm Results in tot storing printing the alarm Update communication protocols 05 18 2013 PS Added density air for less then 996 6 1 1 kg m3 range 996 6 to 1663 5 1 0 kg m3 and greater then 1663 5 0 9 kg m3 05 30 2013 WJP Added simulation control web page to allow Change meter simulation between Auto Force Flow and Hold Flow Change additive simulation between Auto Force Flow and Hold Flow Change input port simulation between Auto Force On and Hold Off 05
177. additive recipe percentage Calculations are made to find a vol injection size that will not overexert the injector or cause the injections to be timed too far apart The resulting calculation for the vol injection can be automatically entered for use by the system The volume per injection setting will determine how frequently injections are made If the volume per injection setting is too small the injector will have to work too hard to complete its requirement Infrequent injections will be the result of a vol injection setting that is too large this may undermine the instantaneous additive product ratio 1 To use this feature highlight Calculate Additive Vol Inject and press Enter E 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE tomatic Calibration Eunction Review Last Calibration Data Additive Vol Inject Additive Mtr K Factr Additive Mtr Factor Next Prev 2 The Following screen displays PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALCULATE 1 Additive Percentage 2 Additive Vol Per 1000 SJAddative Vol Per 1000 4 Additive Pacing Rate Additive Vol Inject Additive Vol Inject Enter Save 3 If the additive recipe percentage is known Press the 1 button and key in the percentage Calculated values will appear in the remaining fields Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 199 Chapter 6 Additive Control 200 In the example a percentage of 05 was entered The second field shows the volume of additive t
178. age size based on 10 000 transactions 20 details per transaction and max clear block size at program startup Tickets numbers are 1 9999 inclusive Removed sidx from header record and hidx from detail record Updated FBOL find first transaction for a specified date to work with large transaction database Updated factory defaults to clear all transactions and transaction flash blocks Will loose COM during operation To greatly reduce possibility of a missed COM message whil rasing a flash block added support on reboot to verify at least 256K of flash transaction storage is available Added powerup text when unlocking transaction flash blocks to explain new powerup delay Added TRACE ARCHIVE ifdef to allow logging of storage actions and locations for debugging Setup AUTOLOAD when tracing archive to load one 10 15 gal preset for each transaction to quickly load the entire transaction archive 30 40 Hrs Updated modbus 7810 7916 interface to read expanded transaction archive Updated R800 to read expanded transaction archive Added ability to send dual output pulse For dual pulse FCM 2 or IO BOARD version must be 38 or greater Indicate use of dual pulse by turning on invert flag on output FCM port configuration parameter Second pulse will always be on the next port 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 10 11 11 12 Note Single Output Limited to 500 Hz Dual Pulse Output Limited to 250 Hz Note As before output pulses are not real time and delayed
179. al The DISABLED value changes to ENABLED switching the Chapter 11 Operation 12 6 AUTOMATIC PROVING FUNCTION This feature is designed for flow meter proving that is performed by delivering a predetermined volume into a static calibrated vessel When a proving run is initiated flow rates and delivery volumes can be selected and implemented without entering the program mode and changing the flow profile that is used for day to day operations When delivery is complete the prover operator will be prompted to enter the volume that was observed in the calibrated vessel A new meter factor for that proving flow rate will be calculated and entered into the MultiLoad II configuration if approved by the operator Determine the Number of Proving Flow Rates The number of flow rates that will be proven should be established during the initial MultiLoad II installation Determine how many flow rates will be proven In the program mode enter the Weights and Measures menu and select Components Scroll through the menu and select the parameter entitled Meter Factors Used Enter the number of flow rates that will be used to prove the meter for the selected component Valid choices are 1 4 Establishing Meter Factor Flow Rates Enter the rates that will be proven In Program mode enter the Weights and Measures menu and select Components Scroll through the menu and select Meter Factor 1 Rate Enter the first proving flow rate If pro
180. al Host Oo geb For security reasons IP Address information will only be displayed when the network is first enabled and on power up Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 4 RCU GENERAL SETUP Use the RCU General Setup function to Specify the RCU communication address Enable or disable remote processing by a TMS Assign passwords for entering the MultiLoad II configuration mode Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt RCU General Setup The RCU General Setup screen displays RCU GENERAL SETUP Card Reader Type DISABLD Processing Mode StndAln Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1 KKKKKKK RIK eK Password Password KKK KK KK 2 E Password 4 KKKKKKK Password 5 RKKKKKK Modem Init AT amp F0 amp B1 amp C1 amp D0S0 1 Modem Dial Host Login DSHS T LDST Terminal SPLC 123456001 Terminal Name Toptech Terminal Next Prev Exit Enter r RCU Address is a data entry field Press Enter and key in the appropriate address value Then press Enter to save the value Remote Processing are toggle fields Use Next or Prev to highlight the appropriate filed Press Enter to access the field then Next or Prev to change the setting Press Enter to save the change Password is a data entry field Press Enter and key in a new password Press Enter to save the change RCU GE RCU Address Card R
181. al Test 3 Press Next or Prev to manually step through the Display Tests Press Exit to end the test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 9 UNICODE TEST Use this function to view the supported Unicode fonts 4 From the Diagnostics Menu select Unicode Deora G NPC srw sees ME Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logie Keypad Display ECM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal ROU Bay Preset Next Prev 5 The Unicode Test screen displays and positions itself on the Hiragana Unicode Character set U 4E00 JELTZ AXEL PITASYS U 4E10 FHA AAHH EAWARERE U 4E20 dtm PE UN PRAF U 4E30 PYPE R gt V ALATA EA As U 4E40 VU UXT ARK EANG EFS U 4E50 FAE RF HRRRAL HALO U 4E60 Y ILLEZ PBZ Hmm U 4E70 LALSASA ES Zw EL U 4E80 BRZRLALEL rte te U 4E90 5 R477 FFE HE AW oe U 4EA0 gt C RAINS BRER ERS U 4EBO RH SAE ERE AAMAS U 4ECO HAT RRA ANETAR AMA U 4ED0 FEA CFE ls FEL ei AF U 4EE0 FERE REANA A U 4EFO SI H Dr AEE EE 6 Press Next or Prev to step forward and backward through the Unicode code points Press Exit to end the test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 231 8 10 FCM COMMUNICATIONS Use this function to determine if the internal I O board or external FCMs are communicating with the MultiLoad Il 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select FCM Com DELA GON OTS REES M Card R
182. al will represent the state of Permissive 0 7 If the signal is not present at authorization or if the signal is lost during delivery the process will be stopped and a bay level alarm will be raised Permiss Out FCM This parameter permits the selection of a Flow Control Module FCM and port that will provide an output signal The signal will represent a loss of one or more of the bay permissives 0 7 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 80 Chapter 4 General Configuration DEADMAN SETUP Belows table will show what parameters needs to be configured for each mode Deadman mode Input Deadman Stop Timer Output Deadman Warning Timer None ContHld X Hid amp Rel X X X X Push X X X X Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 81 Chapter 4 General Configuration 82 4 6 2 PRESET SETUP Use the Preset Setup functions to configure the characteristics of a load arm Further details about flow control can be found in Chapter 5 Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup gt Select Parameter Level gt Preset All Weights and Measures controlled values are displayed in red both on the screen and in this manual The Preset Setup screen displays PRE 1 Preset 001 SETUP Number of Components Number of Additives Sequential Blending Ratio Blending W amp M Controlled Proving Flow Rate Excess Flw Alrm Rate Overrun Alarm Vol iow Flow Start Vol iow
183. alarm only a few alarms can be renamed Alarm Level This is the general level of the alarm how it can be cleared If the alarm is by default not in AUTO level it can be never put into this level Promo Count The amount of times the alarm needs to happen before it cose into the Promo Alarm Level Promo Alarm This is actually has the same levels as the Alarm Level but is only be used when the Level promo count is reached Promo Reset The parameter indicates how the promo count can be resetted again to zero Mode Alarm Host The parameter Alarm to Host can be set to Remote which means that the alarm is send to the host Alarm Local means the alarm will be seen by any host system FCM Output If this the general happens on the Multiload we will send a general output to a PLC Don t store Alarm This feature will disable the storage and printing of a certain alarm if it is not wanted Has affect on Printing Bol Printing Alibi Log storage alarm H the Promo Count value is ZERO Promo Alarm Level and Promo Reset Mode will be not displayed Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 7 1 BAY ALARM SETUP Default values are in the left column Alarm Meaning BAY FCM The MultiLoad Il has lost communication with the I O board or FCM This message indicates that bay level functions are affected by the interrupted communication This alarm will automatically clear when c
184. alarm will also DRIVER occur if the block valve has not closed in the time required by the Block Valve Close Alarm Time parameter Any time a block valve is in the improper position the alarm will activate BAY ALARM This alarm setting should remain at Auto Clear This alarm indicates that the preset has a AUTO Bay Level alarm active COMP ALARM This alarm setting should remain at Auto Clear This alarm indicates that the preset has a AUTO Component Level alarm active ADD ALARM This alarm setting should remain at Auto Clear This alarm indicates that the preset has an AUTO Additive Level alarm active MTR STOP Meter Stop This message will be displayed when the meter stop button has been pressed AUTO An external stop button can be configured for each preset this is an optional feature The driver can clear the alarm by default and resume loading when desired OVERRUN The overrun alarm will occur when the quantity delivered has exceeded the preset quantity by a value configured in the Overrun Volume Alarm parameter This alarm is intended to alert maintenance personnel that a control valve may not be closing as quickly as it should The valve may require maintenance The setting of this alarm should be less than the REMOTE Valve Fault alarm which is intended to indicate a more serious control valve failure EXCESS FL The Excess Flow alarm will occur when flow through the load arm has exceeded the REMOTE maximum flow rate configured in the Pre
185. am configurations and conditions explained below the MultiLoad firmware did not correctly calculate one or more Component Net Volumes For Trade Values and Calculations Preset Level Gross and Net Volumes were not effected Only Not for Trade or For Inventory Only Values and Calculations Component Level Net Volumes wer ffected Problem limited to the previous version of firmware 3 29 11 3 29 13 Problem limited to configurations where more then one main component shared the same side stream component For instance Reg and Prem components sharing a r i eam ited to recipes that included flowing both of these main components sequentially in the same blend For instance Reg flow with Ethanol side stream followed by Prem flow with Ethanol side stream Problem limited to the calculation of the Net Component Volumes calculated for any main components with a common side stream that flow after the first main component with the common side stream in the blend For instance the Premium component in the previous example Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 384 Main Component Net Volume error on effected components would always be an understatement in the amount of side stream net volume that flowed during the previous main components with the common side stream Corrected placement of when performing a sequential or ratio blend with a side stream Updated application of API VCF a
186. an be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 53B This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 15 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 269 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures NMI 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Observed Density is to be corrected to 15 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 53D NMI This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 15 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B whi
187. anol Meter Meter Level values reported as Grem M1 Trem T1 Drem D1 OR De Ge Dr Gr Gb Nrem Grem VCFr Trem Drem Mrem Nrem Drem OR Mrem Grem D1 Where Grem Gross volume loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 Trem Temperature for the Regular Ethanol Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 Nrem Net volume loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mrem Mass loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 294 Premium meter Meter Level values are reported as Gpm M2 Tpm T2 Dpm D2 OR Dp Npm Gpm VCFp Tpm Dpm Mpm Npm Dpm OR Mpm Gpm D2 Where Gpm Gross volume loaded for the Premium Meter M2 Gross volume reported by meter M2 Tpm Temperature for the Premium Meter T2 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T2 Npm Net volume loaded for the Premium Meter VCFp API Correction Table for Premium Mpm Mass loaded for the Premium Meter Blended product Preset Level values reported as Gb Grem Gpm value not to be used for trade Tb Trem Grem Tpm Gpm Gb value not to be used for trade Db Drem Grem Dpm Gpm Gb value not to be used for trade Nb Nrem Npem Mb Mrem Mpem Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weigh
188. another injection until the return Throw Time has expired The piston must return to the starting position within this time period Please refer to Figure 6 1 below Inject Launch Piston Max Travel Return 1 2 Cycle Complete Throw Time Expires Piston Switch High Piston Cycle Graph Throw Time Expired Injection Complete Piston Switch High Throw Time Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Throw Time We IDLE gt Figure 6 1 Piston Cycle Graph Chapter 6 Additive Control 173 6 3 ADDITIVE PORT ASSIGNMENT For most additive methods an additive output injection signal and an additive input are required During configuration an additive FCM Port will be assigned by the user This port assignment will be for the additive output injection signal Valid FCM Port selections for the additive outputs are ports 0 and 1 on the internal I O board and 0 1 2 and 3 on an external FCM The output port that is selected will dictate which port is used for the additive input For example if Port 0 is selected as the FCM Port the output will be on port 0 and the corresponding input will be at port 7 Below is a table of possible port assignments B When using the Piston Only method there is no additive input signal to be monitored However the input port that corresponds to the selected output port will be dedicated as an additive port This port will be out of service and cannot be used for any other f
189. appear on the component line of the printed ticket A host system that queries for real time component meter level values will be supplied with the meter temperature density gross and net volumes that appear on the meter line of the printed ticket A host system that queries for the transaction archive information will be supplied with all same meter and component information that is on the printed ticket Setup Component and Meter Temperature Pressure Density real time component data Setup Component and Meter Gravity Density get routines API routines always use Meter Temperature Pressure Density from the real time component data Transaction Component Data always contains component Temperature Pressure Density from the real time component data Transaction Meter Data always contains meter Temperature Pressure Density from the real time meter data MRS command component data returns component Temperature Pressure Density from the real time component data Modbus 4756 5331 register contains component Temperature Pressure Density from the real time component data Component Meter Screen displays the meter Temperature Pressure Density from the real time component data Renamed RCU parameter Print Blend Components to Print Blend Details When set to 2 all meter records will be archived and printed 1 5 10 3 4 30 00 W
190. approx 1 second Added logic to only allow resetting to factory defaults when W amp M key active and on a powerup ML Simulator Updates Updated simulation to display log messages to console Added exit code to restore proper terminal functionality when closing the program Added digital control valve state into meter trace as 0 close 50 lock 100 open Corrected bug in 1 Arm and SMP products where preset level alarms could not be manually cleared from preset control and preset status screens T Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 388 In FCM2 TESTER build added I O board digital output digital input analog cal and analog test functions Updated FCM 2 Analog Tester to correctly exit RTD calibration mode Updated 4 20mA Input to more descriptive Observed 4 20mA Display yellow background on parameters changed from the default on RCU Bay Preset Component Meter and Additive configuration screens Added Id X to R912 W amp M Log Register to include an Id with each W amp M change logged by TMS Updated R912 register to contain the ID of person that performed that change Updated View W amp M log to have the ability to print a W amp M log Added new terminal esc sequences for Added lt esc gt G command to set Foreground Background text colors Updated lt esc gt J and lt esc gt K to clear to EOL and EOS with color and size attributes Added lt esc gt
191. apter 9 Weights amp Measures 302 Pressure Offset Displays the pressure offset value which is the difference between the Pressure Unadjusted value and the Pressure Adjusted observed pressure value Pressure Adjusted Displays the observed pressure as a result of applying the pressure offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 303 9 16 DENSITY CALIBRATION Use the Density screen to calibrate density for a Meter 1 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose Density After selecting the preset and meter the Density screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 DENSITY Density Unadjusted 1 Density Offset 2 Density Adjusted Next Prev 2 If the observed Density is different from the unadjusted density displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the difference between the Density Unadjusted and Density Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed density in the Density Adjusted field in which case the Density Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 DENSITY Density Unadjusted 1 Density Offset 2 Density Adjusted Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset Density Unadjusted Displays the real time density Density Offset Displays the current Density offset value which is the difference between the Density Unadjusted value and the Density Adjusted
192. arameter is enabled 12 2 PHASES OF OPERATION There are four main phases of MultiLoad II operation Phase 1 Authorization Phase 2 Preset Phase 3 Loading Phase 4 End Load 12 3 DRIVER CARD OR KEYPAD ACCESS To begin the authorization process the MultiLoad II RCU will read a driver s Prox Card Excluding the SMP or will prompt the driver to enter an access ID Next the driver will be prompted to enter a PIN code Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 337 12 4 REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION The following sequence provides detailed Driver instructions for operating the MultiLoad II in Remote mode that is in conjunction with a host system TMS It also provides behind the scenes information relevant to the System Administrator R In order to enable Remote operation the Remote Processing parameter on the RCU General Setup screen accessed from the Configuration Menu must be enabled 12 4 1 AUTHORIZATION PHASE In Remote mode the authorization process is more extensive than in Local mode Prior to the authorization of a transaction the host system TMS may prompt the driver for any number of prompts including but not limited to Truck Trailer Stockholder Customer Account PO number Release Number etc Prior to the authorization of each batch the host system TMS may prompt the driver for any number of prompts including but not limited to Product Quantity Compartment The host sys
193. ary If this component is to have the recipe percentage under W amp M protection set this value to the W amp M accepted value When this value is non zero the Component Recipe Percentage MUST be equal to the W amp M Recipe Percentage or all attempts to authorize a batch will be denied displaying a message of W amp M Required Component Pct Not Correct Specify the volume of Unauthorized Flow that will have to accumulate before an Unauthorized Flow Alarm is raised Unauthorized Flow occurs when the flow meter senses the movement of product when the component has not been authorized for delivery Blk Valve Open Rate Use this parameter when using hydraulic product selection valves instead of MOVs A value of zero disables this feature Hydraulic valves used upstream of the digital control valve may not open fully during the Low Flow stage due to low differential pressure across the product selection valve This may prevent the Block Valve Status input from signaling that the product selection valve is open although flow is occurring Start with a value equal to the Low Flow Rate minus the Low Flow DB deadband Rate Enter this value in the Block Valve Open Rate field Block Valve Open Alarms will not be raised when the flow rate is below this value Blk Valve Open Delay Set this parameter to delay the opening of a block valve by a period specified in seconds When a block valve is employed it will be commanded open after the del
194. as been commanded to open for a particular additive Block Valve Status Indicates that a additive level Block Valve status has been received from a particular additive Flush Pump Run Indicates that a particular additive s Flush Pump has been commanded to run Close Block Valve Indicates that a Block Valve has been commanded to close for a particular additive Alarm Out Indicates that an additive level alarm such as Injector Fault is active for a particular additive Authorized Indicates when a driver is authorized to use a particular additive Permissive Indicates that an additive level permissive has been received Permissive Out Indicates that all additive level permissives have been satisfied Gross Delivered value is in whole defined Additive Percentage value is in hundreths defined meaning two number after the decimal point b Preset Number Specify the preset Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP c Additive Number Specify the Additive Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 13 6 LOGIC FUNCTIONS 1 Always False 2 Always True 3 Assign a Custom Logic Index 4 Not a Custom Logic Index 5 AND a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index a Custom Logic Index b Custom Logic Index 20 START DELAY
195. ass meter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 241 Chapter 8 Diagnostics If the meter is configured as a Micro Motion mass meter the following screen will appear PRE 1 MTR 1 MICRO MOTION Mass Flow Rate XXXXX Mass Total Volume Flow Rate XXXX XX J Volume Total Temperaturer Density XXXXXXXXX WOW OOOO X XX C TRAER K 1 Broadcast Address Set 01 OFF 2 Perform Flowme ter Zeroing OFF Ss Pertorm rotalizer Reset OFF Exit Upstrm Val Energize or deenergize the upstream solenoid valve Dnstrm Val Energize or deenergize the downstream solenoid valve OPN CLS Test Start an automated test measuring the control valve opening and closing speeds Set Output xx mA Set mA drive output to xx Output MA xx xxxx Display or Set mA drive output to xx xxxx Del Pulses Number of meter pulses received Del Volume Meter volume delivered Input mA Current meter 4 20mA signal Analog Meter Input Only Rate Current flow rate Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 242 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 18 DIGITAL CONTROL VALVE TEST MultiLoad II contains an Open Close valve test in the Meter Diagnostics screen This test will automatically open the digital control valve until the high flow rate is achieved When the high flow rate is achieved the digital control valve will be commanded to close The Opening and Closing times are measured and di
196. assigned See the Additive Port Assignment description above Additive Type Set this value to PstnNFB if the piston input is normally high Normal Feedback Set to PstnIFB if the piston input is normally low Inverted Feedback Additive Volume Per Enter the cylinder volume using the appropriate units Injection Piston Throw Time Enter the time in seconds that it will take for the piston to complete one half of an injection cycle The remaining parameters that apply to this additive method are optional They are used to set up alarming pump outputs and permissive inputs Some of the remaining parameters affect how the additive is delivered at different stages of the load cycle All Additive configuration screens and parameter descriptions are found in the General Additive Setup section that follows The Parameters for Additive Methods table identifies the parameters that apply to this method Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 5 METHOD 3 PULSER INPUT This configuration assumes that a flow measurement device is metering the amount of additive entering the product stream It is assumed that there is no piston cylinder and that the additive output port is commanding a solenoid operated valve which controls the delivery of additive Instead of incrementing the additive totalizer at each injection or upon receipt of a feedback signal this feature updates the additive totalize
197. at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Density 20 C is known Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 20 C The valid range of Density is from 800 1064 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 60X This table provides the CTL factors of a petroleum product at observed temperatures and Density This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the reference temperature and units of measure for density pressure and temperature ASTM1250 2004 Table 53A NMI This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 15 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Observed Density is to be corrected to 15 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures c
198. ate appears Continue with the following step 11 The MF field shows the current meter factor for the flow rate that is posted to the left of the field This should not be changed by the user at this point unless a new flow rate is going to be used as described in the previous step 12 Pressing the Next button will advance the user to the remaining rates and meter factors To return to any of the previous fields press the Prev key On MultiLoad II On MultiLoad II SMP PRODUCT E co eee Low Sulfur Diesel LS Diesel SA BON2 12ND Preset 002 IDLE STOPPED EE 1000 ELIVER 6 GALLONS Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick ExitLoad Clear Preset Enter Start 13 When the meter proving pre configuration is complete press Exit to advance to the Preset Control Screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 356 14 Press Enter to commence the proving run When the Enter key is pressed the Preset Status Screen will appear SIE Cal Sus SCREE PRODUCE ow Sulfur Diesel SEAMUS LOW FLOW GROSS 1000 996 3290 4 IMPERATURE 24 00C PRESSURES 0 00 DENSITY One BSW 0700 FLOW RATE 959 Next Prev Exit Stop 15 When the preset quantity has been delivered press Next to advance to Meter Proving Results screen PRE 1 Preset 001 CMP 1 LS DIE
199. ated Ceci temperature units Corrected value placement bug in ticke temp and expansion coefficient function and handle both C and F net value position for placing the measurement character Added api 54yg product to api setup screen For tables that support both Def F and correctly display the correct units and th 02 15 12 WJP Deg C T EC and Ethanol t where gross position was used for the added logic to Corrected FCM analog additive simulation Corrected API 54XG table implementation befor reference temperatur releas selected Corrected analog additive 4 20mA output scaling and log messages Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 402 Updated software copyright year Corrected scaling and update bug in meter and additive analog output diagnostic screens 02 21 12 WJP Updated the following API table defs for integration with new TMS5 bay code TABLE 54CG e EE TABLE 54XG eg EE TABLE 54YG HON 02 21 12 WJP Increased Message Log from 100 to 750 messages For non PXA255 builds added ability to save 90 days of message log files to the SD Card Each day will be saved into a seperate file in the root directory Attempts to save to the SD Card will be aborted after 5 consective failed attempts to save to the SD Card On startup or after a reboot Savnig to teh SD card will resume For UAP or CN builds added ability to send message lo
200. atically and it is composed of 100 of itself If you were to select Edit Product Recipe the new base additive would be displayed on the Product Recipe screen shown below Normally however there would be no need to go to the Product Recipe screen when establishing base additives and base product components PRODUCT AD720 100 00 AD720 60 00 60 0000 AD720 60 0000 Next Prev Select Exit to return to the Select Product screen ADDSP0720 ADDSP0720 undefined ADSP0720 undeftinea Continue to define your base additives as necessary PRODUCT SELECTION Comp 000123 BASE87UNL Comp BAS002 Base Comp BAS003 Base Comp BASO04 Base Comp BAS005 Base Adtv AD720 Adtv AD Adtv AD Adtv AD Adtv AD Adtv AD BAS006 Base undefined D002 Adtv D003 Adtv D004 Adtv D005 Adtv D006 Adtv undefined 002 003 004 005 ADSPO 720 002 003 004 005 Next Prev Exit Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 122 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 11 DEFINING SALEABLE PRODUCTS After defining the base components and base additives begin defining saleable products The system defines a single saleable product Product as composed of 1 to 8 base components and 0 to 6 additives Up until this point the Product Recipe screen has not been necessary since each base component and additive is automatically defined as 100 of itself For de
201. avity Unadjusted value and the API Gravity Adjusted observed relative density value API Gravity Adjusted Displays the observed API Gravity as a result of applying the API Gravity offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 306 9 19 BSW CALIBRATION Use the BSW screen to calibrate relative density for a Meter 7 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose BSW After selecting the preset and meter the BSW screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 BSW BSW Unadjusted 1 BSw Offset 2 BSW Adjusted Next Prev 8 If the observed BSW is different from the unadjusted BSW displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the difference between the BSW Unadjusted and BSW Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed BSW in the BSW Adjusted field in which case the BSW Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 BSW BSW Unadjusted 1 BSW Offset 2 BSW Adjusted Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset Parameter Description BSW Unadjusted Displays the real time BSW BSW Offset Displays the current BSW offset value which is the difference between the BSW Unadjusted value and the BSW Adjusted observed BSW value BSW Adjusted Displays the observed BSW as a result of applying the BSW offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 307
202. ay time has expired For the first component of a blend the delay timer will commence at the moment that the Start button is pressed For subsequent components the timer will start as soon as flow has stopped for the previous component Ignore this parameter if Block Valves are not used B V Open Alrm Time Specifies the time in seconds to allow the component s block valve to open If a component block valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback requirement is not satisfied in this time B V Close Alrm Time Specifies the time in seconds to allow the component s block valve to close If a component block valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback requirement is not satisfied in this time Pump Start Delay The starting of the pump will be delayed by the time in seconds specified by this parameter Pump Stop Delay After the batch has been completed the pump will remain on for the period in seconds specified by this parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 101 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Action Pump Start Alrm Time This alarm setting is used in conjunction with a Pump Status input If the Pump Status signal is not received in time specified by this parameter a Pump Status alarm will be raised The time is specified in seconds Timing will begin as soon as the Start button is pressed The setting for this parameter mus
203. ay Pin Primary Bay FCMs Swing Arm FCMs Secondary Bay FCMs Relay Coil Relay Coil Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 J3 4 TDB oc leie common 24 VDC or 115 VAC Via Swing Arm Switch E 14 S 8 S S amp Relay Socket Swing Arm FCMs Communication Switching Relay Socket Square D Part 8501NR45 Relay Square D Part 8501 RSD34V53 Figure 7 2 Swing Arm FCM Relay Socket 215 Chapter 7 Swing Arm Setup and Operation Excluding SMP 7 4 SWING ARM CONFIGURATION Perform the following steps when configuring two bays to share one or more swing arms Designate one of the bay MultiLoad II RCUs to be the swing arm secondary RCU It does not matter which RCU is chosen as the secondary To make a RCU the secondary go to the designated RCU and enter the program mode Select the Configuration menu and then select RCU Setup In the RCU Setup menu find the parameter labeled Swing Arm Secondary Enable this parameter and then exit the program mode It will not be necessary to set this parameter again if additional swing arms are added to a bay in the future Go to the primary RCU and ensure that the Swing Arm Secondary parameter is disabled Choose one of the bay MultiLoad Il RCUs to configure it does not matter which bay is configured first For purposes of this discussion the primary MultiLoad Il RCU will be configured first Enter the program mode of the primary RCU Select the Configuration menu and then se
204. ay active until the operator archives the batch by clearing the preset or by pulling the card By default a high signal will represent an active condition Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Remote Start FCM This parameter selects an input port that will be assigned to receive the input of a Remote Start button The Remote Start Button can be used to start a load from a location away from the MultiLoad II such as from a top loading position The card in process and preset entry must be completed at the MultiLoad Il prior to activating flow via the Remote Start Button This feature can be used in conjunction with the Meter Stop function If flow is stopped by a Meter Stop flow can be restarted by actuating the Remote Start button If flow is stopped due to a Low Flow Alarm this alarm can be cleared and flow restartd by a single actuation of the Remote Start button Swing Arm FCM If a swing arm is configured for this preset enter the Flow Control Module FCM and port number that will receive the Presets swing arm detector switch Meter Stop FCM Selects the input port that will be assigned to detect the Meter Stop button When the Meter Stop switch is activated the flow control valve will be closed and the component pump will be stopped Alarm Out FCM Alarm Out provides an output signal if the preset has an active alarm This parameter selects the output port that will be assigned to signal an unspecified
205. bar on the Group screen will stay active The black highlight bar indicates which load arm or preset on the Group screen is selected If this parameter is set to zero the highlight bar will always be present over one of the load arm selections If it is set to some time period specified in seconds the bar will disappear after the time has expired Enable this parameter if it is mandatory to perform a display test before each transaction When the test begins each pixel is turned black for 0 75 seconds Then each pixel is blanked for 0 75 seconds Inoperable pixels will appear as tiny contrasting dots When the test ends the Load Screen is displayed When enabled Meter Proving mode will be entered if in stand alone mode delivering a single product Changes to W amp M parameters will not be allowed unless the W amp M switch is active The Trace parameters are used to capture additional data from the system Additional data will be sent to the event log while this feature is active This parameter must have a value specified to make use of the Trace parameters that follow Enter a value that represents the Preset under test Valid entry is 1 This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems The Trace parameters are used to capture additional data from the system Additional data will be sent to the event log while this feature is active This parameter must have a value specified to
206. be periodically reset The Creep Reset Time parameter specifies the reset interval in seconds If the volume of meter creep specified in the Meter Creep Alarm Volume occurs within the time set by this parameter a Meter Creep alarm will occur This function does not reset the viewable Creep Totalizer that is found in the Additive Views A Inquiry s screen Unauth Reset Time Unauthorized flow Reset Time Additive Unauthorized Flow is any volume that passes the additive meter when the additive is not authorized A small amount of unauthorized flow detection due to line shock is expected Flow does not necessarily occur but slight meter movement due to line shock will cause the system to view it as such Over time the accumulated unauthorized volume may increase to a value that raises an alarm unauthorized flow To avoid nuisance alarms this accumulated value must be periodically reset The Unauthorized Reset Time parameter specifies the reset interval in seconds If the volume of Unauthorized Flow specified in the Unauthorized Flow Volume parameter occurs within the time period specified by Unauth Reset Time an Unauthorized Flow alarm will activate This function does not reset the Unauthorized Flow totalizers that can be viewed in the Additive Views amp Inquiry s screen Max Piston Throw Time When piston injectors are employed this parameter tells the additive control logic how much time to permit the injector to complete each in
207. blend ratio adjustments are made until this volume has been delivered This setting should be configured to be greater than the Low Flow Restart Volume and less than the Blend Check Restart Volume so that adjustments can begin after the transition to High Flow Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Bind Adj Dev Excluding SMP Bind Adj Dev Vol Excluding SMP Bind Adj Time Excluding SMP Blend Adjust Deviation Percentage applies to ratio blending only The system will begin adjusting the ratio of the blend when it is found to deviate from the tolerance by the amount specified in this parameter The deviation must occur for the period specified by the Blend Adjust Time parameter before any adjustments will be attempted Blend Adjust Deviation Volume applies to ratio blending only The system will begin adjusting the ratio of the blend when it is found to deviate from the specified tolerance by the volume entered in this parameter The deviation must occur for the period specified by the Blend Adjust Time parameter before any adjustments will be attempted Time period in seconds during which a deviation in the blend ratio tolerance must occur in order for a ratio adjustment to be made See parameters Blind Adj Dev and Bind Adj Restart Vol Proving Low Flow Rate The low flow rate which will be used during the proving mode Min Preset Volume Minimum preset volume allowed Default Preset Volume Max Preset Volum
208. block Injector amp Dye Point ASSOMDIY A 210 Additive Meter in Flush Path 211 Additive Meter and Injector Valve in Flush Path 212 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 10 1 Figure 12 1 SWiInNg Arm GONPQUIALION EE 213 le Rule ARTE Eeer EE 215 View Transaction Header Green 323 Preset Control tee ee ee ee aa AEN 342 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 1 Before You Begin 11 CHAPTER 1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN 1 1 WHO SHOULD USE THIS GUIDE This guide is intended for those individuals at your terminal who will set up and use the MultiLoad Il system terminal managers system administrators terminal operators technicians and meter proving personnel 1 2 How THIS GUIDE IS ORGANIZED The MultiLoad Il User Guide is organized by functional procedures It mirrors the MultiLoad Il menu structure Each chapter discusses a single procedure or a group of related procedures that are necessary to set up and use the system The following table provides an information map to the material in this guide Chapter Audience Topics Covered 2 System Description All System description Remote and Local operating modes System components Navigation Data Entry and Getting Started 3 GUI Configuration System Admin Facility Purpose Access Menu Functions Navigation and Tool expert Local Control only parameter configuration 4 General System Admin Facility Communica
209. button 5 The first injection is made Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 The number of meter pulses displays as well as the delivered volume in gallons and in CCs in parentheses E 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRAT Press Next Key to Inject Now Injection 1 Meter Pulses 52 Delivered Volume 0m 020r Gee 7 Press the NEXT key again to get another injection Continue to inject until you have enough volume in the beaker to get a measurable reading E 1 ADIV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRAT Press Next Key to Inject Now Tnjection 5 Meter Pulses 261 Delivered Volume ORRO SITS 8 Record the volume collected in the beaker 9 Press EXIT Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 10 A Please Wait message displays briefly then the following screen displays PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered Vol 0 RER SH Jee 1 Beaker Vol 0 000000 2l Beaker vol Ces 0 000 Meter Pulses 261 Additive Mtr K Factr 2600 11 To enter the collected beaker volume in thousandaths of a gallons press 1 12 To enter the collected beaker volume in CCs press 2 as shown below Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered Vol 0 L00 See 1 Beaker Vol 0 000000 2 Beaker Vol CCs ii Meter Pulses 261 Additive Mtr K Factr 2600 196 Chapter 6 Additive Control 13 At the promp
210. cation of the MF and Rates b If the proving run is to be aborted press Exit The Old Meter Factor will remain in effect Pressing Exit at this screen will return the operator to the Preset Control screen At the Preset Control screen the batch can be cleared and another proving run can be initiated 22 When all proving has been completed press Exit twice to end the transaction Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 359 CHAPTER 13 CUSTOM LOGIC 13 1 OVERVIEW Custom Logic supplements the standard logic in MultiLoad II This allows the MultiLoad II to perform many of the simple I O sequencing tasks that would have required an additional PLC Configuring Custom Logic involves the building a list of logic instructions to read FCM inputs read MultiLoad II internal states bay authorized batch authorized pump run etc perform logic operations logic AND OR etc and control FCM outputs Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 13 2 Muotoapll ACCESS TO CUSTOM LOGIC To access the Custom Configuration from the MultiLoad II keypad enter the program mode select Configuration then Custom Logic The Custom Logic screen displays 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 GOA 0012 0013 13 3 MULTILOAD II CONFIG TOOL ACCESS TO CUSTOM LOGIC Using the MultiLoad II configuration utility Custom Logic can be found under the Miscellaneous hea
211. ccccccssccesseeeeseeeeenesesneeeneneeeeeeeescaeseseeeeeseeessesescaesqsneeseeeeeseeseseenenseaeees 337 12 4 1 AUTNOFIZALION ee enden See cad vidoes eeh Ea Aaaa Aaa P Aaa aa Aa iiss shivade ties AAAA a Paa a AAAA RAPANA EAA aa 337 12 4 2 ACCESS SCICCM airi le ia en Attias Bois ati ee Aesth UL ENTE T ata lied 337 1243 LOad REENEN 345 12 4 4 End LOad RE 347 12 45 TMS Eege eet ee deeg ege dee dee ee AE 347 12 5 Local Standalone Operation ccccssececeeseeceenseneeeensneeeeensaeeeensaeeeensaaeeesnseaeeeeeseneeseseeeeensnseeeanes 347 12 5 1 ACCESS ID Data E 347 12 5 2 e ee 348 12 5 3 Meter Ticket Printing EE 348 12 5 4 Miscellaneous Tasks Aen eet Leed eeieug he Reuse ARA Eege ieee Raisers 349 12 5 5 Configuring MultiLoad II for Local Mode 350 12 5 6 Operation nee 350 12 5 7 Local AULNOLIZATION EE 351 12 5 8 Meter Tiekot insanin ee i an EENS EeEN 352 12 5 9 Switching Back to Remote Mode 352 12 6 Automatic Proving Function s sssssnsssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nanne nenna nnna 353 12 6 1 Using the Proving Feanen pian r onae E O A RAA 354 CHAPTER 13 CUSTOM LO CO a ick cote ENEE 359 AER e UE 359 13 2 MultiLoad Il Access to Custom LOGIC ccccececeseceseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaesenneeenseeeseaesesaaesesneeseeeeeseaeseseeeenseaeees 360 13 3 MultiLoad II Config Tool Access to Custom LOGIC cccsecseteesteeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeenseeeeneeeeseeeseneeeeeeenees 360
212. ch provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Observed Density is to be corrected to 15 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 800 1064 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 59A NMI This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 20 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Observed Density is to be corrected to 20 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 610 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test tem
213. chnician or electrician to narrow down the problem by showing what is turned on or off input statuses can be viewed as ON or OFF outputs can be activated or deactivated from this screen by pressing the number that corresponds to the function 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select Preset Dt AG ON Oss ies M IESSE Components Additives Custom Logic Com Com Heal Heal Next Card Reader COM Loopback Serial Ports Network Test Keypad Display Unicode FCM PCM FCM PCM RCU Bay Preset Prev 2 The Preset Diagnostics screen displays Only the I O that is configured will appear on this screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 PRE 1 Permiss 2 Authori 3 Alarm Meter S Remote 4 Batch A 5 Flow Ac 6 Opn Bk Val 7 Cis Bk val BE Vals S Ome Ee 1 PermissOut OFF ON PASI OD ut ON See OEE Seals OPE UEN OFER eis Oly OEE ZON tatus OFF e 20 ive Preset 001 DIAGNOSTICS 238 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 17 METER DIAGNOSTICS Meter diagnostics enable your technician or electrician to diagnose wiring problems or hardware problems by testing the wiring and control from the MultiLoad II to outside devices such as digital control valves flow meters and permissives input statuses can be viewed as ON or OFF outputs can be activated or deactivated from this screen by pressing the number that corresponds to the function
214. ck Add Tol Time Set the Check Additive Tolerance Time to permit the system ample time to recover from an Under Additized or Over Additized alarm condition If this value is set too low the system will continue to go into the referenced alarm conditions until the additive error has been reduced to within the of injections specified by the Additized Alarm parameters Enter a value in units of time seconds Unauth Flow Alrm Vol Specify the volume of Unauthorized Additive Flow that will have to accumulate before an additive s Unauthorized Flow Alarm is activated fs This parameter does not apply to the non Pulser methods Valve Fault Alrm Vol Specify the volume of additive flow that will have to accumulate before an additive s Valve Fault Alarm is activated The alarm occurs when an additive is authorized for use and is flowing but the system has not commanded additive to flow This is the only alarm condition that will cause the additive pump to stop fs This parameter does not apply to the non Pulser methods Over Inject Vol The intent of this parameter is to ensure in all cases where a load is aborted that additive delivery will be ahead of schedule Upon starting a load a number of injections will occur immediately The number of injections that will occur immediately is dependent on the number entered for this parameter If a value of one is entered a single injection will occur as soon as Start is pressed Thro
215. ck the minus sign box To access another screen just click on it from the graphical hierarchy Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 37 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 4 MENU FUNCTIONS The following are brief descriptions of the functions available from the Config Tool main menu 3 4 1 FILE FUNCTIONS The following are brief descriptions of the functions available from the File menu New Creates a new configuration file Open Opens an existing configuration file Save Saves the current open configuration file Save As Saves the current open configuration file with a new name and optionally a new directory Close Closes the current configuration file Exit Exits the Config Tool function 3 4 2 EDIT FUNCTIONS Copy Function permits the user to copy a preset configuration to another preset within the same bay This feature is used for MultiLoad Il products that support multiple load arms and does not apply to SMP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 38 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 39 3 5 TOOL FUNCTIONS The following are brief descriptions of the functions available from the Tool menu 3 6 BOL TICKET BUILDER Use this function to generate a customized meter ticket based on the current configuration file 3 6 1 DOWNLOAD REGISTERS Use this function to download the configuration parameters contained in the MultiLoad II registers from the MultiLoad II to TMS Protocol Smith e LC
216. cond from acquisition Output Pulse Factor A factor can be applied to the pulse output to achieve the desired pulse resolution The pulse resolution can be configured from 0 001 to 50 000 pulses per unit volume or mass Output Pulse Typ When NET output pulses will represent net volumes CTL and or CPL must be configured before pulses representing net volume can be realized The output pulses will represent gross volumes when this parameter is set to GROSS When the parameter is set to MASS output will be Mass It is necessary that density as UOM typ of Mass are populated Alt High Flow Start Delay Set this parameter to delay the entering of the Alt High Flow Rate The Alt High Flow Rate Signal must be active for the entire time otherwise the timer restarts This parameter is typically used with bubble detectors Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Alt High Flow Stop Delay Set this parameter to delay the exiting of the Alt High Flow Rate The Alt High Flow Rate Signal must be not active for the entire time otherwise the timer restarts This parameter is typically used with bubble detectors Permissive Alarm Time Set this parameter to delay the raising of a permissive alarm The permissive must be not active for the entire time otherwise the timer restarts This parameter is typically used with bubble detectors Remote Clear FCM Permits selection of a Flow Control Module FCM and port that wil
217. controlled by corresponding preset s In the sample screen above the driver will not be allowed to load at presets 3 4 5 or 6 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 47 3 9 4 HAZARD STATEMENTS Use the Hazard Registers Configuration screen to define up to five hazard warning statements that will print on the meter ticket after loading Each product can be assigned a hazard code via the Hazard index field on the Product Registers Configuration screen File Edit Tool Report Help 1 tms5 cfg rack3 tle Hazard Desc Hazard Desc UN126 3 GASOLINE FLAMMABLE LIQUID a MISCELLANEOUS Hazard Desc E PROMPT Hazard Desc G PRODUCT Hazard Desc ACCESS CARD Figure 3 13 Hazard Configuration Screen R Do not use punctuation in these fields 3 10 OTHER CONFIGURATION TOOL FUNCTIONS All other Config Tool screens mirror the functionality available and accessible from the MultiLoad II Configuration Menu described in the next chapter Equivalent Config Tool screens are shown after each section describing an area of configuration RCU Setup Presets Meters Components Additives etc The one exception is the Flow Control Module Display screen which is a convenient way to view at a glance how each FCM is currently configured Each I O port is labeled and indicates the Preset Pn Meter Mn Component Cn or Additive An as shown in the sample screens on the next page Clicking on an I O p
218. creen press Next the Preset Status screen displays PRESET 01 STATUS SCREE PRODUCH iow S ulfur Diesel STATUS COMPL ER ROSS 5000 0 5000 5000 ERATURE ESSURE ENS TIEN LOW RATE Next Prev PRES ET 01 COMPONENT 01 STATUS SCREE PRODUCT ak S DIES EL SATS OSS De PER El o T TARGEM LIVER 5000 5000 5000 MPERATURE F RESSURE ENS TY S D EI CL None LOW RATE Pei CR Ei bei e e SS E 5000 5000 5000 24 00C 0 00 0 0 0 00 IDLE METER 5000 5000 2400C Oe Oe 0 0 0 00 EO 0 Next Prev Press the Next key the Additive Status screen displays ADD PRODUCT RECIPE DEL STATUS 1 Red Dye 0 000 Next Prev Press the Next key to return to the Load Screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 0 000 INACTIV 346 Chapter 11 Operation 12 4 4 END LOAD PHASE To end a load the Driver removes the driver card or presses the Exit twice on the Load screen Once all flow has been stopped the MultiLoad Il gathers and archives the transaction information Load data is stored in the MultiLoad II transaction database The transaction is completed Note Starting in Multiload Il and SMP ver
219. creens from the W amp M Menu to the Views and Inquiry Menu Updated Alarm setup screen to display Alarm configurations under W amp M control as Red and restrict saving changes with W amp M switch active Added new configuration parameter level of CONDITIONAL to indicate parameters that can be switched into or out of W amp M control Added Preset Configuration Parameter W amp M Controlled that adds W amp M write protection via screen and remote register access inc Modbus to certain parameters Changed level of Blnd Chk Alarm 3 Blnd Chk Alarm Vol Blnd Chk Alarm Time to CONDITIONAL Added Additive Configuration Parameter W amp M Controlled that adds W amp M write protection via screen and remote access to certain parameters Changed level of Additive Vol Inject Vol Inject Cal Factor Additive Mtr K Factr Additive Mtr Factor Max Pstn Missed Inj Under Add Alrm Inj Over Add Alrm Inj Check Add Tol Time Over Inj Vol level to CONDITIONAL Removed Additive Configuration Parameters W amp M Vol per Inject W amp M Vol factor W amp M Pulses per vol W amp M Pulse Factor since no longer needed Added Component Configuration Parameter W amp M Recipe Percentage to enforce delivery Corrected Meter Proving Screen Meter Factor data entry data column alignment Updated Equipment Configuration Database version to 3 29 01 Added printer multidrop capability to Ticket P
220. ct Preset Level values reported as Where Gb Gr Gp Ge value not to be used for trade Tb Tr Gr Tp Gp Te Ge Gb_ value not to be used for trade Db Dr Gr Dp Gp De Ge Gb value not to be used for trade Nb Nr Np Ne Mb Mr Mp Me Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Tr Gr Tp Gp Te Ge Gb Volume weighted temperature for the blend Db Density for the blend Dr Gr Dp Gp De Ge Gb Volume weighted density for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 288 9 11 MULTILOAD SEQUENTIAL WITH SIDE STREAM BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular Premium sequential main streams Ethanol side stream O Regular Ge Cen M Cor GC C _ D ir HPESHHEO Q Premium za A C7 mP Y asip araa Regular Ethanol meter Meter Level values are reported as Grem M1 Trem T1 Drem D1 OR Dr Grem Ge De Ge Grem Nrem Grem VCFr Trem Drem Mrem Nrem Drem OR Mrem Grem D1 Where Grem Gross volume loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 while flowing Reqular Ethanol Trem Temperature for the Regular Ethanol Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 while flowing Reqular Ethanol Nrem Net vo
221. ct liquid volumes to a reference temperature or pressure Highlight the field and press Enter to scroll through the choices API 54 YG Product name needs to be selected In conjunction with the API table 54YG Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 102 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Action API BIO This API BIO tables are used for Methode from the PTB Community Select API Table Name PTB BIO table combined with API BIO to choose the wanted product Formula V T Vo 1 A1 T To A2 T To 2 A3 T Total VO Volume base temperature V T Volume observed temperature TO Base Temperature 15 C T Observed Temperature A1 A2 A3 Biofuel coefficients API Extrapolated Range When enabled VCF values from extrapolated table ranges can be used for CTL and CPL calculations without raising an API Table Alarm API Gravity For API tables that require the entry of an API Gravity value enter that value here The value should be the API Gravity of the component at 60 F The units are degrees API Relative Density For API tables that require the entry of a relative density enter that value here The value should be the relative density of the component at 60 F Note that Relative Density is unit less Default Density For API tables that require the entry of density enter that value here The value should be the density of the component at 15 C
222. d arm Unit designations are as follows Gallons g Liters L Cubic Meters c Tons t Kilograms k Grams G Pounds p Barrels B Status Scrn Enable this parameter if it is desired to prevent the driver or operator from viewing the Status Lockout screens When this parameter is enabled the driver will be able to view only two screens One is the Load Screen which lists all of the load arms or presets The other screen that will be available is the Control Screen which displays the preset quantity and the remaining quantity of the selected load arm To aid troubleshooting terminal personnel can temporarily deactivate this feature by enabling the Program Key switch This will allow technicians to view the status screens during loading without changing the parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Parameter Load Screen Timeout Preset Slct Timeout Pixel Test Meter Proving Mode Trace Preset Number Trace UAP Level Trace Recipe Trace Adtv Number Trace FCM Number Trace FCM Assignment Chapter 4 General Configuration This parameter will return the user to the Load Screen after a period specified by this parameter Specify the time in seconds The Load Screen is the primary screen that displays all load arms or presets To assist troubleshooting efforts this feature is automatically disabled while the Program Key is activated Preset Select Timeout This parameter determines how long the highlight
223. d as 486 1674 however Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alpha The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Enabling the Canada API Limits bay parameter will extend the temperature range down to 40 C in accordance with Measurement Canada Bulletin V 18 E rev 3 1999 09 19 section 270 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 260 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Table Description ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures 1980 Table 54D to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Density 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 800 1064 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Enabling the Canada API Limits bay parameter will extend the temperature range NMI down to 40 C in accordance with Measurement Canada Bulletin V 18 E rev 3 1999 09 19 section 270 ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting
224. d at the preset level At the meter level configuration default values can typically be used for the primary meter Meter 1 When configuring parameters for Meter 2 enter a value in the Side Stream On Mtr parameter By entering a value of 1 for this parameter Meter 2 is designated to be a side stream of Meter 1 It will probably be necessary to adjust the Flow and Dead Band rates of Meter 2 since the side stream meter is typically smaller than the primary stream s meter Reference the table for suggested settings The Maximum Flow Rate and Minimum Flow Rate parameters for Meter 2 will also need to be adjusted to match the flow meter manufacturer s specifications At the component level configuration the components are assigned to a particular meter using the Meter parameter Component 1 is typically assigned to Meter 1 and Component 2 is typically assigned to Meter 2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 153 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Preset Meter Meter 2 Components 1 amp 2 Component To Meter Assignment Meter Parameter Number of Meters 2 Side Stream on Meter 1 Component 1 Meter 1 Number of Components 2 Low Flow DB Rate 10 gpm Component 2 Meter 2 Ratio Blending Enable High Flow DB Rate 10 gpm Seq Blending Disable 17 Stage DB Rate 10 gpm 2nd Stage DB Rate 10 gom Weights amp Measures Meters Minimum Flow Rate 5 gom
225. d by 100 gallons and the preset quantity is satisfied by flush component which is component 1 The desired 60 40 result would have been achieved in this case if component 2 had been designated as the Line Flush Component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 164 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 9 RATIO BLENDING CONSIDERATIONS EXCLUDING SMP When Ratio Blending all product recipe components are flowing simultaneously Any time Ratio Blending is occurring a flush requirement appears on the Status screen since a mixture of components exists in the line Before the ratio blended load begins the algorithm decides which component to short When the remaining preset quantity is equal to the Line Flush Volume the flow of all blended components is stopped Then the flush stage will begin where only the Line Flush Component is flowing All non flush components in the product recipe must have delivered their required volumes by this time When blends are aborted before flush occurs or before the Line Flush Minimum Volume has been delivered the Line Flush alarm is activated The volume of flush error will be displayed on the Status screen If flush is involved with ratio blending the setting of the Blend Check Alarm can prevent loads of certain quantities from being delivered because the blend will be forced to be temporarily out of specification prior to beginning the flush phase This determination is made before loading starts Firmware Version
226. d command to Draw Customer Logo Added lt esc gt e command to Draw Graphics Bitmap Added lt esc gt g command to Fill Graphics Box with Color Corrected API Table TEC ETH to correctly apply TEC values Was off by 10 on the application of the TEC Corrected spelling of Component in the W amp M change log Corrected TTE reported bug in Modbus 7000 register not resetting HOSTUP timer Corrected new bug that prevented printing tickets after a load Corrected new bug that caused line to not increment when printing details Corrected bug sending a UTF8 character instead of extended ascii to the ticket printer 10 30 09 3 29 02 WJP Corrected bug in ticket printing where line feed character was not printing after each line Corrected communications ports wrong factory default values Corrected bug in display type checking Caused some legacy displays to dim too much with the screen saver enabled Added ability autodetect display type and support QVGA SMP will default to QVGA for unknown displays ML will default to VGA for unknown displays Added identification of display id 0000 for legacy 8 4 displays Corrected bug that prevented alibi log printing on multidropped configurations 11 02 09 3 29 02 WIP released to QA 11 11 09 3 29 02 WJP Added card reader ability into SMP firmware but defaults to disabled 11 16 09 3 29 02 WJP Added ability in view transaction archive details to dis
227. d displaying the correct language and footers with some stand alone UAP and host configurations Incorrectly referencing the driver language for the stand alone driver card database instead of program mode language Picklist footers in 5 program mode UAP database screens Picklist footers in 5 diagnostic screens Incorrectly referencing the default alt langauge instead of the currently selected driver langauge Host commanded picklist footers Incorrectly referencing the driver language configuration parameter instead of the currently selected driver language Messages for Authorizing Transaction Completing Transaction Transaction Done Transaction Cancelled Authorized to Load Please Wait and Keypad Locked Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 414 TDS connection staus messages GPS messages Reprint Ticket CN Prompts and all Meter Screens Language on the Idle Screen Logo images UAP authorization picklists Incorrectly only referencing the driver language for the stand alone driver card database instead of the currently selected driver language Uploaded host messages for Please Wait Insert Card Remove Card Invalid Card Press Any Key for Access and System Unavailable Custom Stand Alone Prompts On display of the card in screen current driver language was being set to the default alt language instead of the driver language configuration parameter Updated native and modbus pr
228. d product selection valves Block Valves etc Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 158 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 6 3 RATIO BLENDING WITH SIDE STREAM Side Stream meters can be added to meter runs that are part of a ratio blending load arm e Aside stream can be configured to serve one of a ratio arm s primary streams e Aside stream can be configured to serve multiple streams of a ratio load arm e Multiple side streams can be assigned to a ratio blending arm e Up to five flow meters can be assigned to a load arm regardless of meter function side stream meter or primary stream meter Regular 2 nd Co rei CN Premium ar lte EEN Wir ro K Figure 5 11 Ratio Blending with Side Stream Application The example shows a single side stream meter serving two primary components of a ratio blender The side stream meter will only flow into one of the primary streams during a given batch In the event that two primary streams are used in a blend the side stream meter will still only flow into one of the primary streams At the preset level define the number of flow meters and components liquids that will be delivered through the load arm In this example there will be three flow meters and three components Enable the Ratio Blending parameter found at the
229. d to replace older FCM units In addition FCM Il is designed to work identically with all MultiLoad products FCM II consists of 8 different module types Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description Chapter 2 System Description 4DCIN 4ACOUT 4 DC Inputs 5 30 VDC 4 AC Outputs 85 250 VAC 6ACIN 6 AC Input 90 140 VAC or 180 250 VAC 6ACOUT 6 AC Outputs 85 250VAC 6DCIN 6 DC Inputs 5 30 VDC 6DCOUT 6 DC Outputs 0 30 VDC ANALOG 4DCIN 4ACOUT RTD Input 4 20mA Input 4 20mA Out 4 DC Inputs 5 30 VDC 4 AC Outputs 85 250 VAC roars e H 2 a H a s a EI kz a 2 AJAA Figure 2 1 FCM H Modules Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 20 Chapter 2 System Description 2 8 INTERNAL I O BOARD All RCU enclosures can support the installation of one Internal I O board The basic functionality of the I O board mirrors the functions of an external FCM but adding a 4 20mA input 4 20mA output and several additional descrete input and outputs An I O board can provide control of one meter run O O O O O O G Wi E z x Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 21 Chapter 2 System Description 22 2 9 INTERNAL 2 METER UO BOARD All RCU enclosures excluding the Division 1 Zone 1 SMP Explosion Proof Enclosure can support the installation of one Internal 2 Meter I O board The basic functionality of the 2 Meter I O board mirrors the functions of two
230. d to seal the switch enclosure and all conduit junction points between the switch and the MultiLoad II to ensure that the W amp M parameters remain secure Consult your local Weights and Measures for specifics A switch input will be considered active with either the external switch OR a configured I O point is active ON Your Weights and Measures inspector may wish to verify the W amp M Key FCM parameter prior to sealing the MultiLoad II s W amp M switch to ensure that W amp M parameters are secure If no external field W amp M switch is installed this parameter MUST be DISABLED IW an external field W amp M switch is installed this parameter MUST indicate the correct field I O port Enter Program Mode gt Configuration gt RCU Setup page down REUW SI Measure on Load Scrn Status Serm Lockout Load Screen Timeout Preset Slct Timeout Pixel Test Meter Proving Mode Trace Preset Number Trace Recipe Trace Adtv Number Trace FCM Number 32 Trace FCM Assignment DISABI Trace Meter Flows DISABL Trace Adtv Volume DISABL W amp M Key FCM DISABLD Next Prev Exi Enter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 32 2 12 GETTING STARTED After exiting program mode and when first powering up the MultiLoad II RCU the Firmware identification will be displayed for several seconds Wier Hey To MEAE SE EE Jan xx 2013 Jan xx 2013 Copyright c
231. data to a printer Amount of time in seconds that MultiLoad II will wait for the Host system to retrieve current load data before totals are cleared This parameter is only valid for Remote Mode This feature is only applicable when operating in stand alone mode no supervisory computer is regulating transaction time If no flow activity or button presses have occurred in the time specified by this parameter the transaction will be terminated and any deliveries will be archived Inactivity Timeout will not occur if either the program or Weights and Measure switches are activated or if in the Proving Mode Enter a value of zero to disable this feature Valid range of entries is 0 60 minutes Enable this parameter to print a Message Log thru a Printer Control Module PCM A Message Log is a record of all activities and alarms on the MultiLoad II and is typically used for troubleshooting After enabling this parameter go to Message Log PCM and assign a PCM This parameter designates the Printer Control Module PCM that will be used as a serial port to send Message Log data to a printer Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 73 Chapter 4 General Configuration No Prox Pull If When this parameter is enabled pulling the proximity card from the captive reader will not Flow terminate the transaction if flow is occurring Sequential blends continue to completion When flow stops on all arms and the proximity card is missing from the reader
232. dded r to diagnostic output for new cygwin terminal Corrected minor compiler warnings For UAP Builds added LUA script processing for multipage BOL generation Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 403 4 9 12 MSH Added archiving of Lua chunks to flash along with transaction in UAP builds Changed logic of TDS thread to allow processing of lower priority tasks even if higher priority tasks fail 4 13 12 Added Modem init string to General Setup screen UAP development Replaced Modem Init String and Modem Dial String with Terminal ID and Bay ID Modem parameters to be dropped when UAP included in all ML Builds Replaced meter type field with disabled on the preset table Added supplier number to UAP terminal profile and preset authorized products tables Added processing of UAP disabled fields in Bay Meter and Preset tables Added handeling of compartment required fields on Bay and TerminalProfile tables Added LUA parsing of bay id and term inal id configuration parameters into LUA Added lookup and error handling for terminal profile and bay table records Updated UAP product authorizations to use terminal supplier number Updated LUA goto find and product authorization logging Added logic to exclude saleable products from preset authorized products is the base components or additives are not present on the additive Added logic to abort LUA processing when a LUA script error occurs 4 2
233. dditive solenoid will be energized by the port O output and the additive meter input signal will be expected at port 7 Ifa calibrated cylinder is used with no additive meter a feedback signal can be sent to port 7 to verify that the piston has completed the injection cycle Enables select additive parameters for this additive to be under W amp M control Enable this parameter if the additive block valve is upstream of the injector When enabled the additive block valve will be opened during additive calibration Choose the type of additive control to use which is one of SolnMtr Solenoid with meter PstnNFB Piston with normal feedback PstnIFC Piston with inverted feedback Pstn Piston with no feedback AnlgMtr Analog valve with meter with PID control Additive P Factor Proportional gain for PID loop only applies to analog valve additive type Additive Time Integral gain for PID loop only applies to analog valve additive type Additive D Time Derivative term for PID loop only applies to analog valve additive type Solenoid Shut Pulses This parameter applies only to the Pulser additive method Its purpose is to compensate for the closing speed of the solenoid valve which may allow consistent over deliveries Compensation is accomplished on a pulse basis rather than a volumetric basis This feature is intended to eliminate the remaining over delivery assuming mechanical adjustments to the so
234. de and will operate under the control of a MultiLoad When the parameter is StndAln the MultiLoad II is in local stand alone operation Message Swap Number of seconds to delay before toggling the Idle prompt The Idle prompt is typically For Delay Access Press Next to Begin or For Access Insert Driver Card Message Hold Number of seconds that a message is delayed after a ESC D command This register is only Delay used for temporary displays by MultiLoad Max GPS Site Distance in meters that the current position must be to a GPS site in the database to be Distance considered located at that site When this value is 0 site location lookup and enforcement is not done ML II Mobile Only Auto Authorize Enable this parameter to bypass security prompts This parameter is intended for stand alone operation when no terminal automation system is used to provide remote authorization and when the MultiLoad II is in a secure location When enabled the MultiLoad II will always remain in an authorized state The Load Screen will always be displayed permitting an operator to select an arm and start loading without entering Identification or PIN data The Load Screen will be displayed whenever the Program Key is in the off position To enter Program Mode activate the Program Key and press EXIT two times Then follow the normal procedure to enter Program Mode After exiting Program Mode turn off the Program Key to automatically return to the a
235. de values Press Enter again to save Then press Next to select the next line and repeat the above When you complete the site on the first screen press next to continue on the next screen The card in display displays Insert Driver Card For Access ba G Mobile A product of Toptech Systems Latitude 28 41 Longitude 081 21 Speed 0 0 MPH Site Toptech Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Heading MultiLoa Ces oe dg d 655 N 113 W 39 22 M Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 136 CHAPTER 5 PRODUCT FLOW CONTROL 5 1 OVERVIEW This Chapter focuses on flow control configuration it discusses the concepts and procedures relevant to effective product flow control Single Component Product Delivery Calibration Using Meter Factor Linearization a TM No Low Flow High Flow First 2nd Final Flow Start g Trip Trip Trip ee FFeFFFseMsseeF Figure 5 1 Flow Profile Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 2 SINGLE PRODUCT DELIVERY The following discussion pertains to a load arm that loads a single component There are five stages that occur while product is flowing Low Flow Start High Flow 1st Stage Trip 2nd Stage Trip Final Trip The digital control valve is the key component of the meter run The MultiLoad Il makes adjustments to the valve based on feedback from the flow meter The flow profile illustrated below shows how each stage progresses throughout a load
236. ded API Tables 54AG 54BG 54CG and 54DG 12 17 11 WJP When reading a configuration from an SD Card any rejected commands are added to the message log 12 21 11 MSH Add Vendor Term ID to Transloading operations 01 03 12 MSH Merge fix from 3 4 31 01 branch Fix issue where printing tickets longer than 60 lines cause the firmware to crash Added range checking to ticket configuration paraemters R200 R206 Increased bspool buffer from 60 lines to 120 lines 2 pages Added safe bspool write routines to prevent writing outside bspool area Added 1 extra line for safety in case any items on the last line wrap to the next line 01 04 12 WJP Added PTB Alibi Log Capability Added PTB Alibi Log Port to Serial Port Selections Com port type updated with the followig assignments 6 ALIBI LOG TEXT PORT 7 MASS METER PORT 8 GPS PORT not selectable on screen without GPS capability 9 ALIBI LOG PTB PORT PTB Alibi Log port also checks handshake lines on COM2 Multidrop supported on COM2 RS232 connections Will poll PTB printer every 15 seconds and report a printer error if no response from PTB printer 1 12 12 WJP Removed degr symbol from AlibiLog output Corrected PTB Alibi Log multidrop functionality Added two pad characters for PTB Alibi Log output 1 17 12 WJP Added ability to inject additive using an analog valve pump using a PID loop control Added additive PID loop variables to the bstat struct Ad
237. ded logging of PID values when Additive Trace is enabled in RCU Setup Replaced Piston Injector Used parameter with Additive Type enumeration with the following assignments ADDITIVE TYPE SOLENOID WITH METER ADDITIVE TYPE PISTON WITH NORM FEEDBACK ADDITIVE TYPE PISTON WITH IV FEEDBACK ADDITIVE TYPE PISTON WITH NO FEEDBACK ADDITIVE TYPE ANALOG VALVE WITH METER Removed Pulse Input Used Piston Input Used and Feedback Stats Inverted parameters Added Additive PID P Factor I Time and D Time parameters Updated Additive Diagnostics to support new injector type Updated Meter Diagnostics new Analog Output logic Updated Additive FCM Configuration routines to support new additive type Need to retest all additive types injecting diagnostics and calibrations Updated analog valve output logic to support additive analog valve T VG GA b i CH Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 401 Need to retest meter diagnostic screen with analog valve output Need to add check for misconfiguration of Analog Valves or Additive Analog Valves attempting to use the same 4 20mA output 01 19 12 WJP Updated the terminal text command Esc K the current character attributes unless on
238. default setting of 150 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings 104 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Action Meter Factor 2 Enter the meter factor that was calculated when proving at the Meter Factor 2 flow rate The meter factor is used to correct the volume indicated at the MultiLoad II display to correspond with the observed gross volume The observed gross volume is typically determined by a proving device H this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at the default setting of 1 0000 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings The allowable range of entries is 0 8000 1 200 Meter Factor 2 Rate Enter the flow rate that was used during proving to find Meter Factor 2 This is the second linearization point When the flow rate is between Meter Factor 1 Flow Rate and Meter Factor 2 Flow Rate MultiLoad II will interpolate a meter factor based on the current flow rate H this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at its default setting of 200 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings Meter Factor 3 Enter the meter factor that was calculated when proving at the Meter Factor 3 flow rate The meter factor is used to correct the volume indicated at the MultiLoad II display to correspond with the observed gross volume The observed gross volume is typically determined by a proving devic
239. ding File Communications Tools Reporting CUSTOM EIER Wei el CH LTE LO UF ET Da tcp el ep HRA APA ee Viz Papel ozs aa Way rey zen Pa Pay Vy a e Help GOAAYTDPBOBVVDA H Bay ACU Index 0 E Alarms Type E E Prompts g S Hazard Messages Unused Line v Alibi Log Labels Unused Line E l E Flow Control Modules FCMs f Products Unused Line Driver Access Ids Custom Logic List 00000 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00001 00002 a 00001 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00001 00003 00002 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00002 00002 00003 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00002 00003 00004 OR 00000 00001 00005 OR 00002 00003 00006 OR 00004 00005 00007 FCM OUTPUT PORT 00004 00002 00006 00009 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00003 00002 00010 COMPONENT R T Open Blk Valve 00003 00003 00011 OR 00009 00010 00012 FCM OUTPUT PORT 00006 00000 00011 00014 ASSIGN 00007 00015 ALWAYS TRUE 00016 NOT AND 00014 00015 00017 FCM OUTPUT PORT 00006 00005 00016 00019 ASSIGN 00012 Ka Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 360 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 13 4 WRITING Custom LOGIC Each line of the Custom Logic routine is created using some or all of the five fields in the Custom Logic screen The Index and Type fields are always used Three fields that follow the Type field are determined by the function selected in the Type field To create a line of Custom Logic enter an Index number in the Inde
240. ditive level functions are affected by the interrupted communication This alarm will automatically clear when communications are restored Check the Diagnostic menu under FCM Com to determine if the I O board or FCM is communicating ADTV PERM AUTO Additive Permissive Permissives can be set to affect specific additives in multi additive load arms When the Additive Permissive signal is lost loading will stop on the load arm if the additive is being used The alarm will auto clear when the signal returns The alarm message that appears to the operator is configured via the MultiLoad Configuration Tool at Additive Alarms Alarm 1 UND ADTV REMOTE Under Additized alarm The load is stopped when the additive becomes under additized by the number of injections specified by the Under Add Alarm Inj OVR ADTV REMOTE Over Additized alarm The load is stopped when the additive becomes over additized by the number of injections specified by the Under Add Alarm Inj VALVE FLT PROGRAM Additive Valve Fault occurs when additive flow continues after the injection solenoid has been commanded to close When the volume specified in Valve Fault Alarm Volume has passed the additive meter after it has been commanded shut an alarm will be raised The relevant block valve and pump outputs will be dropped in an attempt to stop flow The Pump kill output will be activated if it is used A Pump Stat alarm message will occur on other load
241. does not exceed 12 per bay The two bays served by a swing arm will each have an MultiLoad II RCU Inputs and outputs associated with a swing arm s flow meter and control valve must reside on an external FCM s that are common to both MultiLoad II RCUs This FCM will receive the flow meter s input and operates the control valve s for this swing arm and will communicate with the RCUs of both bays but not simultaneously A swing arm detector switch and a relay are used to make the appropriate communication connection between the swing arm FCM s and the selected bay MultiLoad II RCU Each swing arm will employ two detector switches and one switching relay Please see Figure 7 1 RCU Bay 1 Primary RCU Bay 2 Secondary L Le FCM 0 24 vdc 24 vdc E ss s DE La 1 e 7 mm SS x UU D Swing Arm Swing Arm p Detector Switch Detector Switch P 2 Bay 1 Bay 2 a o B 142 amp O Relay Coil Ei 19 2 26 4 vde 13 5 1 9 3 o a Le 2 10 EE 10 6 e 1 O H 3 11 i 4 Wire RS 485 l a 4 a D gt gt 7 i e A 4 12 i FCM 1 n 2 A I l l N C Relay Contacts i ers ee See Primary Bay l econaary Bay I Ed He i l Ki o I 2 il l oc I i 2 I i l l ER i D i gt S Sap Fem 3 L i mmm H l B i i S Im 1 I j l ee I Fem Swing Arm FCMs
242. e Pressure Adjusted Displays the observed pressure as a result of applying the pressure offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 6 VIEWING DENSITY From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Density After selecting the preset and meter the Density screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 DENSITY Density Unadjusted 1 Density Offset 2 Density Adjusted Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Density Unadjusted Displays the real time density Density Offset Displays the current Density offset value which is the difference between the Density Unadjusted value and the Density Adjusted observed density value Density Adjusted Displays the observed density as a result of applying the density offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 319 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 7 VIEWING RELATIVE DENSITY From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Relative Density After selecting the preset and meter the Relative Density screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 RELATIVE DENSITY Relative Density Unadjusted 0 5000 l1 Relative Density Offset S 0000 2 Relative Density Adjusted 0 5000 Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Relative Density Displays the real time relative density Unadjusted Relative Density Displays the current Relative Density offset value which is the difference Offset between the Relative Density Unadjusted value and the Relative Densit
243. e Auto Batch Authorize Deliver in Typ BlkValve Open Delay B V Open Alarm Time B V Close Alarm Time Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 When non zero and operating in stand along mode this value will be the default preset volume to load If there is only one authorized product no prompting will occur Maximum preset volume allowed When enabled if operating in stand alone mode a transaction is authorized and the program mode switch is inactive the system will attempt to auto authorize the batch If only one product is authorized to be loaded on this arm and the default preset volume is valid no prompting will occur This parameter when NET is selected will allow preset quantities to be entered as net volumes and delivered as net volumes CTL and or CPL must be configured before net delivery can be realized Each preset in the bay can be configured independently of the others for gross or net delivery When MASS is selected will allow preset quantities to be entered as mass and delivered as mass CTL and or CPL must be configured before mass delivery can be realized Each preset in the bay can be configured independently of the others for gross or net delivery Also the RCU setting UOM for mass needs to be maintained otherwise an IFVCONFIG alarm will be raised If this parameter is selected on the GROSS delivery typ preset entries will be in gross and delivery will be based on gross volumes Set this parameter to delay t
244. e If this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at the default setting of 1 0000 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings The allowable range of entries is 0 8000 1 200 Meter Factor 3 Rate Enter the flow rate that was used during proving to find Meter Factor 3 This is the third linearization point When the flow rate is between Meter Factor 2 Flow Rate and Meter Factor 3 Flow Rate the MultiLoad II will interpolate a meter factor based on the current flow rate If this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at its default setting of 400 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings Meter Factor 4 Enter the meter factor that was calculated when proving at the Meter Factor 4 flow rate The meter factor is used to correct the volume indicated at the MultiLoad II display to correspond with the observed gross volume The observed gross volume is typically determined by a proving device If this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at the default setting of 1 0000 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings The allowable range of entries is 0 8000 1 200 Meter Factor 4 Rate Enter the flow rate that was used during proving to find Meter Factor 4 This is the fourth linearization point When the flow rate is between Meter Factor 3 Flow Rate and Meter Factor 4 Flow Rate the MultiLoad II will interp
245. e CARD READER TYPE BUCKET NONCAPTIVE 2 define CARD READER TYPE SLOT CAPTIVE 3 define CARD READER TYPE SLOT NONCAPTIVE 4 define CARD READER TYPE IBUTTON 5 04 29 2013 PS Increased firmware number to x 31 11 for Mass changes 05 01 2013 PS Added Raizen Logo 05 03 2013 PS Added new feature that promptsl to 4 can be used in custom logic remark entry value will stay until next driver enter new value Added new feature that Alibilog can print all 5 prompts when they are not blank prompts can contain any data Also added 5 new alibilog labels for the 5 prompts default names are Stockholder Customer Account Destination Driver 05 04 2013 PS Added new fifth standalone Prompt updated all protocols can be also used on standalone BOL Enhancement all prompts are getting clear at the end of the load only in standalone mode Added new feature that output pulse on Preset Level can also be Mass 05 06 2013 WJP Update UAP Set Max Preset routine to ignore limit when Max Load Qty from TDS is 0 or blank 05 9 2013 WJP Added debug code to assist with incorporating new TFT displays Added TEST NEW DISPLAY precompiler flag to force display of the display diagnostic screen on powerup Added a screen to adjust and apply changes to the display parameters when th TEST NEW DISPLAY precompiler flag is defined 05 11 2013 PS Enhancement of Custom Logic
246. e card number 00000000 99999999 When reading a TWIC card the Card Reader Test screen displays CARD READER TEST Good Reads 000057 Card pulls 00000 Parity 00000 LRC 00000 Timeouts 00000 7099770037000079 17 17 0000153067170992 Good Read No Error Exit Clear The diagnostic data reported is 1111 2222 333333 4 5 66666666667 88889 TWIC Card FASC N that was read from the card Where 1111 Agency Code 2222 System Code 333333 Credential Number 4 Credential Series 5 Individual Credential Issue 6666666666 Person Identifier Used as Card Number in Access ID Database 7 Organizational Category 8888 Organizational Identifier 9 Person Organization Association Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 221 8 3 IBUTTON READER EXCLUDING SMP Note If the MultiLoad II is a SMP or does not have a iButton installed this test is not applicable Use the iBUTTON function to verify the operation of ibutton and a driver card From the DIAGNOSTICS MENU choose iBUTTON Reader DATATE EE ME iButton Reader COM Loopback Serial Ports Network Test Meters Components Additives Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com Health Health Next Prev The iButton Reader Test screen displays After placing a ibutton at the reader the screen will update after each read of the ibutton iBUTTON DIAGNOSTICS Read Count 00005 EEN DEE ID
247. e changed by following the procedures that follow At the Low Flow Volume field press Enter to key in the volume to be delivered at the Low Flow Rate Press Next to advance to the following field At the Low Flow Rate field press Enter to key in the flow rate Press Next to advance to the following field At the Expansion Coefficient field press Enter to key in the expansion coefficient of the proving container Use the table below for values If the value is unknown leave the value set to zero Press the Next button to advance to the Rate field Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 355 Prover Material Coefficient of Expansion Stainless Seraphin 0 00004770 C Stainless Seraphin 0 00002650 F 304 SS 0 00005184 C 304 SS 0 00002880 F 316 SS 0 00004536 C 316 SS 0 00002520 F 10 Under the Rate heading are the flow rates that have been established for proving If the rates are no longer appropriate they can be changed at this field Press Enter to change the proving Flow Rate or press the Next button to advance to the rate s meter factor MF field If it is necessary to change the rate the corresponding meter factor MF should be changed to 1 0000 If a rate and or Meter Factor MF has been changed it will be necessary to return to the Flow Rate field and select the new rate Use the Prev key to return to the Flow Rate field Press Enter until the new r
248. e cleared when the Program Switch is activated W amp M This alarm can be cleared when the W amp M Switch is activated as Some alarms cannot be settable to Auto Clear This happens when the alarm is not default at AUTO Clear as It is not possible to set an alarm level to W amp M or chance parameters on an alarm when the alarm level is set to W amp M unless the W amp M switch is active Changes in both of these cases will be logged in the W amp M change log Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Alarm Setup The Alarm Setup screen displays ALARM S Bay Preset Meters Components Additives Next Prev The Bay Alarm Setup screen displays Preset Meter Component and Additive screens are similar Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 107 BAY ALARM SI BAY FCM GROUND DO ENIRUS DO OVI S DO ESD PERM DO BAY PI S DO EE z DO EEN S DO A eI TO ALL S DO Ee S EEN BALA BALA An optional alarm setup feature is the ability to promote an alarm after a number of alarm occurrences to another level In the Additive Alarm Setup screen shown below the Injection Fault alarm will be Driver clearable for the first 3 occurrences but then is promoted to Remote clearable The occurrence count and return to the original alarm level will be reset on the next transaction authorizati
249. e following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Relative Density at 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the Relative Density of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of Relative Density is from 0 6110 1 0760 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Relative Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasolines at observed 1980 Table 24B temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Relative Density at 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the Relative Density of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of Relative Density is from 0 6535 1 0760 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Relative Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of light hydrocarbons at observed 1980 Table 24E temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a NGL or LPG propane Relative Density at 60 F i
250. e labeled INACTIVE Additives that are used in the current delivery are labeled READY When an injection is commanded the word READY will change to INJECTING during an injection cycle The RECIPE column will maintain a running total of the quantity of additive that is required at any given moment in the batch The DEL column shows the quantity of additive that has actually been delivered ADD PRODUCT ROTERE DECFSTATUS 1 Adtv O01 0 071 0 061 INJECTING 2 Adty 002 0 000 0 000 INACTIVE Next Prev Exit Stop Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 206 Chapter 6 Additive Control 207 6 11 ADDITIVE FLUSH FEATURES Usually different additive brands are delivered through a single load arm For these reasons it is necessary to have the main product line flushed of additive by the time a load has ended Flushing may be as simple as stopping injections at a certain point in the load and permitting the remaining product to clear the line of additive by the time delivery is complete Or flush pumps and valves may be used for applications that have demanding flush requirements such as red dye MultiLoad Il has additional features to support hardware that has been designed for these applications 6 11 1 BASIC FLUSH FEATURES To flush the line additive injections can be programmed to cease at a predetermined batch volume permitting the volume remaining in the load to force the lingering additive out of the line Often it i
251. e method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F NMI p ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures 2004 Table 24D to the volume at 60 F using the method outlined in Chapter 11 1 6 1 of the 2004 standard Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Relative Density at 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F NMI p ASTM1250 This table provides the CTL factors of a petroleum product at observed temperatures and 2004 Table 24X Relative Density This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the reference temperature and units of measure for density pressure and temperature ASTM1250 This table provides the value of relative density at 60 F of crude oil at observed 2004 Table 23A temperature and density Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Current Temperature and Density is available NMI Relative Density at 60 F is unknown Reference Temperature is 60 F ASTM1250 This table provides the value of relative density at 60 F of gasolines at observed 2004 Table 23B temperature and density Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Current Temperature and Density is available
252. e of zero seconds density alarms will be raised instantly A small delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when density is momentarily out of range The density alarm timer will only run when a density alarm is not active and a batch is currently authorized on this preset Density 4mA Enter the density that will represent the lowest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA Density 20mA Enter the density that will represent the highest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA Density Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce a density offset to correct the indicated density to the observed density Pressure Sensor This parameter indicates the use of a pressure sensor for the selected meter Enable this parameter if a pressure sensor is used to monitor pressure at the flow meter Pressure Sensor FCM Enter the FCM for the pressure sensor Enter a value of 0 for the internal I O board Default Pressure This is the pressure that the API table will use when the pressure transmitter is undergoing maintenance Do not adjust this value unless the pressure transmitter is out of service Return the value to 999 9 when the transmitter has been placed back into service Alarm Low Pressure Enter the pressure that represents the lower pressure limit of the API table in use When pressure falls be
253. e stream amount This bug did not impact any volumes reported on the transaction 6 27 11 WJP To prevent a false API TABLE alarm when side stream flow is ahead of main product stream only call API calculation when component batch gross del hund signed gt 0 6 2 11 WIP Added Analog Valve 4 20mA output controls to Meter Diagnostics screen 7 1 11 Wd Added hardware toggle of COM 2 DTR and RTS signals on startup with TX enabled to sync outputs and inputs with optical isolator TO 7 5 11 WJP Added clear of API table alarm when exiting the program mode temp comp screen 7 5 11 WIP release Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 396 Corrected Web RCU Ditto processing of the stop key 7 19 11 WIP Added Preset Component and Additive product names to the alibi log 7 19 11 WIP Added new configuration W amp M protection type of CONDITIONAL DENSITY Added new configuration parameter W amp M Density Lock that will conditionally move default density default relative density and API gravity parameters under W amp M protection 7 26 11 MSH For CN Builds added truck no carrier id tds_ retry interval seller id consignee parameters No register access For CN Builds added comments is manual bol transaction id and cosignee to transaction archive header TDS access only No register or print access 7 28 11 WIP Added Boot Screen and R000 extension to identify custom built firmwa
254. e temperature Selected API tables are available in MultiLoad Il to be used for specific liquids and specific reference temperatures All of the calculations make use of two variables the variables are the Alpha of the liquid and the Delta Temperature of the liquid Alpha is the coefficient of expansion of the liquid Delta Temperature is the difference between the measured temperature of the liquid and the reference temperature The API tables employed use reference temperatures of 60 F or 15 C Some API tables calculate the Alpha based on the liquid temperature and the API gravity of the liquid The API gravity is a user entered value which is dependent on the type of liquid being measured Other API tables calculate the Alpha based on the liquid temperature and the relative density of the liquid Still other tables calculate the Alpha based on the liquid temperature and the density of the liquid Liquid density like API gravity is dependent on the type of liquid being measured In the C tables Alpha is user entered CPL Calculation The Correction factor for Pressure of Liquid CPL is used to correct the Gross Volume to a volume at the liquid s vapor pressure After applying the CPL to the Gross Volume the resulting net volume represents the area that the liquid would occupy if the liquid were at its vapor pressure The calculation for CPL involves three variables Variables include the current liquid pressure the liquid s vapor press
255. e using the Product Setup functions These functions should be used only in Local stand alone mode In Remote mode product setup information should be supplied by the TMS Zb In order to define Alphabetic product names and descriptions locally it is necessary to use the MultiLoad Configuration Tool Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Products The Product Setup Menu screen displays PRODUCT SETUP MENU Product Setup Preset Product Setup Next Prev This set of functions enables the user to define base components additives single saleable products Product and blended saleable products Blind which are composed of two or more base components with or without additive s as For MultiLoad II installations working with TMS product setup information is loaded automatically via TMS therefore product setup information does not have to be configured manually in the MultiLoad Il If communication with TMS fails the product information will be immediately available for stand alone operation Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 9 PRODUCT SETUP Use the Product Setup functions to define products when the MultiLoad II is configured for Local stand alone mode The strategy here is to define base components and base additives first and then use these as building blocks to define products Navigate to this screen as Program
256. e volume that is actually flushed in a load is not exactly equal to the Line Flush Volume The Line Flush Minimum Volume value must be less than the Line Flush Volume but it must represent an acceptable volume of flush The Line Flush Minimum Volume value will be displayed on the Status screen during loading as the flush occurs the value will decrement to zero If a flush does not meet the minimum volume a Line Flush alarm will activate In the event of a Line Flush alarm the amount of flush volume required to satisfy the Line Flush Minimum Volume would be displayed This information will help terminal personnel decide what corrective action to take The last step is to identify the component to be used to flush the line at the end of each load Enter a numerical value that represents the flush component in the Line Flush Component parameter The parameters discussed in this section are found on the Preset Setup screen shown here PRE 1 Preset 001 SETUP Line Flush Min Vol Line Flush Comp LE from Maten LLE from EIrSES LE from Last High Delay Start Delay Chic Start Voll Chk Restart Vol Chk Alarm gt Chk Alarm Vol Chk Alarm Time On Lead Comp DISABLD Next Prev Exi Enter Whenever the flush component is being delivered outside of the flush stage the minimum flush requirement on the Status screen will return to zero as the Line Flush Minimum Volume is achieved
257. e volumes in non resettable totalizers The numbers on the right indicate volumes in resettable totalizers Use the CLR key to zero out the resettable totalizers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 315 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 3 4 VIEWING ADDITIVE TOTALIZERS From the View Totalizers Menu select Additives After selecting the preset and additive the Additive Totalizers screen displays E 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 TOTALIZERS Total Gross 000000000 000000000 Authorized Gross 000000000 000000000 Unauthorized Gross 000000000 000000000 Meter Creep Gross 000000000 000000000 CLeaR Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Total Gross Total gross volume through the additive meter Authorized Gross Total authorized gross volume through the additive meter Unauthorized Gross Total unauthorized gross volume through the additive meter Meter Creep Gross Gross amount of volume designated as meter creep Meter creep volumes are small amounts of volume that have been indicated by the meter when flow is supposed to be idle Meter creep can be caused by a small leak excessive line shock or electro magnetic interference Notes Numbers are displayed in 1 1 000 of unit of measure A decimal point is implied three positions to the right of the least significant number The numbers on the left indicate volumes in non resettable totalizers The numbers on the right indicate volu
258. e with the serial port over the Ethernet via the socket address shown on the Network Setup Screen 7000 to 7002 Alibi Log indicates the Alibi Log port PTB Alibi indicates the PTB Alibi Log port GPS indicates the NMEA 0183 protocol GPS Port ML II Mobile Only MASS MTR indicates a serial connection to one or more mass meters R When Print or Alibi Log is configured to be on COM 2 the CTS handshake line MUST be connected or a PRNTR ERR will be raised preventing loading See the installation manual for COM 2 connection information Only one port may be defined as a FCM Print or Alibi Log otherwise a Port usage conflict s message will display upon re boot a5 When a port is configured as GPS the last three transaction prompts will be populated with Latitude Longitude and Site Name Information Exiting program mode is required to have the new setting take effect It is possible to use 2 host ports at the same time but the host system should only talk with one of the two ports at the same time E To learn more about the Message Log selection see Views and Inquiries 65 Chapter 4 General Configuration 66 4 3 NETWORK SETUP Use the Network Setup function to define the network parameters for the Ethernet port Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Network The NETWORK SETUP screen displays ETWORK SETUP MAC Address OOP SU ez 60s 90200 Network DISABLD IP Address 1927 o
259. eader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logig Keypad Display Unicode PEM Com FCM Health PCM Health REV Bay Presser Next Prev 2 The FCM COM Diagnostics screen displays FCM COM DIAGNOSTICS 00 Ok 3 An I O board or FCM that is not communicating will display ERR 4 When communications are restored the ERR message will change to OK Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 232 8 11 PCM COMMUNICATIONS Use this function to determine if a PCM is communicating with the MultiLoad II 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select PCM Com DIRA G NOGET CI M Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logig Keypad Display Unicode ECM Com FCM Health PCM Health RCU Bay Preset Next Prev 2 The PCM COM Diagnostics screen displays PCM COM DIAGNOSTICS 00 Ok 3 A PCM that is not communicating will display ERR 4 When communications are restored the ERR message will change to OK Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 233 8 12 FCM HEALTH STATUS The FCM Health Status feature can be used to detect intermittent communication failures between the MultiLoad Il and the internal I O board or external FCMs 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select FCM Health DIERA GNOG EIC M E Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Cu
260. eader Type DISABLD Remote Mode StndAln Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1 DEET EE Password 2 KAKKKKK Password 3 KKKKKKK Password 4 KKK KKK Password 5 KKKKKKK Modem Init AT amp F0 amp B1 amp C1 amp D0S0 1 Modem Dial Host Login TDSTEST TDSTI Terminal SPLC 123456001 mm Terminal Name Toptech Terminal Enter Exit Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration RCU Address Address of the MultiLoad II RCU unit The values are 001 099 Card Reader Type Enable or Disable the card reader If enabled following options are possible Excluding SMP BUCKET BUCKET NON CAPTIVE SLOT SLOT NON CAPTIVE iBUTTON Remote Processing Remote StndAln which means Standalone other modes are possible as UAP depending on the needs Swing Arm Secondary When swing arms are used one bay RCU will be designated as the secondary RCU Excluding SMP Enable this parameter to identify the RCU as secondary When this parameter is disabled the RCU will be considered primary for swing arm purposes If no swing arms are involved in the bay disable this parameter Password Program Mode password There may be up to five passwords entered Each password can consist of seven alphanumeric characters The terminal manager should assign a password to each person group For example employee 1 will be password 1 When employee 1 accesses the Weights amp Measurements Menu hi
261. eceeeeeaeeseneeceneeceeeesaseseneeceentessnnenens 177 RER Ee 178 6 5 6 Configuring a Pulser Input Additive 2 2 cccccceeccceneeceneeeceneteensececaceceuneessaeeseneeceeeeceeeesassseneeseneeessnnetees 178 6 5 7 Method 4 ANALOG ADDITIVE uui cesccccesccesssscsencecenececenesesnaecaeaceceneessaessaneecseneessnsessassgeaeesseneesenassnas 179 6 5 8 Configuring a Analog Additive 0 cccccccceecceesseceeneeceneeeceaeeesaaececaeecueeessaesseneeseeececsuneesassseneecenneeeeeassees 179 6 5 9 Method 5 Common Meter with Multiple Additives ccccscccccceceetceceeeeeeneececeeeceneeesnaeseeneeceneeeeteaetees 180 6 5 10 Additive Block Valves Onh neen neen nanen nnen neen 182 6 5 11 Configuring a Common Meter with Multiple Additives 2 cccccccceseeeneeceteeecesetesesetseeeesnneessenttees 183 6 6 General Additive Set p siisii ennea etnan aaaea eaaa aaa an ae eaa EEA aaaeei ae iraan anties 186 6 7 Additive C li rati OM rar ed SEENEN EEN Gennes steps note EEN SE 193 GZA lt AddIIVe Cal FUNCHOR EE 193 6 7 2 Automatic Calibration Eumchon neen neen nenen nene nenn 194 6 7 3 Piston Type Additive Caibraton nenn nennneennnene neen 198 6 8 Calculate Additive Veollnlect e a EEN EENS SEN 199 6 9 Remote Additive Calibration cseccceeceeseeesseesesneeenseeeeeneeescaeseseeeeneeeessaesesaaesaaeeeeneeeeseesesseeeeneeeeeeas 201 6 10 Additive Status SCKCOM es T r r e a a a a r evocezsesez ensues e A ea nep eaire rapa Ea Hae aeaa meias 206
262. ech support This alarm should not occur during normal operations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 109 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 7 2 PRESET ALARM SETUP Alarm Meaning PRE FCM The MultiLoad Il has lost communication with the I O board or FCM This message indicates that preset level functions are affected by the interrupted communication This AUTO alarm will automatically clear when communications are restored Check the Diagnostic menu under FCM Com to determine if the I O board or FCM is communicating PRE PERM Preset Permissive When the Preset Permissive signal is lost loading will stop The alarm AUTO will auto clear when the signal returns The alarm message that appears to the operator is configured via the MultiLoad Configuration Tool at Preset Alarms Alarm 1 SWING ARM The swing arm alarm will activate when the swing arm is not in the proper position for Excluding SMP AUTO loading The alarm will auto clear when the swing arm is positioned properly NO LNFLSH Excluding SMP DRIVER No Line Flush alarm This alarm will occur when the Minimum Line Flush Volume has not been met for the load Check the Status screen for the amount of line flush that needs to occur to have a properly flushed line BLK VALVE Block Valve Alarm This alarm activates when a Preset level block valve has not opened in the time dictated by the Block Valve Open Alarm Time parameter This
263. ect the component a Select the API CPL table Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Highlight this field and press Enter to scroll through the table choices When the desired table appears press Next to advance to the following field Below is a list of API Table options and the conditions under which they are used Table 11 2 2 This table provides CPL factors for correcting volumes of light hydrocarbons at observed pressure and temperature to the volume that exists when the liquid is at its vapor pressure Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a NGL or LPG propane Relative Density at 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the Relative Density of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of Relative Density is from 0 350 0 637 Test temperatures and pressures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CPL based on the test temperature test pressure and the Relative Density The test temperature test pressure and Calculated CPL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Table 11 2 2M This table provides CPL factors for correcting volumes of light hydrocarbons at observed pressure and temperature to the volume that exists when the liquid is at its vapor pressure Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a NGL or LPG propane Density at 15 C is known
264. ed for additive flow meter injectors The procedure however is identical PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered Vol 0 TO00 S Ice 1 Beaker Vol Oe LOGI 0 2 Beaker Vol CCs 405 000 Piston Cycles 5 Additive Vol Inject 0 0200 New Vol Inject Cal Factr 10699 Enter Save The following is a screen sample for a Piston type additive injector after calibration Notice that the last three fields Piston Cycles Additive Vol Inject and Vol Inject Cal Factr are specific to the piston type of injector Additive The Additive Volume per Injection parameter is applicable to all additive methods When Vol Inject using a piston system with or without feedback enter the volume of the calibrated cylinder as indicated by the manufacturer or calibration service When the additive method involves a piston and an additive flow meter pulser enter the cylinder size Vol Inject Cal This factor will correct the calibrated cylinder volume to a gross observed volume as Factr actually measured during the additive calibration process When an additive meter is involved with or without a piston system set the parameter to 1 0000 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 198 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 8 CALCULATE ADDITIVE VOL INJECT This feature can be accessed at the Additive Calibrate screen The feature is a calculator that can assist the user in determining optimal vol injection sizes based on known data such as the
265. ed for sequential blenders If more than one meter is assigned to the blender assign the component to the appropriate Meter Assign the output that will signal the Block Valve to open If applicable assign an output signal to force the block valve to close An optional Block Valve Status signal can be configured Assign an input point to receive the feedback signal The block valve input and output signals can be assigned to any available port For FCM l ensure that the Opto module is appropriate for the type of voltage that will be used Block valve open and closing alarm times can be configured If the Block Valve Status signal is not received in the specified time block valve alarm will be raised and the load will be stopped The Pump Start port assignment for the component is configured on this screen Additionally there is a Pump Kill output that can be assigned to provide a signal to remove power from the pump An option also exists to configure a Pump Status signal to provide positive verification that a pump is running The pump related input and output signals can be assigned to any Flow Control Module The 1st Stage Trip and the 2nd Stage Trip parameters are defined on the W amp M Setup Screen Enter the volume and rate that defines 1st Stage Trip and 2nd Stage Trips Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 146 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control If more than one component is assigned to the preset repeat this procedure for the other compone
266. ed for single product loading The sequence is repeated for each component that is used in the product recipe The first component of the blend will cycle through the following phases Low Flow Start High Flow Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 1st Stage Trip 2nd Stage Trip Final Trip The load begins in the Low Flow Start stage When the Start button is pressed the control valve opens and the flow rate ramps up from zero to the Low Flow Start flow rate Both the normally open NO and normally closed NC solenoids of the digital control valve are energized causing the control valve to open If sufficient pressure is available the Low Flow rate should be achieved in seconds When the flow rate rises to within the Low Flow Dead Band Rate the normally closed NC solenoid of the control valve will de energize this action locks the valve in position in order to maintain the desired flow rate The initial opening of the control valve can be delayed by the Pump Start Delay parameter and or the Flow Start Delay parameter The optional Pump Start Delay may be used to allow time for the pump pressure to build to a suitable level The control valve will open immediately after the Pump Start Delay time has expired if the Flow Start Delay parameter is set to zero Otherwise the control valve opening will be further delayed by the time period specified by the Flow Start Delay parameter These parameters are located i
267. ed in the recipe LOWPERC The lowest percentage of the components defined in the recipe Blend Adjust Start Volume applies to ratio blending only After the volume specified in this parameter has been delivered the system will start adjusting the ratio of the blend when it is found to deviate from the tolerance by the amount specified in the Blend Adjust Deviation Percentage parameter The deviation must occur for the period specified by the Blend Adjust Time parameter before any adjustments are attempted This parameter is intended to give the flows from the multiple meters an opportunity to stabilize after an initial start from zero flow No blend ratio adjustments are made until after this volume has been delivered This setting should be configured to be greater than the Low Flow Start Volume and less than the Blend Check Start Volume so that adjustments can begin after the transition to High Flow Blend Adjust Restart Volume applies to ratio blending only After the volume specified in this parameter has been delivered the system will begin adjusting the ratio of the blend when it is found to deviate from the tolerance by the amount specified in the Blend Adjust Deviation Percentage parameter The deviation must occur for the period specified by the Blend Adjust Time parameter before any adjustments are attempted This parameter is intended to give the flows from the multiple meters an opportunity to stabilize after a Restart from zero flow No
268. ed without entering the program mode by pressing the following 5 key sequence 4448 NEXT KS The View Transactions screen can be viewed and printed without entering the program mode by pressing the following 5 key sequence 4447 NEXT Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 328 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 329 10 12 View MULTILOAD II MESSAGE LOG The MultiLoad Il Message Log is a real time event log All authorization attempts flow starts flow stops alarms raised or cleared and various other events are logged with their dates and times Particular events will also cause totalizer values to be logged From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Message Log The View Message Log screen displays VIEW MESSAGE 13 32 14 PROGRAM MODE ENTE 13 32 11 Transaction Done ISSA ie Preset 1 Batch Cleared 3225700 Preset 1 Flow Stopping at 500 13 23 14 Preset 1 Elow starting at 0 13 29 13 Preset 1 Batch Authorized prod PRD001 vol 500 13 29 10 Transaction Stand Alone EE E Next Prev Exit Every two lines constitute a full message with the time of the log entry The most recent entry will be displayed at the top of the screen To view earlier entries press the Next key to scroll through the earlier entries Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 330 CHAPTER 11 SD CARD 11 1 OVERVIEW On MultiLoad Il CPU boards manufactured after 1 1 2011 there exists an S
269. elay 5 seconds Component Setup Pump Start Delay 3 seconds Component Setup Low Flow Restart Volume 15 gallons Preset Setup For detailed parameter descriptions please refer to the appropriate section in Chapter 4 General Configuration Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 138 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 2 1 HIGH FLOW As the High Flow stage begins the MultiLoad Il energizes both of the digital control valve s solenoids This permits the line pressure to increase the valve s open area Once the High Flow rate is achieved the normally closed downstream solenoid will be de energized This is done in an attempt to lock the valve in a position to maintain the desired flow rate Periodic adjustments are made to the valve as the flow rate drifts above or below the High Flow Dead Band rate Dead Band rates are configured in the Meter menu Product flow will continue at the High Flow rate until the 1st Stage Trip Volume is reached The following is a table of parameters that affect the High Flow stage characteristics Parameter Default Setting Screen Location High Flow Rate 600 gallons per minute Preset Setup High Flow DB Rate 40 gallons per minute Meter Setup Excess Flow Alarm Rate 800 gallons per minute Meter Setup 5 2 2 1 STAGE TRIP The 1st Stage Trip phase begins when the remaining volume reaches the volume indicated by the 1st Stage Trip Volume parameter located on the Component Setup
270. emperature Updated all API TABLE 2004 to limit message logging unless in api table setup screen On transaction viewer Corrected displayed density index to start at l Corrected displayed preset component meter and additive index to start at 1 Only display temp and pressure on preset component and meter details Updated Dens field name to D G RD Corrected previous page opeartions on detail picklist display Changed firmware version to 3 4 31 04 11 18 11 MSH Added new bay level alarm to CN CONFAR builds DB ERROR which will be set when the local database is full 11 16 11 WJP Increased min default max preset range from 999 999 to 9 999 999 Updated default ticket layouts to handle 7 characters for gross and net values Updated alibi log to handle 7 characters for gross and net values Added preset name to alibi log NMI Req Updated configuration output routines to display 7 characters on UNSIGNED INT and ZP UNSIGNED INT types Updated transaction detail screen and transaction detail details screen to handle 7 characters for gross and net values Corrected alignment issues and overflow indication on additive volume Check against xpos values that could cause lockups on ticket printing of invalid ticket configurations 11 28 11 WJP Corrected recently introduced bug in computing a VCF from the CTP and CPL for 1980s tables Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 400 11 29 11 WJP Ad
271. enabled it will override force on the Display Hundredths parameter View Totalizer and View Transaction screens will display 1 100 resolution NOTE When this parameter is enabled the Host register interface serial and Ethernet will return volume data with an implied 2 decimal places for totalizers transaction details not additive and current delivered volume MRS command Configuration or program changes in the host system may be needed when using this option See the MultiLoad communications manual for more details Enable this parameter to W amp M protect the parameters density relative density and API Gravity on meter as on component level Also the communication update to these parameters is blocked Print Ticket Enable this parameter to print a Meter Ticket from the serial printer port Form Feed After Tckt Print Ticket on PCM Ticket PCM Meter Arch Timeout Inactivity Timeout Print Msg Log on PCM Message Log PCM This parameter is used in conjunction with the Ticket Print function enabled the MultiLoad II will send a form feed after each Ticket Print If this parameter is Enable this parameter to print a meter ticket thru a Printer Control Module PCM A meter ticket is a printed record of the transaction After enabling this parameter go to parameter Ticket PCM and assign a PCM This parameter designates the Print Control Module PCM that will be used as a serial port to send Meter Ticket
272. ending by indicating the number of flow meters that will be assigned to the preset Typically for ratio blenders two meter runs are employed Up to five meter runs can be used if desired Indicate the number of components that will be delivered through the load arm There will be one component for each meter that exists at the load arm Enable the Ratio Blending parameter PRE 1 Preset 001 Number of Meters Number of Components Number of Additives Sequential Blending Ratio Blending W amp M Controlled Proving Flow Rate Overrun Alarm Vol Low Flow Start Vol Low Flow Rate High Flow Rate Next Prev product selection block valves are employed The next step is to configure the Blend Check parameters Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 PRE 1 Preset 001 Line Flush Vol ine Flush Min Vol Line Flush Comp Take L F from Last Alt High Flow Rate Stop Start Delay Blod Chk Starc Vol Blnd Chk Restart Vol Blnd Chk Alarm Bind Chk Alarm Vol Bind Chk Alarm Time Blind On Lead Comp Next Prev Excess Flw Alrm Rate Low Flow Restart Vol Proving Low Flow Vol S DISABLD ENABLED DISABLD 600 1100 5 50 15 IES 600 50 atch Take L F from First Sequential Blending can also be performed on the same load arm if S Take L F from M ENABLED DISABLD DISABLD 600 0 60 10 3000 25 10 DISABLD
273. er Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 410 3 modes Continuous push Continuous push with scheduled periodic release Scheduled periodic releases All signals are added to the Bay Diagnostic screen New alarm added DEADMAN 01 01 2013 PS New feature FKEYPADON and FKEYPADOFF this gives the capability to disable the keypad Stop button will still work to ensure driver can always stop the load Also the Idle and the Menu screen are not keypad locked Modbus commands added Reg 7008 and 7009 Copyright changed to 2013 01 02 2013 PS Enhancement Default startup mode if keypad is locked or unlocked 01 02 2013 WJP Added the ability for bol printing on ethernet printers 01 03 2012 PS Add Bsw to Webinterface Transaction View 01 04 2013 PS Changed UNAUTH FLOW voucher that we take alibilog labels for GROSS and NET also remove approval chars 01 11 2013 PS Added new bio ethanol API tables PTB Method 3 for Products E5 E10 E80 E85 E100 Benzin Petrol Diesel B5 RME B7 RME B100RME B5 SME B7 SME B100SME Corrected Density 15degrees has a fixed value for BIO components Added picklist routines and read register for Multimate 01 12 2013 PS Enhancement UNAUTH FLOW Voucher will use the real time unauth totalizer amount instead of the clear amount on the component level This is to ensure the full amount is always on the alibilog 01 15
274. er the all programs folder ET foptech cient Components L Ka Toptech Systems gt MultiMate 1 FA Tanterh Sweteme Tne gt 6 Following screen will appear Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool MultiMate File Communications Tools Reporting Help ooann ghena aanp MultiMate A PRODUCT OF TOPTECH SYSTEMS Connect to a Device Ticket Builder Create a New Configuration Logo Image Editor Open an Existing Configuration Firmware Upgrade Utility Command Console Recent Connections Reports adebug Weights amp Measures Change Log 10 54 49 75 Transaction Report 192 168 241 16 Message Log 10 54 205 5 10 54 205 30 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 50 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 51 3 11 2 CONNECTION TO THE MULTILOAD II Setup a connection to the MultiLoad II via serial tms5 6 or ethernet 1 Goto the menu Communications and select Connection MultiMate ene Tools Reporting Help Connection P Bw 2 Download Prompts Download Registers l t C y Upload Registers E SYSTEMS n geeee ES we 291 ACHT D poe 2 A new screen will pop up In this screen in the left upper corner the button new connection should be pushed Communications Setup Description serewdtedtdr ryrtytryrSt 192 168 1 4 192 168 1 4 10 54 206 101 10 54 206 101 sim sim upe upe assy assy MTL1 MTL1 Terminal OIL 192 168 5 21 192
275. erature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Product Min Temp Max Temp Min Dens20 Max Dens20 LPG 50 75 498 700 Gasoline 25 75 700 800 Diesel Lubes 25 125 800 900 Crude Oil 0 200 900 1200 heavy oils Corrected density at observed degree will be calculated and stored Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 265 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures ASTM 1250 This table provides the API gravity at 60 F of crude oil at observed temperature and API 2004 Table DA gravity Use this tables if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil Current temperature and API gravity is known NMI API gravity at 60 F is unknown ASTM 1250 This table provides the API gravity at 60 F of refined products at observed temperature and 2004 Table 5B API gravity Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product NMI Current temperature and API gravity is known API gravity at 60 F is unknown ASTM1250 This table provides the API gravity at 60 F of lubrication oil at observed temperature and 2004 Table 5D API gravity Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is lubrication oil Current temperature and API gravity is known NMI API gravity at 60 F is unknown ASTM1250 This table provides the API gravity of a petroleum product at observed temperatures and
276. ere it is needed This design lowers equipment and installation costs significantly compared to traditional presets If you need to add a preset to the loading lane you don t have to purchase wire and install an entire traditional preset device All you have to do is snap one or more Flow Control Modules into the FCM enclosure and configure accordingly In addition to providing all of the original functionality found in the previous generation units FCM Il introduces a variety of new features in a compact new package Modular Construction FCM Il is available in eight varieties featured below This modular construction simplifies the process of FCM mapping to field devices by appropriating each FCM II model with just the right amount of I O for its designated purpose In addition FCM Ils mount on DIN rail and require no wiring between units 24Vdc and serial communications are bussed This substantially simplifies installation and wiring Compact Packaging Every FCM II occupies considerably less space than the previous generation FCM This smaller footprint ranges from 1 3 1 6 the size of the original unit This allows for more I O per enclosure size and provides an opportunity to mount several FCM Ils in a compact explosion proof enclosure Compatibility FCM and FCM II utilize the same protocol and can co exist on the same RS 485 bus Furthermore FCM Ils are backward compatible with previous generation FCMs allowing them to be use
277. erial Ports Network Test Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next 2 The Keypad Test screen displays 3 Type 1234567890 Prev IE NCEYANID AE CE Checksum Errors 00000 Firmware Ver 000 Heartbeat Received 59478 Missed 00000 Keys Pressed 1234567890 Press any key that is suspected of failure Exit CheaR If a key is operating properly its character will be displayed on the diagnostic screen each time the key is pressed If the character for a particular key does not appear on the screen when pressed or appears multiple times it may be necessary to replace the keypad 6 Any counts in the Checksum Errors or Missed could also indicate a keypad failure Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 229 8 8 DISPLAY TEST Use this function to test the MultiLoad II display 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select Display DIE AG Es IN OS IEA IE Gas ME Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logic Keypad prs olay Unicode ECM Com PCM Com Heal 2 The Display Test screen displays As part of the Display test the screen cycles through a Color Bar Test Red Color Signal Test Green Color Signal Test Blue Color Signal Test and several Font Tests Any missing colors or corrupt fonts could indicate a display or display cable failure Red Color Sign
278. es 324 Details Indicates the number of detail lines for this transaction Optional configurable prompts Stockholder ID Customer ID Account ID and Trailer ID ML II Mobile Only When GPS Communication is configured Prompts 3 and 4 will contain the Latitude and Longitude position at authorization When Max GPS Site Distance is configured Prompt 2 will contain the Site Name and Distance from the site Prompts If a COM port is defined as PRINT The 1 Print Transaction is displayed Pressing 1 will print the currently selected transaction The 2 Print Transactions xxxx yyyy when a second transaction is viewed xxxx yyyy is the Bol of the last two transactions viewed indicating the range of transaction to print Pressing 2 will print the selected transaction range If this is a reprint of the transaction the printed transaction will be labeled as Duplicate The Transaction Detail e Press Enter to view detail data for the transaction products gross net temp etc Screen displays VIEW TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR BOL 0003 Pe L Prod Gross Net Temp RE PRD OOL 499 499 042 3C or 2 BASOOT 499 499 042 3C Next Prev VIEW TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR BOL 0003 E L Prod Gross Net Temp G1 1 PRDOOL 499 54 499 54 0423C OL 2 BASOOL 499 54 499 54 042 3C Next Prev 1 100 resolution is displayed when the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M parameter is enabled P
279. essure The net volume is calculated by multiplying the gross volume by a Volume Correction Factor VCF In MultiLoad II applications the VCF is the product of two different factors These factors are the Correction factor for Temperature of Liquid CTL and the Correction factor for Pressure of Liquid CPL The CTL and CPL features can be enabled simultaneously or they can be enabled independent of each other VCF CTL x CPL Gross volume is the Raw Volume multiplied by a meter factor MF The Raw Volume is the unfactored meter pulses divided by the flow meter s K factor The units of the K factor are pulses per unit of volume For example the K factor of a 3 inch turbine flow meter is 50 pulses per gallon nominally The sequence below can be used to conceptualize how pulses from a flow meter are used to determine Raw Volume Gross Volume and Net Volume Raw Volume Pulses K factor or Raw Volume Pulses x 1 K factor Gross Volume Raw Volume x MF Net Volume Gross Volume x VCF CTL Calculation Tables established by the American Petroleum Institute API are used to provide the Correction factor for Temperature of Liquid CTL MultiLoad II calculates the CTL in accordance with API Standard 2540 The CTL is used to correct the Gross Volume to a volume at a reference temperature After applying the CTL to the gross volume the resulting net volume represents the volume that the gross volume would occupy if it were measured at the referenc
280. etected 1 Verify that meter pulsers or pre amps are receiving power 2 Verify pulser connections to the I O board 3 Ensure that channel A and channel B pulsers are not wired in reverse 4 Check for evidence of reverse flow by viewing the meter totalizer backflow REMOTE gross DENSITY This alarm indicates that the value measured by the Density or Relative Density Sensor has deviated from the range specified by Alarm Low Density and Alarm High Density or Alarm Low Relative Density and Alarm High Relative Density parameters Other potential causes include a disconnected sensor or an inappropriate value in the Default Density or Default Relative Density field Go to program mode menu Views amp REMOTE Inquiries gt Density or Relative Density to observe the current density reading RTD ERROR This alarm indicates that the temperature measured by the RTD has deviated from the range established by the Alarm Low Temp and Alarm High Temp parameters Other causes REMOTE include a disconnected sensor or misconfigured Temp Module Type parameter Go to program mode menu Views amp Inquiries gt Temperature for further diagnostic messages VALVE CTL Valve Control error This alarm indicates that the control valve was unable to maintain flow within the Dead Band DB Rates prescribed in the Meter menu This alarm may indicate a need for valve maintenance or that insufficient pressure is available to control the valve Use the Component Status screen
281. eter M1 while flowing Regular Trm Temperature for the Regular Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 while flowing Regular Drm Density for the Regular Meter D1 Volume weighted average Density measured while flowing Regular OR specified for meter M1 Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nrm Net volume loaded for the Regular Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mrm Mass loaded for the Regular Meter Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Grm Tr Trm Dr Dr OR Drm Nr Nrm Mr Mrm Where Gr Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Tr Temperature for the Regular component Dr Density for the Regular component Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 278 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 279 Premium meter Meter Level values are reported as Gpm M1 Tpm T1 Dpm D1 OR Dp Npm Gpm VCFp Tpm Dpm Mpm Npm Dom OR Mpm Gpm Dpm Where Gpm Gross volume loaded for the Premium Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 while flowing Premium Tpm Temperature for the Premium Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 while flowing Premium Dpm Density for the Premium Meter D1 Volume weighted average Density measured while flowing Premium OR specified for meter M1 Dp Density specified for the Premium component Npm Net volume loaded fo
282. eter factors If meter factor flow rates are not entered in ascending order this alarm will occur For example Meter Factor Flow Rate 2 must be greater than Meter Factor Flow Rate 1 If meter factors vary significantly from one another this alarm may occur Check the meter factor parameters for entry errors FCM WDT REMOTE FCM Watch Dog Timer Timeout This alarm indicates that an error has occurred with the processor on the I O board or FCM Reset the alarm and attempt to resume operation If the alarm recurs repeatedly it may be necessary to replace the I O board or FCM Contact Toptech technical support for assistance FCM TMOUT REMOTE FCM Timeout This alarm is initiated by the I O board or FCM if it is not receiving communication from the MultiLoad II and is forced to de energize outputs for safety The I O board will only initiate this alarm when it is actively controlling flow or energizing outputs Flow will be stopped on the I O board if this alarm occurs When communications are restored between the I O board and the MultiLoad Il it will be possible to clear the alarm and resume operations VALVE FLT PROGRAM Valve Fault The control valve has been commanded to shut but flow has not stopped The alarm will activate when the volume specified in the Valve Fault Alarm Volume parameter has passed the meter after the valve has been commanded to close When the alarm occurs component block valves will be commanded t
283. eter pulses received Del Volume Meter volume delivered Input mA Current meter 4 20mA signal Analog Meter Input Only Rate Current flow rate Turning on both Upstrm Val and Dnstrm Val at the same time will open the digital control valve and may result in flow if pumps block valves and dry breaks are set correctly may result in flow if pumps block valves and dry breaks are set correctly U Driving the mA output to any value greater than 4 mA will open the digital control valve and Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics If the meter is configured as a Krohne mass meter the following screen will appear PRE 1 MTR 1 KROHNE DIAGNOSTICS Mass Flow 000000kg Min Volume Flow 000000USGal Min Density 050000kg m3 Temperature a SS arse Mass Total 002545kg Volume Total 670395USGal 1 Communications 2 Sensor Info 3 General Setup 4 Zero Calibration Si Density Calibration 6 Service Page 7 Register Access 8 Service Register Acc Boa Mass Flow The current flow rate in the configured mass flow units Volume Flow The current flow rate in the configured volume flow units Density The current density in the configured density units Temperature The current temperature in the configure temperature units Mass Total The total mass of product flowed since power on of the mass meter Volume Total The total volume of product flowed since power on of the m
284. f 00001 id 1 07 03 23 54 Has W amp M Access Next Prev The most recent entry will be displayed at the top of the screen To view earlier entries press the Next key to scroll through the earlier entries Note To quickly return to the most recent entry press Exit and re select the View option Printing the W amp M Change Log Select Print to have the log printed A serial printer must be connected to Com Port 2 of the MultiLoad II to print this log Com Port 2 must be configured as Print on the Communication Setup screen to print the W amp M Change Log Each event will contain two lines of data The first line will consist of the following 1 Reference Number Up to 1000 entries will be retained in the log After 1000 entries have been logged the oldest entry will be dropped No reference number will be repeated until 65 535 events have been entered in the log Preset Identification This field describes the preset load arm that is relevant to the event This value will always be 1 on MultiLoad Il SMP Example Pre 01 indicates that an event has occurred relevant to load arm 1 The numeric designation that follows the Pre prefix is an arbitrary designation made by the facility engineer This is established during system configuration Component or Meter Identification This field will indicate that a component level change was made or that a meter level change was made Since a load ar
285. fference between the Temp Unadjusted and Temp Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed temperature in the Temp Adjusted field in which case the Temp Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 TEMPERATURE Temperature Unadjusted F42 2 TC 1 Temperature Offset a 2 Temperature Adjusted k 2TG Status Ok Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset as The temperature offset cannot exceed or 3 degrees If you enter a value greater than 3 in this field the value will change to 3 and the temperature will be adjusted by no more than or 3 degrees Likewise if you enter an observed temperature that exceeds the Temp Unadjusted value by 3 degrees the offset will only change by 3 degrees Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 298 Temp Unadjusted Displays the Resistance Temperature Detector real time temperature Temp Offset Displays the current temperature offset value which is the difference between the Temp Unadjusted value and the Temp Adjusted observed temperature value Temp Adjusted Displays the observed temperature as a result of applying the temperature offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 299 9 14 TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION AND VCF CALCULATOR Use the Temp erature Comp ensation function to configure an API table for volume Correction
286. ficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is not known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F needs to be maintained under component level Coefficient of Density is fixed at 1 14 10E 3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Blend range from E60 to E100 Table PTB BIO This API BIO tables are used for Methodes3 from the PTB Community Select PTB BIO table combined with API BIO to choose the wanted product Formula V T VO 1 A1 T TO A2 T T0 2 A3 T T0 3 Vo Volume base temperature V T Volume observed temperature To Base Temperature 15 C T Observed Temperature A1 A2 A3 Biofuel coefficients Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Product Type A1 A2 A3 Ref Density E5 1 2422 x 10 3 9 1811 x 10 7 5 3906 x 10 9 738 858 E10 1 2415 x 10 3 9 8712 x 10 7 6 6333 x 10 9 741 447 E80 1 1129 x 10s 6 5049 x 10 7 8 8556 x 10 9 781 410 264 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures E85 1 1023 x 10 3 6 0110 x 10 7 8 7249 x 10 9 784 549 E100 1 0720 x 10 3 4 5474 x 10 7 8 3383 x 10 9 793 949 Benzin Petrol 1 2361 x 10 3 6 7788 x 10 7 3 8516 x 10 9 733 919 Diesel 8 2239 x 10 4 5 1745 x 10 8
287. fined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined Exit When more than one Saleable Product is defined the Driver will be given a product selection screen during authorization Note Base components Comp can also be made available for loading if desired Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 129 Chapter 4 General Configuration 130 4 12 5 CONFIGURATION TOOL PRODUCT REGISTER CONFIGURATION SCREEN See Local Product Definition and Assignment for information on this screen File Edit Tool Report Help 1 tms5S cfg rack1 tle E BAY Product Id oun Product Index 979 a FCM Prod Short Name RUL Hazard index g E MISCELLANEOUS PROMPT d Components Additives ACCESS CARD t HAZARD Product Name Regular Unlead 4 12 6 CONFIGURATION TOOL RECIPE CONFIGURATION SCREEN Pile Edit Tool Report Help i ADDITIVE 2 ADDITIVE 3 RECIPES o PRESET 2 METER 1 METER 2 METER 3 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 3 ADDITIVE 1 ADDITIVE 2 ADDITIVE 3 Prod Id Regular Unlead RUL Regular Unlead w Chey RUL Y Regular Unlead w Shell SHEUN Y Regular Unlead w Gen Genun MUL Midgrade w Chevron MUL Midgrade w Shell Shehi 1 w Gen Gent Premium Unlead PUL Premium Unlead w Chevron SUL Premium Unlead w Shell ShePr Premium Unlead w Gen GenPr Regular Ethanol REGET Reqular Ethanol Chevron RULET a a E REGET S 23 2 bi x ii
288. fining saleable products however the Product Recipe screen becomes central to product definition Defining a Single Saleable Product In the following sequence a single saleable product is created based on a single base component and a percentage of an additive On the Product Selection screen highlight the product to edit PRODUCE EE GI Hei Prod PRDOO2 Prod 002 Prod PRD003 Prod 003 Prod PRDOO04 Prod Prod PRDOO5 Prod PRDOO6 Prod Next Prev Press Enter will select the product to edit The Edit Product screen displays PDE PRODUCT Long Desc Default Product 001 Short Dese Prod ooi Hazard Taz 0 Type 2 Product Edit Product Recipe Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 123 Chapter 4 General Configuration 124 Fill in the fields and for Type select Product as shown in the example below EDLE PRODUCE Code 87UNL Long Desc OCTANE87UNLEADE Short Desc 87UNLEAD Hazard rdx 10 Type Product Edit Product Recipe Next Prev Select Edit Product Recipe The Product Recipe screen displays PRODUCT 87UNL 87UNLEAD R undefined Adiws s0 0000 underimned Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 125 Chapter 4 General Configuration Configure the Base Component and Base Additive as shown in the example below PRODUCT 87UNL 87UNLEAD
289. formation on the serial port Moved the Date amp Time setup from the W amp M Menu to the Configuration Menu Changes are still logged in the W amp M change log Updated FCM 2 tester code to use fast polling Updated FCM 2 tester code to display DC power output status Updated firmware version to 3 28 10 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 380 06 26 08 3 28 10 WJP Fixed bug that caused the output pulse configuration to incorrectly reserve port 1 on IO boards should be port 10 and raise a configuration alarm when anything else was assigned to the port Since output pulse can be on port 1 fcm or 10 io board and it is not known what board is attached do not report output pulse assignment conflicts 07 17 08 3 28 10 WJP Added ml_gps c to build to support GPS operations To support the building of a linux ML simulator task Updated Makefile to build a linux ml_sim executable SIMULATE precompiler definition will be used to enable simulation code SIMULATE will exclude MAC address viewing and modification SIMULATE will include a driver to display the virtual display on the screen SIMULATE will include FEXIT command to save NVRAM and terminate application SIMULATE will include command line switches to supporting enabling the terminal display keypad device address and device socket port 07 28 08 3 28 11 WJP released to Measurement Canada Updated firmware version
290. fset between the Relative Density Unadjusted value and the Relative Density Adjusted observed relative density value Relative Density Displays the observed relative density as a result of applying the relative density Adjusted offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 305 9 18 API GRAVITY CALIBRATION Use the API Gravity screen to calibrate API Gravity for a Meter 5 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose API Gravity After selecting the preset and meter the API Gravity screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 API GRAVITY Gravity Unadjusted 100 5 Gravity Offset H Gravity Adjusted SEA Next Prev 6 If the observed API Gravity is different from the unadjusted API Gravity displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the difference between the API Gravity Unadjusted and API Gravity Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed gravity in the API Gravity Adjusted field in which case the API Gravity Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 API GRAVITY API Gravity Unadjusted 1000 5 1 API Gravity Offset a 2 API Gravity Adjusted EE G Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset API Displays the real time relative density GravityUnadjusted API Gravity Offset Displays the current API Gravity offset value which is the difference between the API Gr
291. g a transaction If a swing arm s batch is stopped prior to delivering the preset quantity and the swing arm is moved out of the bay the batch on that arm is considered complete If the arm is returned to the bay while the transaction is still in progress there will not be an opportunity to finish the interrupted batch When the arm returns to the bay the status will indicate that the batch is complete This batch must be cleared by pressing the CLR button before another batch can be started on the arm If the transaction is terminated card out without returning the arm and manually clearing the batch the batch will be archived along with all other batches that occurred in the bay during the transaction 7 3 RELAY AND SWITCH LOGIC When a swing arm is moved out of a bay the swing arm s FCM s are removed from that bay s MultiLoad II RCU FCM communication circuit Normally when an FCM fails to communicate with a Remote Control Unit an FCM communication failure alarm occurs But since the FCM s is associated with a swing arm it is expected that these FCMs will drop out of the communication circuit from time to time If a true FCM communication failure occurs due to open circuits or due to FCM board failure the failure will be detected by the RCU that has the active swing arm detector switch The bay with the active swing arm detector switch is expecting to see all FCMs associated with the swing arm When a swing arm is in a neutral position
292. g lines to TDS Added internal reference number to all log messages 02 22 12 WJP Updated transaction processing to store any authorized component or additive in transaction even if flow volume is zero Corrected recent bug with additive normal piston switch feedback incorrectly configuring the FCM version 14 or greater for inverted piston switch input On R910 message log register max two digit counter to 99 for values over two digits 02 24 12 WJP Now storing the target additive volume in the net field of the additive transaction detail record Updated the view transaction archive screen to display the additive target and delivered volume Updated the view transaction archive screen to display the currently configured VCF table for each component 2 28 12 WIP Added additive target volume and percent deviation to Alibi Log output 3 3 12 WIP Added log file cleanup and resync when writes to the SD Card are interrupted power cycle TODO Delete oldest log file when freespace is limited TODO Develop design on time zones on time sync updates from TDS 3 6 12 MSH Added support in web server for download of files from SD card Added logging of user input selections during prompting sequence CN builds Added download of CN specific databases including locomotives vendors vendor BOLs and drivers 3 18 12 WIP For UAP Builds increase BOL max lines from 80 to 4 pages 66 4 For SIMULATION builds a
293. g low flow volume Corrected bug in Preset Net Totalizer not correctly showing preset net volume with side stream Component 1 Net was also impacted but transaction volumes were not affected For meter creep on an unauthorized batch preset product code is now CREEP instead of 000000 first product Product description on ticket displayed at MeterCreep Updated ticket printing routine to print product code from transaction and not the currently loaded product list Updated set clock routines and serial interface to return an error when values are out of range Increased range of low flow alarm time from 65 535 seconds to 999 999 seconds Added new Preset configuration parameter Auto Batch Authorize to support auto batch authorizations when product and volume are already specified and program key off in standalone mode Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 395 2 10 11 WJP release Added BP Customer Logo 2 21 11 WIP release to QA Updated 4449 inspection mode to directly access W amp M change log bypassing views amp inquery menu Corrected bug with density and relative input density format in the Temp Comp screen 2 24 11 WIP release to QA For AT91SAM9G45 flash added ability to properly handle top boot flash first 100 boards shipped May cause later transactions not to be written to flash
294. g the switch into the active states Each cover will also be stamped as W amp M or Program to indicate function OPERATING MODE PROGRAM FUNCTION OGABLED WEGHIS AND MEASURES OGASLED OPERATING MODE PROGRAM FUNCTION DISABLED WEIGHTS AND MEASURES DGABLED PROGRAM MODE PROGRAM FUNCTION ENABLED WEIGHTS AND MEASURES DGABLED WESHTS and MEASURES MODE PROGRAM FUNCTION ENABLED WEIGHTS AND MEASURES ENABLED Figure 2 3 Type 2 Program W amp M Switches Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 2 11 3 TYPE 3 PROGRAM W amp M SWITCHES Type 3 switches consist of two separate external magnetic bolts one for Program Mode Access and one for W amp M change access Program or W amp M access is achieved by removing the corresponding bolt Each bolt has a small hole that can be sealed with a wire and lead seal to detect unauthorized access Both bolts are also have an external fold down cover that can be locked to prevent moving someone from removing either bolt The cover will also be stamped as W amp M or Program to indicate the function of each bolt L Figure 2 4 Type 3 Program W amp M Switches Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 29 Chapter 2 System Description 2 11 4 PROGRAM MODE W amp M DIP SWITCH Two DIP switches on the CPU board can also provide the closure of the Program Mode W amp M switch contacts When the MultiLoad II does not have the external Program Mode W amp M switch ins
295. gged as being reset to defaults on every startup Added debug precompiler directive label LOG TERMINAL CLEAN to assist with capturing screen shots for manuals Corrected bug that prevented the polling of the program and W amp M switch when system marked as not configured Corrected bug that caused corruption of preset batch temp pressure density values Updated firmware version to 3 27 06 Updated database version to 3 27 06 for RCU Setup Database 03 27 07 3 27 07 WIP released to Pemex Bug in 3 27 00 3 27 06 firmware checked Version instead of Product ID on firmware uploads Added dummy version strings to firmware image to allow uploading by 3 27 00 2 27 06 firmware Updated firmware version to 3 27 07 04 05 07 3 27 08 WIP released Fixed bug in custom logic port selection screen where Select was displayed instead of Port x in picklist Updated firmware version to 3 27 08 06 27 07 3 28 01 WIP released to QA Per Measurement Canada changed Side Stream Blending Logic as Back calculation of main product stream component temperature is no longer done Blend meter temperature pressure density is passed back to the main product stream component level Blend meter temperature pressure density is passed up to preset level and side stream temperature pressure density is not passed up to preset level Blend meter volume is passed up to preset level and side stream volume is not passed
296. gize both solenoids this permits the line pressure to reduce the valve opening The solenoids will remain de energized until the 2nd Stage Flow Rate is reached The 2nd Stage Flow Rate is configured in the Component menu When the 2nd Stage Trip flow rate is achieved the MultiLoad II will energize the normally open upstream solenoid This is done in an attempt to lock the valve in a position to maintain the desired flow rate Periodic adjustments to the valve will be made as the flow rate drifts above or below the 2nd Stage Trip Dead Band rate Product flow will continue at the 2nd Stage Trip flow rate until the Final Trip Volume is reached The 2nd Stage Trip phase ends when the Final Trip Volume has been reached Parameter Default Setting 2nd Stage Flow Rate 150 gallons per minute Component Setup 2nd Stage Trip Volume 20 gallons Component Setup 2nd Stage DB Rate 40 gallons per minute Meter Setup 5 2 4 FINAL TRIP The Final Trip Stage is the last phase of delivery where product flow is authorized When the time specified in the Final Trip Max Time parameter has elapsed flow must be completely stopped When the Final Trip Max Time expires the preset will transition to the Idle state If flow is still detected past this period and if the Overrun Alarm Volume has been exceeded the Overrun Alarm will activate The Final Trip Volume parameter will command the valve to close prior to reaching the preset quantity to compensa
297. hapter in the order they appear on the Configuration Menu Functions related to Additive configuration and calibration is covered separately later in this manual 4 2 COMMUNICATION SETUP Use the Communication Setup function to define the communication parameters for each serial communication port Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Communication The COMMUNICATION SETUP screen displays COMMUNICATION SETUP Com2 115K Com0 None Com2 None Com0 8 Data Com2 8 Data Com L Stop Comz i Stop Com0 Single Com2 Single Como FCM Com2 N A Coml 38 4 Coml None Comi 8 Data Qomi 1 StoP Coml Single Coml Host Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 63 Chapter 4 General Configuration The three parameter groups correspond to the three available Communications ports Com0 Com and Com2 Starting with Com work your way down the list modifying the communication parameters as necessary Press the Enter button to toggle the selection on each field Press the Next button to move to the next parameter When you finish Comp continue with Com and Com2 When you are finished press Exit to save the changes and return to the Configuration Menu line 1 Baud Rate Select the baud rate Choices are 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2 for 19 200 38 4 for 38 400 57 6 for 57 600 115 2 for 115 200 and 230 for 230 400 baud line 2 Parity Select the parity The choices are None
298. has no accounts defined you will go directly to the Confirmation screen Select Account Number 0000001 ABC ACCOUNT ONE 0000002 ABC ACCOUNT TWO 0000003 ABC ACCOUNT THREE Next Prev Select the account or key in the account number at the prompt The load Confirmation screen displays If the information is incorrect press Prev to return to the Customer Selection screen If the information is correct CONFIRMATION 0000001 ABC OIL 0000002 ABC ACCOUNT TWO TRAILER 12345678901 Next Prev press Enter to proceed to the Load Screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 339 Chapter 11 Operation 340 On MultiLoad II On MultiLoad II SMP PRODUCT 1 1 STATUS Pre s et 0 0 il PSESE IDLE Preset 002 TOLE IDLE PRESENS 0 GALLONS ExitLoad Enter Preset Next Prev ExitLoad Enter Pick 1 100 resolution is displayed when the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M parameter is enabled Select a loading arm and press Enter to preset a product to load The Product Preset screen displays PRESET SCREEN UCT Tow Sulfur Dressel ET quantity fj Enter Preset Quantity Press If multiple products can be loaded selection can be done on this screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation 341 Driver will key in the desired volume to load e g 5000 and press Enter
299. hat will result in a load of 1000 volumetric units PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALCULATE l Additive Percentage 0 05000 2 Additives Vol Per 1000 0 5000 Ll additive Vol Per 10 00 JEE 4 Additive Pacing Rate AYO EO Additive Vol Inject 0 02000 Additive Vol Inject hee Enter Save Figure 6 8 Vol Inj Calculated The third field will show how many cubic centimeters of additive will be delivered in 1000 gallons This field is only valid if the main product is delivered in gallons The fourth field will show the resulting pacing rate The pacing rate is how often an injection will occur based on the recipe percentage entered In the example an injection will occur for every 40 units of volume that are delivered If delivery is in gallons the value of 40 often provides a nice moderate rate of injection When using units other than gallons enter the equivalent of 40 gallons in the pacing rate field A vol injection calculation will result that should provide a moderate injection rate Following the pacing rate is the calculated volume per injection This value should be used when configuring the additive Press the Enter button to have this value implemented for the selected additive Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 9 REMOTE ADDITIVE CALIBRATION The Remote Additive Calibration feature enables the technician to select in advance all of the additives that will be tested in a calibration se
300. he additive quantity required for the entire load has been delivered While loading the Additive Injector Valve opens and closes periodically to inject additive into the product stream The Additive Injector Valve will be open long enough to deliver the quantity specified by the Additive Volume per Injection parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 181 The following schematic illustrates the electrical relationship between the injection outputs and the solenoid operated valves The outputs are represented by switches in the diagram During a load only one of the Additive Block Valve outputs will be active The output will remain active energizing its corresponding solenoid for the load s duration The Additive Injection output will close and open periodically as injections are required energizing and de energizing the injector solenoid L1 L2 be are g Additive Injection Output Injector Valve Solenoid b e E Z Additive Block Valve Additive Block Valve Output Add 1 Solenoid Add 1 ger G C Additive Block Valve Additive Block Valve Output Add 2 Solenoid Add 2 Figure 6 4 Electrical Schematic using Injector Valve Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 182 6 5 10 ADDITIVE BLOCK VALVES ONLY Additive Block Valve Add 1 Additive Figure 6 5 Scheme using Block Valves to Inject In the diagram above the solenoid operated Additive Block Val
301. he local network IP Host IP address of the Host TMS system This address is used during Network Diagnostics to set ping packets to the host computer Socket Port This is a read only parameter and indicates the socket port number 7734 the Host TMS system must connect to establish a serial connection across the serial port The type of socket connection is a SOCKET_STREAM Com 0 Port Read only parameter indicating the socket address the Host TMS will use to communicate with this serial port if it is configured as INTERNET 7000 Com 1 Port Read only parameter indicating the Socket address the Host TMS will use to communicate with this serial port if it is configured as INTERNET 7001 Com 2 Port Read only parameter indicating the Socket address the Host TMS will use to communicate with this serial port if it is configured as INTERNET 7002 HTTP Port The Socket address client computers will use to contact the built in HTTP server A value of 0 disables the HTTP server Default is 80 Admin Password Password for the Admin user Admin has read write access means access to rcuditto with keypad and upload files The admin user name is admin lower case User Password Password for the User User has read access means access to rcuditto with no keypad and is not allowed to upload files The user user name is user lower case Printer1 IP To print a ticket to a network printer give the IP address in of that Printer Firm
302. he opening of a block valve by a period specified in seconds When a preset level block valve is employed it will be commanded to open after the delay time has expired The delay timer will commence at the moment that the Start button is pressed Specifies a time in seconds to allow the preset level block valve to open If the valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback signal is not received within the specified time Specifies a time in seconds to allow the preset level block valve to close If the valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback requirement is not satisfied within the specified time 86 Chapter 4 General Configuration Non Proportional Non proportional Blending is a type of blending which is used when a certain arm has Blending blendings from 5 to 95 percent Instead of keeping the load continues in spec the non proportional blend will be out of spec the whole time until the full load is finished Multiload will pre calculate the target for all components This is working for ratio as side stream blends The flow of the products Multiload will check in the recipe which is the biggest component The biggest component will run alone in Low Flow when the main component goes in High Flow the other small components are also starting in High Flow The High Flow rate for each component is defined on the Component Level Component High Flow rate This rate should be near max fl
303. he parameter labeled Density Sensor and enable it d Find the parameter labeled Density Sensor FCM and enter a zero e Find the Density 4 mA parameter Enter the density that will represent the lowest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA f Find the Density 20 mA parameter Enter the density that will represent the highest density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA g Press the EXIT key until the Main Menu is displayed Enter the Configuration Equipment Setup Component menu Select the appropriate Preset and Component h Find the Alarm Low Density parameter Enter a density value that represents the lower density limit of the API table in use i Find the Alarm High Density parameter Enter a density value that represents the upper density limit of the API table in use j Perform density calibration 6 Configure for Relative Density Measurement For API tables that use relative density a relative density value can be entered manually or relative density can be measured throughout loading Manual relative density values are entered by the user when the appropriate API table is activated To use live relative density readings from a densitometer 4 20 mA for volume correction use the following procedure a Wire the relative density transmitter to any available Flow Control Module FCM Use any available analog input port Consult transmitter wiring diagram
304. he screen ECO2008 007 Added ability to reprint any ticket or range of tickets from the transaction archive A serial port must be configured as connected to a printer When viewing the header of a transaction in Views and Inquiries gt Transactions a footer prompt of l Print Transaction now appears instructing how to print the transaction After viewing two different transactions a footer prompt of 2 Print Transactions xxxx yyyy now appears instructing how to print the selected range of transactions Transactions that have been printed before will be marked as Duplicates on the ticket W amp M requirement Note Per ECO2008 003 hardware handshake and alarming has also been added W amp M requirement This will require that customers properly wire the DTR and Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 379 other handshake signals to the RCU or a printer alarm will be raised and prevent loading 01 26 08 3 28 07 WIP sent to QA for testing Corrected bug that caused meter level alarms not to clear when leaving factory calibration analog calibration menu 01 29 08 3 28 07 WIP sent to QA for testing Corrected bug that caused unknown RTD value on powerups and other errors 03 13 08 2 28 07 WJP Corrected bug to properly handle and return negative API gravity Updated transaction retrival MRS and ticket printing 03 17 08 3 28 08 WJP Corrected
305. he swing arms control valve and monitor the swing arm s flow meter input Ports two and three will be reserved for the upstream and downstream solenoid outputs respectively Port four will be reserved for flow meter pulse input A Port five is available for flow meter input pulse B or for any other function associated with the swing arm Any unused ports on this FCM must be reserved for this swing arm s use only since the FCM will not be available to either bay all of the time Configure other Meters menu parameters as necessary Any Meter level I O assignments that must be made will have to be assigned to one of the swing arm s FCMs which will be on the common MultiLoad II RCU communication circuit Otherwise the same I O function will have to be configured on both MultiLoad II RCUs Make a note of the swing arm FCM port assignments for entry in the other secondary MultiLoad Il RCU Exit the Meters menu and return to the Equipment Setup menu Configure Component level parameters for the swing arm In cases where the swing arm component pumps are common to other load arms in the bay Pump Run and Pump Status assignments should be made to FCMs that are dedicated to a single MultiLoad II RCU That means that the pump related I O assignments would have to be configured on both MultiLoad Il RCUs If a component pump is only needed for the swing arm however it may be more efficient to assign the pump related I O to the swing arm FCM ports Block Valve Open a
306. iE i ui all Es Et d el el el el oe lalalala PlPlel ele in in in wo o S o eo ala Niel S alr E PRESET 3 i Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 13 Access IDs Use the Access ID s function to assign Personal Identification Numbers PINs to MultiLoad Il access cards Up to 300 0 299 Access IDs cards can be stored in the system along with the associated PIN number Access number length may be from 4 8 characters long Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Access Dis The Access ID s Setup screen displays 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 pona LOZI 013 IN ee Cardal No Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Card Next e za ee ee eae ie eis ee EN WO O O 0O 0O 1G 0000 0O 0 0O E S gt ECV LD Y 00000132 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000111 PIN 00000125 PIN PINS Banis BTN EINES Pans P P P e IN ER IN PIN PIN PIN PIN Enter OTe Ons EE 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 For each card press Enter then key in the card number using the keypad Press enter then key in the corresponding Pin number Press Enter again to save Then press Next to select the next line a
307. ication on the configuration file Each parameter that is not equal to the default value will be shown in yellow S ae FCM Trace C Enabled 3 Store the configuration file Via the Menu File and Save Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 57 adebug MultiMate Communications Tools Reporting Help SSES RR Multiload Version MultiLoad Il v4 31 06 Nov 12012 Reload ROM Lang File Enabled Hazard Messages Driver Language ENGLISH v Alibi Log Labels ProgramMode Language ENGLISH a 4 The file can be stored on your PC or on the Tms6 Server if available Save SEE Save To File File Path LI Save To Table Server Username Display Registers Password Connect Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 11 5 DOWNLOAD A CONFIGURATION FILE FROM A MULTILOAD II To download a configuration file from a MultiLoad Il 1 Start the MultiMate program 2 Open a connection to a Multiload device download prompts 3 After downloading the prompts the red highlighted button can be used to download all the config registers adebug MultiMate File Communications Tools Reporting Help CORA D2 roM o Inacuvigy neon 0 S Bay x Download Registers a BCL Print Msg Log C Enabled H Alarms E Prompts Message Log PCM D Hazard Messages No Prox Pull If Flow Alibi Log Labels EE
308. ics to include more registers Update FCM control logic to deal with mass meter flow with on off valve for demo 5 5 10 3 29 20 WIP release to QA Merge of parallel development streams back into one Added Mardarin language Changed all variable flags from char to int to improve efficiency Changed all string usage of unsigned char to char for compiler compatability Started email functionality development Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 390 Updated serial routines to use integer instead of character configuration parameters Added web server functionality Added routines to get and set ethernet MAC address for new and old processor Added ML Mass build for demo of Krohne meter at ILTA Density alarm 4 20mA values outside 4 20 are to be treated as an error and density set to zero Added time delay on density alarms Added code to support uploading new firmware on new processor Added ablity to support 3 host connections at the same time Corrected simulation build processor utilization bug by adding nanosleep call Changed firmware version to 3 29 20 Changed all database versions except NR3 W amp M amp Totalizers to 3 29 20 5 17 10 3 29 20 WIP release to QA Added Factory Test function to verify the installation of OptoFCMs firmware in FCM I and FCM II 5 18 10 WIP Rev 9 26 20 Corrected web display of W amp M Log and Event Log Increased latest known FCM version to 038
309. ide more less rounding Slowed down the FCM polling from open loop to 4 polls per second transaction to always record the density in the transaction PTB alibi transaction log logic to correctly record symbol for PTB APPROVED SPECIFICATION when density sensor is disabled OR an overriding density is specified at the component level configuration Added m ter level configuration pulse in mass to enable the conversion of meter level mass pulses to component level volume Added MSS command for SMP similar to the MRS command but only returns 1 component instead of 8 1 meter instead of 4 and 2 additives instead of 16 Added new query 3 value with bits to return meter level values Meter Batch Gross Del Whole Mass and Meter Gross Flow Rate Mass Flow Updated flowing and Batch Temperature Pressure Density when stopped Updated Preset Status Screen to Display Current Temperature Pressure Density when Component Status Screen to Display Current Temperature Pressure Density when flowing or zero delivered and Batch Temperature Pressure Density when stopped Included Component Status Screen on the Next Prev Screen Loop Removed pressing on Component Screen to enter Component Status Screen In prep for keyless program alarm clearing Added Mass Section to the Component Status Screen showing Target Delivered and Rate when Updated Updated Updated Pulses In Ma
310. ified in the additive parameter Shutoff Volume From End The signal is removed at this volume in order for the valve to close and to permit the additive or dye to be flushed from the line When MultiLoad Il commands the valve to close the Open Blk Val signal will be removed Test Button FCM This parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal for the test injection button used during calibration Pump Run FCM Permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal to run the additive pump Pump Kill FCM Permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal to stop the additive pump The Pump Kill signal only becomes active when the system experiences an additive Valve Fault Alarm Pump Status FCM Permits the selection of a port that will accept an input signal that will verify if the additive pump is running or not If this signal is absent for the period specified in the Pump Status Alarm Time parameter the additive s Pump Status Alarm will be raised Alarm Out FCM Provides an output signal if the additive has an active alarm This parameter selects an output port that will be assigned to signal an additive level alarm condition Authorized FCMA Provides an output signal if the additive has been authorized for flow as a result of driver card in This parameter selects an output port that will be assigned to signal the condition Permiss FCMA Per
311. ii Gross Deliverd Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xviii Net Delivered Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xix Mass Delivered Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xx Delivered Percentage value is in hundreths defined meaning two number after the decimal point xxi Remaining Volume value is in whole defined xxii Gross Flow Rate value is in whole defined xxiii Temperature value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point xxiv Pressure value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point xxv Density value is in tenths defined meaning one number after the decimal point xxvi Relative Density value is in tenthousth defined meaning 4 numbers after the decimal point xxvii Api Gravity value is in tenths defined meaning one number after the decimal point xxviii BSW value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point b Preset Number Specify the preset Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP 7 Component Time RT a Component Real Time Prompt i ii iii iv V vi vii viii Clearing Errors Indicates that a component level alarm is clearing for a particular component Clearing Batch Indicates that a particular component is being cleared and archived Pump Run Indicates that a particular Component s pump has been commanded to run Pump Kill Indicates that a Pump Kill signal has been received for a particular component Pump Sta
312. ill appear Authenticatie vereist Ye http 10 54 51 183 vraagt om een gebruikersnaam en wachtwoord De website meldt toptech com Gebruikersnaam admin wachtwoord eeeceeee 14 3 WEBSITE Home website of the Multiload2 MultiLoad I MultiLoad I Bay 00 Menu e Home e ECH Ditto e Message Log e W amp M Change Log e Files o Upload File e Transaction Log yr GF fa IREX LouD COMMONS anoue When open the rcuditto webserver it is possible to view what the driver is doing and also it is possible to you the remote keypad to interfere with the driver Note Only when the user is logging with the admin user the keypad is available Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic D kt RCU Ditto tlech BERBERS Bie BOBS ie lt il 14 4 MESSAGE LOG Shows the full logging of every event on the Multiload2 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 13 05 04 10 10 10 10 52 52 52 52 252 252 152 253 253 137 37 37 33 14 16 17 19 21 23 23 28 28 53 53 57 32 Card in successful for driver no PROMPT CUSTOM 1 User PROMPT CUSTOM 2 User PROMPT CUSTOM 3 User PROMPT CUSTOM A User PROMPT CUSTOM_5 User input input input input input 54321 09876 JIHGE JIHGE JIHF 00000111 Tran
313. in write access to program mode Set this parameter to the FCM and Port for the input where the switch is attached The input value at this location will be Ord with the MultiLoad II program mode switch status RCU diagnostics will show the status of this switch Startup Keypad At startup of the Multiload2 the keypad is locked or not locked The only screen where the Locked keypad is still working is the IDLE Screen So the Configuration Menu is always accessible Screen Brightness Brightness of the Display RCU Address Enter MultiLoad Il RCU address Valid entries are 001 099 Toptech strongly recommends use of address 001 for all MultiLoad Ils Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 76 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 6 EQUIPMENT SETUP Use the Equipment Setup functions to configure the Bay and its associated presets meters components and additives Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup gt Select Parameter Level ELECT PARAMETER LEVEL ALL Input Output Weights amp Measures Flow Control amp Rates Blending RET Alarms Next Prev This new selection groups the parameters together so each parameter can be easly found It is possible that some parameters are under more than 1 group The Equipment Setup Menu will display EQUIPMENT S Bay Preset Meters Components Additives Next Prev Note A ty
314. in x time to eliminate concern with Rogue Smith Pulsers Set parameter to 45 seconds to prevent Rogue Smith Pulsers from activating alternate operating mode Do not raise an alarm just start flow after delay expires Log message when Driver attempts to start flow within this time for later analysis tracking Updated Real Time Database version to 3 28 17 Updated firmware version to 3 28 17 2 26 09 3 29 01 WJP Updated PetroPlus logo per customer supplied graphic To support dynamic Configuration Parameters that may change from general to W amp M controlled parameters all W amp M parameters have been moved into general areas and the W amp M Menu has been removed All W amp M controlled parameters are now displayed in red and are still protected from modification via the external W amp M switch Screens include RCU Setup Bay Setup Preset Setup Component Setup Additive Setup Additive Calibration Meter Proving View Temperature View Density View Pressure Temperature Comp Pressure Comp Alarm Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 385 Updated PickList routines to support attributed color selection of items in the list Moved all W amp M Equipment Configurations back under Equipment Configurations Moved Temperature Pressure and Density Calibration functions to the Temperature Pressure and Density View Screens Moved Temperature Comp and Pressure Comp s
315. invalid parameter code Added W amp M Key FCM and Program Key FCM as RCU level parameters for external connection of W amp M and program switches Status of these inputs are ORed with internal inputs DIP switches and can be viewed on the RCU Diagnostic screen Incorporated final review of all Spanish Translactions Added MultiLingual Product Graphic capability with English and Spanish versions for the ML II ML II 1 Arm MultiLoad II SMP graphics Corrected SMP bug when the program key was not active and the Load Screen Timeout occurs the screen would stop updating and keypad would stop functioning until a end transaction signal was received Updated firmware version to 3 27 05 Updated database version to 3 27 05 for Equipment Database Per PEMEX Calculation of CTL from Table 59E is calculated as CTL Measured Density Corrected Density from API Table 59E 03 23 07 3 27 06 WIP released to QA for testing Corrected bug in transaction archive not recording the ending time Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 376 Corrected design in transaction archive that omitted storing the year in the date Removed unused datestr and timestr from RCU Setup Database Removed unused Report Time Detailed Report and Auto Report from RCU Setup Parameters Marked the Preset Select Timeout RCU Setup Parameter as NA on SMP builds Fixed bug where all RCU level NA parameters were lo
316. ion capability of MultiLoad II 1 At MultiLoad II Serial Port assigned to the Host disconnect the communication cable and short the following terminals a RS232 RX to TX or b RS485 RDA to TDA RDB to TDB 2 When Loopback is turned ON press any key at the MultiLoad II keypad and the character pressed should appear on the MultiLoad II display indicating a successful loop back Failure of the character to appear on the display may indicate a bad Com Port or invalid communication setup B When testing is complete press the 1 key to toggle Loopback Test to OFF Auto Mode If you press 1 again you will be in Auto mode When Auto mode is turned On The character string Testing is sent out from the Serial Port assigned to the Host once every second Any character received on the serial port assigned to the Host will be displayed on the MultiLoad II screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 5 SERIAL PORT TEST The Serial Port Test is used to verify the serial port hardware of the MultiLoad II This test provides a method for service personnel to determine the serial port hardware health before sending equipment back to Toptech for repair From the DIAGNOSTIC MENU choose Serial Ports DTAC NT TOTS EE CS M Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Additives Network Test Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Health PCM Health RCU Bay Preset
317. ion is enabled Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Max Quad Errors This parameter is only valid when the Quadrature feature has been enabled Enter the number of Quadrature Pulse Security errors that will trigger a Quadrature alarm The alarm will stop flow A dual Pick Off flow meter or dual channel meter pulser is required to use this feature Reset Quad Errors This parameter is only valid when the Quadrature feature has been enabled This parameter establishes the number of pulses that will be checked for errors If no Quadrature Pulse Security errors have occurred during the transmission of the number of pulses established by this parameter the Quadrature error counter will reset itself The error counter then will begin tabulating errors from zero When the number of errors tabulated in the error counter exceeds the Max Quad Errors value before the quantity of pulses established in this parameter have been transmitted a Quadrature alarm will occur Low Flow Alarm Rate Specifies the absolute minimum flow rate of the flow meter When the flow rate falls below this value for a period specified by the Low Flow Alarm Time parameter the meter low flow alarm will activate Typically this value is set to the flow meter s lowest flow rate as published by the meter s manufacturer Low Flow Alarm Time When the flow rate falls below the Low Flow Alarm Rate for the duration of time specified in this parameter the
318. ion screens and parameter descriptions are found in the General Additive Setup section that follows The Parameters for Additive Methods table lists the parameters that apply to this method Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 179 Chapter 6 Additive Control 180 6 5 9 METHOD 5 COMMON METER WITH MULTIPLE ADDITIVES Method 4 permits multiple additives to be delivered through a common injector The injector must use an additive meter that provides a pulsed output to a Flow Control Module This method of additive metering is an extension of the Pulse Input approach Method 3 The principles described in Method 3 apply to this method also A maximum of 16 additives 2 additives on SMP can be routed through a single injector Regardless of the configuration a maximum of 16 additives 2 additives on SMP can be assigned to each load arm only one additive can be delivered through the common injector during a single load The Common Meter algorithm has been designed to accommodate two hydraulic configurations One scheme employs an Injector Valve and Additive Block Valves The second scheme uses Additive Block Valves only Add 1 Additive Block Valve Add 1 Additive Meter Figure 6 3 Common Injector Valve Scheme In the diagram above the solenoid operated Additive Block Valves are used to select the additive that is to be delivered One of these valves will open when the start button is pressed It will close when t
319. irst Trip Dead Band Rate specifies the amount of rate error that will be tolerated before a rate adjustment is attempted by the flow control valve If for example this parameter is set to 10 gpm and the First Trip Flow Rate is set to 200 gpm the valve will not attempt to adjust flow until the First Trip Flow Rate exceeds 210 gpm or until the First Trip Flow Rate falls below 190 gpm ST Stage DB Rate The Second Trip Dead Band Rate specifies the amount of rate error that will be tolerated before a rate adjustment is attempted by the flow control valve If for example this parameter is set to 10 gom and the Second Trip Flow Rate is set to 50 gpm the valve will not attempt to adjust flow until the Second Trip Flow Rate exceeds 60 gpm or until the First Trip Flow Rate falls below 40 gpm Valve Cnil Alrm Time When the control valve is unable to reduce flow within the period specified in this parameter the Valve Control Alarm will activate This alarm will stop the load The repeated occurrence of this alarm may indicate that valve operation is sluggish valve maintenance or inspection may be required Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Valve Fault Alrm Vol When the valve has been commanded to close the Valve Fault Alarm will activate if the valve fails to close before the Valve Fault Alarm Volume is delivered Creep Reset Time Meter Creep is any volume that passes the meter when the valve is commanded
320. is carded in or not 10 25 2012 MSH Added new web server based on Mongoose open source web server Ported existing ML pages over to new web server Added authentication for web pages Both an admin read write and user read only user Added file upload to SD card 11 01 2012 PS Fix the MAX API TABLES count Comment out the 1122 Pressure tables 11 01 2012 PS Added ability that Multimate and other systems can download the picklist possibilities via the r300 prompt register 11 01 2012 PS Increase 4 times the alibilog 11 01 2012 PS Fix alignment issue on Gross Totalizers EOD Report FEODLOG command 11 01 2012 PS German prompt fix 11 01 2012 PS Changed revision to 3 4 31 07 and for nvram alibilog Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 407 11 02 2012 PS Add ability of EOD Report to trigger via modbus 11 04 2012 WJP Added RCU general configuratuion parameter R U076 Ethernet HTTP admin Password default toptech Added RCU general configuratuion parameter R U077 Ethernet HTTP user Password default toptech 11 06 2012 PS Integrated a Low Flow Proving Rate so during proving another low flow rate can be giving instead of using the preset low flow rate 11 6 2012 Corrected bug in UAP script with respect to picklist paging PickListHandle calls in the prompt script must NOT have commands following it on the same line 11 7 2012 WJP Corrected UA
321. is possible to see the last 10000 transactions in the web interface of Multiload2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 C Database Level 05 Set Factory Defaults 1Simulation Mode DISABLD gt EHABLED 1Simulation Mode ENABLED gt DISABLD C Firmrare Update 4 01 01 gt 4 01 01 1Pre 01 Cmp 01 API Table None gt Invalid C Firmyrare Update 4 01 01 gt 4 01 01 C Firmrare Update 4 01 01 gt 4 01 01 1Pre 01 Cmp 01 API Table Invalid gt None C Database Level 01 Set Factory Defaults C Database Level 05 Set Factory Defaults Size 27 8k 5 9k 6 0k 70 2k 7 0k EECH 370 Chapter 12 Custom Logic BOL 0014 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0015 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0016 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0017 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0018 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0019 Driver 00000111 Date 05 03 BOL 0020 Driver 00000111 Date 05 04 Start 16 14 Start 16 23 Start 16 24 Start 16 25 Start 16 30 Start 16 44 Start 10 46 Opening a transaction to get the full details of the load BOL 0 Driver Start Stop T Stop D Prompt Prompt Prompt Prompt Prompt Detail Commen Transa LUA Si Detail Preset Index Alarm Errors Type Measur Densit Correc Produc Gross Net De Mass D Temper 017 00000111 Time 16 25 Start Date 05 03 ime 16 26 ate 05 03 Company 00 1 329433 2 92139821 3 4 MGBHMRLGHMGLA 5 Count 2 t Count 0 ction ID 0 Consignee
322. ivery of additive Line Flush Min Vol Specifies the volume of product line flush that must occur to satisfactorily flush additive from the load arm Enter the value in the volumetric units used by the product flow meter After the additive has completed delivery the volume entered in this parameter must pass through the product flow meter If the volume indicated in this parameter does not get delivered after the additive requirement for the load has been met an additive flush alarm will occur Enter a zero in this parameter to disable the feature This feature has no bearing on the settings of the flush parameters that are found in the Preset menu Assigned Component If an additive is injected into a particular component of a sequential blend all additive volume for the batch must be delivered when this component is flowing This parameter when non zero specifies that the additive can only flow when the specified component is flowing W amp M Recipe If this additive is to have the recipe percentage under W amp M protection set this value to Percentage the W amp M accepted value When this value is non zero the Additive Recipe Percentage MUST be equal to the W amp M Recipe Percentage or all attempts to authorize a batch will be denied displaying a message of W amp M Required Additive Pct Not Correct Additive Vol Inject The Additive Volume per Injection parameter is applicable to all additive methods When using a piston system with
323. jection stroke Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control Parameter Description Pump Start Alrm Time lf a Pump Status signal has not been received from the additive pump in the time specified by this parameter the additive s Pump Status Alarm will be raised Enter the time in seconds To disable this alarm enter zero Meter Creep Alrm Vol Enter the volume of meter creep that will trigger a Meter Creep alarm If the volume of meter creep specified in this parameter accumulates within the time period indicated in the Creep Reset Time parameter a Meter Creep alarm will occur Meter creep may indicate that there is a small leak in the valve or it may be the result of excessive line shock Meter creep means that fluid is moving past the meter when the valve is supposed to be closed Remote Calibration Enable this parameter if it is desired to have the selected additive enabled on the Remote Additive Calibration selection list This parameter is only relevant if the Remote Additive Calibration feature is to be used and remote additive test buttons have been installed B V Open Alrm Time Block Valve Open Alarm Time This parameter specifies the time in seconds to allow the additive s block valve to open If an additive block valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback requirement is not satisfied in this time If a feedback signal is not used and the value of this pa
324. l Modules FCMs Host Down Timeout 30 Alas Host Wait Timeout 999 Driver Access Ids Custom Logic Prt Alibi Log on PCM C Enabled Alibi Log PCMH n Swing Arm Secondary C Enabled 4 Open the configuration file that needs to be uploaded Upload From File File Path CJ Upload From Table Server Usemame Display Registers Password Connect 5 At the right bottom corner a progress bar will be visible at 100 percent it is mandatory to check if the registers where correctly uploaded Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 11 7 UPDATE THE FIRMWARE IMAGE IN A MULTILOAD II The process of updating the firmware image in a MultiLoad II occurs in two steps The first step involves uploading the new firmware image to the MultiLoad Il concurrently with normal loading operations The Second step involves updating the flash memory with the new image and restarting the system This step only takes about 10 seconds but all loading operations and host communication must be discontinued during this operation To update the firmware image in a MultiLoad Il 1 Start the Multimate tool 2 Create a new connection to the Multiload device 3 Select under the Menu tools the Firmware Upgrade option serewdtedtdr MultiMate File Communications Reporting Help Miekat Bulder s MultiLoad Il v3 31 04 Nov 30 2011 RS BCL Alarms 4 Prompts Haza
325. l allow a remote switch to clear a completed batch This option used with the Remote Start and Auto Batch Authorize parameter may be very useful for barrel filling or other multi batch operation Alt HF Rate FCM Permits selection of a Flow Control Module FCM and port that will monitor an input Excluding SMP from an air eliminator head or other device When an input is received Flow will change from the High Flow Rate to an alternative flow rate specified by the Alt Flow Rate parameter found in Preset Weights amp Measures Close Blk Val FCM Permits selection of an output port that will provide an output signal to close a preset level block valve This feature is provided for block valves that require separate opening and closing signals Blk Val Status FCMA Block Valve Status FCM parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the preset level block valve indicating whether it is open or closed When the block valve is closed an external contact attached to the valve will close applying a status signal to the input When the block valve is open the external contact will also be open removing the status signal from the input When the block valve has been commanded to open the absence of a signal at the input will indicate that the valve has opened If the closed signal is still present after the Block Valve Open Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure a
326. larm will be issued When the block valve has been commanded to close the presence of the status signal at the input will indicate that the valve has closed If the closed signal has not been detected by the time the Block Valve Close Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure alarm will be issued Open Blk Val FCM Permits selection of a port that will provide an output signal to open a preset level block valve The preset level block valve is commanded to open after the Start button has been pressed and the Block Valve Open Delay time has expired The valve is commanded to close during any of the following conditions batch completion any alarm when the Stop button is pressed or if the card is pulled from the card reader Flow Active FCM This parameter selects a port that will provide an output signal to indicate that flow is active When the Start button is pressed the signal will become active The signal will de activate upon batch completion when the Stop button is pressed or when an alarm condition stops flow The signal will re activate when the Start button is pressed following either an alarm condition or an intentional interruption of the batch By default a high signal will represent an active condition Batch Authorized FCM This parameter selects a port that will provide an output signal to indicate that the preset is authorized for loading The signal will become active after authorization has been granted The signal will st
327. lect Equipment Setup Enter the Preset menu Select a preset that will be configured as a swing arm In the Preset menu find the parameter labeled Swing Arm FCM Press Enter Press Next to enable the parameter Enter a number that represents the Flow Control Module FCM that will contain the input port for the bay s swing arm detector switch fs The FCM chosen must not be an FCM dedicated to the swing arm s functions it must be an FCM that is connected to a single MultiLoad II RCU Li The first FCM on the communication circuit FCM 0 must not be a swing arm FCM After entering an FCM enter a number that represents the input port that will receive the detector switch signal Select any available port Configure other Preset menu parameters as necessary Any Preset level I O assignments that must be made will have to be assigned to one of the swing arm s FCMs which will be on the common MultiLoad Il RCU communication circuit Otherwise the same I O function will have to be configured on both MultiLoad II RCUs Make a note of the swing arm FCM port assignments since they will be used in the secondary MultiLoad II RCU Exit the Preset menu and return to the Equipment Setup menu Select and enter the Meters menu Select the preset that has been assigned to the swing arm that is being configured Select Meter 1 The first parameter is Flow Control Module Enter a number that represents the FCM that will be used to operate t
328. lenoid valve s closing speed have already been made The quantity of pulse overruns due to valve action can be determined by performing the additive calibration test The quantity of excess pulses delivered for each test injection can be observed When the number of overrun pulses is determined enter the number into this parameter to eliminate the overrun Shutoff Vol From End Additive will stop delivery at the remaining preset quantity specified by this parameter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Enter a numerical value in the units of volume used by the base components When the remaining quantity of the load reaches the volume specified in this parameter delivery of the selected additive will cease regardless of the amount of additive demand that remains This is typically done to allow the additive to be flushed from the load arm by the time product delivery is complete If additive injection is desired throughout the entire delivery enter a zero for this parameter See descriptions of the related parameters entitled Last Injection Volume From End and Line Flush Minimum Volume 187 Chapter 6 Additive Control Last Inj Vol From End Last Injection Volume From End This parameter specifies when the last injection should occur in order to deliver the proper additive volume based on the preset quantity With the use of this parameter it is possible to have the load arm flushed of additive as described in the Shutoff Vol From End pa
329. low control needs and to expand easily and inexpensively as your needs grow Whether it s single product loading ratio blending or sequential blending the MultiLoad can handle all your flow control requirements now and into the future The primary purpose of the FCM is to provide maximum control of a single meter run Each FCM controls up to one meter run FCM s can be ganged together to form multiple component ratio or sequential blend spots or for single product delivery on multiple arms Press Siet to Bin MultiLoad RCU PS Iess rom ll om om2 MN EOE DW E rous Al Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 2 7 FCMIl The Flow Control Module FCM is an integral part of the MultiLoad system The FCM contains its own microprocessor for digital analog valve control meter pulse counts and factoring additive injection pump and meter permissives DC amp AC General purpose I O RTD Input 4 20 mA input output and more The utilization of FCMs enables you to extend control beyond the confines of the expensive heavy metal boxes that clutter today s load racks Now you can buy as much or as little as you need and locate that control wh
330. low this value an alarm will be raised Alarm High Pressure Enter the pressure that represents the upper pressure limit of the API table in use When pressure exceeds this value an alarm will be raised Pressure Alarm Time At the default value of zero seconds pressure alarms will be raised instantly A small delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when pressure is momentarily out of range Pressure 4mA Enter the pressure that will represent the lowest pressure value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA Pressure 20mA Enter the pressure that will represent the highest pressure value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA Pressure Offset This parameter provides a means to introduce a pressure offset to correct the indicated pressure to the observed pressure The offset range is 3 00 to 3 00 units Relative Density Sensor This parameter indicates the use of a relative density sensor for the selected meter Enable this parameter if a relative density sensor is used to monitor relative density at the flow meter Relative Density Sensor FCM Enter the FCM for the relative density sensor Enter a value of 0 for the internal I O board Default Relative Density For API tables that require the entry of relative density enter that value here The value should be the relative density of the component at 15
331. lue to loop around Req of Measurement Canada Limit 4 20mA pressure input to 0 to 4000 Kpa PSI instead of the 9999 Extend pressure offset from 3 00 to 30 00 Kpa PSI Req of Measurement Canada Changed the stand alone BOL to include Net Volume corrected to Vapour Pressure 15C instead of Net values corrected to 15C Req of Measurement Canada Changed the preset control screen to include GALLONS Volume corrected to 60 F instead of GALLONS corrected to 60 F Fixed bug with uninitialized new hazidx in ticket printing routine that caused application to halt 01 05 07 WJP Changed SMP normal fonts from 20 col to 40 col This includes all stand alone prompting as well as host driven prompts 01 18 07 WJP Added component current _temp_hunds component current press hunds and component current density tenths to real time structure 01 18 07 3 27 01 WJP Added minor version number to firmware version xx yy 2zz Updated boot screen to display minor version number and firmware build date Added UTF 8 terminal support Updated R000 to include minor version number Updated ditto register to return utf8 characters if displayed Extend picklist register to handle UTF8 characters Added Unicode diagnostic screen to view available CJK characters Updated firmware version to 3 27 01 02 01 07 3 27 02 WJP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 374 Program Mode key switch no longer en
332. lume loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mrem Mass loaded for the Regular Ethanol Meter Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Premium Ethanol meter Meter Level values are reported as Gpem M1 Tpem T1 Dpem D1 OR Dp Gpem Ge De Ge Gpem Npem Gpem VCFp Tpem Dpem Mpem Npem Dpem OR Mpem Gpem Di Where Gpem Gross volume loaded for the Premium Ethanol Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 while flowing Premium Ethanol Tpem Temperature for the Premium Ethanol Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 while flowing Premium Ethanol Npem Net volume loaded for the Premium Ethanol Meter VCFp API Correction Table for Regular Mpem Mass loaded for the Premium Ethanol Meter Blended product Preset Level values reported as Gb Grem Gpem value not to be used for trade Tb Trem Grem Tpem Gpem Gb value not to be used for trade Db Drem Grem Dpem Gpem Gb value not to be used for trade Nb Nrem Npem Mb Mrem Mpem Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Trem Grem Tpem Gpem Gb Volume weighted temperature for the blend Db Density for the blend Drem Grem Dpem Gpem Gb Volume weighted density for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 289 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 290 Ethan
333. lush 100 Flush component 2 Preset Total 1000 1000 Example 2 1 600 500 Take Flush From First Component 2 400 400 Flush 100 Flush component 2 Preset Total 1000 1000 Example 3 1 600 600 Take Flush From Last Component 2 400 300 Flush 100 Flush component 2 Preset Total 1000 1000 In Example 2 when the Take Flush From First Component is executed the resulting product ratio is 50 50 since the non flush component was shorted component 1 In this case the desired 60 40 result would have been achieved by using component 1 as the Line Flush Component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 166 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 10 CALIBRATION USING METER FACTOR LINEARIZATION Meter factors are determined during flow meter proving tests by comparing the observed volume with the volume that is indicated on the MultiLoad II display As the MultiLoad II collects pulses from a flow meter it divides the pulses by the K Factor to obtain a Raw Gross Volume Meter factors are used to correct the Raw Gross Volume so that the volume indicated on the MultiLoad II display matches the volume that is observed during flow meter proving Meter factors can vary significantly at different flow rates For this reason meter factors are determined for two or more flow rates to improve accuracy over a range of flow rates The Meter Factor Linearization feature permits the MultiLoad II to interpolate a meter factor when product is flowing in be
334. lush From Matching component If one of the components used in a Excluding SMP given recipe happens to be the designated Line Flush Component this recipe component will be under delivered to accommodate the Line Flush Volume at the end of the load The under delivered portion will be delivered during the Line Flush phase Choices for this parameter are Disable or Enable If this parameter is disabled the recipe will choose to short either the first recipe component or the last recipe component as specified by the two parameters that follow Take L F from First Take Line Flush From First recipe component If the Take Line Flush From Match Excluding SMP parameter is disabled or if the designated flush component is not used in a particular recipe the algorithm will look to this parameter for instruction on which recipe component to short A recipe component must be shorted to accommodate the Line Flush Volume If this parameter is set to enable the first recipe component will be chosen as the component to be shorted If this parameter is disabled the algorithm will look to the next parameter for instruction Take L F From Last Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Take L F from Last Excluding SMP Compute Blend Density Alt High Flow Rate Stop Start Delay Blend Chk Start Vol Excluding SMP Bind Chk Restart Vol Excluding SMP Bind Chk Alarm Excluding SMP Firmware Versio
335. lved in the bay disable this parameter The time in seconds that the backligh screen saver turn on when the MultiLoad II is idle Timeout Screen Saver The brightness in percentage that the backlight will illuminate when the backlight screen saver Bright turns on Min Time Change Min Time Change Secs Before the beginning of each transaction TMS will attempt to Secs synchronize the date and time of the MultiLoad II with the date and time of the TMS computer TMS will update the date and time of the MultiLoad II if the difference between the TMS system time and MultiLoad II time is greater than the value of this parameter Enter a value in seconds The date and time of MultiLoad II will not be updated unless the Weights and Measures switch is activated Display Load When this parameter is enabled the sum of all volumes delivered in a transaction will appear Volume at the bottom of the Load Screen The text Total Delivered will be displayed immediately below the last load arm listed on the load screen This total will be reset to zero when the transaction has been ended by pulling the card or pressing Exit at the Load Screen twice FCM Trace Enable or Disable This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Please do not enable this parameter without direction from Toptech Systems Engineering Measure on Load Enable this parameter to display a units designation that will be visible on the Load Screen Sern adjacent to each loa
336. m can have multiple components liquids or meters assigned to it a numeric indicator will identify which of the load arm s components or meters is referenced Component level changes may include settings such as meter factors flow rates and VCF configurations Meter level changes may include settings such as Temperature and Pressure configurations This field will indicate CMP xx for a component change event or MTR xx for a meter change event The numeric designation that follows the Cmp or Mtr prefixes is an arbitrary designation made by the facility engineer This is established during system configuration Parameter Value Change This field will indicate the previous parameter value followed by the new value For example 2400 gt 2500 indicates that the value was changed from 2400 to 2500 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 327 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries The second line of data will contain the following data 1 Identification Number This field will contain a numeric designation that will identify which individual caused the event Up to five individual passwords can be assigned to authorized personnel If the value in this field is the number 1 it means that the person who was assigned password number 1 caused the change log event to occur If the value in this field is the letter C it means that parameter changes were made by remote computer across the communication port Changes to protected parameters cannot be made via remote comp
337. make use of the Trace parameters that follow Enter a value that represents the level of trace for UAP Valid entry is 1 to 5 This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems Use this parameter to view how blends are constructed in MultiLoad Il Blend composition used during deliveries of the preset specified in Trace Preset Number will be echoed to the event log for analysis This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems Use this parameter to specify the injector under test Only one injector can be put in trace at a time First specify the injector s preset in Trace Preset Number Then enter a value that represents the injector under test Also enable parameter Trace Adtv Volume This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems Use this parameter to specify an FCM for analysis See parameter Trace FCM Assignment Return this parameter to default value of 32 when not in use This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems When a value of 1 is entered in parameter field Trace FCM Number and when this parameter is enabled the MultiLoad assignments will be echoed to the event log for analysis each time the MultiLoad II is rebooted This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable withou
338. me Toptech Terminal Truck Number Next Prev Exit Enter Parameters that are displayed in RED are Weight and Measures controlled values The W amp M switch must be active before modification can take place All changes made to Weights and Measures controlled values will be logged in the W amp M Change Log Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 26 RCU TSI Preset Slct Timeout Meter Proving Mode Trace Preset Number Trace Recipe Trace Adtv Number Trace FCM Number 32 Trace FCM Assignment DISAI Trace Meter Flows DISABL Trace Adtv Volume DISABL W amp M Key FCM DISABL Program Key FCM DISABL Startup Keypad Locked DISABL RCU Address 001 Next Prev Exit Enter In the RCU Bay Preset Component Meter and Additives setup screens parameters that are highlighted in YELLOW indicate values that have been modified from the factory default value 2 11 SWITCH ACCESS CONTROL MultiLoad Il supports external access control switches This switches limit access to Program Mode and changes to Weights and Measures controlled parameters Values displayed in red There are three types of external switches and all can be sealed and or locked to prevent access to Program Mode and prevent changes to Weights and Measures controlled parameters In Program Mode the operator has access to the following The Configuration Menu parameters The Diagnostics
339. mes in resettable totalizers Use the CLR key to zero out the resettable totalizers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 317 10 4 VIEWING TEMPERATURES From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Temperature After selecting the preset and meter the Temperature screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 TEMPERATURE Temperature Unadjusted PAZ 2276 1 Temperature Offset 02 OU 2 Temperature Adjusted 42 27C Stare Ok Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Temp Unadjusted Displays the Resistance Temperature Detector real time temperature Temp Offset Displays the current temperature offset value which is the difference between the Temp Unadjusted value and the Temp Adjusted observed temperature value Temp Adjusted Displays the observed temperature as a result of applying the temperature offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 5 VIEWING PRESSURES From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Pressure After selecting the preset and meter the Pressure screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 PR Pressure Unadjusted 1 Pressure Offset 2 Pressure Adjusted Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Pressure Unadjusted Displays the real time pressure Pressure Offset Displays the pressure offset value which is the difference between the Pressure Unadjusted value and the Pressure Adjusted observed pressure valu
340. miss FCM parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the additive s permissive If the signal is not present at authorization or if the signal is lost during delivery the process will be stopped and a permissive additive level alarm will be raised Permiss Out FCMA This parameter permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal The signal will indicate that all additive permissive requirements have been met Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 192 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 7 ADDITIVE CALIBRATION Two additive calibration methods are available with the MultiLoad II One is called Additive Cal which addresses one additive at a time The other is Remote Calibration which permits simultaneous setup of multiple additives for calibration The Remote Calibration function is discussed following the section on the standard Additive Calibration function 6 7 1 ADDITIVE CAL FUNCTION The standard Additive Cal ibration feature enables the user to calibrate one additive at a time The test injections can be initiated by an optional pushbutton installed at the additive panel or the test injections can be initiated by pressing a button on the MultiLoad II keypad To use a pushbutton configure the additive parameter Test Button FCM to indicate the input port that is connected to the pushbutton If the Test Button FCM parameter is disabled
341. mponent Blending System e MultiLoad Il SMP Single Meter Preset 1 Arm Single Component Blending System Field equipment is connected to the system via an internal I O board several external FCM Flow Control Modules or a combination 2 5 MuLTILOADIIRCU The Remote Control Unit RCU of the MultiLoad II System is the driver interface to the system performs all high level process control contains all configuration information totalizers and event logs The driver interface contains a keypad display and prox card reader excluding the SMP 2 5 1 RCU ENCLOSURES AVAILABLE WITH MULTILOAD ll e Division 2 Enclosure with optional internal I O Board e Division 1 Zone 1 Explosion Proof Light EXL Enclosure with optional internal I O Board 2 5 2 CU ENCLOSURES AVAILABLE WITH MULTILOAD Il SMP e Division 1 Zone 1 SMP Explosion Proof Enclosure with internal I O Board no Card Reader Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 18 2 6 EXTERNAL FCM FLOW CONTROL MODULE The MultiLoad Flow Control Module FCM is a state of the art device that delivers the maximum in flexible modular flow control processing The FCM contains its own microprocessor for digital valve control meter pulse counts and factoring additive injection pump and meter permissives and more As a major component of the MultiLoad the FCM functions as the preset on a card Its highly modular design allows you to satisfy your current f
342. n cccccccceeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeeeecaeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeeescaeesenaeeeenees 154 Multiple Side Stream Applicatton sinesine stissrisstisstnnstnnstnnttnnntnnnnnnntnn nenns nn nennt nt 155 Multiple Side Stream Configuration cccccccecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeeseneeee 156 Sequential Blending with Side Stream Application c ccceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesnaeessaees 157 Sequential Blending with Side Stream Confguration 158 Ratio Blending with Side Stream Application ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeeeseeeeee 159 Ratio Blending with Side Stream Confiouratton tsenter netnnstnnssnnstnnntrnnstn neen nenn 160 Meter Factor LINEI zato aE E E aE E EAE A ET A BEENA AA AERCH 167 Piston Cycle TELE 172 Additive docio asrar EE AE AET EEEE TAE EEE EA TEE 174 Common Injector Valve SCHEME c ccceccceecneeeeneeeeeneeceeeeecaaeeeenaeeeaeeecaaeeseeaesdeneeseeeesaeseeaaeesenes 180 Electrical Schematic using Injector Valve ssssesseesseesseeseesseessesnrestrtstnnstnnetnnstnnstnnnsnnstnnnnrnsnnsnnt 181 Scheme using Block Valves to niet 182 Electrical Schematic using Block Valves as Injectors ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeess 182 Additive Over Inlechon aa iaia ea e a E a a a a e 190 lee DEE 200 Basic Flute eege ees ty saabe ee Ee 207 Front Loading Dyei s t4 aus ei etait aati Hi enol aati ds hein 209 Mono
343. n 3 4 31 11 Take Line Flush From Last component If the Take Line Flush from Match parameter is disabled or if the designated flush component is not used in a particular recipe and if the Take L F From First parameter is disabled the algorithm will look to this parameter for instruction on which recipe component to short A recipe component must be shorted to accommodate the Line Flush Volume If this parameter is set to enable the last component assigned to the recipe will be chosen as the component to be shorted This parameter cannot be disabled if the previous two parameters are both disabled When meter level density is not defined and component level density is defined if Compute Blend Density is enabled the meter density is computed by a volume weighted average of the component densities If Compute Blend Density is not enabled then meter density is taken from the main component density Alternative High Flow Rate is intended to be an intermediate flow rate that is employed when liquid in the air eliminator tank has fallen to a certain level requiring a flow rate less than the High Flow Rate but greater than the Low Flow Rate Set this parameter to a value less than the High Flow Rate but equal to or greater than the Low Flow Rate parameter This parameter is to ensure that a certain minimum amount of time in seconds lapses between the stopping and starting of flow Powering up the MultiLoad and exiting program mode will also start
344. n screen displays NETWORK T tt erer cnis Cesty will be sent to the Host IP Address The Ethernet por Ping packets t must be enabled properly configured and connected to the Host Computer Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 226 Chapter 8 Diagnostics Press Enter The Network Test screen displays and the test begins Press Exit to end the test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 NETWORK T Host IP Address 192 Tests Completed 000063 64 S92 720 1048 Ss 1704 ZOS2 2360 2688 3016 3344 SOW by byt by by by by by by by by by byt EE Se DOSi ECS EE EE Ee CES ECS EE EE EE icmp seg 0 Zemmer Sec ii Lomp _seq 2 eme engt 3 icmp seg 4 icmp seg 5 6 ql 8 ri i riempie ces L empeg Lemp eeg icmp seg 9 Hemp seo 107 Zemmer Segall Exit CLeaR r T EST L68 OnT tim tim tim tim tim e time e time time e time e time time e Errors time lt 10m AAA AAAA TANS 000000 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m n COO Cy COCs Eeer 227 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 8 7 KEYPAD TEST 228 The Keypad test enables you to prove that the keypad is working by testing the individual keys 1 From the DIAGNOSTICS MENU choose Keypad DTA GN Ors i es ME Magen Components Additives Custom Logie Card Reader COM Loopback S
345. n the Component menu Once the Low Flow rate has been achieved the Flow Control Module will make periodic adjustments to the valve as the flow rate drifts above or below the Low Flow Dead Band rate Dead Band rates are configured in the Meter menu The duration of the Low Flow stage is set by the Low Flow Start Volume parameter This parameter can be found in the Preset menu As the parameter name implies the Low Flow Start stage s duration is determined on a volumetric basis The Low Flow Start Volume should be configured to permit adequate tank wetting in order to prevent a static charge build up When the Low Flow Start Volume has been delivered the High Flow stage will begin When subsequent components are started the tank has already been wetted As a result it is not necessary to stay at the Low Flow Start flow rate for the same duration as the first component The components that follow the first component will begin loading at the Low Flow Start flow rate until the volume specified by the Low Flow Restart parameter has been delivered Product flow of the subsequent components can be delayed by the Pump Start Delay parameter and by the Flow Start Delay parameter as described for the first component These parameters will have to be configured individually for each component assigned to the preset load arm 5 3 1 SEQUENTIAL BLENDING CONFIGURATION Configuring a preset load arm for sequential blending involves setting a number of configuration
346. naeeua eade 136 5 1 OVErVIEW EENEG 136 5 2 Single Product Delivery csseccesecesseeeeseeeenseeesseeseseeeenseeeeseesesaeseseeeeneeeeseaesasaesaanaeeeeeaessaeseseeeenseaeees 137 E Wee e 139 TA ae ST Ts EE 139 EE 140 E FINA TID EE 140 G29 22 32 Digital Ne 140 5 2 6 Adaptive Digital Control Algorithm 21 cccccccccecceeesececneecenetecaeeeenaecseneecsaeeesaaesseneeceneeeseaseseneeseeneetennseees 141 5 2 7 TWO RE 141 See 142 5 3 Sequential Blending Excluding SMP cccssccsseesseeesseeesneeseseeeenseeeseaesesnaesnseeeseeeseseaeseneenenseeeees 142 5 3 1 Sequential Blending Configuration 1 cccccccsccesssscseseececenecenesesaeecseneecensssnaecseneeceneneseasssenseceennesennsstes 143 5 4 Ratio Blending Excluding SMP csseccesecesseeseseeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeeneeeeseaesasaaesaseeeeeeeeeseaeseseaeeneeeeeneas 148 54 1 Ratio Blending Contiguration GEET 149 5 5 Side Stream Blending Excluding SMP ccssccsseesseeeeeeeeesseeseseeeenseeeseaeseseaesnsneeseeeeeseaeseneenenseeeees 153 5 5 1 Simple Side Stream Blender Contouraton 153 5 6 Hybrid Blending Excluding SMP ccccsccssecesseeeeseeeseneeescaesesneeenseeeseaesasaaesaseeeeneeeessaeseseaesneeeeeneas 155 CH NEIER EE 155 5 6 2 Sequential Blending with Side Stream ccccccccsccscseececeeeceseeseeecseneeceeeessaesseneeceuneeseseseaeeceeesessensteas 157 5 6 3 Ratio Blending with Side Ziream nenen neea 159 5 7 Proving Side Stream Meters E
347. nd Block Valve Status assignments must be made to swing arm FCM ports which will be on the common MultiLoad Il RCU communication circuit Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 216 Chapter 7 Swing Arm Setup and Operation Excluding SMP Configure Additive level parameters for the swing arm The output port that signals the injection and the input port that receives the injector feedback must be assigned to a swing arm FCM Configure the Flow Control Module parameter enter a number that represents a swing arm FCM Configure the FCM Port parameter for an available port on the swing arm FCM Consult the General Additive Setup section in Chapter 6 in the User Guide for instructions on choosing an additive port Additive Test Buttons used for calibration must be assigned to a Swing Arm FCM as well In cases where the swing arm additive pumps are common to other load arms in the bay Pump Run and Pump Status assignments should be made to FCMs that are dedicated to a single MultiLoad II RCU That means that the assignment will have to be configured on both RCUs If an additive pump is only used for the swing arm however it may be more efficient to assign the pump related I O to the swing arm FCM If configuration of the primary RCU is complete configure the load arms of the secondary RCU When configuring the swing arms of the secondary unit use the same FCM and port assignments as were used for the corresponding swing arm in the primary bay fs
348. nd W amp M DIP Switches seeseesseesseessesiesissrissrissrinsrnnsrresrrnsrens 30 CPU Board Rev 2 0 Program and W amp M DIP Switches seeseesseesseesseesieeissrissrissrinsrnnnrinsrennsrene 30 Fil Selection Screen veer Geet Hel ave fe ie dente a a vidi acl oa a ia viel 35 Bay Configuration Menu isi ncaa dein Means eee ie a ia a veer ates 36 RCW Gontiguration AE E 37 Re Mee Blue 39 Upload W inGow EE 40 Transaction tee EE 41 Bill of Lading BOL Wimdow scence ceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesiaaeseneeeeaas 41 Configuration Reportern iniaa aa aae ea a a E e S aa eee eee eed 42 VO Assignment Report A 43 Prompt Configuration Mem 44 Product eut Ui le EE 45 Access ID SCre n EE EE 46 Hazard Configuration Screen cccccccecceesceceeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeeecaeeseaaeseeaeeseaeeeseaesseaaesseneeseaeeesaeesseneesaas 47 OcAssignment Graphic s sc03 tiA aia ehs aide aa aaa a a aati ate adit Aaah ie tel ide 48 l O Assignment D tail sitienti ei aani i aaa iiei nee 48 Flow te UE 136 Flow Profile for Single Product Delivery ccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeaeeesaaeseeeeeseeeesaeessaeeeeneeees 137 Sequential Blending Application cccccceccceceneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaaesseaeeseeeesaeeseaeeeeaees 142 Ratio Blending eelere 148 Simple Side StreaM Application cccccceecceceeeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeecaeeeeaaesseeeeseeeessaeeseaeeeeaees 153 Simple Side StreamM Configuratio
349. nd meter calibration to perform rounded calculations Updated firmware version to 3 28 14 1 13 08 3 28 16 WIP released to QA for testing Corrected placment of on additive net on printed ticket Corrected titles on factory Optical Isolator Test Updated firmware version to 3 28 16 1 22 09 3 28 16 WIP released to Measurement Canada for testing Added Meter Net Gross to Component Status Screen Added Transaction Detail Record for Component Meter Per Measurement Canada Requirement Updated transaction database and transaction printing to support type 4 details Changed transacction database version to 3 28 16 Kept firmware version the same since 3 28 16 was not released to production or outside Toptech 1 28 09 3 28 16 WJP Added Analog Test No Cal function to FCM 2 Factory Test 1 30 09 3 28 16 WJP Released Corrected bug in reading Modbus register 4180 Preset Batch Rate On FCM II Factory Calibration function increased threshold on missed COM messages to avoid restarting calibration over again when FCM updates internal EPROM after a successful calibration 7 3 4 09 3 28 17 WIP released Corrected bug in TEC and TEC ETH API tables where temp 10 was being delivered to the calculation Corrected bug in TEC and TEC ETH API tables where temp gt ref temp calculation would always produce grossly invalid value Added Preset Configuration Parameter Stop Start Delay to prevent stop and start with
350. nd repeat the above When you complete the last card on the first screen press Next to continue on the next screen Notice that the selection bar is on the last line of the continuation screen 013 selection bar to the top of the screen to continue with the next card in sequence 014 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Press Next to move the 131 Chapter 4 General Configuration 132 4 14 CUSTOMER LOGO SETUP When the MultiLoad II is idle not authorized for loading the screen displays a message instructing the driver how to begin the authorization process Press Next to Begin Insert Driver Card For Access For Access A A product of Toptech Systems Press Next to Begin Insert Driver Card For Access For Access The display also alternates between three graphic images 2 Product Identification Images and a configurable customer logo default customer logo is the Toptech Systems graphic There are two methods to configure this customer logo Load from a built in customer logo or upload a custom bmp file Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 133 4 14 1 LOADING A BUILT IN CUSTOMER LOGO Enter Program Mode select Configuration and then Customer Logo Setup The Customer Logo Setup screen is displayed CUSTOMER LOGO SI Next Prev E The currently loaded customer logo is displayed Pressing the Next and Prev keys will allow viewing of all built in logos
351. ndicates that the parameter does not apply to the method Piston Only Piston w Input Pulser Only Common Meter Analog Add Enable Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Add FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Port output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 20mA W amp M Controlled Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Upstream Block Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Valve Additive Type Pstn Geet te SolnMtr SolnMtr AnlgMtr AnlgMtr Additive P Factor No No No No Yes Additive Time NO No No No Yes Additive D Time No No No No Yes Sol Shut Pulses No No Yes Yes No Shutoff Vol End Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control Piston Only Piston w Input Pulser Only Common Meter Analog Last Inj Vol End Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Line Flush Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Vol W amp M Recipe Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Percentage Add Vol per Inj Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Vol Inj Cal factor Yes Yes No No Yes Add K Factor No No Yes Yes Yes Add Meter Factor No No Yes Yes Yes Max Pstn Missed No Yes No No No Inj Max Solenoid Inj No No Yes Yes Yes Time Under Add Inj Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Over Add Inj Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Check Add Tol Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes UA Flow Alm Vol No Yes Yes Yes Yes Valve Fault Vol No Yes Yes Yes Yes Over Inject Vol Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Creep Reset Time No No Yes Yes Yes Unauth Reset No No Yes Ye
352. ne or cancelled 04 07 2013 PS Fixed update Custom Logic via ml_terminal or ml_modbus Added to fcm_control logic for mass level Added Mass to the transaction archive details Added printing mass on UAP tickets Added printing mass on Stand Alone tickets Added new LUA command SetDetailMassNumberPos to BOL script processing Added SetDetailMassPos to default BOL script Added Mass to transaction details in the MRTDppp and R800 commands Added Mass to the Transaction Viewer Screen Added MRS command to read the current mass Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 415 Added Mass to the Web Server Transaction Detail Viewer Added Mass to Alibilog only saleable product will not print when Mass is ZERO Added new mass totalizer to Totalizer Screen Added new register R114 to read real time Mass Totalizers Added real time preset gross net mass totalizers to CONTROL SCREEN Added new mass measured used type on RCU Level Added new mass measured used _ type to r133 Register Added new alibilog labels for mass Added new ml _weight c Added Mass on Preset Screen Added Mass on Component Screen Enhanced Deliver in Net Parameter to Deliver type Gross or Net or Mass Added new deliver type to r133 Register Added new message on Preset Screen Volume_unit corrected to Mass Unit Added all previous change for Mass also in hundreths mode Added routine to go from
353. newly created base component as shown below PRODUCH SELECELON Comp BAS002 Base 002 Comp BAS003 Base 003 Comp BAS004 Base 004 Comp BAS005 Base 005 BAS006 Base undefined D001 Adtv D002 Adtv DOOS Adtv D004 Adtv D00S Adtv D006 Adtv undefined Prev Exit Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 10 2 DEFINING AN ADDITIVE Defining an additive is almost identical to defining a base component On the Product Selection screen highlight the product to edit PRODUCT Cones 000123 SELECTION BASE87UNL Comp BASO0O2 Base 002 Comp BASOUOs Base 003 Comp BAS004 Base 004 Comp BASOO05 Comp BASO06 undef Base 005 Base 006 ined Adtv ADDOO1 Adtv 001 Adtv ADDOO2 Adtv 002 Adtv ADDOO03 Adtv 003 undef Prev Press Enter will select the product to edit The Edit Product screen displays Fill in the fields as you did for the base component but with one exception For Type select Base Additive as shown in the sample below Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Code 2 ADIZ0 Long Bese i T0720 SP Hazard Idx 0 Edit Product Recipe Next Prev tv ADDOO4 Adtv 004 tv ADDOO5 Adtv 005 D006 Adtv 006 ined Exit EDIT PRODUCT ECT Aas A ie TNs Short Desc ADDSP0720 Type Base Additive 121 Chapter 4 General Configuration Select Enter The base additive is defined autom
354. ning preset volume is equal to the value specified by the First Stage Trip Vol parameter The First Stage Trip phase is the initial reduction from the High Flow rate to a no flow condition When the First Stage Trip Volume is reached the flow control valve will reduce the flow rate from the High Flow Rate to a flow rate specified by the First Stage Flow Rate parameter The First Stage Trip phase ends when the Second Stage Trip Volume is reached pnd Trip The Second Stage Trip phase will begin when the remaining preset volume is equal to the value specified by the Second Stage Trip Vol parameter The Second Stage Trip phase is the second in a series of adjustments from the High Flow rate to a No Flow condition When the Second Trip Volume is reached the flow control valve will reduce the flow rate from the First Stage Flow Rate to a flow rate specified by the Second Stage Flow Rate parameter The Second Stage Trip phase ends when the Final Trip Phase is reached Complete Load is complete For detailed information on the parameters described above refer to Chapter 5 Product Flow Control View Detail Status During Loading ZD Driver access to these screens can be blocked using the Status Screen Lockout parameter found on the RCU Setup screen from the Configuration Menu Pressing the Next and Prev keys will advance through the following load detail screens Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 345 Chapter 11 Operation From the Load S
355. nitor the RTS line to determine when the printer is in use by another MultiLoad II device The DCD line on the MultiLoad will be driver low by a MultiLoad device to take control of the printer 12 5 4 MISCELLANEOUS TASKS Any power signals permissives or lockouts that are not supplied or controlled by MultiLoad II directly will need to be bypassed or put into manual operation For example if a permissive to MultiLoad II or an additive pump or product pump is controlled by a PLC that receives commands from TMS rather than MultiLoad Il these pumps will not start automatically in Standalone mode because TMS and the PLC will not be aware of the status of the MultiLoad II in standalone operation Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 349 Chapter 11 Operation 350 12 5 5 CONFIGURING MULTILOAD II FOR LOCAL MODE If the MultiLoad II is configured to operate in Remote mode that is in conjunction with TMS you need only change one configuration parameter to operate in standalone mode Enter Program Mode Configuration RCU General Setup The RCU General Setup screen displays RCU GE RCU Address Card Reader DISABLE Swing Arm Secondary DISABLE Password 1 He ke Password 2 He Password 3 KKKKKKEK Password 4 KKK KKK Password 5 KKK KKK Modem Dial Host Login TDSTESE TDOSTEAST Terminal Name Toptech Terminal Next Prev Exit Select Remote Processing and press Enter The ENAB
356. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne nnnn mnnn nennen nnana 119 4 10 1 Defining Base Component Heclnes ee 120 410 2 DOTAING an AGOILIVG E 121 4 11 Defining Saleable Products ccsseccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeesaeseseeeenseeeseaesesaesasneeeneeeeseaesseseeeenseeeeeas 123 4 12 Preset Product Setup EENS NEES 126 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 4 12 1 Preset E EE 126 4 122 Component ASSIQNMeNt x sohbet at alii dead ee ah aise bi aoa 127 4 12 33 Additive ASSIGNING sisi oer hast ister eae de rho etna Geir eine enti ales 128 4 124 Authorized ee Ee ren 129 4 12 5 Configuration Tool Product Register Configuration Screen ccccscccsssceesceceneeesesesteneeeeeeeetsnneeens 130 4 12 6 Configuration Tool Recipe Configuration Doreen 130 413 H RE 131 4 14 Customer Logo Setup wwiiccs sscccecssccccccecaticrescencuececesecesstueseeaeceteseveccevedecetectaeducceesdcetancedsceddetecetestartuccteeeeet 132 4 14 1 Loading a built in customer 1OQGO sece sirarii estria ir E EKE E EaR EE EAA TAE EEE A 133 4 14 2 Uploading a Custom BMP Customer Logo 133 4 15 System Date and Time ccccccceceseceseeeeneeeeeeeeeescaesesneeenseeeeeaeeesaaesnseeeenseeessaesasaeeaseaeeneeeeseaeseseaeenseaeeees 134 4 16 GPS Sites ML Il Mobile Only ccccccseeceseeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeesaaeseneeeeneeeeseaesesaaesasneeeneeeeseaesasneeeenseeeeeas 135 CHAPTER 5 PRODUCT FLOW CONTROL ennnen aini anenai deae aonane enaa en eaa aaa daea iaa seede kidodi
357. no longer used Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 41 3 7 1 EXTRACT AND VIEW TRANSACTION Figure 3 6 Transaction Window 3 7 2 CREATE BOLS FROM TRANSACTIONS Figure 3 7 Bill of Lading BOL Window Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 42 3 8 MUuLTILOAD II REPORTS The MultiLoad II GUI Config package provides two useful reports the Configuration Report and the Flow Control Modules Report The report format mechanism and display options are identical to those employed for TMS reports If you need information on TMS reporting capabilities and options please refer to the TMS Operations Guide 3 8 1 CONFIGURATION REPORT This report contains all configuration information for your MultiLoad II system Figure 3 8 Configuration Report Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 43 3 8 2 FLOW CONTROL MODULES REPORT The Flow Control Modules Report is a comprehensive listing of every I O assignment on the MultiLoad II These assignments can be on the external FCMs excluding SMP or on the optional internal UO board Figure 3 9 UO Assignment Report Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 9 LOCAL MODE ONLY PARAMETERS When running in Remote mode some MultiLoad II prompts are supplied by TMS or other TAS When running in Local mode these parameter values must be supplied via the MultiLoad II Configuration t
358. nt Component which is loaded Type Product Type 1 Saleable Product Recipe 2 Component 3 Additive 4 Meter 5 Preset Totalizer 6 Meter Totalizer 7 component Totalizer 8 Additive Totalizer Product Name of the Product Saleable Component Additive Alarm If their was an alarm for that transaction Gross Gross Volume Net Net Volume Mass Mass Temperature Temperature of the load Pressure Pressure of the load BSW Bottom Sediment Water percentage Density Density of the load Relative Relative Density of the load Density API Gravity API Gravity of the load API Table Name of the API table that is used for that batch Vef Vcf factor which is used during the loading MultiLoad stores by batch the alarms which occurred during loading for all alarm levels except the bay level Select the alarm and press Enter to view Alarm details EW TRANSACTION ALARM DETAILS Preset 1 No Alarms Next Prev Pressing Next will show all alarm levels by Preset Meter Component and Additive Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 326 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 11 VIEW WEIGHTS AND MEASURES CHANGE LOG Select W amp M Change Log from the Views and Inquiries screen The W amp M Change Log Screen displays VIEW WEIGHTS amp MEASURES CHANGE LOG Ref 00003 Pre Cmp 01 None gt LAB SOE Td 1 07 03 23 58 API CTL Table Name Ref 00002 Pre Mtr 01 DISABLD gt ENABLE Ta 07 08723 56 Temperature Sensor Re
359. ntages of using the GUI Config package are e All related parameter fields are located on one GUI screen e Multiple configuration files can be created and maintained e Most Configuration tasks can be performed at the TMS console in Remote mode or from a dedicated PC e Configuration changes can be uploaded to the MultiLoad Il e Configuration reports can be displayed or printed e Screen and field Help are readily available Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 35 3 2 ACCESS FROM TMS 5 GUI From the TMS Main Menu select Facility Facility Configuration Menu Load Rack Communications TLC MultiLoad II Configuration A blank Configuration Screen displays Open the File menu on the menu bar and choose Open a fF ON gt A File Selector dialog box displays MlAmssictg back tle rack2ddy tle d rackZa tle rack3 tle BOB S tlc rack3a tle rack4 tie rack4a tic Mike tic road tle Figure 3 1 File Selection Screen Click the drop down arrow to the right of the File Name field Select the file name that appears This file has been pre configured at Toptech for your facility It can be modified and you can create new configuration files that can be downloaded to the MultiLoad II 8 After selecting the configuration file click the Done button Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 9 The Bay Level Configuration screen displays a D b
360. nter April 8 2003 as 030408 Press ENTER to save the entry 3 Press 2 and enter the current time in HHMMSS hours minutes seconds 24 hour format For example for 15 seconds past 2 30 pm enter 143015 Press ENTER to save Changes to the Date and Time parameters are logged in the W amp M Change Log Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 135 4 16 GPS SitEs ML II MOBILE ONLY Use the GPS Site Setup function to enter up to 4 000 approved transaction sites Each site name can be up to 15 characters A GPS must be connected and configured to use this option This database can use to Display the current site name on the card in display Record the Latitude Longitude and Site Name into the local transaction database header Optionally raise a GPS error if the transaction authorization is not at a site in the database Raise a GPS error is the position changes after transaction authorization Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt GPS Sites The GPS Site Setup screen displays GPS STIE SETUR Ne AIN E N oer or Ee RE N 28 36 423 W 081 08 234 ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined ndefined undefined undefined undefined undefined undefined Prev Exit Toptech Bob s Gas MS Terminal Next For each Site press Enter then key in the Site Name using the keypad Press enter then key in the corresponding Latitude and Longitu
361. nts Parameter Default Setting Meter 1 1st Stage Trip Volume 70 gallons 1st Stage Trip Flow Rate 225 gallons per minute 2nd Stage Trip Volume 20 gallons 2nd Stage Trip Flow Rate 150 gallons per minute Pump Run FCM Disabled Pump Kill FCM Disabled Pump Status FCM Disabled Block Valve Open FCM Disabled Block Valve Close FCM Disabled Block Valve Status FCM Disabled For detailed parameter descriptions please refer to General Configuration chapter topic Component Setup Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 5 4 RATIO BLENDING EXCLUDING SMP Regular H Zeche Cea ok Figure 5 4 Ratio Blending Application E Premium SH To perform Ratio Blending two to five meter runs must be constructed to deliver each component through a single load arm Each meter run will consist of one flow meter and one control valve The MultiLoad will deliver each of the recipe components simultaneously The MultiLoad will attempt to keep the total blend ratio within the range established by the Blend Adjust Deviation throughout the load During the Low Flow Start stage the combined flow rate of all meter runs will be controlled to maintain the flow rate configured for the Low Flow Start Rate parameter The low flow rate for each component will be de
362. number after the decimal point xxi Relative Density value is in tenthousth defined meaning 4 numbers after the decimal point xxii Api Gravity value is in tenths defined meaning one number after the decimal point xxiii BSW value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point b Preset Number Specify the preset Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP c Component Number Specify the component Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP 8 Meter Real Time RT a Meter Real Time Prompt i Clearing Errors Indicates that a meter level alarm is clearing for a particular flow meter ii Clearing Totals Indicates that batch totals are clearing for a particular flow meter iii Alarm Out Indicates that a meter level alarm such as Low Flow is active iv Authorized Indicates that a particular flow meter is authorized for use v Permissive Indicates that a meter level permissive is active vi Permissive Out Indicates that all meter level permissives have been satisfied vii Side Stream on meter Indicates that a particular flow meter is a side stream meter and that it is authorized for the batch viii Meter Sate High Flow Low Flow FST_IDLE 0 FST_LOW_FLOW 1 FST_HIGH_FLOW 2 FST_FIRST_TRIP 3 FST_SECOND_TRIP 4 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic Xi xii xiii xiv XV Xvi xvii 366 FST_FINAL_TRIP 5 Gross Deliverd Preset Quantity value is in whole defined Gross Flow
363. o be connected directly to the Com 2 MultiLoad ll After a printer is connected the correct COM parameters and PRINT option must be selected in the Configuration gt Communication Setup section and Ticket Printing must be Enabled in the RCU Setup section A default Meter Ticket format is stored in the MultiLoad Il This can be reconfigured without software changes but not manually through the MultiLoad II or MultiLoad II Configuration tool Please contact Toptech for Meter Ticket format reconfiguration Hazard warnings are also configurable per product On the MultiLoad II Mobile the default ticket has been configured for a small 4 5 wide ticket with all header parameters left aligned The Authorization Latitude Longitude and Site Name will also appear on this default ticket Several MultiLoad devices can be attached to the same serial printer Using the RS232 Multidrop hardware in the MultiLoad it is possible to connect the RS232 COM 2 port on all MultiLoad II devices to a single printer Serial connections must be as follows SMP 1 COMM2 TBS PRINTER 0 Ki Ki B D g K 2 T eeoovodo The DTR signal from the printer should provide the printer status busy on line paper out error etc MultiLoad will monitor its CTS input to report any printer status errors Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 348 Chapter 11 Operation When COM 2 is put into the Multi mode the MultiLoad will mo
364. o close and the relevant pump will be commanded to stop The Pump Kill output will be activated if it is used A Pump Stat alarm message will occur on other load arms that are using the common Pump Run output For example if a Valve Fault occurs on load arm 1 diesel all other diesel load arms in the bay will display the Pump Stat alarm and will not be able to load until corrective action is taken This alarm may indicate that the control valve requires maintenance and is in an unsafe condition LOW FLOW DRIVER The flow rate has remained below the Low Flow Alarm Rate for a period specified by the Low Flow Alarm Time parameter The pump may have stopped or the valve may be shut A meter pulser failure may also cause this alarm EXCESS FL REMOTE Excess Flow at the meter level this alarm indicates that the maximum flow rate of the flow meter has been violated This alarm can also occur with bad pulse transmitters or loose pulser connections Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 111 Chapter 4 General Configuration Alarm Meaning QUAD ENC Quadrature Encoder error also known as pulse security error This alarm applies to flow meters that use dual channel pulsers One of the pulser channels has failed or is failing intermittently This alarm occurs in new installations when pulser channel A is wired to pulser channel B and vice versa This alarm will also be raised if reverse flow is d
365. obe T1 while flowing Regular Drm Density for the Regular Meter D1 Volume weighted average Density measured while flowing Regular OR specified for meter M1 Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nrm Net volume loaded for the Regular Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mrm Mass loaded for the Regular Meter Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Grm Tr Trm Dr Dr OR Drm Nr Nrm Mr Mrm Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 285 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Where Gr Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Tr Temperature for the Regular component Dr Density for the Regular component Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Premium meter Meter Level values are reported as Where Gpm M1 Tpm T 1 Dpm D1 OR Dp Npm Gpm VCFp Tpm Dpm Mpm Npm Dom OR Mpm Gpm D1 Gpm Gross volume loaded for the Premium Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 while flowing Premium Tpm Temperature for the Premium Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 while flowing Premium Dpm Density for the Premium Meter D1 Volume weighted average Density measured while flowing Premium OR specified for meter M1 Dp Density specified for the Premium component Npm Net volume loaded for the Premium Meter VCFp API Correction Table for Premium Mpm Mass loaded for the Premium Meter Premi
366. observed density value Density Adjusted Displays the observed density as a result of applying the density offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 304 9 17 RELATIVE DENSITY CALIBRATION Use the Relative Density screen to calibrate relative density for a Meter 3 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose Relative Density After selecting the preset and meter the Relative Density screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 RELATIVE DENSITY Relative Density Unadjusted 0 5000 1 Relative Density Offset 0 0000 2 Relative Density Adjusted 0 5000 Next Prev 4 If the observed Relative Density is different from the unadjusted relative density displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the difference between the Relative Density Unadjusted and Relative Density Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed density in the Relative Density Adjusted field in which case the Relative Density Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 DENSITY Relative Density Unadjusted 0 5000 l1 Relative Density Offset F 2 Relative Density Adjusted 0 5000 Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset Relative Density Displays the real time relative density Unadjusted Relative Density Displays the current Relative Density offset value which is the difference Of
367. of Range it is possible that the value entered is invalid for the selected API table 6 After a valid density gravity or expansion coefficient has been entered configuration for VCF is complete At this point various test temperatures densities and relative densities can be entered to view what VCF would be used if the liquid s temperature was of the same value API Name Select the desired API table to correct liquid volumes to a reference temperature Highlight the field and press Enter to scroll through the choices Test Temp Enter a test temperature in this field The temperature that is entered here will not have any effect on actual measurement Test Density or Enter a test density test relative density or test API Gravity in this field The value Test Relative Density or that is entered here will not have any effect on actual measurement Test API Gravity Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures API Gravity Expansion One of these fields will appear depending on the API table selected Enter the Coefficient requested value in this field The value that is entered in this field will be used to calculate VCF during operations Calculated VCF The value in this field is the result of the API Test Temperature and the data in the previous field density gravity or expansion coefficient This Calculated VCF is for information only and has no affect on actual measurement Corrected Relative Thi
368. ol Enter a volume that will trigger the beginning of the First Stage Trip phase The First Stage Trip phase will begin when the remaining preset volume is equal to the value specified in this parameter The First Stage Trip phase is the initial reduction from the High Flow rate to a no flow condition When the First Stage Trip Volume is reached the flow control valve will reduce the flow rate from the High Flow Rate to a flow rate specified by the First Stage Flow Rate parameter The First Stage Trip phase will end when the Second Stage Trip Volume is reached 1 Stage Flow Rate Enter the target flow rate for the First Stage Flow Rate 2 Stage Trip Vol Enter a volume that will trigger the beginning of the Second Stage Trip phase The Second Stage Trip phase will begin when the remaining preset volume is equal to the value specified in this parameter The Second Stage Trip phase is the second in a series of adjustments from the High Flow rate to a no flow condition When the Second Trip Volume is reached the flow control valve will reduce the flow rate from the First Stage Flow Rate to a flow rate specified by the Second Stage Flow Rate parameter The Second Stage Trip phase will end when the Final Trip Phase is reached 2 Stage Flow Rate Enter the target flow rate for the Second Stage Flow Rate Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 100 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Action Final Trip Vol
369. ol Coefficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is not known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F needs to be maintained under component level Coefficient of Density is fixed at 0 84 10E 3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Blend range from BO to B40 Table TEC ETH E40 NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is ethanol Coefficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is not known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F needs to be maintained under component level Coefficient of Density is fixed at 1 27 10E 3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations NOTE Blend range from EO to E40 Table TEC ETH E100 NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is ethanol Coef
370. ol meter Meter Level values are reported as Gem M2 value not to be used for trade Tem T2 value not to be used for trade Dem D2 OR De Nem Gem VCFe Tem Dem value not to be used for trade Mem Nem Dem OR Mem Gem D1 value not to be used for trade Where Gem Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter M2 Gross volume reported by meter M2 Tem Temperature for the Ethanol Meter T2 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T2 Nem Net volume loaded for Ethanol Meter VCFe API Correction Table for Ethanol Mem Mass loaded for Ethanol Meter Ethanol product Component Level values are reported as Ge Gem value not to be used for trade Te Tem value not to be used for trade De De OR Dem Ne Nem value not to be used for trade Me Mem value not to be used for trade Where Ge Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component Te Temperature for the Ethanol component Ne Net volume loaded for the Ethanol component Me Mass loaded for the Ethanol component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Grem Ger value not to be used for trade Tr Trem Grem Ter Ger Gr value not to be used for trade Dr Dr OR Dr Drem Grem Der Ger Gr value not to be used for trade Nr Nrem Ner value not to be used for trade Mr Mrem Mer value not to be used for trade Where Gr Gross volume loaded for the Reg
371. olate a meter factor based on the current flow rate Meter Factor 4 will be used for all flow rates that exceed the Meter Factor 4 Flow Rate If this linearization point is not used leave this parameter at its default setting of 800 Meter Factors Used Enter the number of meter factors that are to be established by flow meter proving If proving a single flow rate enter a 1 in this field Data that are in the fields related to meter factors 2 3 and 4 will be ignored If proving two flow rates enter a 2 in this field Data that are in the fields related to meter factors 3 and 4 will be ignored If proving three flow rates enter a 3 in this field Data related to meter factor 4 will be ignored If proving four flow rates enter a 4 in this field Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 105 Chapter 4 General Configuration 106 4 7 ALARM SETUP Use the Alarm Setup functions to define alarm conditions and authorities at the various configuration levels Bay Preset Meter Component and Additive All alarm setup screens will indicate who has the authority to clear the alarm or how the alarm is to be cleared The following table shows these authorities in increasing order of severity and or importance AUTO The alarm will be cleared automatically when the condition rights itself DRIVER The driver may clear the alarm REMOTE This alarm can be cleared remotely by the host system TMS PROGRAM This alarm can b
372. ollowing conditions exist The liquid is ethanol Coefficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is not known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Table TEC ETH B100 NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is ethanol Coefficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is not known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F needs to be maintained under component level Coefficient of Density is fixed at 0 84 10E 3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 263 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures NOTE Blend range from BO to B100 Table TEC ETH B40 NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is ethan
373. om Logic 392 When a default density value is supplied or measured at the meter level this density value is accepted as the meter density and is applied to API calculations on the received meter volumes When a default density value is not supplied or measured at the meter level a blend weighted density is calculated from the component densities and is accepted as the meter density and is applied to API calculations on the received meter volumes When a default density value is supplied at the component level this density value is accepted as the component density When a default density value is not supplied at the component level a back calculated density is calculated and is accepted as the component density Meter sampled temperature continues to be used for the API calculation on the received meter volumes The meter temperature density can still be viewed on the Component Status Screen next to the calculated CTL CPL values The meter temperature density gross and calculated net volumes still appear on the meter line of the printed ticket Main component temperature is once again back calculated to keep back end accounting systems happy The component temperature density gross and net volumes appear on the component line of the printed ticket and are marked not for custody transfer A host system that queries for real time component level values will be supplied with the same component temperature density gross and net volumes that
374. ommunication with the I O board is restored Check AUTO the Diagnostic menu under FCM Com to determine if the I O Board or FCM is communicating BAY PERM 0 7 When the permissive signal s assigned to bay permissives 0 through 7 is are lost loading will stop and a message will be displayed The alarm will auto clear when the affected signal is restored The alarm message that appears to the operator is configured via the MultiLoad Configuration Tool at Bay Alarms Default names include GROUND VRU AUTO OVERFILL ESD PERM ALL STOP This feature is not available AUTO BAY PCM The MultiLoad II RCU has lost communication with a configured PCM board AUTO PRNTR ERR The printer connected to a PCM module is in error offline out of paper etc AUTO GPS_ERROR Is raised when GPS communication is configured and one of the following occur ML II Mobile Only AUTO No GPS fix data arrives for 60 seconds Max GPS Site Distance is configured as a non zero value and a transaction is authorized when the current position is not within this distance from a site in the GPS Site Database Current position has moved from the site where authorization was obtained BALARM 13 15 31 Driver Future bay level alarm assignments DEADMAN This Alarm will go on when the driver didn t push in time the deadman button Driver FCM Trace This alarm will appear when certain diagnostic features are activated by Topt
375. omponent during the Line Flush stage Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 163 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Example The following table shows how a 1000 gallon load is affected by each of the decision parameters The product is a 60 40 blend Component 1 is 60 of the total and component 2 is 40 of the total The Line Flush Component is component 1 The Line Flush Volume is 100 gallons Component Desired Quantity Delivered Flush Option Ratio Example 1 1 600 500 Take Flush from Matching Component 2 400 400 Flush 100 Line Flush Component is component 1 Preset Total 1000 1000 Example 2 1 600 500 Take Flush From First Component 2 400 400 Flush 100 Line Flush Component is component 1 Preset Total 1000 1000 Example 3 1 600 600 Take Flush From Last Component 2 400 300 Flush 100 Line Flush Component is component 1 Preset Total 1000 1000 In Example 1 using Take Flush From Matching Component results in a 60 40 blend The first component is shorted by 100 gallons but it is made up at the end of the load since the first component is also the flush component Example 2 produces identical results The MultiLoad will short the first component in the product recipe which happens to be the designated flush component In Example 3 when the Take Flush From Last Component is executed the resulting product ratio is 70 30 The last component component 2 is shorte
376. omponents 1 3 Component To Meter Assignment Meter Param Number of Meters 3 Side Stream on Meter 1 Component 1 Meter 1 Number of Components 3 Side Stream on Any Mtr Component 2 Meter 2 Enabled Ratio Blending Enable Low Flow DB Rate 10 gom Component 3 Meter 3 Seq Blending Disable High Flow DB Rate 10 gpm 1 Stage DB Rate 10 gpm 2nd Stage DB Rate 10 gpm Weights amp Measures Meter 3 Minimum Flow Rate 5 gpm Maximum Flow Rate 100 gpm Figure 5 12 Ratio Blending with Side Stream Configuration At the component level I O assignments can be made for product pumps etc The product selection BV valves used in this example are not configured in the Component section however They are operated by a Custom Logic routine The following routine can be used to steer the Side Stream component into the Meter 2 stream when Meter 1 is not used in a blend Custom Logic is configured in the Configuration Custom Logic Menu Lines 000 through 005 direct the BV for Component 1 to open when Meter 1 Component 1 is used in the blend If both Meter 1 and Meter 2 are being used to make a blend the side stream will default to Meter 1 Lines 006 011 direct BV2 to open when Meter 1 Component 1 is not used in a blend 000 P01 M03 Side Stream on Mtr 001 Set Value 1 002 000 Equals 001 003 P01 C03 Open BV 004 002 AND 003 005 FCM OUTPUT XX Y 004 006 P01 M03 Side Stream on Mtr 007 Set
377. on Output Pulse FCM This parameter enables an output port that will provide an output pulse that is representative of the volume delivered For FCMs and I O boards with firmware 035 and earlier the port setting must always be set to 1 for FCMs and 10 for I O boards For FCMs and I O boards with firmware 036 and later the port setting can be 0 5 for FCMs and 10 12 for I O boards For FCMs and WO boards with firmware 038 and later support dual pulse outputs Enable dual pulse output by configuring the Invert state on this port This port will be the leading pulse The trailing pulse will be the next contiguous port 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 10 11 11 12 on the FCM or I O board Notes Single Output Pulse Limited to 500 Hz Max Dual Output Pulse Limited to 250 Hz Max Output pulses are NOT real time and delayed up to 1 second from acquisition Output Pulse Factor A factor can be applied to the pulse output to achieve the desired pulse resolution The pulse resolution can be configured from 0 001 to 50 000 pulses per unit of measure Deadman Mode None Deadman functionality is disabled ContHld Continiuos Hold The Deadman input needs to be preset when the loading goes in low flow if not the load will stop No pre alarm is given Hid amp Rel Hold and Release The Deadman input needs to be pushed continiuos when the pre alarm gets triggered the deadman needs to be released for maximum of 3 seconds after tha
378. on ADDITIVE ALARM GI ADIV ECM AUTO SADT B 2 AUTO S EMOTE EMOTE PROG RIVI RIV EMO RIVI EMO RIVI A T C E bk AUTHORZ al IEA G A Di Ai A E e X F Hee e The alarm occurrence count can be reset by the following 2 MIN After 2 minutes of continuous system time 5 MIN After 5 minutes of continuous system time 15 MIN After 15 minutes of continuous system time 30 MIN After 30 minutes of continuous system time 60 MIN After 60 minutes of continuous system time 3 HRS After 3 hours of continuous system time 6 HRS After 6 hours of continuous system time 12 HRS After 12 hours of continuous system time 24 HRS After 24 hours of continuous system time AUTHORZ Until the next transaction is authorized CLEAR When the alarm is cleared Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration In the following topics only Bay Alarm Setup screen is shown To change each alarm you need to push ENTER to go into the ALARM DETAIL SETUP SCREEN ADDITIVE ALARM DETAIL S Alarm Name ADTV FCM Alarm Level Promo Count Promo Alarm Level Promo Reset Mode Alarm co Host FCM Output Don t store Alarm Alarm Meaning Alarm Name This is the name of the
379. on all of a bay s load arms that make use of the same pump output For example if a Pump Stat alarm appears on load arm 7 diesel it may have occurred due to a Valve Fault on another diesel arm that is in the same bay The Pump Stat alarm will also occur when using the Pump Status input to monitor a pump s DRIVER pressure When the pump loses pressure the Pump Status alarm will appear on all of a bay s load arms that rely on the pump MTR ALARM This alarm setting should remain at Auto Clear This alarm indicates that the component has a AUTO Meter Level alarm active OVR BLEND Over Blend alarm This alarm will occur when a component of a Ratio Blend is above tolerance by Excluding SMP the percentage specified by the Blend Check Alarm parameter or by the volume specified by the Blend Check Alarm Volume parameter For Sequential Blends this alarm will be raised when a batch is cleared and the blend is above tolerance by the percentage or volume specified by DRIVER aforementioned parameters UND BLEND Under Blend alarm This alarm will occur when a component of a Ratio Blend is below tolerance by Excluding SMP the percentage specified by the Blend Check Alarm parameter or by the volume specified by the Blend Check Alarm Volume parameter For Sequential Blends this alarm will be raised when a batch is cleared and the blend is below tolerance by the percentage or volume specified by DRIVER aforementioned parameters Firmware Version
380. on the MultiLoad Il e Upload of parameters via a SD memory card on the MultiLoad II Rev 2 0 CPU board only In all cases write access to W amp M parameters is denied unless the W amp M key switch plug is in the W amp M access position fs To perform a remote upload of metrological parameters the W amp M key switch plug MUST be in the W amp M access position otherwise all remote attempts to modify the W amp M parameters will be rejected The MultiLoad Il enclosure has a location where a lead seal can be placed to ensure that any tampering with the MultiLoad II internals to access the field connections CPU configuration memory or switch electronics directly will be evident MultiLoad II uses two methods of firmware update e Remote upload of a new firmware image via the host serial or Ethernet link on the MultiLoad Il e Upload of a new firmware image via a SD memory card on the MultiLoad II Rev 2 0 CPU board only In all cases attempts to upgrade the firmware of the MultiLoad will be denied unless the W amp M key switch plug is the in the W amp M access position aj To perform a remote update of the firmware the program W amp M key switch plug MUST be in the W amp M access position otherwise all remote attempts to update the firmware will be rejected Any W amp M parameter changes or firmware updates that are made will be logged into the W amp M change log Up to five passwords can be stored for access each password has an identifying
381. on would be logged internally The system will immediately attempt another injection assuming that the previous attempt delivered no additive When the number of missed injections equals the value entered for the Max Pstn Missed Inj Maximum Piston Missed Injections parameter an Injection Fault alarm will be raised and the load will be stopped If the piston has successfully returned to its starting position as determined by the feedback signal the piston will sit idle until another injection signal is received from the additive output port Another injection command signal shall be sent to the injector when the demand for additive based on product delivery becomes 50 of one injection volume Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 176 Chapter 6 Additive Control Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 4 CONFIGURING A PISTON WITH INPUT ADDITIVE This topic describes the minimum configuration required to get an additive to operate using this method Configuration of the following parameters is mandatory Using the MultiLoad II Configuration Tool or the Remote Control Unit keypad in Program mode select the preset and additive desired Additive Enable Enable this parameter Additive FCM Set this value to the FCM where the additive is connected Set this value to zero for the internal I O board FCM Port Select the port that will serve as the Additive Injection Output Note A corresponding additive input port will automatically be
382. onent Me Mass loaded for the Ethanol component Regular product Component Level values are reported as Where Dr Dr OR Gr Gbm Ge value not to be used for trade Tr Tbm Gbm Te Ge Gr value not to be used for trade Dr Dbm Gbm De Ge Gr value not to be used for trade Nr Nom Ne value not to be used for trade Mr Mbm Me value not to be used for trade Gr Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Gbm Ge Gross volume loaded difference between Blend and Ethanol Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Nbm Ne Net volume difference between the Blend Net Volume and Ethanol Net Volume Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Mbm Me Mass difference between the Blend Mass and Ethanol Mass Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 284 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 10 MULTILOAD SEQUENTIAL WITH RATIO BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular Premium sequential main streams Ethanol ratio blended Regular Regular meter Meter Level values are reported as Grm M1 Trm T 1 Drm D1 OR Dr Nrm Grm VCFr Trm Drm Mrm Nrm Drm OR Mrm Grm D1 Where Grm Gross volume loaded for the Regular Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 while flowing Regular Trm Temperature for the Regular Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by pr
383. only allow clearing of alarm when W amp M switch is active Added wm clear errors bit to bay preset component meter and additive status MRS command Added promotion count promoted alarm level and alarm _count_reset_ mode to the alarm configuration When an alarm occurs promotion count number of times the alarm level is changed to the promoted alarm level When the alarm count reset mode condition is met the alarm count is reset and the alarm is returned to the base alarm level Reset modes can be on transaction authorization successful alarm clearing or a delay of time from minutes to days of up system time Power cycling a system will restart the time required to return an alarm to the base level Attempts to set non autoclearable alarms to autoclear will result in the alarm being set to driver clearable ie low flow alarm Added new configuration format type ALARM COUNT RESET MODE Updated Alarm Configuration Registers 710 714 to support new parameters but still accept updates in the old format On U710 714 attempts to set non autoclearable alarms to autoclear will result in the alarm being set to driver clearable ie low flow alarm Added alarm count to alarm raised log message when promotion count is configured Added Additive W amp M controlled parameters W amp M Inj Flt Promo Count and W amp M Inj Flt Reset Mode to override registers for alarm promotion to WM CLEAR
384. onst structs Updated U R 990 and 991 registers to work with new raw file method Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 387 Removed mll MultiLoad 1 Arm target from the Makefile build script Updated ML package firmware to contain 1 Arm product id string to allow legacy 1 Arm firmware to upgrade to this and later full MultiLoad versions Updated simulation get _ticks to not log warnings about non monotonic system timer jitter on Lunux Updated simulation to work with backspace key for clear Corrected bug in Diagnostic Display Unicode where rolling backwards would attempt to display code point Oxffffffff Updated firmware version from 2 29 01 to 3 29 02 Updated product recipe register to support 6 additives Updated Modbus 2200 2271 interface to support 6 additives in a recipe Updated R U500 to support 4 and 6 additives in a recipe Added French language prompts Include Additive Under add and Over add alarms under conditional W amp M control Renamed additive cofig parameters wm inj fault promo _count reset mode as wm alarm promo _count reset mode Added logic to handle alarm promotion and clearing for Under add and Over Add alarms Changed Max Solenoid Injection Time from General to Conditional W amp M control Added support to store up to 10 000 transactions Updated Transaction Archive Database version to 3 29 02 Moved transaction storage from NVRAM to last 10 MB of program flash memory Max stor
385. ontrol after starting pumps and opening block valves Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 247 8 20 ADDITIVE DIAGNOSTICS Additive diagnostics enable your technician or electrician to diagnose wiring problems or hardware problems by testing the wiring and control from the MultiLoad II to outside devices such as block valves pump runs status injector outputs inputs and permissives input statuses can be viewed as ON or OFF outputs can be activated or deactivated from this screen by pressing the number that corresponds to the function 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select Additives DTAC N OTS CANC S M Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Pores Network Test Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next Prev 2 After Selection of the Additive the Additive Diagnostics screen displays Only the I O that is configured will appear on this screen if it is not the analog additive PRE 1 ADTV 1 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFE Del Pulses 1 PermissOut ON Del Volume Ettel h IAlarm OUt S IER Feedback OFF Test Button OFF 4 Pump Run PS Pump Kii ZORE Bumpo catus OEE 6 Eustis kump OER 7 Opn Bk Val OFF fo Cls Be val ON Bk Val Status OFF 9 Del Pulses 0 If the analog additive is configured following screen will appear where the pump speed can be controlled with the analog outpu
386. ontrol if the flow meter s pulse resolution is low The default scan time should be used if flow meter resolution is 40 pulses per gallon or greater At the default setting of 0 100 seconds the FCM will sample the flow rate 10 times every second If the guidelines below do not produce the desired effect increase the parameter value in increments of 0 100 seconds until the desired results are achieved The range of settings is 0 100 to 1 000 seconds 40 ppg 0 100 seconds 25 ppg 0 200 seconds 10 ppg 0 500 seconds 1 ppg 1 000 seconds Valve Dwell Time Use this parameter for digital control valves that have their opening and closing speed adjust valves set wide open This parameter should be adjusted when ball style valves are used on digital control valves for opening and closing speed control If the control valve contains needle style speed adjust valves and they will be used to tune the control valve s opening and closing speeds use the default setting of 1 second Otherwise use the following guidelines based on valve size 4 Digital Control Valve 0 040 0 080 seconds 3 Digital Control Valve 0 030 0 070 seconds 2 Digital Control Valve 0 020 0 040 seconds When the FCM attempts to adjust flow the control valve s opening and closing solenoids are actuated The Valve Dwell Time will determine the duration of solenoid actuation As the Valve Dwell Time is reduced the solenoid actuations will become increa
387. ool in lieu of TMS These local only parameters are accessed under the Miscellaneous group as shown in the sample screen below 3 9 1 DRIVER PROMPTS When a driver attempts access he is prompted for his PIN number He is then prompted for the Customer who is purchasing the product and if applicable the particular Account of that customer Because this data is not verified by an external computer it must be specified locally Pile Edit Tool Report Help f1 tmsS cfg rack3 tle E BAY Length of Data 18 FCM BOL Line B5 MISCELLANEOUS BOL Position D I Si PROMPT Language 1 Enter Stockholder PROMPT I Language 2 ENTER STOCKHOLDER PROMPT 2 PROMPT 3 PROMPT 4 PRODUCT ACCESS CARD HAZARD Figure 3 10 Prompt Configuration Menu Prompt 1 will be the first prompt displayed after entry of a valid PIN It instructs the driver to key in the product owner s ID number The screen below defines the prompts the driver will view as well as the location on the meter ticket where that information will appear Using the sample screen above the prompt is telling the driver to enter the Stockholder ID Once the load completes the value entered by the driver appear on line 10 column 68 on the subsequent meter ticket that is printed Length of Data Number of characters allowed for the entry BOL Line Line number on the meter ticket Bill of Lading where the product owner s name will appear To di
388. or without feedback enter the volume of the calibrated cylinder as indicated by the manufacturer or calibration service When the additive method involves a piston and an additive flow meter pulser enter the cylinder size If an additive flow meter pulser is used enter the volume of additive desired for each injection Enter the value using the same units of volume as the K Factor of the main product flow meter Do not use CCs Vol Inject Cal Factor This factor will correct the calibrated cylinder volume to a gross observed volume as actually measured during the additive calibration process When an additive meter is involved with or without a piston system set the parameter to 1 0000 Additive Mtr K Factor Enter the K factor of the additive flow meter This parameter is applicable if using an additive flow meter with or without a piston injector Enter the value using the same units of volume as the K Factor of the main product flow meter Do not use CCs Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control Additive Meter Factor This is the meter factor for the additive flow meter that will be used to correct the metered results to the observed additive volume The observed additive volume is obtained during additive meter calibration Max Pstn Missed Inj Use the parameter when employing the Piston With Input method of additive delivery Enter the number of piston injections that can be missed before the
389. ort will display detail information for that port Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 10 1 FCM GUI DISPLAY Pile Edit Tool Report FCM No 0 FCM No 1 FCM No 2 FCM No 4 FCM No 5 FCM No 6 MISCELLANEOUS PROMPT PRODUCT ACCESS CARD HAZARD Help ZC rardrabi Ei D vd m OO RZrardrabibi Para tomgt Cp Pom zoOc rd DO ZE Cp Pom zoc D gt marca gmaz vd Em ZZ ra PC obrg Za ra e Figure 3 14 UO Assignment Graphic To view detail for a port left click on it A detail window appears immediately to its right File Edit Tool Report FCM No 0 FCM No 1 FCM No 2 FCM No 4 FCM No 5 FCM No 6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESS CARD HAZARD Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Help 1 tmsS cfg rack3 tle PRESET No 882 METER No 862 FCM No 883 PORT No 862 DESC CONTROL YALVE UPSTREAM sc mat oO MYCmenm OOD P avatormgt Cp MPOmHZOO Figure 3 15 UO Assignment Detail 48 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 11 WINDOWS MULTIMATE CONFIGURATION TOOL 3 11 1 INSTALLATION The MultiMate Configuration Tool program is typically distributed as a ZIP file The instructions below describe the proper procedure to install and run the software 1 Extract the zip file Execute the setup exe follow the instructions carefully Optional delete the MultiLoad_cfg zip file Execute the MultiLoad_cfg exe program The program window opens a fF oO DN Open the program und
390. ot being received at port 5 of the FCM or they are being received intermittently If this REMOTE alarm is received along with QUAD CHA alarm the meter channels are either wired in reverse or backflow is occurring See QUAD ENC alarm MTR COM No communication with Meter that is connected via a communication line AUTO BSW This alarm indicates that the value measured by the BSW Sensor has deviated from the Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 112 Chapter 4 General Configuration REMOTE range specified by Alarm Low BSW and Alarm High BSW parameters Other potential causes include a disconnected sensor or an inappropriate value in the Default BSW field Go to program mode menu Views amp Inquiries gt BSW to observe the current BSW reading GRAVITY This alarm indicates that the value measured by the BSW Sensor has deviated from the range specified by Alarm Low API Gravity and Alarm High API Gravity parameters Other potential causes include a disconnected sensor or an inappropriate value in the Default API Gravity field Go to program mode menu Views amp Inquiries gt API Gravity to REMOTE observe the current API Gravity reading MALARM 19 31 Future meter level alarm assignments 4 7 4 COMPONENT ALARM SETUP Alarm Meaning COMP FCM The MultiLoad II has lost communication with the I O board or FCM This message indicates that component level functions are affected by the interrupted
391. ote If you re boot exit program mode without stopping the pump or closing the block valve these devices will automatically de energize Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 245 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 246 8 19 COMPONENT DIAGNOSTICS Component diagnostics enable your technician or electrician to diagnose wiring problems or hardware problems by testing the wiring and control from the MultiLoad II to outside devices such as block valves pump runs status and permissives input statuses can be viewed as ON or OFF outputs can be activated or deactivated from this screen by pressing the number that corresponds to the function 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select Components Pet AG ONT OSs ses M Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Serial Ports Additives Network Test Custom Logic Keypad Display Unicode FCM Com PCM Com FCM Heal PCM Heal RCU Bay Preset Next Prev 2 After Selection of the Component the Component Diagnostics screen displays Only the I O that is configured will appear on this screen PRE 1 CMP 1 Base 001 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFE 1 PermissOut ON 2 Authorized OFE 3 Alarm Out OHH 4 Pump Run ORE fa Pump Kiii OFF JEE Eet SIE slOpn Bk val OFF eC Bk va TEON Bk Val Status OFF Enter Meter Diagnostics To view diagnostics for the meter associated with this component press Enter Going to Meter Diagnostics from this screen allows valve c
392. otocols to update the currently selected driver language when the driver language configuration parameter is updated Since language does not exist in the UAP driver database update the currently selected driver language to the driver language configuration parameter for UAP driver authorization Removed the default alt language configuration parameter Host bay code needs to be updated to 1 Once a driver card is read and the driver language is known update the R008 register driver language with the driver language using the following index mapping table ie tms language 45 is german converts to index 4 in ML define LANGUAGE ENGLISH 0 define LANGUAGE SPANISH 1 define LANGUAGE PORTUGUESE 2 define LANGUAGE FRENCH 3 define LANGUAGE GERMAN 4 define LANGUAGE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE 5 define LANGUAGE TRADITIONAL CHINESE 6 define LANGUAGE THAI 7 2 Keep the current operation of reading the TMS language prompt database at language index 0 and writing this prompt into R700xx0 registers for older MultiLoad firmware 3 Read the TMS language prompt database for the selected driver language ie tms language 45 is german and write this prompt into R700xxl where 1 is the same index that was written into R008 ie 4 for german 4 Update the R008 register driver language with the default driver language once the driver transaction is do
393. ow profile Parameter Default Setting Low Flow Start Volume 50 gallons Low Flow Restart Volume 15 gallons Low Flow Rate 150 gallons per minute High Flow Rate 600 gallons per minute Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Meter Setup The next phase of sequential blending configuration occurs at the Meter level on the Meter setup screen PRE MER i SETUR Flow Control Module 0 Side Stream on Mtr Side Strm on Any Mtr Meter Address Meter Type Max Quad Errors 0 DISABLD 0 VOL PUL 10 145 Reset Quad Errors 10000 ow Flow Alarm Rate 10 Oow Flow Alarm Time 10 000 Excess Flw Alrm Rate 800 Minimum Flow Rate 50 Maximum Flow Rate 650 Low Flow DB Rate 40 High Flow DB Rate 40 Next Prev Enter the Flow Control Module number that will receive the flow meter input Valid choices are 0 31 The number of a FCM is determined by the communication address of the module The address is determined by the setting of the DIP switch S1 that is located on the FCM The switch position indicates a binary zero when it is in the Off position a binary one is represented by a switch in the On position The A channel of the flow meter signal will always be on Port 4 of the selected Flow Control Module If a channel B signal is used for pulse security that input will always be connected to Port 5 If channel B is not used Port
394. ow rate of the meter So this means that in Low Flow that pre defined Preset Low Fow is used for the main component For the High Flow the Multiload will look only for each component to the high flow rate of the component and NOT to the Preset High Flow parameter This type of blending will have a high accuracy because the meters of the smaller component will run almost on max flow rate and around the min flow rate of the meter which has a less accuracy The pre defined first trip and second trip are still used as it was before Most common the first and second trip volume for the low grade products are set to zero Output Pulse FCM This parameter enables an output pulse that is representative of the volume delivered through a preset s flow meter For FCMs and I O boards with firmware 035 and earlier the port setting must always be set to 1 for FCMs and 10 for I O boards For FCMs and I O boards with firmware 026 and later the port setting can be 0 5 for FCMs and 10 12 for I O boards For FCMs and UO boards with firmware 038 and later support dual pulse outputs Enable dual pulse output by configuring the Invert state on this port This port will be the leading pulse The trailing pulse will be the next contiguous port 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 10 11 11 12 on the FCM or I O board Notes Single Output Pulse Limited to 500 Hz Max Dual Output Pulse Limited to 250 Hz Max Output pulses are NOT real time and delayed up to 1 se
395. p the bay while the Download is in Download progress Warning If the box is unchecked blank it will be possible for a driver to start a load while the upload download is in progress Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 40 3 6 2 UPLOAD REGISTERS Use this function to upload a configuration file to a MultiLoad Il at a load rack You would typically use this function after modifying an existing configuration file or creating a new configuration file then uploading the file to the appropriate MultiLoad II Protocol LC Name Address Directory File Name Smith RACK4 mm BB Disabled ReU while Downoad MAmssicty rack4 tle ja Upload file to RCU CANCEL EXIT Figure 3 5 Upload Window Protocol Type of communication protocol Smith default Brooks DanLoad LC Name Line Controller that controls the serial port the MultiLoad II is on Address Address of the MultiLoad II to which the configuration parameter values are to be uploaded Directory Full directory path where the configuration file resides File Name Name of the configuration file Disabled RCU while Checking this box is recommended because it will stop the bay while the Upload is in Download progress Warning If the box is unchecked blank it will be possible for a driver to start a load while the upload download is in progress 3 7 RELOAD LANGUAGE This feature is
396. pecified by the Flush Pump Run Time Consult the User Guide for more details on performing additive flush on this type of additive configuration See also Solenoid Flushed parameter description Solenoid Flushed This parameter is to be enabled if the additive Injector Valve is in the flush path The additive Injector Valve will be held open during a period specified by the Flush Pump Run Time Consult the User Guide for more details on performing additive flush on this type of additive configuration W amp M Alarm Promo Count If this additive is to have a W amp M clear promotion level setting this value to a non zero number will override the value in the Additive Alarm Setup configuration W amp M Alarm Reset Mode Flush Pump Run FCM Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 If the W amp M Alarm Promo Count is non zero then for this additive this value will override the value in the Additive Alarm Setup configuration This parameter permits selection of an output port that will provide an output signal to activate a flush pump 191 Chapter 6 Additive Control Parameter Description Close Blk Val FCM Close Block Valve FCM This parameter permits selection of a port that will provide an output signal to close an additive s block valve The valve is commanded to close when the remaining quantity of the load reaches the value specified in the additive parameter Shutoff Volume From End The block valve is
397. perature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 59B NMI This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 20 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Observed Density is to be corrected to 20 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 59D This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 20 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a lube oil Observed Density i
398. perature on RCU Diagnostics screen only if CPU board supports the feature 03 08 2013 PS Enhancement of Register800 to always transaction read of api_expansion coef tenths corrected densitygravity volume correction factor bsw_hund alibilog alarm 03 08 2013 PS Added Bay Number to the Web Interfac 03 11 2013 PS Fix Ticket Print Measure used was on totalizer line correct for gross but incorrect for net Also allow totalizer to be shown with max value of 999999999 Fix Measure used for Additive Totalizer Line was missing 03 12 2013 PS Added in Custom Logic the State for Preset Meter Component High Flow Low Flow e Added in Custom Logic under Rcu Real Time Parameters the Date and Time value 03 12 2013 WJP Corrected bug on SMP firmware builds where the editing of parameters on the RCU General screen edited the wrong parameter 03 12 2013 WJP Update TDS 3po checksum routine to stop converting all incomming and outgoing data to upper case 03 18 2013 WJP Corrected bug may have been created on 5 17 2011 in processing and prompting for PIN numbers when processing mode is set to Stand Alone 03 19 2013 WJP Added ability to support two different serial ports set to host mode 03 21 2013 WJP Added MRTDpppddd command to directly read the transaction details for a specified preset archived after clearing each batch 03 29 2013 WJP Added Batch Number 1 9 999 999 to the transaction
399. pical MultiLoad Il SMP bay would consist of one load arm or Preset one main product Meter control valve connected to one Component and may have up to two Additives The following table shows the relationships between internal UO board ports and the functional assignments AC Output Port 0 Additive Injection Output 1 AC Output Port 1 Additive Injection Output 2 AC Output Port 2 N O Solenoid Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration AC Output DC Input DC Input DC Input DC Input DC Input DC Output DC Output DC Output Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 9 Port 10 Port 11 Port 12 78 N C Solenoid Meter Channel A Meter Channel B optional Additive Meter Input 2 Additive Meter Input 1 Ground input 4 6 1 BAY SETUP Use the Bay Setup functions to configure all Bay level configurations Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup gt Select Parameter Level gt Bay Setup All Weights and Measures controlled values are displayed in red both on the screen and in this manual The Bay Setup screen displays BAY SETUP Number of FCMs Number of PCMs Temps in F Canada API Limits Bay Number Number External Presets Pulse FCM Pulse Factor Output Output Deadman Mode Input Deadman FCM Deadman Stop Timer Output Deadman FCM Deadman Warning Timer 20 10 000 NONE DISABLD 180 DISABLD
400. play batches that have the alarm flag set in red Added Batch Alarm preset status bit on MRS command to latch any preset alarm to be reported on transactions 11 20 09 3 29 03 WJP Updated SMP graphic to high resolution version To support adding back in card reader for SMP Div 2 also added back in Prox Card Pull Secs and No Prox Pull If Flow parameters Corrected bug that prevented dual pulse output from working on port 2 3 Updated preset meter and component totalizers to accept and view volume in whole units or hundredths Updated backflow totalizer logic to capture 100s without dropping percision across whole numbers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 389 Added new W amp M RCU Setup parameter Use Hundredths R030 to enable display recording and totalizing in hundredths Added support to transaction archive and alibi log for viewing or printing whole units or hundredths Updated Transaction Detail view screen to display whole units or hundredths Corrected ticket printing of leading zeros on temperature pressure and density Updated Serial and Modbus interface for totalizers transaction archive to return implied two decimal places when the Use Hundredths parameter R030 is enabled Updated firmware version to 3 29 03 12 14 09 3 29 04 WJP Added API tables 600 and 901A for TTE Updated firmware version to 3 29 04 Gl 12 15 09 3 29 05 WD merge with atmel development
401. preset Select the desired component Each component of a given preset will need to be configured independently for CTL 1 Select the API CTL table Highlight this field and press Enter to scroll through the table choices When the desired table appears press Next to advance to the following field Below is a list of API Table options and the conditions under which they are used If the name in red NMI is in it means that the table is approved for MID purposes Table Description ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of crude oil at observed 1980 Table 6A temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is crude oil API Gravity 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the API Gravity of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of API Gravity is from 0 100 API Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the API Gravity The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 257 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Table Description ASTM1250 1980 Table 6B This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasolines at observed temperatures to the volume at 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist
402. preset level At the meter level configuration default values can typically be used for the primary meters Meter 1 amp Meter 2 When configuring parameters for Meter 3 enter a value in the Side Stream On Mtr parameter By entering a value of 1 for this parameter Meter 3 is designated to be a side stream of Meter 1 If it is necessary to flow through more than one primary stream also enable the parameter Side Stream on Any Meier under Meter 3 configuration This will allow the side stream meter to flow into another primary stream if Meter 1 is not used in the blend The side stream meter will always expect to flow through Meter 1 when Meter 1 is used in a blend due to the setting of the Side Stream On Mtr parameter It will probably be necessary to adjust the Dead Band rates of Meter 3 since the side stream meter is typically smaller than the primary stream meters Reference the table for suggested settings The Maximum Flow Rate and Minimum Flow Rate parameters for Meter 3 will also need to be adjusted to match the flow meter manufacturer s specifications Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 159 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control At the component level configuration the components are assigned to a particular meter using the Meter parameter Referencing the diagram in Figure 5 5 Component 1 is assigned to Meter 1 Component 2 is assigned to Meter 2 and Component 3 is assigned to Meter 3 Preset Meter Meter 3 C
403. r MASS ee ee ee ath ee 256 9 5 3 APISPABLE VGF Calculators EE asian EE EE ANE tea eased ee 256 9 5 4 Display of Net Volume and Related Data 257 9 5 5 API MPMS Chapter 11 1 2004 Adjunct to IP 200 04 Adjunct to ASTM D 1250 04 esscccsssseeeeee 257 9 5 6 Configuring for Temperature Correction CT 257 9 6 MultiLoad Straight Delivery Single Component Calculations ccss cccesseeeeesseeeeenseseeenees 276 9 7 MultiLoad Sequential Blending Calculations ccsccccescssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeees 278 9 8 MultiLoad Ratio Blending Calculations cs cssecceseeeseseeessesseseeeeneeeeseeseseaesnsneeeeeeeeseeseseanenseeeeeees 280 9 9 MultiLoad Side stream Blending Calculations 0 s cccesccsseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeessaeseseaeenseeeeeees 282 9 10 MultiLoad Sequential with Ratio Blending Calculations cccsceseseesseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeesesseeenseeeeeees 285 9 11 MultiLoad Sequential with Side stream Blending Calculations ccccsscsseeceeseeeseeeseseeeeeseeeeeees 288 9 12 MultiLoad Ratio with Side stream Blending Calculations cccsecssscssseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeneeeeeeees 293 9 13 Temperature Calibration for Meters cccscccsscesseeeeseeeeeeeeesceeseseeeneeeeseaesescaesaseeeeeeneeseeeseseeeenseeeeeeas 297 9 14 Temperature Compensation and VCF Calculator ccccscccsseesseeeeeseeeseeeeesneeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeneas 299
404. r Preset Number Always 1 on MultiLoad II SMP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries Typ Product Type 1 Saleable Product Recipe 2 Component 3 Additive 4 Meter 5 Preset Totalizer 6 Meter Totalizer 7 component Totalizer 8 Additive Totalizer Prod Product ID Gross Gross Volume Net Net Volume Temp Temperature Dens Density Relative Density Gravity CP Compartment VIEW TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR BOL 0003 Gross Net Temp 499 54 499 54 042 3C 499 54 499 54 042 3C Pr T Prod 01 1 PRDOOL O01 2 BASOO1 Next Any Batch that had an alarm occur during delivery where the accuracy may be in question will be Highlighted in RED Select a batch and press Enter to view details Prev VIEW TRANSACTION DETAIL DETAILS Bol Batch Preset EE Alarm Gross Mass Jet DD Pressure BSW 00001 Detail 00001 0000005 O1 Component o1 Preset Product PRDOOQT No 499 54 Net 499 54 O20 SHENG oS SEI a0 510 Bol Bol sequence number from Multiload2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 325 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries Detail Number of details of 1 transaction 1 to 99 Batch Batch sequence number from Multiload2 for each loaded batch the number will be increased by 1 Preset Preset or Arm which was used during loading Compone
405. r Shutoff Volume From End additive delivery will cease regardless of the demand that is remaining If the Shutoff Volume From End parameter is set to 150 gallons additive delivery will stop when there is 150 gallons to be delivered The remaining product volume will flush additive from the line Line Flush Min Vol Set this parameter to ensure that the minimum required flush volume is delivered If the load is aborted before enough product has flushed the line an Additive Flush alarm will activate warning that the flush may be insufficient Throughout most of the delivery cycle the additive product ratio will be within the specified recipe When the final injection occurs prior to reaching the volume specified by Shutoff Volume From End the load will be slightly over additized By the time the load is complete the additive product ratio will be on target Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 208 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 11 2 TECHNIQUES FOR FLUSHING DYE Front Loading Dye The flush cycle can be maximized by injecting the load s entire dye requirement at the very beginning of the delivery cycle Flushing will occur for the majority of the load the load will be over additized during most of the delivery The Last Injection From End Volume can be set to a number that is equal to the maximum allowable preset quantity This will cause the final injection to occur as soon as the batch is started The Shutoff Volume From End should be set to
406. r big Flash Firmware This operation will permenantly update the device s firmware Please ensure that the device is inactive and unavailable for load operations During this operation all communication with the device will be lost and you may need to manually reconfigure network settings on the device itself Are you sure you want to continue 9 After the upgrade the communication parameters should be re entered to the Multiload 10 Test the communication again via MultiMate and reupload the existing configuration NOTE Legacy MultiLoad II 1 Arm firmware can be updated to the full MultiLoad II firmware version 2 29 02 or later Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration CHAPTER 4 GENERAL CONFIGURATION 4 1 OVERVIEW MultiLoad II is highly configurable which makes it extremely flexible and adaptable to your facility s changing needs The MultiLoad II Configuration functions are available from the Configuration Menu Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration The CONFIGURATION MENU screen displays ClOwN EH Sl CW IR Ay iS ON Network RCU General Setup REU SECUR Equipment Setup Alarm Setup Products Additive Cal Remote Adtv Cal Access ID s Custom Logic Customer Loge see Date amp Time GPS Sites Next Prev With the exception of Additive setup and calibration functions all configuration functions and features are discussed in this c
407. r menu options and function screen items pressing the Next key moves the selection bar down and pressing the Prev Previous key moves the selection bar up To return to the Main Menu press EXIT To return to any previous screen press the EXIT key Note Depending on the card reader mode the Card Reader Screen could be appear as iButton Reader Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 23 Chapter 2 System Description 2 10 2 FIELD MODIFICATION AND DATA ENTRY MultiLoad II will have all fields populated with default values There are two types of fields toggle or data entry Toggle fields contain a number of choices Scroll through the choices by pressing the Enter key Data entry fields require that a value be entered into the field within a given applicable range In the example below RCU Address field is highlighted RCU GE IRCU Address O01 Card Reader Type DISABLD Remote Processing StndAln Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1 KAKKK KK Password 2 KEKKKKK Password 3 KKKKKKK Password 4 KAKKKK KK Password 5 KKKKKKK Modem Init AT amp F0 amp B1 amp C1 amp D0S0 1 Modem Dial Host Login TDSTEST TDSTEST Terminal Name Toptech TerminalTruck Number Next Prey Exit Enter Press ENTER to choose the field A blinking cursor indicates data can be entered RCU GE RCU Address Card Reader Type DISABLD Remote Processing StndAln Swing Arm Secondary DISABLD Password 1
408. r pulse security that input will always be connected to Port 5 If channel B is not used Port 5 can be assigned to some other I O function Port 2 will automatically be assigned to be the control valve s Upstream Solenoid signal Port 3 will be used for the control valve s Downstream Solenoid signal PRE 1 MTR 1 SETUP Side Stream on Mtr 0 Side Strm on Any Mtr DISABLD Meter Address 0 Mercer Type VOL PUL Max Quad Errors Reset Quad Errors ow Flow Alarm Rate ow Flow Alarm Time Excess Flw Alrm Rate Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate Low Flow DB Rate High Flow DB Rate Next Prev The Dead Band rates for the flow stages are configured on the Meter Setup screen No valve adjustments will be attempted when the flow rate is within the dead band Whenever flow drifts outside of the dead band the valve will make adjustments to bring the flow rate back within the dead band If multiple meters are assigned to the preset repeat this process for the other meters Two additional ratio blending parameters are found on the Meter Setup screen The Ratio Adjust Proportional Factor and the Ratio Adjust Derivative Factor have been configured at the factory These parameters should not be adjusted without consulting Toptech Systems Parameter Default Setting Flow Control Module 0 1st Stage Dead Band Rate 40 gallons per minute 2nd Stage Dead Band Rate 40 gallons per minute
409. r selects an output port that will be assigned to signal the condition Permiss FCMA Allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the component s permissive If the signal is not present at authorization or if the signal is lost during delivery the process will be stopped and a permissive component level alarm will be raised Permiss Out FCM This parameter permits the selection of a port that will provide an output signal The signal will represent the loss of the component s permissive Meter Factor 1 Enter the meter factor that was calculated when proving at the Meter Factor X flow rate The meter factor is used to correct the volume indicated at the MultiLoad II display to correspond with the observed gross volume The observed gross volume is typically determined by a proving device If linearization is not used leave this parameter at the default setting of 1 0000 Leave the remaining Meter Factor parameters at their default settings The allowable range of entries is 0 8000 1 200 Meter Factor 1 Rate Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Enter the flow rate that was used during proving to find Meter Factor 1 This is the first linearization point Meter Factor 1 will be used to correct the indicated volume for flow rates ranging from zero up to and including the Meter Factor 1 Flow Rate If linearization is not used leave this parameter set at the
410. r the Premium Meter VCFp API Correction Table for Premium Mpm Mass loaded for the Premium Meter Premium product Component Level values are reported as Gp Gpm Tp Tpm Dp Dp OR Dpm Np Npm Mp Mpm Where Gp Gross volume loaded for the Premium component Tp Temperature for the Premium component Dp Density for the Premium component Dp Density specified for the Premium component Np Net volume loaded for the Premium component Mp Mass loaded for the Premium component Blended product Preset Level values reported as Gb Gr Gp value not to be used for trade Tb Tr Gr Tp Gp Gb value not to be used for trade Db Dr Gr Dp Gp Gb value not to be used for trade Nb Nr Np Mb Mr Mp Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Tr Gr Tp Gp Gb Volume weighted temperature for the blend Db Density for the blend Dr Gr Dp Gp Gb Volume weighted density for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 8 MuLTILOAD RATIO BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular 2 TRAN A O ipa Regular meter Meter Level values are reported as Grm M1 Trm T 1 Drm D1 OR Dr Nrm Grm VCFr Trm Drm Mrm Nrm Dr OR Mrm Grm Dm Where Grm Gross volume loaded for the Regular Meter M
411. r to the internal I O board or external FCM Consult wiring diagrams in the Installation Guide b Perform temperature calibration c Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad II Select the Configuration Equipment Setup Meters menu Then select the preset and meter d Enable the Temperature Sensor parameter This parameter should already be enabled if the temperature calibration step has been performed e Find the Default Temperature parameter Configure this parameter for 999 9 Do not adjust this value unless the RTD is undergoing maintenance f Find the parameter Temp Module Type Enter a value that represents the appropriate type of temperature sensor For MultiLoad II SMP 1 Internal I O Board RTD 3 Internal I O Board 4 20mA For MultiLoad II 0 External FCM with Opto22 RTD Module 1 Internal I O Board RTD or FCM I with Toptech RTD module or FCM Il RTD 2 External FCM with Opto22 4 20mA Module 3 Internal I O Board 4 20mA or external FCM Il 4 20 mA If the Temperature module is on a different FCM than its associated meter add 10 to the above values g Find the Alarm High Temp parameter This parameter is found in Configuration Equipment Setup Meter menu Enter the temperature that represents the upper temperature limit of the API table in use h Find the Alarm Low Temp parameter This parameter is found in Configuration Equipment Setup Meter menu Enter the temperature that represents the lower
412. rameter but still maintain a proper additive product ratio throughout most of the delivery When the last injection is initiated the remaining additive requirement will be delivered as quickly as possible before the Shutoff Volume From End volume is reached Example We have a preset quantity of 1000 gallons and we want the additive to be finished delivering by the time we reach the last 50 gallons of the batch in order to flush the load arm of additive The Shutoff Vol From End parameter has been set to 50 gallons commanding the additive to be finished by this point in the delivery If we set the Last Injection Volume From End parameter to 100 gallons additive will be injected at a rate that will ensure a proper additive ratio at any time before the last 100 gallons is delivered If the batch is aborted at the 500 gallon mark the driver will have a properly additized load When the batch reaches the final 100 gallon mark the system knows that it has to have the remaining additive delivered before the final 50 gallon mark is reached The rate of injection is substantially increased to satisfy the requirement for the load As a result the batch is over additized for a short time as the last 100 gallons is delivered When the last gallon has been delivered the batch is properly additized Even if additive line flush is not a consideration it is recommended that this parameter be set to the default value of 20 gallons which will ensure a precise del
413. rameter is greater than zero the opening of the block valve will be delayed until the Block Valve Open Alarm Time has elapsed BV Close Alrm Time Specifies the time in seconds to allow the additive s block valve to close If an additive block valve employs a feedback signal an alarm will occur if the feedback requirement is not satisfied in this time Pump Stop Delay Enter the time in seconds for the additive pump to continue running after batch completion When this parameter is set to zero seconds the pump keeps running until the batch is complete in most configurations additive delivery will be finished prior to batch completion in order to accommodate an additive flush of the product line If more than one load arm is placing a demand on the additive pump contact that contact will remain active as long as a load arm is calling for the additive Flush Pump Run Time The Flush Pump signal is intended to run a pump that is designed to flush the orifice of a block valve The block valve and Flush Pump are typically used for red dye applications The Flush Pump signal will activate when the dye requirement has been delivered and the block valve has been commanded to close The Flush Pump will run for a period specified by this parameter Enter a value in seconds Meter Flushed This parameter is to be enabled if the additive meter is in the flush path When enabled additive meter pulses will be ignored during a period s
414. rcentage specified in this parameter loading will stop and an OVR BLEND or UND BLEND alarm will be raised The alarm will occur when the percentage error has lasted for the period specified by the Blend Check Alarm Time parameter Sequential Blending In sequential blending applications this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the blend composition is out of specification at batch completion If upon completing delivery and clearing the totals the ratio of any component of a sequential blend is out of specification by the value entered in this parameter an OVR BLEND or UND BLEND alarm will be raised Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Bind Chk Alarm Vol Excluding SMP Bind Chk Alarm Time Excluding SMP Low Flow Start Percentage Bind On Lead Comp Excluding SMP Bind Adj Start Vol Excluding SMP Bind Adj Restart Vol Excluding SMP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Ratio Blending Blend Check Alarm Volume When the ratio is found to be out of tolerance by the volume specified in this parameter loading will stop and an OVR BLEND or UND BLEND alarm will be raised The alarm will occur when the volume error has lasted for the period specified by the Blend Check Alarm Time parameter Sequential Blending In sequential blending applications this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the blend composition is out of specification at batch completion If upon completing delivery and clearing the total
415. rd Messages Alibi Log Labels E Flow Control Modules E Products Driver Access Ids Custom Logic Firmware Upgrade Logo Image Editor G ft A Command Console Enabled Access ID Import Export GPS Site Editor Card Reader ei Prox Card Pull Secs p Remote Processing Ser Message Swap Delay Message Hold Delay Auto Authorize Oo MM DD YYYY Date e Default to Alt Lang Oo Load Date From End M Config Timeout Mins Large Prompts Confirm Flow Starts Display Adty as CCs ENGLISH z NGLISH v Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled TRES Ki Enabled Enabled 20 Enabled Enabled Enabled fd a Yaa KS KI Display Hundredths lt E Fnahled lv NOTE When using a serial connection at 115K Baud firmware upload should take 25 minutes At 56K firmware upload should take 50 minutes At 9600 Baud firmware upload should take 300 minutes NOTE Some firmware updates MAY cause the configuration parameters and possibly the totalizer data to be set back to factory defaults It is critical to download a fresh copy of the current MultiLoad II configuration before updating the firmware Totalizers may be reset to zero 4 Before uploading the firmware the user needs to select the bin file which needs to be uploaded Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 This step may take a while but it can be done 60 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool
416. re 8 9 11 WIP Corrected ReprintTicket prompt to only reprint ticket on Next keypress not Enter keypress 8 23 11 WJP Added clear of entire nvram DB blocks to avoid config problems when switching between build types Added check for struct size exceeding block size Added start and end dates to transaction headers for use with TDS records Updated Transaction Archive database version Updated GPS GPS SITE DATABASE and GPS POSITION LOG compiler switches 8 24 11 WIP Added TDS INTERFACE precompiler switch for selective inclusion Updated support for CONFAR BUILD and CN BUILD precompiler switches Removed MULTILOAD MOBILE BUILD precompiler switch and logos Increased SOFTWARE BUILD ID size from 15 to 25 characters R000 and boot screen display For CONFAR BUILDs added LAT LONG and WELL NAME to TDS transaction comments 8 24 11 WIP Bumped position log from 200 records to 500 records Increased GPS database block size from 512K to 1M Cleaned up GPS data on Idle Screen to allow for GPS SITE DATABASE and GPS POSITION LOG at the same time e 8 24 11 WIP Clean up RCU Setup Screen for selective inclusion of TDS INTERFACE prameters 8 26 11 WJP Added automatic selection of Conoco Logo on CONFAR builds 9 9 11 WJP Correct display of Load Volume on the Main Preset Screen to display Hundredsths if Use Hundredths is enabled Added printing of Average Load Temperat
417. red to create demand for an additive volume that is equal to one half of one injection See Figure 6 2 Injection size is determined by the Volume per Injection parameter If the injection is successful one full injection will have been delivered before the demand has reached one full injection The additive Delivered totalizer will increment by one full injection volume after enough time has passed for the piston to have returned to its starting position The piston Throw Time parameter determines when the system expects the injection cycle to be completed See Figure 6 1 Additive Recipe P d Additive se E Volume 2 Inject Vol Additive Injection 1 2 Inject Surplus Graph Right On 1 Inject Vol 1 2 Inj Vol 1 2 Inject Deficit exists Injection Initiated Product Delivered Figure 6 2 Additive Injection It is possible to experience an additive alarm using this method Although there is no verification of additive delivery using this method the system does check the delivered totalizers against the Recipe target totalizers It is possible to get an Under Additized alarm if the additive has been configured to meet a target that it cannot possibly attain An additive alarm when using this feature indicates that the pace of delivery is beyond the physical capabilities of the injector or that the additive ratio target is unrealistic An alarm can occur if the Piston Throw Time parameter is set to an excessive duration The Throw
418. rganiZed cssscceceeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeeeeesaesaseeeenseeeseaesasaaesasneeeneeeesseseseaaeenseeeseaees 11 1 3 Documentation CONVENTIONS a ra a ee aeae eaae aae aae raer ar pe e a aSK aan ae Eae aap Ea LaNa Eaa aeaaea 12 tad SCreen de 12 L32 lee EE 12 1 4 Information Alerts visi cece es cece a EEEE NEE Pe cecile cen ectant cu ctacuewtecheuerccoacaswvecueuecuceacueneuetewes 13 1 5 Typographical Conventions cscccsscseseeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeensneeeeeeeescaesasaeeenseeeseesesaaesaseeeeeeeeeseaesseseeeneeeeeeees 13 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Eessen 14 2 1 EIERE tte by seit eb Much ecg Paces ee 14 2 2 System Overview enee Ee eee dad da cael hae Ee ae a ed he ve Eege 15 2 3 Two Operating Modes aa etic ea aa rea aaraa ar ict geed Ee 16 2 3 a OR el ee EE 16 28 2 REMOTE Contor TT 16 2 4 System Components E A EE PE deet eeg ege eects E eege 17 2 5 M lti E ROU RE 17 2 5 1 RCU enclosures available with MultiLoad Il cccccsssccccessssceceeseecesesaecesessaesesesaaesecseaaeeesseasesessesaeeeeeeas 17 2 5 2 RCU enclosures available with MultiLoad UM 17 2 6 External FCM Flow Control Module ccccssscceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeesnaeseeeseaeeeenseaeseeesnanseenenees 18 2 7 Le IT 19 2 8 Int rnal V O Board DE 21 2 9 Internal 2 Meter UO Board cccssccceseeceseeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeenseeeeesesessaesasneeeneeaeseaesesaaesaseaeenseeeseeseseaeenseeneneeaes 22 2 10 Navigating the System ieie eenei ae ERE
419. ribes the minimum configuration needed to get an additive to operate using this method Configuration of the following parameters is mandatory You can accomplish this using the MultiLoad II Configuration Tool or the MultiLoad II keypad in Program mode Select the preset and additive desired Additive Enable Enable this parameter Flow control module Set this value to the FCM where the additive is connected Set this value to zero for the internal I O board This should be always a flow fcm2 because the only fcm who has an analog output FCM Port Select the port that will serve as the Additive Injection Output Note A corresponding additive input port will automatically be assigned See the Additive Port Assignment description above Additive Type Set this value to AnlgMtr Multiload will control the pump speed to inject continues the additive into the main line Feedback we receive via the pulser of the additive Additive Volume Per Injection Enter the injection volume in the appropriate units Piston Throw Time This parameter is not applicable Additive Meter K Factor Enter the additive meter s K factor in pulses per gallon The remaining parameters that apply to this additive method are optional They are used to set up alarming pump outputs and permissive inputs Some of the remaining parameters affect how the additive is delivered at different stages of the load cycle All Additive configurat
420. rinting Added printer multidrop capability to Alibi Log Printing Added ability to multi drop several MultiLoads on to a single printer using RS232 on COM2 Connections must be as follows ML 1 ML n Serial Printer RX lt RX lt TX CTS lt CTS lt DTR TX gt TX gt RX GND GND GND DSR DTR DSR DTR RTS CTS DSR RTS DCD lt gt RTS DCD DCD Added more discrete control of the Transmitter Enable to support having multiple MultiLoads connected to a single printer Dropped monitoring of DSR or DCD for printer status CTS indicates printer status Added Meter Configuration Parameters Adaptive Valve Control Analog Valve Control 4 20mA Increase Step 4 20mA Decrease Step to support analog valve control Allow ports 2 amp 3 to be used as general IO when Analog Valve control is enabled Increased latest known FCM version to 037 On FCM TESTER and ISO TESTER build allow entry into factory menu Updated FCM2 Analog Calibration to ignore COM timeouts when setting calibration values during test Was causing test to sometimes restart when FCM was writing to EPROM and not communicating Updated FCM2 Analog RTD mA Calibration to perform 3 tests then stop Updated FCM2 Analog RTD mA Check to perform 1 test then stop Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12
421. rmal Coefficient Constant Density 15 C Temperature Alpha 15 C K Range C Propane 0 002850 1 55 507 6 10 to 40 Propen 0 003095 1 36 523 1 10 to 40 Butane 0 001900 0 80 584 5 10 to 40 Isobutan 0 002130 1 00 563 0 10 to 40 Isobutene 0 002060 1 45 600 1 10 to 40 Cis But 2 en 0 001900 0 80 627 0 10 to 40 Trans But 2 en 0 001910 1 33 610 1 10 to 40 But 1 en 0 001955 1 30 602 1 10 to 40 But 1 3 dien 0 001972 0 80 627 7 10 to 40 Methanol 0 001155 0 38 796 1 0 to 40 Ethanol 0 001078 0 86 793 5 20 to 40 Isopropanol 0 001027 0 93 789 1 0 to 30 Isobutanol 0 000923 0 82 805 6 0 to 30 MTBE 0 001413 0 95 745 6 0 to 30 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 262 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures TAME 0 001204 1 72 775 0 15 to 30 Benzol 0 001188 0 68 884 2 0 to 30 Toluol 0 001060 0 73 871 6 0 to 30 o Xylol 0 000954 0 78 884 3 0 to 40 NMI m Xylol 0 000983 1 03 868 4 0 to 30 p Xylol 0 000990 1 30 865 3 15 to 40 ASTM1250 This table provides density at 20 C of light hydrocarbons at observed temperature and 1980 Table 59E density Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a NGL or LPG propane Current Temperature and Density is available Relative Density at 20 F is unknown Reference Temperature is 20 C Test temperatures and densities can be entered on this screen that will calculate the corrected density at the test temperature and density The
422. rmation and has authorized the batch for delivery Load Complete Indicates when a batch has been completed on a particular load arm Clearing Errors Indicates that operational alarms are being cleared on a particular preset This process can be initiated remotely or locally Clearing Load Indicates that the batch has been archived on a particular preset A driver clears a batch by pressing the CLR button before selecting the next product to load or by pulling the cared to end the entire transaction Open Block Valve Indicates that a preset level Block Valve has been commanded to open Block Valve Status Indicates that a preset level Block Valve status has been received Close Block Valve indicates that a preset level Block Valve has been commanded to close Remote Start Indicates that the Remote Start button of a particular preset has been pressed Swing Arm Indicates that the swing arm of a particular preset is active in the bay Meter Stop Indicates that the Meter Stop button of a particular preset has been pressed Alarm Out Indicates that a preset level alarm has is active Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic xiv Permissive Indicates that a preset level permissive is active xv Permissive Out Indicates that all preset level permissives have been satisfied xvi Preset State High Flow Low Flow FST_IDLE 0 FST_LOW_FLOW 1 FST_HIGH_FLOW 2 FST_FIRST_TRIP 3 FST_SECOND_TRIP 4 FST_FINAL_TRIP 5 xv
423. rmine which component is shorted The MultiLoad will consider each parameter in the order that it is listed in the table above If the conditions of the first parameter do not resolve the question of which parameter to short the parameter that follows the first will be considered and so on The first decision parameter is Take Line Flush From Match This parameter if enabled will instruct the MultiLoad to determine if the flush component is used in the product If the Flush Component is used in the product it will short that component by the Line Flush Volume amount The deficit will be made up during the Line Flush stage If the flush component is not used in the product recipe or if the parameter is disabled the MultiLoad will look to the next parameter for instruction The second decision parameter is Take Line Flush From First This decision will be considered if the previous parameter is disabled or if the previous decision was not resolved If this parameter is enabled the MultiLoad will short the first component in the recipe the first component will be shorted by the Line Flush Volume If this parameter is disabled MultiLoad will look to the third decision parameter The third decision parameter is Take Line Flush From Last This parameter must be enabled if the two previous parameters are disabled MultiLoad will subtract the Line Flush Volume from the last component in the recipe The preset quantity will be satisfied by the Line Flush C
424. rs based upon measured flow Because the physical limitations of a piston cylinder injector are eliminated the Throw Time parameter is irrelevant The Volume Per Injection parameter is still valid however The Volume Per Injection parameter sets a target pace that the system will inject if necessary in order to eliminate a deficit The Solenoid Shut Pulses parameter applies only to the Pulser Input additive method Its purpose is to compensate for the closing speed of the solenoid valve which may allow a slight but consistent over delivery of additive non cumulative Compensation is accomplished on a pulse basis rather than a volumetric basis This feature is intended to eliminate the remaining over delivery assuming mechanical adjustments to the solenoid valve s closing speed have already been made The quantity of pulse overruns due to valve action can be determined by performing the Additive Calibration test or the Additive Diagnostic Test Injection The quantity of excess pulses delivered for each test injection can be observed When the number of overrun pulses is determined enter the number into this parameter to further reduce the overrun See the Additive Calibration topic later in this chapter for details 6 5 6 CONFIGURING A PULSER INPUT ADDITIVE This topic describes the minimum configuration needed to get an additive to operate using this method Configuration of the following parameters is mandatory You can accomplish thi
425. rted by the GPS Note This value is computed by movement not vehicle orientation Site When configured will report the site name and distance from the current position Prn The Pseudo Random Noise PRN Code reported for each SV Space Vehicle signal received by the GPS Rx The Received signal strength of each SV signal received Higher the number the stronger the signal Fix As reported by the GPS the indicates that the corresponding SV signal is being used to compute the current position fix Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 251 CHAPTER 9 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES 9 1 OVERVIEW 9 1 1 WEIGHTS AND MEASURES The Weights and Measures key switch plug may be lead sealed or locked preventing access to all Weights and Measures protected parameters All parameters that are W amp M protected will appear red on the MultiLoad RCU display You may need to contact your local Weights and Measures office after breaking the seal and changing Li parameters This is typically done only during meter proving or temperature calibration procedures at the terminal Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 252 9 2 ACCESS RESTRICTIONS TO W amp M PARAMETERS MultiLoad II uses three methods of write access to the W amp M parameters e Manual entry of W amp M parameters via the keypad on the MultiLoad Il e Remote upload of parameters via the host serial or Ethernet link
426. s parameter if a bsw sensor is used to monitor bsw at the flow meter BSW Sensor FCM Enter the FCM for the BSW sensor Enter a value of 0 for the internal I O board BSW Density When the BSW sensor is disabled this value will specify the BSW to be used for the meter level BSW If the BSW sensor is disabled and this default BSW value is zero the currently value will we always zero No component level BSW Alarm Low BSW When a BSW Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured BSW falls below a minimum value When BSW of the metered product falls below the value entered in this field a BSW alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See BSW Calibration for instructions on configuring a BSW sensor Alarm High BSW When a BSW Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured BSW rises above a maximum value When the BSW of the metered product exceeds the value entered in this field a BSW alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See BSW Calibration for instructions on configuring a BSW sensor BSW Alarm Time At the default value of zero seconds BSW alarms will be raised instantly A small delay can be added in seconds to avoid nuisance alarms that may occur when BSW is momentarily out of range The BSW alarm timer will only run when a BSW alarm is not active and a batch is currently authorized on this preset BSW 4mA
427. s code will be part of the change log event It will say ID 1 has Weights amp Measurements Menu Access Any changes made in the log will be prefaced with the ID Modem Dial This feature has not yet been implemented Host Login This feature has not yet been implemented Terminal SPLC Terminal SPLC code for Host System for example TDS Terminal Name Enter the name of the terminal or depot in this field This name will be printed on Alibi logs and Meter Tickets if they are enabled Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 5 RCU SETUP Use the RCU Setup function to configure how the MultiLoad II RCU unit will function Navigate to this screen as Program Mode gt Configuration gt RCU Setup All Weights and Measures controlled values are displayed in red both on the screen and in this manual The RCU Setup screen displays lex 1U Sy Reload ROM Lang File Driver Language ProgramMode Language Card Reader Prox Card Pull Secs Processing Mode Message Swap Delay Message Hold Delay Max GPS Site Distance Auto Authorize MM DD YYY Date Mass Measured Used Load Date From End Measure Used ENABLED ENG SH ENG TSH StndAl DISABLD 10 200 DISABLD ENABLE POUN ENABLE GALLONS Next Prev Enter Using the field descriptions below make any necessary changes When you are finished with MultiLoad
428. s the volume of any component of a sequential blend is out of specification by the value entered in this parameter an OVR BLEND or UND BLEND alarm will be raised Blend Check Alarm Time applies to ratio blending only When the ratio is found to be out of tolerance for the time period determined by this parameter loading will stop and a blend ratio alarm will occur Enter time in seconds Calculate from the entered preset amount the low flow start volume This volume will be only used when it is larger than the Low Flow Start parameter This calculated volume will not exceed 65 535 The low flow restart value will not be calculated using the preset value Blend on Lead Component applies to ratio blending and side stream blending only Enable this parameter to have all other components track the flow rate of the lead component The lead component is defined as the first component listed in the product recipe The product recipe is provided to MultiLoad by Terminal Automation Systems TAS such as TMS5 6 This feature should be used when blending viscous components such as asphalt The lead component should be the component that is expected to be the limiting factor in achieving maximum flow for the blend The lead component can be limited by inconsistent pump pressure for example v2 25 The leading component can be defined on three ways FIRCOMP First component defined in the recipe HIGPERC The highest percentage of the components defin
429. s 20 200 IP Mask POO nZone oo a0 IP Gateway OA eS 2 Ole al iP HOST 192 168 01 Socket Port TTSA Com 0 Bort 7000 Com i Port 7001 Com 2 Port 7002 Webpage Setup Network Printer Setup Next Prev W EH SETUR EH PORTS 80 Admin Password KKKKKKK User Password KKKKKKK Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration NETWORK PRINTE Printeri TE Printer Port Pimimrers TE Printer Port Printer Alibi IP Printer ALII Powis ss After changes are made in this screen exiting program mode is required for the changes to take effect Parameter Description MAC Address This is a read only parameter and indicates the hardware MAC address of the Ethernet port This number is unique assigned at the factory and cannot be modified Network Enables or Disables the Ethernet port If the Ethernet port is enabled with no network connected startup may have a 10 20 second delay while the connection is checked IP Address Static IP address assigned to the unit This value should come from the local network administrator and should be unique to the local network Dynamic IP address DHCP is not supported IP Mask The IP mask used to determine if an IP address is in the local network or is on the other side of the Gateway Default is 255 255 255 0 IP Gateway The IP address of the network gateway used to access IP addresses outside t
430. s Yes Time Max Pstn Throw Yes Yes No No No Time Pump Status Alm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Meter Creep Alm No No Yes Yes Yes Vol Remote Calibrate Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control Piston Only Piston w Input Pulser Only Common Meter Analog BV Open Alrm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time BV Close Alrm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time Pump Stop Delay Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Flush Pump Run Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time Meter Flushed No No Yes Yes Yes Solenoid Flushed No No Yes Yes Yes W amp M Alarm No Yes Yes Yes Yes Promo Count W amp M Alarm No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reset Mode Flush Pump Run Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Close Blk Val Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Blk Val Status Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Open Dk Val Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Test Button FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Pump Run FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Pump Kill FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Pump Stat FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Alarm Out FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Authorized FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Permiss FCM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Permiss Out Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCM Configuration of this parameter is mandatory Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 186 6 6 GENERAL ADDITIVE SETUP 1 From Program mode select Configuration Equipment Setup 2 From the Equipment Setup Menu select Additives The Select Preset menu displays 3 Select
431. s desired to activate a warning lamp anytime an alarm condition is raised the meter or component The Alarm Outs from the meter and component are ORed so that when all arms are normal a high voltage is available at the assigned output When any one of the arms enters into an alarm condition the high voltage output is dropped and the alarm warning lamp is illuminated The final line Index 003 assigns an FCM output port to turn on or off depending on the outcome of Index 002 The output is available at the internal I O Board or external FCM port 1 in this example Custom Logic selections for the TYPE field are listed below There are currently 28 choices Each choice may have a number of additional data fields to specify 13 5 MULTILOAD II REAL TIME RT FUNCTIONS 1 Unused Choose this selection to leave an index line blank 2 FCM Input Port Look to an FCM input port a FCM Specify FCM 0 for I O Board b FCM Input Port Specify FCM Port 3 FCM Output Port Activate an FCM Output a FCM Specify FCM 0 for I O Board b FCM Output Port Specify FCM Port c Custom Logic Index The output will be activated depending on the state of the Index line referenced by this field 4 RCU Real Time RT a RCU Real Time Prompt Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic vi 363 Proving Mode Indicates if the MultiLoad II is in the Proving Mode W amp M Key Indicates if the W amp M key is active Program Key
432. s displayed Enter the Configuration Equipment Setup Meter menu Select the appropriate Preset and Meter Find the parameter Alarm Low Pressure Enter the pressure that represents the lower pressure limit of the API table in use Find the parameter Alarm High Pressure Enter the pressure that represents the highest pressure limit of the API table in use 9 Configure for Default Pressure When the pressure transmitter is undergoing maintenance the observed pressure can be manually entered for use by the API table Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad Il Select the Weights A Measures Meters menu Then select the appropriate preset and meter Find the parameter Pressure Sensor Set the parameter to Disabled Find the Default Pressure parameter Enter the pressure that is observed at the flow meter When the pressure transmitter is ready to be placed back in service re enable the pressure transmitter parameter and return the default pressure to 999 9 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 275 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 6 MULTILOAD STRAIGHT DELIVERY SINGLE COMPONENT CALCULATIONS Regular Meter Meter Level values are reported as Gm M1 Tm T1 Dm D1 OR Dr Nm Gm VCFr Tm Dm Mm Nm Dr OR Mm Gm Dm Where Gm Gross volume loaded for the Meter M1 Gross volume reported by meter M1 Tm Temperature for the Meter T1 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T1 Dm Density for the Meter Di Volume weighted a
433. s field will appear depending on the API table selected The value will show the Density corrected Relative Density Corrected Density This field will appear depending on the API table selected The value will show the corrected Density Corrected Gravity This field will appear depending on the API table selected The value will show the corrected Gravity Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 300 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 15 PRESSURE CALIBRATION FOR METERS Use the Pressure screen to calibrate pressure for a meter 1 From the Views amp Inquiries Menu choose Pressure After selecting the preset and meter the Pressure screen displays PRE ly MRS t PR Pressure Unadjusted 1 Pressure Offset 2 Pressure Adjusted Next Prev 2 If the observed pressure is different from the unadjusted pressure displayed there are two options Press 1 and key in the observed offset that is the difference between the Pressure Unadjusted and Pressure Adjusted Or press 2 and key in the observed pressure in the Pressure Adjusted field in which case the Pressure Offset will automatically be calculated and displayed PRE 1 MTR 1 PR Pressure Unadjusted 1 Pressure Offset 2 Pressure Adjusted Use the key to toggle between a minus sign and a plus sign on the offset Pressure Unadjusted Displays the real time pressure Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Ch
434. s fo lt gt A Tey ESF tia Ki Kl ei Ka A AA A AA a A AA Gi DI Gi anon Figure 3 2 Bay Configuration Menu Notice that the fields on this screen correspond to the parameter fields found on the Bay Setup screen from the Equipment Setup Menu from the MultiLoad II Configuration screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 36 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 3 3 SCREEN NAVIGATION If you are familiar with Windows Explorer or the TMS Help system you will already know how to access the Config Tool screens The dynamic screen directory is located on the left side of every screen As shown below the main screen hierarchy consists of Bay FCM and Miscellaneous The plus sign boxes indicate that lower levels exist To access these lower level screens click the plus box File Edit Tool Report Help tmsS efg rackl tle Reload ROM Lang File ENABLED Card Reader ENABLED BAY ALARMS Prox Card Pull Secs 3 PRESET ALARMS Remote Processing ENABLED METER ALARMS Message Swap Delay 3 COMPONENT ALARMS Message Hold Delay 8 ADDITIVE ALARMS Current BOL Number 45 Security v ENABLED Default to Alt Lang v ENABLED Load Date From End ENABLED SI Measure Used v ENABLED Print Blended Comps ENABLED Compartment Entry ENABLED Config Timeout Mins 26 Report Time H Detailed Report v ENABLED PRESET 1 BF PRESET 2 PRESET 3 D FCM MISCELLANEOUS well Figure 3 3 RCU Config
435. s in the Installation Guide b Enter the program mode at the MultiLoad II Select the Configuration Equipment Setup Meters menu Then select the appropriate preset and component c Find the parameter labeled Relative Density Sensor and enable it d Find the parameter labeled Relative Density Sensor FCM and enter a zero e Find the Relative Density 4 mA parameter Enter the relative density that will represent the lowest relative density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 4 mA f Find the Relative Density 20 mA parameter Enter the relative density that will represent the highest relative density value measured by the transmitter This value will be equal to 20 mA g Press the EXIT key until the Main Menu is displayed Enter the Configuration Equipment Setup Component menu Select the appropriate Preset and Component h Find the Alarm Low Relative Density parameter Enter a relative density value that represents the lower relative density limit of the API table in use i Find the Alarm High Relative Density parameter Enter a relative density value that represents the upper relative density limit of the API table in use j Perform Relative Density calibration 7 Configuring for Pressure Correction CPL CPL is most commonly used for propane applications Enter the program mode and select the Views amp Inquiries menu From the Views and Inquiries menu select Pressure Comp Select the preset Sel
436. s known Reference Temperature is 60 F After selecting this table enter the Relative Density of the liquid at 60 F The valid range of Relative Density is from 0 3500 0 6880 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Relative Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table is used to correct observed density at the observed temperature to a density at 1980 Table 53B 15 C When this table is activated the corrected density is then automatically used in Table 54B which provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Observed Density is to be corrected to 15 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this NMI screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 259 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Table Description ASTM1250 1980 Table
437. s sufficient to stop additive delivery at the 1 trip stage of the delivery cycle since the remaining load volume at the trip stages often exceeds the volume that exists between the additive injection point and the end of the load arm Three parameters must be configured to set up a simple additive flush Last Injection Volume From End 200 gal 600 rs Additive Target Volume 1st Stage Trip Volume g 200 gal Q Shutoff Volume o x From End 150 gal d 2 LL 100 Min Flush Vol 150 gal 1000 500 200 0 Remaining Load Volume gal Figure 6 9 Basic Flush Cycle Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control Last Injection Volume From End This parameter serves as a warning to the system that a point is approaching where all additive for the load must be delivered Determine the volume that exists between the injection point and the end of the load arm If the 1 Trip Stage Volume is several times the volume that exists between the injection point and the end of the load arm enter a value that is equal to the 17 Stage Trip Volume When the load s remaining volume is equal to the Last Injection Volume From End the system will begin its final injection to finish the additive demand of the load This parameter should be set to a number that is higher than the volume specified in the Shutoff Volume From End parameter Shutoff Volume From End When the volume remaining in the load reaches the value entered fo
438. s to be corrected to 20 C and used in Table 54B Reference Temperature is 20 C Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 270 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures NMI After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at the observed temperature The valid range of Density is from 800 1064 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 59X This table provides the base density of a petroleum product at observed temperatures and Density This table allows specifying the commodity being measured the reference temperature and units of measure for density pressure and temperature OIML6 This table is used to calculate the mass alcohol percentage at an observed temperature and a observed density When this table is activated the CTL factor will contain the amount of alcohol So the net volume which is shown on each screen is the alcohol volume in the product The liquid is a refined product Observed Density is used in Table OIML6 Observed Temperature is used After selecting this table the density has no range checking only the temperature is allowed between 20 and 40 degrees Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Densit
439. s to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Density at 20 C is known Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 20 C The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 60C NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed temperatures to the volume at 20 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 20 C is known Reference Temperature is 20 C After selecting this table enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion alpha of the liquid at 20 C The valid range of alpha is from 0 000486 0 001674 The alpha will be entered as 486 1674 however Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alpha The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 2004 Table 60D NMI This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of lube oils at observed temperatures to the volume
440. s using the MultiLoad Il Configuration Tool or the MultiLoad II keypad in Program mode Select the preset and additive desired Additive Enable Enable this parameter Flow control module Set this value to the FCM where the additive is connected Set this value to zero for the internal I O board FCM Port Select the port that will serve as the Additive Injection Output Note A corresponding additive input port will automatically be assigned See the Additive Port Assignment description above Additive Type Set this value to SolnMtr Multiload will control the solenoid to inject and meter the pulses Additive Volume Per Injection Enter the injection volume in the appropriate units Piston Throw Time This parameter is not applicable Additive Meter K Factor Enter the additive meter s K factor in pulses per gallon The remaining parameters that apply to this additive method are optional They are used to set up alarming pump outputs and permissive inputs Some of the remaining parameters affect how the additive is delivered at different stages of the load cycle All Additive configuration screens and parameter descriptions are found in the General Additive Setup section that follows The Parameters for Additive Methods table lists the parameters that apply to this method Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 178 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 7 METHOD 4 ANALOG ADDITIVE This config
441. sable enter 00 BOL Position Column number on the meter ticket Bill of Lading where the product owners name will appear To disable enter 00 Language 1 The actual prompt the driver will view in the primary language Language A Example If Language A is English Enter Stockholder Language 2 The actual prompt the driver will view in the secondary language Language B Example If Language B is Spanish enter Entrada Dueno De Producto Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 44 Chapter 3 GUI Configuration Tool 45 Prompt 2 is usually defined for the Customer Prompt 8 is usually defined for the Account Prompt 4 is usually defined for the Trailer ID Prompt 5 is usually defined for the Trailer2 ID 3 9 2 PRODUCT CONFIGURATION File Edit Tool Report Help f1 tms5S cfg rack3 tle E BAY Product Id 981682 e Product Index 481 CH FCM Prod Short Name MIDETHSHEL Hazard index ja MISCELLANEOUS g PROMPT Product Name Midgrade Ethanol Shell 8 PRODUCT Components Additives 5 ACCESS CARD Percent Percent i HAZARD 661166 Regular Unlead 55 08 661366 Premium Unlead 35 68 eoa7aa Shell Additive 6 a300 D Opp Base Ethanol 16 66 Figure 3 11 Product Configuration Screen Under Remote control product information is supplied to the MultiLoad II by the TMS Product database In local mode you must supply the product data Product ID Alpha or numeric product ID
442. saction Stand Alone Authorized for 00000111 Network port 7734 select 60 second timeout Network port 7734 closed from 10 54 49 200 3849 Preset 1 Batch Cleared Transaction Cancelled PROGRAM MODE ENTERED MultiLoad II v4 31 11 May 4 2013 14 5 W amp M CHANGE LOG Shows the full W amp M logging of every W amp M parameter change in Multiload2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 369 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 700017 00018 700019 00020 700021 700023 00024 700025 00026 00022 00027 13 04 30 13 04 30 13 04 30 13 05 01 13 05 01 13 05 02 13 05 03 13 05 03 13 05 03 13 05 03 13 05 04 10 17 17 17 14 14 09 08 09 13 13 11 42 51 25 25 32 51 41 46 46 41 Id Id Id Id Id Id Id Id Id Id Id C Firmrare Update 4 01 01 gt 4 01 01 14 6 FILES ON THE SD CARD It is possible to see all the files on the SD Card remotely Index of files ML Log 130430 130501 130502 130503 130504 SMP BIN 14 7 UPLOAD FILES TO THE SD CARD Upload files from a remote place to the Multiload is possible even can be used to send the firmware file to the device Modified 01 Jan 2007 OO 01 Jan 2007 21 01 Jan 2007 07 01 Jan 2007 07 02 Jan 2007 03 18 Mar 2013 16 Si Bladeren 49 IER 15 756 746 EK 14 8 TRANSACTION VIEWER It
443. sary to open component block valves If appropriate press the number that corresponds to Opn Blk Val d Press the Enter key to jump into the Meter Diagnostic Menu Start the test a On the Meter Diagnostic screen see next page make sure that all preparations have been made to accommodate product flow Press the number that corresponds to OPN CLS Test the screen will indicate that the upstream and downstream solenoids are energized ON Product will begin to flow pulses and volume will begin to accumulate as indicated on the diagnostic screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 243 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 244 PRE 1 MTR 1 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFF 1 PermissOut ON AJAuthorized OFER 3 Alarm Out OFF 4 Upstrm Val ON Dauert Aert 6 DNS URSE Del Pulses 46 Dele Volk 0 90 Gross Rate 23 b The flow rate will begin to increase from zero as indicated on the diagnostic screen The flow rate will continue to increase until the High Flow Rate is reached c As soon as the High Flow Rate is reached both solenoids will automatically de energize and their valves will return to their normal state The upstream solenoid valve will return to the open condition and the downstream solenoid valve will return to the closed position When flow has dropped to zero the test is complete PRE 1 MTR 1 DIAGNOSTICS Permissive OFF 1 PermissOut ON 2 Authorized OFF gt l Alarm OUr SOE 4 Upstrm Val OFF 5 Dn
444. se These parameters are located in the Component Setup screen Once the Low Flow rate has been achieved the MultiLoad II will make periodic adjustments to the valve as the flow rate drifts above or below the Low Flow Dead Band rate Dead Band rates are configured on the Meter Setup screen The duration of the Low Flow stage is set by the Low Flow Start Volume parameter This parameter can be found on the Preset Setup screen As the parameter name implies the duration of the Low Flow Start stage is determined on a volumetric basis The Low Flow Start Volume should be configured to permit adequate tank wetting in order to prevent a static charge build up When the Low Flow Start Volume has been delivered the High Flow stage will begin Whenever a load is momentarily stopped before completion and then restarted the Low Flow Restart stage will commence If a load is restarted in the midst of the High Flow cycle a low flow rate will be used initially and for a shorter duration than is typical of Low Flow Start The following table lists the parameters that affect the start of loading and the Low Flow Start characteristics Parameter Default Setting Screen Location Low Flow Start Volume 50 gallons Preset Setup Low Flow Rate 150 gallons per minute Preset Setup Low Flow DB Rate 40 gallons per minute Meter Setup Low Flow Alarm Rate 10 gallons per minute Meter Setup Low Flow Alarm Time 10 seconds Meter Setup Flow Start D
445. se this alternate digital control valve algorithm by configuring as follows Navigate to Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup and configure the following parameters Parameter Setting Screen Location Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 140 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control 141 Flow Scan Time 0 200 Seconds Meter Setup Valve Dwell Time 0 060 Seconds Meter Setup To increase the speed of adjustment increase the Valve Dwell Time by 0 005 up to no more than 0 170 seconds To decrease the speed of adjustment decrease the Valve Dwell Time by 0 005 down to no less than 0 030 seconds 5 2 6 ADAPTIVE DIGITAL CONTROL ALGORITHM To increase the accuracy of targeting flow rates an Adaptive Digital Control Valve Algorithm have been developed This algorithm notes the adjustment speed of the digital control valve with the current flow and valve conditions and adjusts its control method to target as close as possible to the target flow rate Once locked into this target flow rate the next adjustment will not occur until the current flow rate falls outside the target deadband With FCM or I O Board versions 037 and later MultiLoad can be configured to use this Adaptive Digital Control Valve Algorithm by configuring as follows Navigate to Program Mode gt Configuration gt Equipment Setup and configure the following parameters Parameter Setting Screen Location Flow Scan Time 0 200 Seconds
446. set Level Excess Flow parameter This alarm can also occur with bad pulse transmitters or loose pulser connections PALARM 11 31 DRIVER Future preset level alarm assignments INVCONFIG This alarm indicates that an invalid configuration has been detected Inappropriate meter factor changes are often the cause of this alarm When this alarm occurs enter the program mode and select Views amp Inquires gt Message Log The Message Log will indicate the source of the INVCONFIG alarm Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 110 Chapter 4 General Configuration 4 7 3 METER ALARM SETUP Alarm Meaning MTR FCM AUTO The MultiLoad Il has lost communication with the I O board or FCM This message indicates that meter level functions are affected by the interrupted communication This alarm will automatically clear when communications are restored Check the Diagnostic menu under FCM Com to determine if the I O board or FCM is communicating MTR PERM AUTO Meter Permissive When the Meter Permissive signal is lost loading will stop on the load arm if the meter is being used The alarm will auto clear when the signal returns The alarm message that appears to the operator is configured via the MultiLoad I Configuration Utility at Meter Alarms Alarm 1 FCM CONF REMOTE FCM reporting an invalid configuration This alarm is the result of a configuration error Most likely the error is related to m
447. singly short and rapid As the valve opens or closes it will take finer steps toward the target flow rate as the Valve Dwell Time is reduced See Valve Dwell Step Rate Valve Dwell Step Rate This parameter is to be used in conjunction with Valve Dwell Time Set this parameter to be four times the deadband rate Large course valve adjustments will be made when the flow rate is far from the deadband As the deadband is approached the valve will begin making the fine adjustments prescribed by Valve Dwell Time The Deadband Rate setting can be found under Configuration Equipment Setup Meter See Valve Dwell Step Time Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 93 Chapter 4 General Configuration Valve Dwell Step Time Set this value to 1 00 when using the Valve Dwell Time and Valve Dwell Step Rate parameters Adaptive Valve Control When enabled the Control Valve algorithm will attempt to adapt to the speed of the valve resulting obtaining more accurate target flow rates To use this feature Flow Scan Time must be set to 0 200 seconds Valve Dwell Time set to 0 030 seconds Analog Valve Control Enable this parameter to use a 4 20mA Analog Control Valve 4mA is considered full closed and 20mA is considered full open OmA indicates no flow or inactive 4 20mA Increase Step The mA amount to INCREASE the analog output after each flow scan if the flow rate is found to be BELOW then the target dead band flow rate
448. sion 2 29 02 the transaction archive will store the last 10 000 transactions These archived transactions can be viewed or printed in program mode Old transactions are deleted in a First In First Out order 12 4 5 TMS BOL The host system TMS extracts all load data and generates the Bill of Lading For information on the RCU Ditto feature please refer to the TMS User Manual 12 5 LOCAL STANDALONE OPERATION In Local standalone Control mode product and access information are stored in non volatile memory in the MultiLoad Il In Remote Control mode product and access information comes from host system TMS databases In Local mode the MultiLoad II prompts the driver for a PIN code after the driver card or access ID driver number is verified This PIN code must match the PIN code of the driver table stored in the non volatile database of the MultiLoad II Once the PIN code is verified the MultiLoad II will display additional driver prompts based on its internal configuration Up to 4 configurable prompts may be presented to the driver Once the driver completes these prompts the MultiLoad II will authorize the transaction Before operating in Local mode it is necessary to set up two databases in the MultiLoad Il the Access ID database and a Product database 12 5 1 AccEssID DATABASE The Access ID database contains the Card Number or Access ID Driver Number and matching PIN for each driver Up to 300 Access IDs can be entered
449. splayed to provide guidance in adjusting the speed control settings gt gt gt To perform the test liquid must flow through the valve Therefore an appropriate receptacle must be provided to receive the product flow Ensure that there is enough volume in the receptacle to accommodate test flows Each test will deliver about 50 gallons with a properly operating control valve Keep a log of the totals delivered for each test Volumes delivered will be categorized as unauthorized flow Upon initiating the test the flow rate will be immediately ramped up to the High Flow Rate without a Low Flow Start phase Consult the terminal s safety procedures for loading hydrocarbon s into an empty vessel Be prepared to manually stop flow through alternate means dry brake if the valve has been malfunctioning or adjustments are being made Press any key to abort the test The following procedure can be used to determine the opening and closing speeds of the digital control valve 1 2 At the MultiLoad II enter Program mode and select the Diagnostic menu Energize the pump of the desired component a From the Diagnostic screen select Components b Select the preset that is under test Select the desired component for the valve that is under test c Press the number that corresponds to Pump Run This should start the pump if power is enabled by all intermediary devices such as PLCs Depending on the site configuration it may be neces
450. ss is configured Component Status Screen to always show Temperature Pressure Density Moved Unicode Display from Factory Menu to Diagnostic Menu firmware version to 3 27 03 database version to 3 27 03 for RCU Setup Database Real Time Database and Equipment Database Updated Makefile to build qml and gqmll images for use with QVGA displays 03 02 07 3 27 04 WJP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 375 Added multilingual support all driver and program mode screens except meter calibration screens and MAC address configuration screen Added Driver Language R008 and Program Mode Language R009 RCU level parameters to select the language Added the format type of 21 of Language type 0 English 1 Spanish Configuration parameter lengths have been increased from 20 to 30 characters All levels of configuration screens are wider now to accommodate forign languages Configuration prompts will be returned in the language specified by Program Mode Language parameter Configuration parameters descriptions ranges and defaults as well as status and key prompts have been moved into ROM Updates to language prompt registers u000 099 ulO1lxxx ul02xxx ul03xxx ul04xxx no longer supported Removed all configurable prompt registers 700xxx except ones used by TMS for overseas customers 70000x 70004x 70007x 70019x 70020x 70028x 70035x Removed 701 status and 705 additive sta
451. ssion The injectors can be tested one right after the other without having to return to the MultiLoad II to enter data Observed additive volumes are entered at one time after all samples have been measured and recorded The injections must be initiated by pushbuttons installed at the additive panels To assign a pushbutton that is installed at the additive panel go to the Additive menu and select Test Button FCM Select a port that will assign the pushbutton to an input port This must be done for each additive that will be tested using Remote Additive Calibration 1 To begin the calibration procedure enter Program mode and choose Configuration from the Main Menu 2 Select Remote Adtv Cal and press Enter COMET CURATI a OTN Communication Network RCU General Setup RCU Setup Equipment Setup Alarm Setup PROCUCES Additive Cal Access ID s Custom Logic Customer Logo Ser Next Prev The Remote Additive Calibration menu displays Highlight Select Additives and press Enter EMOTE ADDITIVE CALIBRATION Select Additives Collect Samples Check Delivered Next Prev Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 201 Chapter 6 Additive Control 202 5 The Select Additives screen displays BLECT ADDITIVES FOR REMOTE CALIBRATION PRL AFL Adtv OO ENABLED D I A 2 Adtv 002 ENABLED Next Prev 6 Select the additives tha
452. stom Logig Keypad Display Unicode ECM Com PCM Com FCM Health PCM Health RCU Bay PReser Next Prev 2 The View FCM Health Status screen displays VIEW FCM HEALTH STATS FCM Timeouts Com Lost Ver 00 000000000 000000000 036 CLeaR Next Prev 3 After making a repair press the CLR key to reset the totalizers Then return to this screen to determine the effectiveness of the repair FCM Flow Control Module number I O board 1Meter is 00 and 2 Meter is 00 and 01 Timeouts A timeout occurs when MultiLoad II does not receive a response from the internal I O board or external FCM after a poll is sent The MultiLoad Il interprets three consecutive timeouts to mean that communications with the internal I O board or external FCM has been lost The Timeouts totalizer increments each time a timeout occurs Com Lost The Com Lost totalizer is incremented whenever three consecutive timeouts have occurred Ver Displays the firmware revision number or Err if communications are currently lost with the internal I O board or external FCM Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 234 8 13 PCM HEALTH STATUS The PCM Health Status feature can be used to detect intermittent communication failures between the MultiLoad Il and a PCM 1 From the Diagnostics Menu select PCM Health DACA GN Oo Sek ae eS ME Card Reader Meters COM Loopback Components Serial Ports Additives
453. strm Val OFF 6 DNS Shoe 4UP SS 2 7 Del Pulses 2840 Del Vol 56 80 Gross Rate 0 stop flow by pressing any key Determine why the High Flow Rate cannot be reached before Valve will remain open until the High Flow Rate is reached If the High Flow Rate cannot be obtained resuming the test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics 4 Read the Opening and Closing Times a DNS The numbers to the right of this designation indicate the opening speed in seconds Target should be above 10 seconds but less than 20 seconds The Downstream needle valve will set this time Close to increase this time open to decrease this time UPS The numbers to the right of this designation indicate the closing speed in seconds Target should be above 1 5 seconds but less than 2 5 seconds The Upstream needle valve will set this time Close to increase this time open to decrease this time It may be desirable to repeat step three a number of times to get an average response A running total of the delivered volume will be maintained if Exit is not pressed in between tests 5 Determine if opening and closing speeds fall within values recommended by the valve manufacturer If appropriate opening and closing times are achieved exit the Diagnostic mode and perform a typical loading sequence in order to evaluate flow performance If the values fall outside of these ranges make turn adjustments as described below Repeat steps
454. t Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 8 Diagnostics Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 PRE 1 ADTV Permissive 1 PermissOut 2 Authorized Sj Alarm OUt Feedback 4 Pump Run S51 Pume KEI ich Sree 6 Flush Pump 7 Opn Bk Val 8 Cls Bk Val ZORE ON SORE Del Del 9 Set CORREIOS GE OFF 11 Set TES Wuticom SOME 1 2 Sec E M O O O O EELER ENEE SORE FORE OEE SORE FON Bk Val Status OFF 1 DIAGNOSTICS ulses olume EPUL Froane UEpUE utput t mA 0 0 OmA 4mA 12mA 20mA 00 000 248 Chapter 8 Diagnostics Feedback Reads the Pulse or Feedback signal that verifies that the piston has been launched and has returned to its starting position Test Button Reads the test button signal See Additive Calibration topic in Chapter 6 Pump Run Turns on or off an output signal to an additive pump starter The additive pump output will remain energized until the load is completed unless a Valve Fault Alarm occurs Pump Kill Turns on or off an output signal to stop the additive pump The Pump Kill signal only becomes active when the system experiences an additive Valve Fault Alarm Pump Status Reads the Pump Status signal which indicates if the additive pump is running or not If this signal is absent for the period specified in the Pump Status Alarm Time parameter the additive s Pump Status Alarm will be raised x
455. t key in the additive volume collected in the beaker and press Enter In the sample below the value 405 was keyed in The Beaker Vol value now reflects the beaker volume in thousandths of a gallon and the new Additive Meter PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered vol DEE See Beaker Vol 0 106990 2 Beaker Vol CCCs AO 5 0010 Meter Pulses 261 Additive Mtr K Factr 2600 New Additive Mtr Factor 1 0658 Enter Save Factor displays on the last line 14 Press Enter to save the new additive meter factor 15 This returns you to the Additive Calibrate screen which displays the new additive meter factor PRE 1 ADIV 1 Adtv O01 CALIBRATE Review Last Calibration Data Calculate Additive Vol Inject Additive Vol Inject Additive Mtr K Factr Additive Mtr Factor Next Prev The new additive meter factor is now in effect 16 Press EXIT to exit to the Select Additive screen Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 B All additive volumes delivered during the calibration process will be added to the Unauthorized Totalizer of the additive under test 197 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 7 3 PISTON TYPE ADDITIVE CALIBRATION E 1 ADIV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Press Next Key to Inject Now Injection 0 Piston Cycles 0 Delivered Volume 07 000 oee As noted previously the calibration screens for Piston type injectors are slightly different than the screens us
456. t direction from Toptech Systems Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 75 Chapter 4 General Configuration Trace Meter Flows Use this parameter to take samples of meter flow rates from the preset specified in Trace Preset Number Flow meter rates are sampled every second The flow rates are copied to the event log for analysis The flow rates can them be exported to a spreadsheet and graphed for analysis Data logged includes total volume delivered meter flow rates and digital valve states This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems Trace Adtv When enabled this parameter will copy the volumetric details of each injection to the event log Volume for analysis Use parameters Trace Preset Number and Trace Adtv Number to specify the injector under test This parameter is used for advanced troubleshooting Do not enable without direction from Toptech Systems Max Lines on a This parameter is at the moment only used in UAP mode It defines the number of lines on Ticket each printed ticket W amp M Key FCM Allows connection of an external switch to gain write access to W amp M parameters Set this parameter to the FCM and Port for the input where the switch is attached The input value at this location will be ORd with the MultiLoad Il W amp M switch status RCU Diagnostic will show that status of this switch Program Key FCM Allows connection of an external switch to ga
457. t exceed the setting of the Pump Start Delay time Flow Start Delay Delays the opening of the flow control valve by a period in seconds specified by this parameter The delay time begins when the Start button is pressed Unauth Reset Time Unauthorized Reset Time This parameter is intended to prevent nuisance unauthorized flow alarms for load arms that typically sit idle for long periods of time Over time stray pulses may accumulate and eventually trigger false unauthorized flow alarms in idle load arms The value entered here determines how often an internal unauthorized flow alarm counter gets reset The internal unauthorized flow alarm counter is not user viewable and is not to be confused with Unauthorized Flow Totalizers which do not get reset by this function This parameter will reset the internal counter periodically as specified by the value entered herein to prevent nuisance alarms Enter a value in seconds The possible range of entries is 600 65 535 seconds Fallback Rate If during the High Flow stage the flow rate is below the High Flow Deadband Rate for the period specified by the Fallback Time parameter the control algorithm will fall back to the flow rate specified in this parameter This parameter is intended to be used with turbine flow meters When the High Flow rate is unobtainable the flow rate will revert to the specified flow rate which should have a proven meter factor If the flow meter is a Positive
458. t needs to be pushed again until the pre alarm goes of again Push Push The deadman needs to be pushed in intervals The deadman needs to be pushed when the pre alarm is active Also a push earlier will reset the interval Input Deadman FCM This is the deadman reset button to recalculate the interval Deadman Stop Timer The deadman interval when the load needs to be stopped when the reset button was not handled in the correct mode Output Deadman FCM This is the deadman output for the pre alarm so the driver is notified if the deadman stop interval is almost expired Deadman Timer Warning The time before the deadman stop timer is expiring and this will also trigger the pre deadman alarm output Deadman Bypass Key FCM Without going into the program mode it is possible to disable the deadman functionality with a key switch Alarm Out FCM Provides an output signal when the bay has an active alarm This parameter selects an output port that will be assigned to signal an unspecified alarm condition at the bay Authorized FCM Provides an output signal upon successful completion of the authorization process The output will stay active until the transaction completes This output is often used to signal the starting and stopping of vapor recovery units VRU Permiss 0 7 FCM Allows the selection of a Flow Control Module FCM and port that will receive an input signal The input sign
459. t ports through the serial ports Term Server Added communication type 5 Etherenet Passthrough Port to Register 091 093 Added communication type Ethernet to the Communcation Setup Screen Added listing the COMO COM1 and COM2 socket ports on the Network Setup Screen Removed checking on startup for the configuration of a host communication port Updated firmware version to 3 28 05 11 27 07 3 28 06 GLP Implemented alphanumeric data entry capability for the EXL keyboard Updated firmware version to 3 28 06 01 09 08 3 28 07 WJP Updated firmware version to 3 28 07 Increased latest FCM version number from 17 to 34 for FCM II release Large Prompts parameter was added to the RCU setup Updated large prompt logic to only control prompts ECO2007 058 Increased the number of components in SMP builds from 1 to 8 to support multiple meter factors for ECO2007 58 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 378 Number of Components parameter added back into SMP builds ECO2008 001 Moved all flow rate parameters out of W amp M control except meter min and max flow rates TMS can change these values when a batch is not authorized Preset Low Flow Rate Preset High Flow Rate Preset Alt High Flow Rate Component High Flow Rate Component lst Stage Trip Vol Component lst Stage Flow Rate Component 2nd Stage Trip Vol Component 2nd Stage Flow Rate ECO2008 002 Added ability to lock do
460. t will be tested in the current session If multiple additives are assigned to the same test button make sure that only one is enabled otherwise the others may inject when the button is pressed 7 Press EXIT when all of the desired additives have been selected This will return you to the Remote Additive Calibration menu 8 Select Collect Samples EMOTE ADDITIVE CALIBRATION Select Additives Collect Samples Check Delivered Next Prev 9 The technician is prompted to remove the program key in order to lock the MultiLoad Il keypad this is optional Upon entering this screen all of the additives that were enabled in the last step are now ready for calibration The appropriate additive pump contacts will be activated and will remain that way until the screen is exited Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 203 EF ADDITIVE CALIBRATION Collect Calibration Samples Now Hola Test BUCCON Lo TAJeCE Remove Program Key to Lock Keypad Exit 10 Choose one of the enabled additives to test The order of testing does not matter Place a receptacle at the first test point to collect the injected additive Press the test pushbutton once for each injection desired For example if five injections are necessary to collect a measurable volume press and hold the test pushbutton until the fifth injection starts 11 When enough additive has been collected record
461. table the bottom line will display API Input Data Out of Range The test temperature density and pressure will not be used by the API table when flowing product The gravity that is entered is a value that will be used by the table under operating conditions Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 256 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 5 5 DISPLAY OF NET VOLUME AND RELATED DATA Whenever the CTL or CPL function is enabled for a preset load arm the net volume can be viewed on the Component Detail screen The Component Detail screen is a sub screen of the Component Status screen The Component Detail screen will also display the current CTL and CPL Additionally the Component Detail screen will display one of the following variables appropriate to the selected API table API gravity density relative density or coefficient of expansion If the Deliver in Net feature is disabled volumes on the Load screen and the Control screen are gross values By enabling the Deliver in Net feature volumes on the Load screen and the preset s Control screen will be net values Preset quantities will then be entered as net quantities and delivery will be in net volume The Control screen will display a message that indicates the units of volume and the reference temperature to which the volume has been corrected The Component Detail screen is accessed from the Component Status screen A Component Detail screen can be viewed for each component that is listed on the
462. table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of gasoline s at observed 2004 Table 54B temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product Density at 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Density of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of Density is from 653 1075 kg m3 Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated NMI CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of petroleum liquids at observed 2004 Table 54C temperatures to the volume at 15 C Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is a refined product or crude oil Coefficient of Expansion 15 C is known Reference Temperature is 15 C After selecting this table enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion alpha of the liquid at 15 C The valid range of alpha is from 0 000486 0 001674 The alpha will be entered as 486 1674 however Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the alpha The test temperature and Calculated NMI CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations ASTM1250 This table provides CTL factors for correcting
463. tail screen for that transaction Added LUA Data to transaction detail for UAP to show all additional record data also stored with transaction Added Next and Prev b uttons to the transaction detail screen to step into other transaction without returning to the Transaction Log Summary page 8 31 2012 WIP Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 406 Added ability to UAP firmware to read the BOL script from the SD Card for customer site custom BOL formats On startup bol script LUA is read from the root directory of the SD card bol scripts directory has been created in Perforce to maintain controlled version control and history of custom BOLs developed If a bol _script LUA file is not present the default_bol script in the source code moved to ml _db c will be used 9 21 2012 MSH Added German translation Added Comfort Energy logo 10 4 2012 MSH Fix for display on SMP EXL Was broken by 07 24 12 build 10 11 2012 PS Add EOD report for Shell Report triggered by FEODLOG command from host Prints totalizers per preset meter component to Alibi Log 10 12 2012 MSH Add Meter Creep voucher 10 16 2012 MSH Tweaks to Unauth Flow voucher formatting net volume Change to how we handle meter creep unauthorized flow We will no longer generate a ticket for the meter creep We will print a Unauth Flow meter creep voucher for all unauthorized flow regardless of whether drive
464. talled it is necessary to use this DIP switches on the CPU board to enable program mode and W amp M access Switches are numbered 1 through 4 with 1 being closest to the front of the enclosure top of the picture and 4 being toward the back of the enclosure bottom of the picture When switch is in the ON position the switch is in the active state A switch is ON when it moved right and OFF when moved to the left Switch 3 is the program mode switch Switch 4 is the W amp M access switch In the Figure below the Program Mode switch is currently Active while the W amp M Switch is not active A switch input will be considered active with either the DIP switch OR external switch is active ON Your Weights and Measures inspector may wish to verify that DIP switch 4 bottom switch is in the off position moved left prior to sealing the MultiLoad II enclosure to ensure that W amp M parameters are secure Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 30 Chapter 2 System Description 31 2 11 5 PROGRAM MODE W amp M FIELD SWITCHES The MultiLoad II also has the ability to accept field inputs for the Program Mode and W amp M Access switches The W amp M Key FCM and Program Key FCM in the RCU W amp M Parameters list allow any field I O position to be the source of the switch input See Weights and Measures for more information If an external switch is wired to the MultiLoad Il as a W amp M access switch the installer may be require
465. te for small consistent over deliveries This adjustment is made on a volumetric basis For example if the valve consistently delivers 1 50 volumetric units more than the preset amount enter 1 50 for this parameter The Final Trip parameters are located on the Component Setup screen Parameter Default Setting Screen Location Final Trip Volume 1 15 gallons Component Setup Final Trip Maximum Time 500 milliseconds Component Setup Overrun Alarm Volume 20 gallons Preset Setup 5 2 5 27 3 DIGITAL CONTROL VALVES Once the digital control valve needle valve adjustments are correctly set digital valve control is not a problem But with small 2 3 digital valves or valves that do not contain needle valve adjusters these valves tend to react very quickly to and sometimes result in constant overshooting of the target flow rate especially at low flow rates This can be observed as the valve fails to lock into a steady flow rate while the solenoids continue to click throughout the load To prevent this problem an alternative flow algorithm can be configured This algorithm makes small steps in the adjustment of the digital control valve eliminating the overshoot and allowing a reduction in the flow deadband values Changing the length of time the solenoid is strobed Valve Dwell Time will allow software adjustment of the valve speed similar to the way a needle valve adjusts the valve speed MultiLoad can be configured to u
466. tem expects the injection cycle to be completed Please see Figure 6 1 for illustration When an injection is commanded the piston must leave its starting position before the Throw Time has elapsed The Piston Input feedback switch should indicate a change of state when the piston has been launched The default state is high when the piston is in the starting position changing to a low state as the piston travels away from its seat If the Piston Input signal changes to a low state before the Throw Time elapses the Throw Time timer is reset pending a command for the piston to return If the state does not change within the Throw Time a missed injection will be logged internally The load can be programmed to raise an alarm after a number of missed injections are logged When the Throw Time has elapsed the additive output injection signal will be removed permitting the piston to return to the starting position After the output signal has been removed the Throw Time timer is restarted The piston must return to the starting position before the Throw Time has elapsed If the piston returns to its starting position before the Throw Time elapses the state should change to a high condition The system would assume that the injection was successful and it would increment the additive totalizer by the quantity specified in the Volume per Injection parameter If the signal did not change to a high state before the Throw Time elapsed a missed injecti
467. tem may also verify the supplied data and check allocations before uploading the product recipe and authorizing the batch Upon receiving batch authorization from TMS the MultiLoad Il requests the Driver to Confirm Start by pressing Enter again to start flow Upon transaction completion the host system TMS retrieves the transaction data and prints the BOL 12 4 2 ACCESS SCREEN When the MultiLoad II is in Operation mode the Access screen displays On MultiLoad II On MultiLoad Il SMP For Access For Access Insert Driver Card Press Next to Begin Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 11 Operation After inserting a driver card or pressing Next and entering an Access ID Driver Number the driver is prompted for a PIN Personal Identification Number The driver may be prompted for additional information like trailer ID Afterwards the Customer Selection screen will display Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Enter PIN Number fff Select Customer Number F 0000001 ABC OIL 0000002 SHIPCO 0000003 XYZ HEATING 0000004 VANCI Nex bk SHIPPING een Perey 338 Chapter 11 Operation The driver can either select the customer from the picklist or they can key in the customer number at the prompt In either case press Enter If the customer you selected has at least one account defined the Account Selection screen will display shown below If the customer you have selected
468. tering a value of 1 for this parameter Meter 2 is designated to be a side stream of Meter 1 It will probably be necessary to adjust the Dead Band rates of Meter 2 since the side stream meter is typically smaller than the primary stream s meter Reference the table for suggested settings The Maximum Flow Rate and Minimum Flow Rate parameters for Meter 2 will also need to be adjusted to match the flow meter manufacturer s specifications At the component level configuration the components are assigned to a particular meter using the Meter parameter Referencing the diagram in Figure 5 4 Component 1 and Component 2 are assigned to Meter 1 and Component 3 is assigned to Meter 2 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 157 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Preset Meter Meter 2 Components 1 3 Component To Meter Assignment Meter Param Number of Meters 2 Side Stream on Meter 1 Component 1 Meter 1 Number of Components 3 Low Flow DB Rate 10 gpm Component 2 Meter 1 Ratio Blending Enable High Flow DB Rate 10 gpm Component 3 Meter 2 Seq Blending Enable 1 Stage DB Rate 10 gpm 2nd Stage DB Rate 10 gpm Weights amp Measures Meter 2 Minimum Flow Rate 5 gom Maximum Flow Rate 100 gom Figure 5 10 Sequential Blending with Side Stream Configuration At the component level I O assignments can be made for product pumps an
469. termined by the ratio of that component in a given blend For example a two component blend that has a 50 50 ratio will produce equal flows through the two meters during the Low Flow Start stage The low flow rate through each meter will equal 50 percent of the Low Flow Start Rate The resulting flow through any meter must not violate the rate specified in the Minimum Flow Rate parameter The message Invalid Recipe will be displayed prior to loading if this limit is violated A meter s Minimum Flow Rate value is configured in the Meter menu for each flow meter assigned to the preset As the load transitions into High Flow the flow rate through each meter used in the blend will increase proportionally until the High Flow Rate is reached The flow rate through each meter will be a percentage of the High Flow Rate The resulting flow through any meter must not violate the rate specified in the Maximum Flow Rate parameter The message Invalid Recipe will be displayed prior to loading if this limit will be violated The meter Maximum Flow Rate value is configured in the Meter menu for each flow meter assigned to the preset Each component used in a given recipe will transition to the 1st Stage Trip phase when it reaches the 1st Stage Trip Volume The 1st Stage Trip Volume is configured in the Component menu for each component that is assigned to the preset Each component will probably reach the 1st Stage Trip Volume at slightly different times The flow
470. test temperature density and Calculated corrected density at 20 C are for informational purposes and will not be used in NMI calculations during operations The CTL value is calculated as CTL Observed Density Corrected Density at 20 C ASTM1250 This table provides density at 20 C of light hydrocarbons at observed temperature and 1980 Table 600 density ASTM1250 This is the table based volume correction for Alcohols Biofuels Brazil Reference 1980 Table Standard ABNT NBR 5992 for Ethanol 901A It is passed the product api density20 at 60 901A degrees api60 and the product temperature in degrees F Table TEC This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the following conditions exist The liquid is ethanol Coefficient of expansion at 15 C or 60 F is known Reference Temperature is 15 C or 60 F After selecting this table enter the coefficient of expansion of the liquid at 15 C or 60 F Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and coefficient of expansion The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Table TEC ETH US This table provides CTL factors for correcting volumes of ethanol at observed temperatures to the volume at either 15 C or 60 F Use this table if the f
471. the flow meter Unauthorized Gross Total unauthorized gross volume through the flow meter Meter Creep Gross Gross amount of volume designated as meter creep Meter creep volumes are small amounts of volume that have been indicated by the meter when flow is supposed to be idle Meter creep can be caused by a small leak excessive line shock or electro magnetic interference Backflow Gross Total gross volume that has flowed through the meter backwards This can only be detected with meters using dual pick offs Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries Notes Volume numbers displayed are whole numbers or with 1 100 resolution depending on the current setting of the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M Parameter The numbers on the left indicate volumes in non resettable totalizers The numbers on the right indicate volumes in resettable totalizers Use the CLR key to zero out the resettable totalizers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 313 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 10 3 3 VIEWING COMPONENT TOTALIZERS From the View Totalizers Menu select Components After selecting the preset and component the Component Totalizers screen displays E 1 CMP Toral Total oral Authorized Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Unauthorized Unauthorized E 1 CME Total Total Total Authorized Authorized Authorized Unauthorized Unauthorized Unauthorized i Parameter Descriptions
472. this delay timer If starting flow is attempted inside this delay period by the driver the MultiLoad will log a message indicating that a driver attempted to start flow inside this delay The Preset state will stay in the Starting state until the delay period lapses then flow will start as normal Blend Check Start Volume applies to ratio blending only After the volume specified in this parameter has been delivered the system will start checking the ratio of the blend This parameter is intended to give the flows from the multiple meters an opportunity to stabilize after an initial start from zero flow No blend ratio checks or adjustments are made until after this volume has been delivered This setting should be configured to be greater than the Low Flow Start Volume so that checks can begin after the transition to High Flow Blend Check Restart Volume applies to ratio blending only After the volume specified in this parameter has been delivered the system will start checking the ratio of the blend This parameter is intended to give the flows from the multiple meters an opportunity to stabilize after a restart from zero flow Blend ratio checks will not resume until after this volume has been delivered This setting should be configured to be greater than the Low Flow Restart Volume so that checks can begin after the transition to High Flow Ratio Blending Blend Check Alarm When the ratio is found to be out of tolerance by the pe
473. this occurred one of more tasks would stop running the system could lock up or the system state would become invalid Solution Disable CPU cache in the MMU at startup for the flash memory area Use application flash routines that do not modify CPU cache states Added check for all presets complete to end transaction in case previous end transaction was interrupted Remove background processing in end transaction routine to prevent recursion with previous change Build now links with pxa255 rcu lib romram net 11 with cache disabled on flash address space Use application flash routines for firmware and transaction updates Verify firmware update functionality For PXA255 Flash block unlock routine checks lock status before unlocking flash blocks Transaction archive blocks are left unlocked Corrected issue with reading transaction details on the Modbus interface Restored ability to remotely modify time without an active W amp M switch changes are W amp M logged Updated copyright date 2 8 11 WIP Increased the number of allowable additives in a recipe from 6 to 12 Changed firmware version to 3 4 31 00 Realigned all NVRAM structures for new fields totalizers will not be preserved from previous versions Changed all NVRAM DBASE versions to 3 31 00 Added ability to place compartment number on standalone ticket Added column position to R203 command MultiMate update needed Adjusted default ticket to displa
474. tion Setup Equipment Setup Product Configuration expert Setup Presets Additive Calibration Access IDs System Date and Time 5 Product Flow System Admin Facility Flow control configuration for single product delivery Control expert and calibration 6 Additive Control Additive expert Configuring for different additive control methods piston only pulser input etc 7 Diagnostics System Admin Technician Loopback Test Diagnostics for Bay Preset Meter Electrician Component and Additives 8 Weights amp System Admin Technician Meter pulse resolution Meter Factors Calibration Measures Temperature Calibration 9 Views and Inquiry Operators View presets totalizers and meter temperatures 10 Operation Drivers Operators Phases of Operation Keypad Entry Local Control Operation Remote Control Operation TMS Authorization SMP Ditto 11 Custom Logic Admin analyst programmer How to customize activation of outputs using Boolean logic statements Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 1 Before You Begin 13 DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS The following documentation conventions are used throughout this guide 1 3 1 SCREEN SAMPLES The field data shown are provided as samples only 1 3 2 PROCEDURES Procedures that should be followed in order are shown in a step by step format Usually the result of a user action is shown on the next line For example 1 From the Configuration Menu choose Equipment Setup Press Enter The
475. tive Control 205 15 Press 2 and key in the measured amount of additive in CCs collected for this additive then press ENTER In the sample below wel use 405 CCs PRE 1 ADTV 1 Adtv 001 CALIBRATE Delivered Vol 0 100 ST USS 1 Beaker Vol 0 106990 2 Beaker Vol CCs 405 000 Meter Pulses 261 adartive MER K Factns 2600 New Additive Mtr Factor lO Gare Enter Save 16 A new additive meter factor or a new calibration factor for piston cylinder type will be calculated automatically The values on the screen change to reflect the actual volume you collected 17 Press Enter to have the new factor take effect and to return you to the Check Delivered Additive screen where you can select another additive for calibration 18 When all additives have been calibrated press the EXIT key until the program mode has been exited The new additive meter factor s or the new Cylinder calibration factor s are now in effect k All additive volumes delivered during the calibration process will be added to the Unauthorized e Totalizer of the additive under test Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 10 ADDITIVE STATUS SCREEN During operation an additive status screen is available for each preset The Additive Status screen shown below displays all additives that are associated with the preset Additives that are assigned to a preset but are not used for the current delivery ar
476. to 3 28 11 08 27 08 3 28 12 WIP released to G R Correct bug in U133 that prevented access to FCM ports over 7 Corrected bug in uploadable logo size on SMP that prevented uploading new customer logos Updated firmware version to 3 28 12 09 5 08 3 28 12 WJP Updated makefile to build new MultiLoad II Mobile application Added new MultiLoad II Mobile product identification graphic ROOO will respond with MultiLoad Mobl to identify MultiLoad II Mobile product The following are specific only to the MultiLoad II Mobile product Added GPS selection in Communication Setup display Setup default serial configuration to have GPS on COM1 and Printer on COM2 Added GPS Diagnostic screen under the Diagnostics Menu Added GPS Site Database to store up to 4 000 site names with Lat Log position Added GPS Site Setup screen under the Configuration Menu Added new RCU level parameter Max GPS Site Distance The current position must be within this number of meters of a site in the GPS Site Database If this number is zero location verification is not performed Added new GPS Err alarm Alarm raised when no GPS fix data arrives for 60 seconds Also raised when a transaction is authorized and the authorization position is not at a site in the GPS Site Database or the current position has moved from the site where authorization was obtained Updated logic to place Site Name Latitude and Longitude information into the
477. to be shut Creep volumes can occur when the component is authorized or unauthorized This parameter will permit the internal creep counter to be reset periodically in order to avoid nuisance alarms due to line shock Resetting this internal counter periodically will prevent small amounts of meter creep from accumulating in the counter over time and triggering misleading Valve Fault alarms Set the time in seconds This function does not reset the Creep Totalizer that can be viewed in the Meter Views amp Inquiry s screen Ratio Adj P Factor Excluding SMP Ratio Adjusted Proportional Factor This parameter only applies to ratio blending Do not adjust this parameter without consulting Toptech Technical Support Ratio Adj D Factor Excluding SMP Ratio Adjusted Derivative Factor This parameter only applies to ratio blending Do not adjust this parameter without consulting Toptech technical support Meter Creep Alrm Vol Enter the volume of meter creep that will trigger a Meter Creep alarm If the volume of meter creep specified in this parameter accumulates within the time period indicated in the Creep Reset Time parameter a Meter Creep alarm will occur Meter creep may indicate that there is a small leak in the valve or it may be the result of excessive line shock Meter creep means that fluid is moving past the meter when the valve is supposed to be closed Flow Scan Time Use this parameter to achieve smoother flow c
478. to the SD card Added compiler switch to supply demo or simple UAP test data when clearing local database 8 21 2012 WIP Added compiler switch to include UAP Enterprise BOL 8 21 2012 WJP Updated Ticket prompting script to display the ticket prompt number 1 10 Updated Ticket prompting script to verify ticket number is a valid number and greater than 0 8 21 2012 WJP Updated Ticket prompting script to verify ticket number is not negative 8 23 2012 WIP Replaced Mandarin with Simplified Chinese and added Traditional Chinese 8 24 2012 WJP Appended Bay Number to Preset Number on Alibi Log per Germany requirement 8 26 2012 WJIP Updated the functionality on the Message log and W amp M Log web pages Corrected bug that pr page from working on some vented the Next Prev page buttons on the bottom of the web browsers Buttons shifting around made it difficult to quickly page thru Updated logic to keep all buttons visible Added First and Last buttons to quickly move to the first or last page Added 25 50 100 but tons to allow displaying more records per page Increased default number of lines shown from 15 to 25 Added Transaction Log S ummary Page Same functionality and feel as the Message Log and W amp M Log pages including the same buttons and starting Clicking on a transac on the last page to view the most recent transaction tion will drive to the de
479. trying after lost communications This will ensure that any FCM flowing product or with outputs on will stop flow and drop all outputs 5 10 12 WJP Removed CTS check on PTB Alibi Log Printers 5 15 12 MSH CN builds Addressed ISS 2045 Vehicle not archived with transaction which affected transload to truck operations 5 16 12 WIP Added RCU configuration parameter Trace UAP Level 0 minimal logging l 2 3 4 inc low level logic 5 inc low level com Added low level logging to the UAP product authorization processing 5 16 12 WIP Added Disabled field to UAP TDSClientProducts struct to be removed again Fixed issue where UAP local database edits did not mark DB as dirty Corrected null error issue with UAP AuthorizeTransaction when using Prox Cards Bug with UAP Update Saleable Products where Prod ID was checked as Prod Type Added UAP Preset Authorized Products functionalty to include all saleable and base products when no records are present in the PAP table 5 17 12 WIP Removed Disabled field from UAP TDSClientProducts struct 5 18 12 WIP Updated UAP processing of TDSClientProducts component percent field to contain a decimal point in 000 0000 format 6 1 12 WIP Updated UAP processing of UAP meter type field to use P Product and A Additive instead of C Component and A Additive Updated UAP processing of UAP prod type field to use 1 Product and 2 3 4 Additive instead of C Component A Additive and
480. ts amp Measures 295 Ethanol meter Meter Level values are reported as Gem M3 value not to be used for trade Tem T3 value not to be used for trade Dem D3 OR De Nem Gem VCFe Tem Dem value not to be used for trade Mem Nem Dem OR Mem Gem D2 value not to be used for trade Where Gem Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter M3 Gross volume reported by meter M3 Tem Temperature for the Ethanol Meter T3 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T3 Nem Net volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter VCFe API Correction Table for Ethanol Mem Mass loaded for the Ethanol Meter Ethanol product Component Level values are reported as Ge Gem value not to be used for trade Te Tem value not to be used for trade De De OR Dem Ne Nem value not to be used for trade Me Mem value not to be used for trade Where Ge Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component Te Temperature for the Ethanol component Ne Net volume loaded for the Ethanol component Me Mass loaded for the Ethanol component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 296 Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Grem Ge value not to be used for trade Tr Trem Grem Te Ge Gr value not to be used for trade Dr Dr OR Dr Drem Grem De Ge Gr value not to be used for trade Nr Nrem Ne value not to be used for trade Mr Mrem Me value not to be used for trade Where Gr
481. tus label registers Removed 720 key prompt label registers Alarm Label registers R7100xx R7140xx will return the alarms in the language specified by Program Mode Language Alarm Labels registers U7100xx U7140xx will only update the labels on permissives U711001 711008 U712001 U712001 U713001 U714001 API tables 23E ai 59E bi have been added to support correction to 20C Moved integer front end of API table 24E to a separate routine to allow 23E and 59E to access the 24E floating point calculations without rounding Corrected Table 24E start point Correction did not effect 24E calculations API tables can now return corrected relative density and corrected density Default configurable prompts are now disabled Preset status and component status formatting has changed to accommodate forign languages Updated W amp M change log to trace parameter index and not memory index to parameter to handle ROM placement of parameters Updated firmware version to 3 27 04 Updated database version to 3 27 04 for RCU Setup Database Real Time Database and Equipment Database and W amp M Log amp Totalizer Database 03 02 07 3 27 05 WJP released to QA for testing Marked parameters not releavent to the SMP builds to be NA All NA parameters are reset to the default value on bootup A message is logged when this occurs Updated code so that writes to NA registers returns an
482. tus Indicates that a Pump Status signal has been satisfied for a particular component Open Block Valve Indicates that a Block Valve has been commanded to open for a particular component Block Valve Status Indicates that a component level Block Valve status has been received from a particular component Close Block Valve Indicates that a Block Valve has been commanded to close for a particular component Alarm Out Indicates that a component level alarm such as Block Valve Status is active for a particular component Authorized Indicates when a driver is authorized to use a particular component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 365 xi Permissive Indicates that a component level permissive is active xii Permissive Out Indicates that all component level permissives have been satisfied xiii Comp State High Flow Low Flow FST_IDLE 0 FST_LOW_FLOW 1 FST_HIGH_FLOW 2 FST_FIRST_TRIP 3 FST_SECOND_TRIP 4 FST_FINAL_TRIP 5 xiv Gross Deliverd Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xv Net Delivered Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xvi Mass Delivered Preset Quantity value is in whole defined xvii Gross Flow Rate value is in whole defined xviii Temperature value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point xix Pressure value is in hundreths defined meaning two numbers after the decimal point xx Density value is in tenths defined meaning one
483. tween two flow rates that have proven meter factors As product is delivered the meter factor is continuously applied to the Raw Gross Volume to display the Gross Volume The meter factor that is applied against the Raw Gross Volume changes as the flow rate varies between two established flow rates MFR 1 MFR 2 MFR 3 MFR 4 Meter Factor Flow Rate Figure 5 13 Meter Factor Linearization Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 167 Chapter 5 Product Flow Control Meter Factor Configuration Meter Factors are accessed in Program mode from the Configuration gt Equipment Setup Menu shown below If multiple components are delivered through the same meter meter factors must be established for each component This is particularly important if the physical characteristics of the components such as density and viscosity have wide variation Meter Factors and Meter Factor Flow Rates are the parameter fields that will be entered These fields are displayed red and are Weights and Measures protected When entering the values through the MultiLoad Il keypad the Weights and Measures key switch must be activated to change the value From the Configuration gt Equipment Setup Menu select Components EQUIPMENT S Bay Preset Meters Additives Next Prev The Component Setup screen displays PRE 1 CMP ter Factor 1 ter Factor 1 ter Factor 2 Factor 2 Rate a te 3 A 4 1 Base
484. ty device gives an invalid value because of Air in the line By increase this parameter in seconds it is possible to still offload without going into alarm Last known density will be used for calculation Close Block Valve FCM Permits selection of a port that will provide an output signal to close a component s block valve This feature is provided for block valves that require separate opening and closing signals Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 103 Chapter 4 General Configuration Parameter Action Blk Val Status FCMA Block Valve Status FCM parameter allows the selection of a port that will receive an input signal The input signal will represent the state of the component block valve indicating whether it is open or closed When the block valve is closed an external contact attached to the valve will close applying a status signal to the input When the block valve is open the external contact will also be open removing the status signal from the input When the block valve has been commanded to open the absence of a signal at the input will indicate that the valve has opened If the closed signal is still present after the Block Valve Open Delay time has elapsed a block valve failure alarm will be issued When the block valve has been commanded to close the presence of the status signal at the input will indicate that the valve has closed If the closed signal has not been detected by the
485. ty or API gravity This formular is used when we have a default density relative density or API Gravity Mass Net Volume x Density This formular is used when we measure the observed density Mass Net Volume x Density Note Kilogram Air will change the density with 1 1 for products under a density of 996 6 between 996 6 and 1663 5 we use a density change of 1 0 and everything above 1663 5 will be 0 9 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 5 1 NET PULSE OUTPUT There is a provision to produce a net pulse output A factor can be applied to the net pulse output to achieve the desired pulse resolution The pulse resolution can be configured from 0 001 to 50 000 pulses per unit volume The Net Output Pulse configuration parameter is found under Preset Setup 9 5 2 MASS PULSE OUTPUT There is a provision to produce a mass pulse output A factor can be applied to the mass pulse output to achieve the desired pulse resolution The pulse resolution can be configured from 0 001 to 50 000 pulses per unit volume The Mass Output Pulse configuration parameter is found under Preset Setup 9 5 3 DELIVER IN GROSS OR NETOR MASS Each load arm can be configured to deliver in either gross net volume or mass If a preset is configured to deliver in gross preset quantities will be entered in gross A preset that is configured to deliver in net volume will accept preset quantities in net volume A preset that is configured
486. u are asked to key in or which button s to press on the MultiLoad II keypad Example Key in 00000 and press Next Italic In topic text italic indicates a key MultiLoad Il term or industry term Example The display features a pick list style of item selection Italic is also used for emphasis Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2 1 OVERVIEW This chapter introduces you to the MultiLoad II system by defining its capabilities describing its operating modes identifying its main components and discussing navigation of the user interface Main topics covered are System Overview Two Operating Modes System Components Navigating The System Switch Access Control Getting Started The MultiLoad II Configuration Tool MultiMate Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 2 System Description 15 2 2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The MultiLoad Il is designed to manage multiple loading arms delivering straight or blended products The system can operate in conjunction with the Toptech TMS system remote processing mode or in Local stand alone mode The MultiLoad II supports 12 loading arms 5 meters per loading arm 6 component ratio blending 8 components per loading arm 8 component sequential blending Sequential Ratio and Side stream blending proportional as non proportional blending 16 additive injectors per loading arm Digital two stage and Analog 4 2
487. uct Message is after each the product component line Swapped UAP Bol City line with Phone number lin Fix UAP Bol when more than 1 page cursor would not follow the end of copy line 02 21 2013 WJP Trim CRs and LFs from BOL script to prevent TDS communications from hanging on message log lines with CRs 02 22 2013 PS Enhancement of the Alarm Screens Added new functionality that each status alarm bay preset meter component additive can be hidden for any remote system 2 26 2013 WJP Added Driver Routines to read NVRAM Battery Monitor Voltage and Temperature Added Battery Monitor Service Routine to Check Battery Voltage every 24 hours 2 26 2013 PS Added new alarm routine which give all 32 bit alarm states New communication commands are added Bay MRBA32 Preset MRPA32 MRPA Meter MRMA32 Comp MRCA32 Add MRAA32 03 01 2013 PS Enhancement of new Menu Level under Equipment Setup for settings up the Multiload2 03 02 2013 PS Add Deadman functionality also to Custom Logic 03 06 2013 PS Enhancement on payload transaction to UAP Added BSW and Pressure to the transaction file Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 412 03 07 2013 PS Enhancement of Custom Logic supports now Temperature BSW Gravity Relative Density Density Pressure Volumes Enhancement of Custom Logic supports now Timers Start and Stop Delay 03 07 2013 WJP Added display of Battery Voltage and Tem
488. ue here The value should be the density of the component at 15 C The units are kg m3 When the density sensor is disabled this value will specify the density to be used for the meter level density If the density sensor is disabled and this default density value is zero the currently assigned component density will be used If this meter is the main stream of a side stream blend a volume weighted blend density will be calculated from the main and side stream component densities For API tables that require a density the meter level density will be used for this calculation Alarm Low Density When a Density Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured density falls below a minimum value When the density of the metered product falls below the value entered in this field a DENSITY alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See Density Calibration for instructions on configuring a density sensor Alarm High Density When a Density Sensor is enabled this parameter can be used to raise an alarm when the measured density rises above a maximum value When the density of the metered product exceeds the value entered in this field a DENSITY alarm will be raised and loading will be stopped See Density Calibration for instructions on configuring a density sensor Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 94 Chapter 4 General Configuration Density Alarm Time At the default valu
489. ughout the remainder of the load a one injection surplus will be maintained Upon reaching completion the volume of additive delivered will be 100 of the specified volume plus the volume of one injection If a load is terminated prematurely it will have the proper additive volume for the amount of product delivered plus a volume between 0 5 to 1 0 injections Valid range of entries is 1 0 to 65 See figure 6 7 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 189 Chapter 6 Additive Control Additive Volume 3 Inject Vol 2 Inject Vol 1 Inject Vol 1 2 Inj Vol 190 Effective Additive Offset a a 1 Injection Surplus Additive Recipe Programmed Additive Over Injection Graph 1 2 Inject Surplus exists Injection Initiated Product Volume Delivered Figure 6 7 Additive Over Injection Parameter Description Creep Reset Time Additive Meter Creep is any volume that passes the additive meter when the valve is commanded to be shut Creep volumes can occur when the additive is authorized or unauthorized see Unauth Reset Time parameter description A small amount of meter creep due to line shock is expected Flow does not necessarily occur but slight meter movement due to line shock will cause the system to view it as such Over time the accumulated creep volume may increase to a value that raises an alarm meter creep or valve fault To avoid nuisance alarms this accumulated value must
490. ular component Ger Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Regular Ethanol Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Ner Net volume loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Reqular Ethanol Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Mer Mass loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Regular Ethanol Premium product Component Level values are reported as Gp Gpem Gep value not to be used for trade Tp Tpem Gpem Tep Gep Gp value not to be used for trade Dp Dp OR Dp Dpem Gpem Dep Gep Gp value not to be used for trade Np Npem Nep value not to be used for trade Mp Mpem Mep value not to be used for trade Where Gp Gross volume loaded for the Premium component Gep Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Premium Ethanol Np Net volume loaded for the Premium component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Nep Net volume loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Premium Ethanol Mp Mass loaded for the Premium component Mep Mass loaded for the Ethanol component while flowing Premium Ethanol Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 292 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 293 9 12 MULTILOAD RATIO WITH SIDE STREAM BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular Premium ratio main streams Ethanol side stream on Regular Regular Regular Eth
491. ulse Input or Mass to Remain Mass MAS PUL Mass Pulse Input to be converted to Volume VOL ANALOG Volume 4 20mA Analog Input VKrohne Volume Input from Krohne Mass Meter Serial Input VMicroM Volume Input from MicroMotion Mass Meter Serial Input Volume Pulse Input Pulses from a meter indicate Volume The Meter K Factor and Meter Factors convert this pulse to a volume Mass Pulse Input This selction indicates that the pulse input is in Mass units but should be converted to Volume All displays and preset quantities will still be done in Volume The MultiLoad Il processes data and are configured at different equipment levels Typically data flows from the actual meter hardware into the Meter Level then on to the assigned Component Level and finally to the Preset Level The incorporation of the Mass Pulse feature allows the Meter Level to flow product and process pulse data as mass This includes weighting the observed temperature and density Meter mass data is converted to volume when it is moved from the Meter Level into the Component Level Vol Mass Density In the Component Level gross volume is converted to net volume and both gross and net values are passed up to the Preset Level While only the Meter Level actually processes mass data most of the volume and rate parameters on the Component Level and Preset Level are passed down to the meter level to configure the flow control hardware I O board for the load
492. um product Component Level values are reported as Where Gp Gpm Tp Tpm Dp Dp OR Dpm Np Npm Mp Mpm Gp Gross volume loaded for the Premium component Tp Temperature for the Premium component Dp Density for the Premium component Dp Density specified for the Premium component Np Net volume loaded for the Premium component Mp Mass loaded for the Premium component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 286 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 287 Ethanol meter Meter Level values are reported as Where Ethanol Where Gem M2 Tem T2 Dem D2 OR De Nem Gem VCFe Tem Dem Mem Nem Dem OR Mem Gem D2 Gem Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter M2 Gross volume reported by meter M2 Tem Temperature for the Ethanol Meter T2 Volume weighted average temperature reported by probe T2 Dem Density for the Ethanol Meter D2 Volume weighted average Density measured OR specified for meter M2 De Density specified for the Ethanol component Nem Net volume loaded for the Ethanol Meter VCFe API Correction Table for Ethanol Mem Mass loaded for the Ethanol Meter product Component Level values are reported as Ge Gem Te Tem De De OR Dem Ne Nem Me Mem Ge Gross volume loaded for the Ethanol component Te Temperature for the Ethanol component De Density for the Ethanol component De Density specified for the Ethanol component Ne Net volume loaded for the Ethanol component Me Mass loaded for the Ethanol component Blended produ
493. unction 6 3 1 ADDITIVE OUTPUT PORT AND INPUT PORT ASSIGNMENTS Output Port Input Port Injector 1 0 7 Injector 2 1 6 Injector 3 Excluding SMP 2 5 Injector 4 Excluding SMP 4 6 4 ADDITIVE UNITS Additive totals can be displayed in one of two units cubic centimeters cc or thousandths of a unit volume The parameter to select the desired units for additives Display Adtv as CCs is accessed from the MultiLoad II Setup screen When enabled all additive related displays will show additive totals in cubic centimeters cc If disabled additive totals will be displayed in thousandths of a unit volume Zb Additive units will be displayed in thousandths of the volumetric or mass units that are being used by the main components For example if the k factor of the product meter is pulses per liter additive units will be presented in thousandths of a liter The option to display additives in cubic centimeters is only valid when the product flow meters are entered in pulses per gallon Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 ADDITIVE CONTROL METHODS 6 5 1 METHOD 1 PISTON ONLY The Piston Only method provides for the use of a piston style injector using a calibrated cylinder This method provides no verification of additive delivery it merely calls for an injection as the demand for the additive accumulates An injection will occur as soon as enough product has been delive
494. up to the preset level API table listed for the main product stream is applied to the gross blend meter volume and is passed up to the preset level CR Offloading Air Eliminator High Flow Control functionality Added two new parameters Alt High Flow Rate and Alt H F Rate FCM to change to an alternate high flow rate when a status input changes This change is intended for single product delivery without blending Updated real time database version to 3 28 01 Updated firmware version to 3 28 01 07 18 07 3 28 02 WIP released to Measurement Canada Req of Measurement Canada Updated Ticket to include an by any values not measured for trade Updated default stand alone ticket definitions to properly format ticket with TEU Sa Added preset and component status bit to indicate when gross value measured for trade For Preset when gross value measured for trade is not set Temperature Pressure Density and Gross Volume may not be used for trade Net Volume may only be used for trade when MultiLoad is applying an API table to convert gross to net for all components Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 377 For Component when gross value measured for trade is not set Temperature Pressure Density Gross Volume and Net Volume may not be used for trade Updated firmware version to 3 28 02 bug still at 3 28 01 07 23 07 3 28 02 bug still at 3 28 0
495. uration Menu For example to access the configuration screens under Bay click the box next to Bay The second level of the screen hierarchy displays and the first screen of the set is active as shown below The RCU Level Configuration screen becomes active and RCU is highlighted to show you where you are in the screen hierarchy Notice that a vertical scroll bar appears to the right of this screen indicating more fields You can use the scroll bar to view these additional fields or you can simply grab the bottom of the screen and drag it down to elongate it You can do the same for screens having fields to the right by either scrolling horizontally or resizing the screen Parameter Names in Red are parameters that are under W amp M control Attempting to upload a value different then the value already in the MultiLoad II with the external switch NOT in W amp M mode will cause that single parameter upload to be rejected by the MultiLoad II After an upload a report of all rejected commands will be displayed Parameter Names in Blue are parameters that have been modified from the default value In most cases it is appropriate to leave most of the parameters at the default values Marking parameters that have been modified from the default value is simply a way to highlight the change Also notice that the small box next to Bay now has a minus sign in it indicating open To close or hide the Bay screen hierarchy cli
496. uration assumes that a flow measurement device is metering the amount of additive entering the product stream It is assumed that there is no piston cylinder and that the additive output port 4 20mA is commanding a drive of a pump which controls the delivery of additive Instead of incrementing the additive totalizer at each injection or upon receipt of a feedback signal this feature updates the additive totalizers based upon measured flow Because the physical limitations of a piston cylinder injector are eliminated the Throw Time parameter is irrelevant The Volume Per Injection parameter is still valid however The Volume Per Injection parameter sets a target pace that the system will inject if necessary in order to eliminate a deficit To control better the drive of the pump a PID loop is implemented All three parameters can be changed to get a stay drive of the pump during loading The Solenoid Shut Pulses parameter applies only to the Pulser Input additive method The quantity of pulse overruns due to valve action can be determined by performing the Additive Calibration test or the Additive Diagnostic Test Injection The quantity of excess pulses delivered for each test injection can be observed When the number of overrun pulses is determined enter the number into this parameter to further reduce the overrun See the Additive Calibration topic later in this chapter for details 6 5 8 CONFIGURING A ANALOG ADDITIVE This topic desc
497. ure and the F factor of the liquid Current Pressure is the pressure of the liquid This is a measured variable and will require that a pressure transducer be employed to provide pressure information to a Flow Control Module FCM in the form of a 4 20 mA signal Vapor Pressure is the pressure at which the liquid changes to vapor at the current liquid temperature Vapor pressure is also referred to as equilibrium pressure and bubble point TP 15 is used to determine the vapor pressure F factor is the compressibility factor of the liquid API tables 11 2 1 and 11 2 2 are used to compute the F factor 9 5 MASS CALCULATIONS The MultiLoad II has the ability to calculate mass Mass for the purposes of this discussion is defined to be the net volume corrected to a density The mass is calculated by multiplying the net volume by a density There are 3 types of densities which can be used 1 Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 254 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 255 2 Relative Density 3 API Gravity The Density used in the mass formula follows the following rule If an API table is selected the API table determines the density If no API table is selected the following rulez are going into affect Check if there is a default density or relative density or API gravity If not Check if a meter sensor is enabled for density or relative density or API gravity If not Check if there is a default meter density or relative densi
498. ure if the Load Totals are displayed directly under the transaction details tot _gpos 99 and tot glin 99 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 397 9 9 11 MSH Added support for two meter I O board automated test rig Changed prompting sequence to use Driver Language setting in RCU Setup rather than language bit in card database 10 3 11 MSH Added vehicle ID as prompted in transload to truck scenario to transaction sent to TDS Added BOL Prefix configurable to RCU General Setup for CN builds Prefix is user adjustable and is prepended to ticket number when sent to TDS 10 4 11 WJP Added ASTM1240 2004 tables Added the following configuration types COMMODITY TYPE 28 EXP COEF UOM TYPE 29 DENSITY UOM TYPE 30 PRESSURE UOM TYPE 31 With the following assignments define COMMODITY TYPE NONE define COMMODITY TYPE CRUDE define COMMODITY TYPE REFINE define COMMODITY TYPE LUBRIC WNrR CH Wess define EXP COEF UOM TYPE FAHRENHEIT 1 define EXP COEF UOM TYPE DEGREES 2 define DENSITY UOM TYPE KG 1 define DENSITY UOM TYPE API 2 define DENSITY UOM TYPE REL 3 define PRESSURE UOM TYPE PSIG Sg define PRESSURE UOM TYPE KPA 2 define PRESSURE UOM TYPE BAR 3 Added the following W amp M Component configuration parameters commodity type
499. uter unless the Weights amp Measures key switch has been activated Assignments for the passwords are made in the RCU General Setup menu under Configuration Menu Date This field will indicate the date that the parameter change was made Time This field will indicate the time that the parameter change was made Parameter Name This field will identify the parameter that was changed causing the event VIEW WEIGHTS amp MEASURES CHANGE LOG Ref 00003 Pre Cmp 01 None gt TAB59E Tak Or 037 23 58 API CTL Table Name Ref 00002 Pre Mtr 01 DISABLD gt ENABLE Td 1 07 03 23 56 Temperature Sensor Ref 00001 Toae 10703723 54 Has W amp M Access Next Prev Ref 00003 Pre 01 Cmp 01 None gt TAB59E Id 1 07 03 06 10 54 API CTL Table Name The most recent entry from the example is event 00003 It indicates that on preset load arm 1 the API CTL Table of component 1 was changed from None to Table 59E This change occurred at 10 58 on March 23 2007 Every two lines constitute a full message as The Message Log can be sent to a serial printer Go into the Communication Setup screen and set COM2 to Print before entering the View Weights amp Measures Change Log screen The Weights and Measures change log can be viewed and printed without entering the program mode by pressing the following 5 key sequence 4449 NEXT ES The View Totalizers menu can be viewed and print
500. uthorized state MM DD YY Date When enabled dates will appear on tickets as MM DD YY instead of DD MM YY Mass Measure Product mass measurement units to be displayed It is mandatory when loading in mass that Used this register is correctly populated Load Date From Load date from end means that the load date of the transaction will be the date at the end of End the load For instance if a transaction takes place across midnight this parameter will control whether the load date is the date at the beginning of the transaction or the end of the transaction Measure Used Product measurement units to be displayed Print Blend Details Controls the printing and archiving of transaction additive component and meter values 0 No additive component or meter values 1 All additive and component values Meter data only when values are different from the component data 2 All additive component and meter values Compartment If enabled the MultiLoad II will prompt the driver for a compartment entry for each batch This Entry compartment data is stored with the transaction Config Timeout Configuration timeout minutes is the number of minutes that the program mode will stay in Mins operation without a user keystroke If this parameter is set to non zero program mode will reset to operation mode after this parameter number of minutes expires without a keypad keystroke Print Totalizers Enables the recording of ending totalizer values
501. ve example is using the Alarm Out function This particular function is defined at the Meter level in MultiLoad Il Whenever an alarm related to a specific meter is raised by MultiLoad II an output can be activated In this example it is desired to take advantage of MultiLoad Is Alarm Out logic to make some decision rather than activate an FCM output based on a meter level Alarm Out condition A meter level Real Time prompt called Alarm Out has been selected After selecting this prompt the programmer must indicate which Preset load arm is being referenced In the example Preset 1 is selected for Index 000 Because the Alarm Out function is meter level the Preset s specific Meter must be identified SMP can only have 1 meter so this will always be 1 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 362 BOOLEAN OPERATION When a Boolean operation such as OR is selected in the TYPE field the operation will be applied to two lines in the Custom Logic List The lines to which this operation is directed can be specified in the two fields that follow the Type field The following example shows how the operation is applied to Index 000 and Index 001 Custom Logic Index 3 ADD UPDATE FCM_OUTPUT_PORT Se Type FCM Number 00000 DELETE FCM Port Number foooo1 EI EXIT Custom Logic Index 00002 Custom Logic List METER R T COMPONENT R T OR CustomLogic is Added In the above example it i
502. verage Density measured OR specified for meter Mi Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nm Net volume loaded for the Meter VCFr API Correction Table for Regular Mm Mass loaded for the Meter Regular product Component Level values are reported as Gr Gm Tr Tm Dr Dr OR Dm Nr Nm Mr Mm Where Gr Gross volume loaded for the Regular component Tr Temperature for the Regular component Dr Density for the Regular component Dr Density specified for the Regular component Nr Net volume loaded for the Regular component Mr Mass loaded for the Regular component Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 276 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures Saleable product Preset Level values reported as Gb Gm Tb Tm Db Dm Nb Nm Mb Mm Where Gb Gross volume loaded for the blend Tb Temperature for the blend Db Density for the blend Nb Net volume loaded for the blend Mb Mass loaded for the blend Pressure and Gravity are handled in the same way as Temperature and Density Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 277 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 9 7 MuLTILOAD SEQUENTIAL BLENDING CALCULATIONS Regular PJ IIN D ark D I pg Premium CV r p Regular meter Meter Level values are reported as Grm M1 Trm T1 Drm D1 OR Dr Nrm Grm VCFr Trm Drm Mrm Nrm Dr OR Mrm Grm Dm Where Grm Gross volume loaded for the Regular Meter M1 Gross volume reported by m
503. very type is mass that the mass measure used cannot be NON Gl Added check when delivery type is net or mass that the measure used cannot be NONE 04 27 2013 WJP Updated U700 so language index 0 is used before any other language indexes 1 MAX LANG to maintain backwards compatability Added new card reader types to support non captive card readers and ibutton readers Added new U700 strings to support Swipe Card and Touch iButton messages 04 28 2013 PS Added iButton routine to read the iButton Reader also updated the keypad firmware v003 Added new diagnostic screen to see ibutton reader data with read counter Added iButton animation on the IDLE Screen 04 28 2013 WJP Added support and card reader types for noncaptive card readers India Req Changed Driver Card Number from an Integer to a String for iButton Support Manual entry of Card Numbers Access ID setup and Card Reader Disabled zero pads numbers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 417 UAP TMS and MultiMate uploads of Driver Card Number data should be zero padded before uploading UAP TMS and MultiMate should be updated to support alphanumerics hex data for ibutton support TMS needs to be updated to support the following card reader types for MultiLoad SMP define CARD READER TYPE DISABLED 0 define CARD READER TYPE BUCKET CAPTIVE 1 defin
504. ves are used to select the additive that is to be delivered In contrast to the previous scheme an additive Injector Valve is not used During a load the Additive Block Valve of the selected additive is opened only when an injection is commanded This is accomplished by wiring the Additive Block Valve output in series with the Additive Injection output Refer to the schematic below During a load the selected Additive Block Valve output will be active at all times The Additive Injection output will periodically complete the circuit energizing the Additive Block Valve solenoid whenever an injection is commanded L1 L2 e G Sg Additive Injection Additive Block Valve Additive Block Valve Output Output Add 1 Solenoid Add 1 os G C Additive Block Valve Additive Block Valve Output Add 2 Solenoid Add 2 Figure 6 6 Electrical Schematic using Block Valves as Injectors Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 6 Additive Control 6 5 11 CONFIGURING A COMMON METER WITH MULTIPLE ADDITIVES This topic describes the minimum configuration needed to get an additive to operate using this method Configuration of the following parameters is mandatory You can accomplish this using the I O II Configuration Tool or the I O II keypad in Program mode These parameters will have to be configured for each additive that is assigned to the common injector Additive Enable Enable this parameter Flow control module Set this value to the
505. ving will be done for two flow rates enter the second flow rate in Meter Factor 2 Rate field Up to four proving rates may be entered Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 353 Chapter 11 Operation 354 12 6 1 USING THE PROVING FEATURE 1 ak oO ND Activate the Weights and Measures switch In stand alone mode Navigate to Program Mode gt Configuration gt RCU Setup and enable the Meter Proving Mode parameter In remote mode the host system must send a MPT Meter Proving Transaction command to the Multiload Authorize a single product transaction on the MultiLoad Il Cannot be a blend Press enter and preset the volume that is to be delivered into the test vessel Press Enter to authorize the preset quantity Following Authorization the operator will advance to the Meter Proving pre configuration screen At this screen the Flow Rate field will be highlighted PRE 1 Preset 001 CMP 1 LS DIESEL Meter Proving Preconfiguration Proving Rate M E M F Elow Rate 150 DORT OON Low Flow Vol ZO OD 120101010 Low Flow Rate 60 400 1 0000 Prover 800 1 0000 Exp Coeff 0 000000000 Note The Weights and Measures Switch MUST be active to modify Rate and M F parameters Press Enter to scroll through the proving flow rates These flow rates were established during the Preliminary Setup Press Next after finding the desired flow rate Zb Note f the flow rates are no longer appropriate they can b
506. ware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 4 General Configuration 68 Parameter Description Printeri Port This port is set fixed to 9100 standard raw protocol Printer2 IP To print a ticket to a network printer give the IP address in of that Printer If Printer 1 and Printer 2 are used we will send at each printer one copy If both IP addresses are the same 2 copies will come out of the same Printer Printer2 Port This port is set fixed to 9100 standard raw protocol Printer Alibi IP Printing to a PTB protocol PC or network Printer Printer Alibi Port This port is set fixed to 9100 standard raw protocol Note The password for both is default Toptech lower case if the password is changed by the keypad of the Multiload2 it is always capital If it is changed by the web interface it handles lower as capital case After enabling the network and rebooting the MultiLoad Il the two network activity lights next to the Ethernet connection should become active indicating network activity and link status The Boot Screen will display as Von kx Jan xx 2013 Copyright c 2013 Toptech Systems Inc MAC Address 00 50 c2 60 90 00 IP Address 192 168 0 200 Net Mask BOO 299 AO Or Broadcast 92 LEse0 Zao Gateway 1592 16803 T AOSE 192 168 0 1 TII RR Jan xx 2013 Copyright c 2013 Toptech Systems Inc MAC Address 00 50 c2 60 90 00 IP Address 192 168 0 200 Net Mask 255 255 2505 20 Broadcasts INGA SIGs 0 25S Gateway HOGS Or
507. weight to net and nert Co gross Added routine to go from measured unit to mass measured unit mass units in the measured unit are out of scope Updated all Meter Type for volume and mass totalizer calculations Added Date to the Preset Control Screen Mode DD MM YYYY or MM DD YYYY Fixed bug for alibilog when in hundreths mode that the decimal points would be not converted to comma only saleable level Moved Time on Preset COntrol Screen next to the date value Enhancement on EOD Report include now also Mass Totalizers and Thruput Fixed bug in EOD Report if more than 1 meter per arm was assigned report would loop multiple times Added new thruput totalizers auth unauth volume for Gross Net Mass Added Mass calculations when using online density relative API Gravity instead of using Mass Net Dens we will use Mass Gross Dens Added DINISO rounding routines for weight When not loading in hundreths net and mass gets calculate from whole values Added new Mass Calculator Screen starts from Net volume to Mass Added Mass to Custom Logic Preset and Component Level Added missing net hundreths level to clear reset component level 4 17 2013 WJP Fixed bug in UAP bol processing where sometimes the header lines would not get copied to other pages Corrected bug in UAP BOL default script where one detail line on the start of new pages was lost Updated UAP BOL default script to add a dividing line
508. when driver and card number are not equal then reprint doesn t work because database has driver number reprint search on card number UAP Fix alignment issue on Reprint Prompt 12 17 2012 PS New enhancement Low Flow Start Volume Based on Percentage 12 17 2012 PS Enhancement on UAP ticket number Webpage TransactionViewer and BOLs 12 17 2012 PS Enhancement on UAP ticket date change be change to MM DD YY or DD MM YY 12 19 2012 WJP Release to Customer Correct Print Blend Details so when 0 Exclude components additives and meters 1 Include components additives and meters only when meters are needed 2 Include components additives and meters always include meters even when not needed Updated Low Flow Start Volume to use the greater or either the configured Low Flow Start Volume or the computed Low Flow Start Volume by Percentag Low Flow Restart Volume always uses the configured Low Flow Restart Volume 12 24 2012 PS Enhance Network Menu combining parameters under a new webpage menu Add new Network Printer Menu 12 25 2012 PS Enhance modbus interface that all transaction values are readabl api expansion coef tenths corrected densitygravity volume correction factor bsw_hund alibilog alarm 12 26 2012 PS Restrict low flow start volume to 65535 when using low flow percentage 12 29 2012 PS New feature deadman with input and output signal deadman interval timer deadman warning tim
509. wn additive calibration data and recipe percentag under W amp M protection New parameters added Additive W amp M Recipe Percentag Additive W amp M Additive Vol Inject Additive W amp M Vol Inject Cal Factr Additive W amp M Additive Mtr K Factr Additive W amp M Additive Mtr Factor ECO2008 003 Added the ability to connect an Alibi Log to a Serial Port Added a communication port type of Alibi Log RTS and DTS are always driven active Data will only be transmitted when DCD DSR and CTS signals are active If DCD DSR or CTS remain inactive for 5 seconds or more a printer alarm will be raised Printer must be in hardware handshake mode DTR used for pacing Also added printer flow control and alarming to ticket printing ECO2008 004 Added interface to allow TMS to display other preset volumes seperate from ML values on the load screen Values will be maintained in a different color to clearly establish them as not legally relevant and should not be used for trade Added new bay parameter Number External Presets to specify how many external presets should be displayed All external presets are displayed in a different color with a message indicating Not Legal for Trade Added R U401 register to update displayed external preset data When an external preset is selected the MultiLoad state will go to a a h matching the preset number MAMppp can be sent by the host to return to the load screen when don driving t
510. wnload a Configuration File FROM a MultiLOa UL 58 3 11 6 Upload a Configuration File TO a MUItiLOG le 59 3 11 7 Update the Firmware Image in a MUItiLO H 60 CHAPTER 4 GENERAL CONFIGURATION i522 ccsccccsttescceh dcecsencesceciSsceesescdeseecedcecereccdezsacghecaeecentetd eebe deele 63 4 1 OVO VICW ees E E ATTE A Dese Eege ege 63 4 2 COMMUNICATION SeOtUp der ugedeit 63 4 3 Network Setup xicciccceccscessccecsccestecccseetetsseceeeccedtetedesasds edecventeterausrestevessede SEENEN 66 4 4 ROU General Setup scien ect enccec cece eocceeds anoi ama ceaceutacs cdsteventadescuurestey evsdeeroccedsecudeecte EE ee EEN 69 4 5 ROU SOU py EE 71 4 6 Equipment S tu pice ccscsce seccesccesccsccoseteds aanp aa aa eaaa narren aaaea ov candies daOn aaeei iaaa ae seateestouceedeutuveadsnenueecetes 77 H Pa GE EE 79 46 2 Preset Set p EE 82 46 3 Meter SOLU TE 90 4 6 4 CGomponent SCtUP ccesccccsceccenceceneessneecncneecuneessaeceaeecscnnessanssanaecseneecaesssnasegeaeecseeteseasssaneecsenseseenstens 100 4 7 large 106 4 71 Bay Alarm S tup EE 109 4 7 2 Preset Alarm SQtup EE 110 4 7 3 Meter Alarm Setup 335003328 saitiei ti nde eee ue Aelia 111 4 7 4 Component Alarm Setup EE 113 e en EE 115 4 8 Local Product Definition and Assignment cccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenees 117 4 9 eaaa o E E E A ee E EA 118 4 10 Defining Base COoMponentsS s sssssssnssnurnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnn
511. x field The first line shall be entered as 000 Next select a function from the Type field The functions will either be standard MultiLoad II functions or Boolean operations After a Type function is selected the three fields that follow it will be defined When a line of Custom Logic is completed it is added to the Custom Logic List when the Add Update button is selected I Custom Logic DEK Ge ADD UPDATE Type x KR METER iI Meter Real Time Prompt Alarm out DELETE Preset Number HE Kn Meter Number 00001 Custom Logic List 00000 METER R T Alarm Out 00001 00001 CustomLogic is Added INDEX This field numbers each line of logic When creating the first line use index 000 and number subsequent lines sequentially TYPE There are two classes of items to select for this field The item selected will be a MultiLoad Il function such as an Alarm Output or a Boolean operation MultiLoad II operations are defined as Real Time RT and the Boolean operations are identified by specific mathematical or logic operations such as Add Subtract NOR AND etc REAL TIME The MultiLoad II Real Time RT operations represent existing MultiLoad II functions Functions are assigned to various MultiLoad II hierarchal levels RCU Bay Preset Meter Component and Additive After a Real Time function is selected it will be necessary to specify the relevant Preset and a specific Meter Component or Additive The abo
512. xcluding SMP ccscccesceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeenseeeeeeeeeseaeseseanenseaeeeaes 161 5 8 Line Flush Excluding SMP cssseccsseeeeeseeeeseeseseeeenseeeseaeeesaeseseeeeeeeeeseaesasaaesaaneeeneeeeseaesesaeeesneeeeees 162 5 9 Ratio Blending Considerations Excluding SMP ccesccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeenseeeeeeeeeseeseneeeeeneeeeneas 165 5 10 Calibration Using Meter Factor Linearization cccccccesecesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesnsneeeeseeeseeeseseeeeeseeeeeees 167 5 10 1 Single Meter EE 170 5 10 2 Plules for Meter Factors earrann a i E A T A i aiae 170 CHAPTER 6 ADDILDNEGOGONTROE ci r a cca cece tect a aaea eaaa a r r aare e ee 171 6 1 ODA EE 171 6 2 Piston Injector C ES ra aa aea a raD aeaaea aa a aea EE 172 6 3 Additive Port Assidpment EE EE held Ae ee ee eege EE 173 6 3 1 Additive Output Port and Input Port Assignments s ssseneeneeneeennsennsennnernnrrnnrennennnennnennnennnnennnnnn nene 173 6 4 AOditive United eege eege eege eege eege e 173 6 5 Additive Control Methods ia a aaa deeg dated sca ege ra aaa aaa aaea a oa aeaa ae a cccececnqesaacdaseedevene 174 6 5 1 Method E Een 174 Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 6 5 2 Contiguring a Piston Only Additive eare eenen adaa aa ae aAa 175 6 5 3 Method 2 Piston with Input Feedback Switch ssesssnesenesnneennsennsnnnsnnnnrrnnnnnnennnennnennnennnnennnnnnnenn 176 6 5 4 Configuring a Piston with Input Additive 21 cccccceceeceseceeneeceese
513. y Adjusted observed relative density value Relative Density Displays the observed relative density as a result of applying the relative density Adjusted offset Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 321 10 8 ViEwING BSW From the Views and Inquiry Menu select BSW After selecting the preset and meter the BSW screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 BSW BSW Unadjusted SD TE EEN Offset FOLD 2 BSW Adjusted 0500 Next Prev Parameter Descriptions BSW Unadjusted Displays the real time BSW BSW Offset Displays the current BSW offset value which is the difference between the BSW Unadjusted value and the BSW Adjusted observed relative density value BSW Adjusted Displays the observed BSW as a result of applying the BSW offset 10 9 ViewiNG API GRAVITY From the Views and Inquiry Menu select Api Gravity After selecting the preset and meter the Api Gravity screen displays Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries PRE 1 MTR 1 API GRAVITY Api Gravity Unadjusted oO OO 1 Api Gravity Offset t00 2 Api Gravity Adjusted 45 0 0 0 Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Api Gravity Displays the real time Api Gravity Unadjusted Api Gravity Offset Displays the current Api Gravity offset value which is the difference between the Api Gravity Unadjusted value and the Api Gravity Adjusted observed relative density value
514. y The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations OIML7 This table is used to calculate the volume alcohol percentage at an observed temperature and a observed density When this table is activated the CTL factor will contain the amount of alcohol So the net volume which is shown on each screen is the alcohol volume in the product The liquid is a refined product Observed Density is used in Table OIML7 Observed Temperature is used After selecting this table the density has no range checking only the temperature is allowed between 20 and 40 degrees Test temperatures can be entered on this screen that will calculate a CTL based on the test temperature and the Density The test temperature and Calculated CTL are for informational purposes and will not be used in calculations during operations Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 271 Chapter 9 Weights amp Measures 2 Configure Temperature Measurement The API tables used in MultiLoad II require the availability of an observed temperature The observed temperature is the temperature of the liquid as it is being metered The observed temperature can be monitored continuously with a Resistance Temperature Device RTD or a 4 20 mA temperature transmitter Alternatively a manually entered Default Temperature can be provided 3 Configure for a Temperature Sensor a Wire the temperature senso
515. y compartment number and also have room for totalizer widths Added remote clear input to clear batch on external input No Flow No Alarm Load Complete remote clear bit added to preset status Added new Preset configuration parameter Remote Clear FCM Added ability to read a live relative density Density error will be reported for a density or relative density error Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 12 Custom Logic 394 Added new Meter configuration parameters to support live Relative Density input Relative Density Sensor Enabled Relative Density Sensor FCM Default Relative Density Alarm Low Relative Density Alarm High Relative Density Relative Density Alarm Time Relative Density at 4mA Relative Density at 20mA Relative Density Offset Added new Component configuration parameter Default Relative Density Relative Density weighting calculations are the same as Density Calculations Added ability for API functions to use live Relative Density Added ability to read component current relative density in MRS command Added ability to read component meter current relative density in MRS command Updated preset and component status screens to display relative density Added ability to read component current relative density from Modbus register 6292 6483 View Relative Density Screen modify offset added to Views and Inquiries Updated API table setup screen to handle test Relative
516. ycle The remaining parameters that apply to this additive method are optional They are used to set up alarming pump outputs and permissive inputs Some of the remaining parameters affect how the additive is delivered at different stages of the load cycle All Additive configuration screens and parameter descriptions are found in the General Additive Setup section that follows The Parameters for Additive Methods table identifies the parameters that apply to this method Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 6 5 3 METHOD 2 PISTON WITH INPUT FEEDBACK SWITCH This method provides for the use of a piston style injector with a calibrated cylinder A provision has been made to receive a feedback signal that will verify that the piston has been launched and that it has returned to its starting position An injection will occur as soon as enough product has been delivered to create demand for an additive volume that is equal to one half of one injection Injection size is determined by the Volume per Injection parameter If the injection is successful one full injection will have been delivered before the demand has reached one full injection The Additive Delivered totalizer will increment by one full injection volume after enough time has passed for the piston to have returned to its starting position and the appropriate feedback signal has been received at the additive input port The piston Throw Time parameter determines when the sys
517. zed Net Total unauthorized net volume through the preset load arm Unauthorized Mass Total unauthorized mass through the preset load arm Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 311 Notes Volume numbers displayed are whole numbers or with 1 100 resolution depending on the current setting of the Use Hundredths RCU W amp M Parameter The numbers on the left indicate volumes in non resettable totalizers The numbers on the right indicate volumes in resettable totalizers Use the CLR key to zero out the resettable totalizers Firmware Version 3 4 31 11 Chapter 10 Views and Inquiries 312 10 3 2 VIEWING METER TOTALIZERS From the View Totalizers Menu select Meters After selecting the preset and meter the Meter Totalizers screen displays PRE 1 MTR 1 TOTALIZERS Total Gross 000000631 000000631 Authorized Gross 000000631 000000631 Unauthorized Gross 000000000 000000000 Meter Creep Gross 000000000 000000000 Backflow Gross 000000000 000000000 CLeaR Next Prev PRE 1 MTR 1 TOTALIZERS Total Gross 0000006 31 O000006 Authorized Gross 0000006 31 0000006 Unauthorized Gross 0000000 00 OO000000 Meter Creep Gross 0000000 00 0000000 Backflow Gross 0000000 00 0000000 CLeaR Next Prev Parameter Descriptions Total Gross Total gross volume through the flow meter Authorized Gross Total authorized gross volume through

20130631 - Toptech Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents